* * · * * * * * * ºxae
ſae

---------------
tºº-ºº-ºº:
-º-º-º-º-
HºłłłS 39:03: 33
.* ——TO TH E---
T.TIEER, A FRX
—C F--
ſºft/
jºº ºligº
º º -- -- - - º . s P º $: t - - à. -
ty fº & wº, º& ... A, t %
-S *W -
*.
7-3. 2:\ \f
zºº
- -- --- - .** - -----
—- --> -º-; *::: tº . *:::=S- $ :-a--— -----— ... --
“And pleazó return it.NYou may think th
a strange yºguest, but I finisthat although m
friends 2% poor Arithmeticians they are neal
ly aj/6f them good $ook-keepers
SIR WALTENSCOTT.
\;
ºSº? tºys ºf £ *...*
* g. - KN *
º - ¥ º ºs - ** F. *
º, jº S. * {{? .3 ". s * ..Y. *--- º 2)
#6 º: Nº. sº *.2%xº : * r *.*- £ºsº ::::::RºzºFaſº.--Tºx: £% :: *-ºº: -. - & & 3
- - - - º 2: º'--> - ºãº-ºº-ººººf ºr Nº. &º
Aſ ºf - - - 'J *: º &
t - -
**º y t
}





















HISTORY
., & 7 Vigº
- ---"
AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONS
IN
ASIA, AFRICA, EUROPE AND NORTH AMERICA,
UNDER THE CARE OF THE AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONARY UNION,
BY
WILLIAM GAMMELL, A.M.
P R O F E SS OR IN B R O W N UN IV E R S IT Y.
WITH MAPS AND AN APPENDIX.
B O S T O N :
G O U LD, KEND ALL AND LIN COL N,
69 W A SH IN GT ON STR BET.
1 8 4 9.
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1849, by
GOULD, KENDALL AND LINCOLN,
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts.
B O ST ON 2
STEREOTYPED BY C. C. P. MooDY . . . . . old DICKINSON OFFICE,
NO. 52 WASHINGTON STREET,
C E R TIFICATE.
THE UNDERSIGNED, having been requested by the Ex-
ecutive Committee of the Missionary Union to read, in
manuscript, Professor Gammell's HISTORY OF AMERICAN
BAPTIST MISSIONS, are happy in being able to state that,
in our opinion, the work is well adapted to accomplish the
important purposes for which it was written.
Such a history we think to be much needed, and
worthy of being read by all. It exhibits gratifying evi-
dence of research, fidelity and skill. It sets before the
reader, in a lucid manner, facts that should never be
forgotten. Some of them, in power to awaken attention
and touch the heart, could scarcely be surpassed by
fiction. Others are full of instruction, presenting the
rich fruits of varied experience; or coming, in impressive
tones of Christian love and admonition, from the graves
of those who, in making known the way of Salvation,
have cheerfully laid down their lives in distant lands. And
iy CERTIFICATE.
others still, abound in encouragement, giving us to see
unequivocal tokens of success, – the foundations of idola-
try and superstition shaken; the Holy Scriptures trans-
lated; the press sending forth messages of divine truth;
children gathered into schools, and brought under evan-
gelical influence; the gospel proclaimed by missionaries
and native preachers; converts multiplied; the ordinances
of Christ administered; churches constituted, exemplifying
in the lives of their members the power and loveliness of
primitive Christianity, and sending up to heaven, from
overflowing hearts, the voice of prayer and hymns of
praise;— all urging us onward in the missionary enter-
prise, and all fitted to excite our gratitude to God, in
view of the signal blessing which He has already bestowed
on our feeble endeavors. -
- SPENCER H. ConE,
DANIEL SHARP,
IRAH CHASE.
BOSTON, MAY 1, 1849.
PR EFA C E.
THE following work was undertaken at the request of the
Executive Committee of the American Baptist Missionary
Union, and is designed to narrate the origin and progress of the
several missions which have been commenced and sustained by
the agency of that association. It is intended to be a history of
the missions rather than of the society by which they are con-
ducted, -of the colonies which have been planted on distant
shores, rather than of the government by whose agency they
were commenced, and by whose patronage they are sistained.
On this account it records only such domestic changes and events
in our missionary organization as have shaped the character or
affected the progress of the enterprise for which that organization
was called into being.
The subject relates to many different countries and races of
mankind, and comprises the personal adventures and philan-
thropic labors of a large number of individuals, who, in the spirit
of their Master and in obedience to His great command, have
toiled for the extension of Christian truth among their fellow-
men. From a range of topics so wide and varied, the author
has aimed to select the incidents and scenes which may fairly
represent the growth of each separate mission, and to form from
them a series of narratives fitted to interest the general reader.
In the execution of the design, the most difficult task has been
to blend particular facts with general views, and from the scat-
tered labors of many individuals to trace the gradual advance-
ment of the enterprise in which they are engaged. In doing
this he has of necessity omitted many details of themselves in-
teresting and important, but less immediately connected with the
1%
vi PREFACE,
general object of the narrative, and has often grouped together
in a single paragraph toils and adventures, each of which might
furnish material for an entire chapter.
The principal sources from which the materials for the work
have been derived are the journals of the missionaries, and the
published reports and documents of the Executive Managers,
which are contained in the volumes of the Missionary Maga-
zine. In addition to these, the author has had free access to
the records and papers in the Missionary Rooms at Boston; he
has read the memoirs of departed missionaries, and consulted
many works relating to the benefits resulting from the missions
and to the history and condition of the countries in which they
are planted. He has also woven into the narrative brief notices
of such public events as have affected their progress and success.
Great pains have been taken to render the statements and views
as accurate as possible, and to furnish for those who may be in-
terested in its perusal a clear and impartial account of the origin
and progress of a single branch of the noble enterprise in which
the churches of our own and of nearly every other Christian
communion are now earnestly engaged.
In his endeavors to secure accuracy of dates and facts, the
author acknowledges the valuable aid he has received from the
Corresponding Secretaries of the Board, and from the gentle-
men appointed to examine the manuscript; from all of whom
he has experienced the kindest courtesy and attention in con-
ducting every part of the work. The maps, though small, will
be found valuable aids to the text, and the statistical tables con-
tained in the Appendix serve to render the volume a fuller ex-
ponent of the present condition of the Missionary Union. It
is now submitted to the public in the humble hope that it may
be deemed worthy of a place in the already extensive literature
of Christian missions, and that it may be made instrumental in
promoting a cause which is identified with all the highest inter-
ests of the human race.
C O N TEN T S.
MISSIONS IN B D RM A H.
C H A P T E R I.
0. of the Missionary Spirit in America. —The Massachusetts Baptist
issionary Society. — The American Board of Commissioners for For-
eign Missions.—The earliest American Missionaries.—Change of Sen-
timents of Messrs. Judson and Rice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C HAPTER II.
Messrs. Judson and Rice at Serampore...—The Difficulties they Encoun-
ter. — Mr. and Mrs. Judson settle at Rangoon. — Mr. Rice returns to
America. — Interest awakened in the Churches here. — Formation of
a Society for Propagating the Gospel in India. — A Meeting of Dele-
gates proposed. . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHA PTE R III.
Meeting at Philadelphia. — Formation of the Triennial Convention.—
Appointment of Messrs. Judson and Rice as Missionaries. – The La-
bors of Mr. Rice. — Financial Basis of the Mission. . . . . . .
C H A PTE R IV.
Labors of Mr. Judson at ..º.º. of the º: — Burmah:
its People: Government: Religion. — Arrival of Rev. Mr. Hough with
a Printing Press. – Translation of the Scriptures commenced. —Books
printed. - First Burman Inquirer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C H A P T E R W.
Convention meets at Philadelphia. – Appointment of Messrs. Colman
and Wheelock. — Mr. Judson sails for Chittagong. — Troubles of the
Mission during his Absence.—His Return. — Mr. Hough embarks for
Calcutta. — Arrival of Messrs. Colman and Wheelock at Rangoon. —
Death of Mr. Wheelock. — Opening of the Zayat. — Baptism of the
first Convert. — Jealousy of the Government. --Messrs. Judson and
Colman go to Ava to obtain Toleration from the King. . . . . . .
17
24
35
CONTENTS.
C H A P T E R W I.
Their Introduction at the Burman Court. — Their Petition refused.—
They return to Rangoon. — Mr. and Mrs. Colman go to §.
Death of Mr. Colmafi...—Converts at Rangoon. — Mr. and Mrs. Judson
visit Calcutta.— Progress of the Mission at Rangoon. . . . . . .
C H A P T E R W II.
Mrs. Judson's Visit to the United States in 1822. — Her History of the
Mission. — Arrival of Dr. Price at Rangoon. — Messrs. Judson and Price
go to Ava. —Interview with the King. — A Branch of the Mission es-
tablished at Ava. — Arrival of Mrs. Judson and Mr. and Mrs. Wade at
Rangoon. — Messrs. Hough and Wade at Rangoon. — Messrs. Judson
and Price at Ava. – Removal of the Government to Amarapura. . .
C H A P T E R V III.
War between the Burmans and the English. — Capture of Rangoon, —
Perils of Messrs. Hough and Wade, and their Families.—Advance of
the English towards Ava. —Imprisonment of the Missionaries there.—
Their removal to Oung-pen-la. —Their protracted Sufferings.-Heroic
Services of Mrs. Judson. — Liberation of the Missionaries. – Their
Agency in Negotiations with the English. — Reception of Mr. and Mrs.
Judson by Sir Archibald Campbell.—Their return to Rangoon. — The
Mission removed to Amherst.— Mr. Judson joins the English Embassy
to Ava. – Death of Mrs. Judson. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C H A P T E R IX.
Seat of the Board established at Boston. — Rev. Dr. Staughton. — Amer-
ican Sympathy for the Missionaries. – Condition of the Mission. —
Death of Dr. Price. — Arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Boardman. — Their set-
tlement at Maulmain. — Removal of the Mission to Maulmain. —Labors
of the Missionaries. – Mr. and Mrs. Boardman remove to Tavoy. —
Condition of the city. — They become acquainted with the Karens.—
Character of the Karen Race. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTE R x.
Labors of Ko Thah-byu.--Superstitions of the Karens. – Their interest
in Christianity.— Mr. Boardman visits their Villages.—His Agency in
establishing Schools. – Insurrection in Tavoy.—Interruption of the
Mission. — Increasing interest of the Karens. – Arrival of Mr. and Mrs.
Mason at Tavoy. —Ill health of Mr. Boardman. — His last Visit to the
Karens.—His Death. . . . . . . . . . . . . . tº gº
e º º
CH A P T E R XI.
The Mission at Maulmain. —Labors of Messrs. Judson and Wade. — Or-
dination of Ko Thah-a. — He is stationed at Rangoon. — Messrs. Judson
and Wade visit Rangoon. — Circulation of the New Testament and
Tracts. – Mr. Judson ascends the Irrawaddy to Prome. — His Labors at
Rangoon in Translating the Bible.—Return to Maulmain. — Arrival of
other Missionaries. – Mr. and Mrs. Wade visit Arracan. — Review of
45
56
66
79
91
the Progress of the Mission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
CONTENTS. IX
C H A P T E R XII.
Progress of the Mission from 1832 to 1835. — Mr. Judson devoted to
Translating the Bible. —Resolutions of the Board at Salem.–Estab-
lishment of Out-Stations.— Christian Villages. – Excursions of Mr.
Mason from Tavoy. — Great º: among the Karens.—Their Lan-
guage reduced to Writing by Mr. Wade. — Mr. and Mrs. Wade obliged
to sail for the United States.—Arrival of new Companies of Missiona-
ries. – Mr. Kincaid at Rangoon and at Ava. — Mr. Judson completes
the Translation of the Bible. — Mr. and Mrs. Wade in the United
States. – Results of their Visit. — Their Return with additional Mis-
sionaries. – Death of Miss Cummings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
C H A P T E R XIII.
Meeting of the Convention at Richmond in 1835. — Rev. H. Malcom
visits the Missions.—Comparative Results among the Burmans and
among the Karens.— Modes of Life and of Labor adopted by the Mis-
sionaries. – Multiplication of Schools. – Theological School at Tavoy
and at Maulmain. — Growth of the Karen Mission in British Burmah.
— Agency of the Press. – Station at Dong-yahn. — State of the Mission
in Burmah Proper. — Persecution at Rangoon. — Arrival of Messrs.
Vinton, Abbott, and Howard at Rangoon. — Mr. Kincaid at Ava. – His
attempt to visit the Shyan States.—Civil War in Burmah. — Missiona-
ries leave the Country. — Return of Messrs. Abbott and Kincaid. –
Joined by Mr. Simons.—Labors among the Karens.— Final Departure
of Missionaries from Rangoon in 1840. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
C H A P T E R XIV.
The Province of Arracan. — Mr. and Mrs. Comstock settle at Kyouk
Phyoo. — Arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Hall. — Their early Death. — Messrs.
Abbott and Kincaid join the Mission.— Mr. Abbott at Sandoway. —
Labors among the Karens. – Their rapid Conversion to Christianity.—
Burman Persecution of the Christian Karens.—Their Fidelity and its
Results. – Sympathy of British Residents. – Death of Mrs. Abbott,
and Visit of Mr. Abbott to the United States.— Mr. Kincaid at Akyab.
—The Mountain Chief. — Sad Changes in the Mission. —Death of Mr.
and Mrs. Comstock. — Progress of the Mission in British Burmah from
1840 to 1845; also in Burmah Proper. — Changes in the Board. — Death
of Rev. Dr. Bolles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
C H A P T E R X W.
Financial Embarrassment of the Board. — Its Causes. – Question of
Slavery. — Correspondence of the Board with the Alabama State Con-
vention. — Formation of the Southern Baptist Convention. — American
Baptist Missionary Union.—Visit of Rev. Dr. Judson to the United
States.—His return to Burmah with other Missionaries.— Changes in
the Missions during his Absence. — Executive Officers of the Board. —
Return of Mr. Abbott to Sandoway. — Karen Converts waiting for
Baptism. — Appointment of new Missionaries. – Latest Reports from
the Missions in Burmah. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
CONTENTS.
MISSIONS IN SIAM AND CHIN A.
C H A P T E R XVI.
Arrival of Rev. J. T. Jones at Bangkok. — Character of the Siamese. —
Arrival of Mr. Dean.—His Labors among the Chinese at Bangkok.--
A Chinese Church. — Arrival of other Missionaries. – Progress of
Chinese Department. —Death of Mr. Reed and Mrs. Jones. – Printin
the Scriptures in Siamese. — Arrival of Messrs. Slafter and Goddard.
—Death of Mr. Slafter. — Progress of each Department of the Mission.
—Temporary Station at Macao. —Chinese War. —Its Results.-- Re-
moval of Missionaries to Hongkong. —Death of Mrs. Dean. — Station
at Ningpo. — Treaty between China and the United States.—Its Re-
sults.-Death of Mrs. Shuck.-- Prospects of the Station at Hongkong.
— Condition of the Mission at Bangkok. — Translations of the Bible in
China. – Labors of Messrs. Dean and Goddard. — Present Attitude of
these Missions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
MISSION IN A S S AM.
C H A P T E R X W II.
The Country of Assam and its Inhabitants. – Reasons for establishing a
Mission there. — Messrs. Brown and Cutter go from Burmah to Assam.
— They settle at Sadiya. — Arrival of Messrs. Bronson aud. Thomas. –
Death of Mr. Thomas. – Labors of the Missionaries. – Mr. Bronson
removes to Jaipur. — Coöperation of British Residents. – Insurrection
of the Khamtis. – Mr. Bronson settles among the Nagas. – Arrival of
other Missionaries. – Station at Sibsagar. — Station at Nowgong.—
Generous aid of British Officers. — Translation of the Gospels. – Mr.
Barker at Gowahatti...— Growth of the Mission at the several Stations.
— Schools. – Conversions to Christianity.—Need of Reinforcement. —
Appointment of new Missionaries. –Present Prospects of the Mission. 209
MISSION AMONG THE TELO O G O O S.
C H A P T E R X W III.
Country of the Teloogoos. – Origin of the Mission. — Arrival of Rev. Mr.
Pº, at Vizagapatam.—His settlement at Madras. –Visit to Bellary.
- Difficulties Encountered by a solitary Missionary. — His Removal to
Nellore. — Arrival of Rev. Mr. Van Husen. — Mr. Day visits Madras.
– Caste among the Teloogoos. – Need of a Translation of the Scrip-
tures. – Growth of the Mission.— Health of the Missionaries fails. --
They leave Nellore and return to the United States. – State of the
Mission in their Absence.—Return of Mr. Day and Appointment of
Rev. Mr. Jewett in 1848. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CONTENTS.
MISSION IN WESTERN AFRIC A.
C H A P T E R XIX.
General Character of the Mission.— Lott Carey and Collin Teage. —
Rev. Calvin Holton. — Character and Death of Mr. Carey. — Rev.
Benjamin Skinner. — Failure of the Mission in consequence of the
Death of Missionaries. – Arrival of Messrs. Crocker and Mylne. —
Station at Edina among the Bassas. – Madebli. — Character of the
People. — Arrival of Rev. Ivory Clarke. —Departure of Mr. Mylne. —
Progress of the Mission. — Messrs. Fielding and Constantine. — Fail-
ure of their Undertaking. — Departure of Mr. Crocker.— Progress of
the Mission in his Absence. — His Return and Death. — Station at
Bexley.—The Labors of Mr. Clarke: Translations: Churches: Schools:
his Death. — Close of the Mission. — Attempted Mission in Hayti. . . 243
\
MISSION IN FRAN C E.
CHA PTE R xx.
Commencement of the Mission. — Agency of Messrs. Chase and Rostan.
—Appointment of Mr. Willmarth, – Messrs. Willard and Sheldon join
the §. at Paris. – Messrs. Willmarth and Willard settle at Douay.
—The Chapel at Genlis. – Mr. Willmarth leaves the Mission.— Mr.
Sheldon goes to Douay: returns to America. — Religious Freedom in
France in the Reign of Louis Phillippe. — Hostility to the Mission.—
Civil Prosecutions.—The Revolution of February. — General Progress
of the Mission. — Visit of Mr. Willard to the United States. – Dr.
Devan joins the Mission. — Stationed at Paris — Religious Freedom
under the New Constitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
MISSION IN GERMANY AND DEN MARE.
C. H. A. PTE R X. XI.
Object of the Mission. — Visit of Professor Sears to Germany. — Rev.
... G. Oncken appointed Missionary at Hamburg.—Extension of the
Mission to other States. – Decree of the Senate of Hamburg against
the Mission. — Petitions of the Board and of others in the United States
and in England. — Persecution in other States of Germany. — Growth
of the Mission. — Change of Policy in Hamburg and in other States.
— Persecution most severe in Denmark. —Imprisonment of the Danish
Missionaries. – Visit of Mr. Oncken to º: — Persecution allayed.
— Deputation of Messrs. Hackett and Conant to Denmark. — The
“Law of Amnesty.”—Troubles in the Danish Churches — Peculiar
Features of the Mission. — Its Connection with Religious Freedom. —
The Recent Revolution.—lts Effects upon the Mission. . . . . . . 278
XII CONTENTS.
MISSION IN GREECE.
C. H.A. PTE R XXII.
Commenced in 1836. — Messrs. Pasco and Love at Patras. – Policy of
the Greek Church respecting the Scriptures.—Appointment of Mrs.
Dickson.—Return of Mr. Pasco. — Mr. Love removes to Corfu. — Bap-
tism of Apostolos. – Arrival of Rev. Mr. Buel. — Tumult on St. Speri-
dion's day. — Other Baptisms at Corfu. — Popular violence at Patras.
— Mr. Love obliged to return to the United States. – Labors of Mr.
Buel at Piraeus. – Arrival of Rev. Mr. Arnold at Corfu. — He preaches
in English. — Slow progress of the Mission. – Evils with which it has
to contend. — Labors of Mr. Arnold. — Prosecution of Mr. Buel at
Piraeus. – General Aspect of the Mission. . . . . . . . . . . 299
MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
C H A P T E R XXIII.
General View of these Missions. – Earliest Missionaries to the Indians.—
Appointment of Rev. Isaac McCoy. — Station at Carey for the Puta-
watomies: at Thomas for the Ottawas. – Changes in these Tribes. –
Care of the Government of the United States for the Indian Race.—
Mission among the Ojibwas: its Progress and Results. – Mission among
the Indians of New %. — Commencement of the Mission among the
Cherokees. – Appointment of Messrs. Posey and Jones. – Stations at
Valley Towns and at Tinsawattee. — Civilization of the Cherokees:
Emigration of a part of them beyond the Mississippi...—Mission among
the %. their Emigration. — Continuance and Close of the Creek
Mission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
C H A P T E R XXIV.
Plan of º the Indians beyond the Mississippi. — Act of Congress
in 1830. — Refusal of the Cherokees to remove. — Their removal by
Force. —Influence of these Events upon the Mission.—Judicious Con-
duct of the Missionaries.— Condition of the Mission in the Indian
Territory. — Missions among other Tribes in the Territory; their Prog-
ress and Results. – Growth of the Mission among the Cherokees. –
Their general Progress in Civilization. —Death of Rev. Jesse Bushy-
head. — Present Condition of the Cherokee Nation. — Claims of the
Indian Race. — Conclusion. © & * & © º ſº sº gº º &P ę º tº tº te 330
A PP E N DIX.
Table of the Missions.— Missions and Missionaries. – Deceased Mission-
aries.—Contributions.—Constitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONS.
-*
MISSIONS IN B U R M A H.
C H A P T E R I.
ORIGIN of the Missionary Spirit in America. — The Massachusetts Baptist
Missionary Society.—The American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions. – The earliest American Missionaries. – Change of Sentiments
of Messrs. Judson and Rice.
THE beginning of the present century was marked by the
operation of two opposite agencies, which were at that time at
work and struggling for the ascendancy in the bosom of Amer-
ican society. The one was the infidel philosophy which was
borne to our shores along with the frenzied enthusiasm for
liberty that had then just burst forth in the Revolution of
France;— the other was the spirit of Christian philanthropy,
breathed from the gospel of Christ, and then just waking to a new
and more vigorous existence among the people of this young
and prosperous republic. After the lapse of nearly half a cen-
tury, we may now look calmly back and observe the different
characters which they manifested, and the different destinies which
they have reached. The former, though presumptuous and
boastful, and at that time ranking among its disciples many a
popular name, has produced no results that the world values or
will ever value, and is fast passing away from the thoughts and
the memories of men. The latter, though modest and unpre-
tending, and scarcely daring to raise her voice even in the
Christian church, has moulded the character of the age, and, by
giving birth to the enterprise of American Missions, has con-
2
2 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
ferred inestimable blessings upon mankind, and introduced a
new era in the history of Christianity.
At early periods in our colonial history, the condition of
the Aborigines of the continent had excited a wide-spread in-
terest among Christian people both in England and the colonies;
and societies had been formed for their benefit, and at different
times had employed the labors of many whose names are en-
rolled among the brightest ornaments of their age. It was in
this hitherto neglected field of Christian philanthropy that John
Eliot and the Mayhews, Roger Williams and William Penn,
David Brainerd and Bishop Berkely, performed many of those
pious labors which have secured for them an undying remem-
brance. As yet, however, the sphere of Christian obligation
was confined within narrow limits; and the idea of sending
missionaries to other lands, who should preach the gospel alike
to the dwellers in the vales and on the mountains, had scarcely
begun to dawn upon the churches of America.
It was not till the beginning of the present century, that this
obligation began to be distinctly recognized among any of the
Christian denominations of the country. The Baptist churches,
at this period, were comparatively few in number, and, save in
the leading cities, they seldom comprised members of the
wealthier classes of society. They had struggled into existence
amid many difficulties, and, though scattered over a wide extent
of territory and numbering many communicants, they were yet
but poorly supplied with ministers or even with suitable places
of public worship. In these circumstances their attention was
seldom diverted from their own wants as a denomination, and
their sympathy had scarcely at all been enlisted in behalf of
heathen nations. Whatever Christian effort they could put
forth, was naturally directed to the supply of their own scat-
tered and destitute brethren, or, at the farthest, to sending
occasional preachers to the Indian tribes that then skirted the
frontiers of most even of our oldest States.
The first indication of the growth of a wider philanthropy
is found in the formation of the Massachusetts Baptist Mis-
MASSA CHUSETTS MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 3
sionary Society, which was organized in 1802. Its object,
as set forth in its constitution, was, “to furnish occasional
preaching and to promote the knowledge of evangelical truth
in the new settlements within these United States, or further
if circumstances should render it proper.” The missionary
preachers who went forth under the auspices of this society,
among the distant frontier settlements, contributed not a little
by the reports and statements which they circulated through
the churches, to the awakening of a still livelier interest in the
spread of the gospel. At the same time also the letters of
Carey, Marshman, Ward, and their heroic coadjutors in the
English Baptist Mission at Serampore, began to be widely read
in this country. The facts which they contained respecting the
hitherto unimagined crimes and miseries of heathenism, and the
warm and eloquent appeals of the missionaries, were commu-
nicated to the denomination in the Massachusetts Baptist Mag-
azine, and were read with eager interest in every part of the
land. Numerous associations called mite societies were formed
in nearly all the principal churches, and their contributions
were devoted to missions. At nearly the same time Buchanan's
sermon, entitled “the Star in the East,” was republished in
America. Its thrilling narratives and stirring appeals were
read alike by ministers, and by laymen—by the merchant in
the midst of his worldly gains, and by the cloistered student
beside his solitary lamp; and they every where gave a new
impulse to the spirit of missionary inquiry. The growing
sympathies of the Baptists of America were mainly centred
in the missions at Serampore, which had been planted by their
brethren in England, and were now, by their extraordinary
success, attracting the attention of the whole Christian world.
They early began to contribute small sums for their support,
and the grateful acknowledgments which they received from
Dr. Carey and his associates, served to inflame their zeal and
increase their liberality. At a meeting of the Boston Associa-
tion of Baptist Ministers, held in November, 1811, a vote was
unanimously passed, “recommending it to the members of their
4 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
body, to make known to their respective congregations, in
whatever mode they should think proper, the subject of East-
ern Translations, and to express their readiness to receive, and
transmit to the authorized persons whatever contributions any
of their people should be disposed to make.” So great had
now become the interest which was felt in the undertaking of
the Serampore missionaries to translate the Scriptures, that in
the year 1812 the sum of four thousand six hundred and fifty
dollars was contributed to the aid of that object by persons of
different denominations in the towns of Boston and Salem alone.
These signs of awakening interest in the conversion of the
heathen to Christianity, though by no means universal in our
churches, were yet appearing in nearly every part of the
country, and gave unequivocal token that a new era was about
to dawn in the history of Christian philanthropy, as well
among the Baptists as among their brethren of other commun-
ions. It was plain that a spirit was at work, and that princi-
ples were beginning to be cherished, which, of themselves, must
soon lead to systematic and organized efforts for the diffusion
of the gospel among men. As yet, however, there were want-
ing among us any leading minds who should propose the un-
dertaking of an American mission, and enlist the energies of
the churches in its accomplishment.
In the year 1810 a new impulse was given to the missionary
spirit in every denomination of Christians in America, by the
formation of the American Board of Commissioners for For-
eign Missions. This institution, whose name has now become
associated with many of the noblest triumphs of Christian mis-
sions in every part of the world, sprang from the pious zeal
of several young men, at that time students of theology at the
Andover Seminary, who had submitted their views to a meet-
ing of the Congregational ministers of Massachusetts, and de-
clared their determination to devote themselves to preaching the
gospel among the heathen. It was no sudden, transitory impulse,
that had been kindled by the contagious enthusiasm of youthful
inexperience. With most of them, the sentiment had been
Y
P-
EARLIEST AMERICAN MISSIONARIES. 5.
cherished for years. It had been nurtured amid the retirement
of their early studies, and had borrowed strength from all that
they had learned of the history of man or the revelations of God.
It had blended with all their manly purposes until it had become
a settled resolve, and embodied itself in vows and mutual
pledges, such as have always given birth to the greatest enter-
prises which history has recorded. |
One of these young men was Adoniram Judson,” an ardent
and aspiring scholar, who, though but lately reclaimed from the
mazes of infidelity, had now embraced the gospel with a fer-
vor made more glowing by its contrast with the gloomy skep-
ticism in which he had been involved. He had already corres-
ponded with the friends of missions in England, and was the au-
thor of the communication which, together with his associates,
he now addressed to the ministers of the Massachusetts Associa-
tion. Immediately on the organization of the Board, he was
sent by the Commissioners to England, in order to ascertain
what assistance would be furnished by the London Missionary
Society, in case, as was anticipated, the Congregational churches
in America should fail to sustain the newly-conceived enter-
prise. His passage across the Atlantic was interrupted by the
capture of the vessel in which he had embarked, by a French
privateer. He was made a prisoner of war and carried into
Bayonne, where he was detained for a time; but when released,
he proceeded on his passage to England under the protection
of passports obtained from the Emperor of the French. Here
he was received with the warmest Christian cordiality by the
Directors of the London Missionary Society, who heartily re-
# The names of the others were Samuel Nott, Samuel J. Mills, Samuel
Newell, James Richards and Luther Rice. The two latter names were at first ,
signed to the paper which was presented to the ministers, but were afterwards
withdrawn lest the number should seem too large. The quiet communing of
these young students amid the shades of Andover, when considered in con-
nection with all its great and benignant results, might well be.compared with
the scene in the chapel at Mont-martre, nearly three centuries before, when
the seven founders of the “Society of Jesus” met to exchange their vows of per-
petual fealty to the Romish Church.
2*
6 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
sponded to the views and aspirations which had kindled his own
mind and those of his associates. The Directors, however,
wisely declined to enter into any union with the Commissioners
in America. They feared the evils which would be likely to
ensue from a divided jurisdiction placed on both sides of the
Atlantic, and they justly estimated that the churches in Amer-
ica were already able to sustain the young missionaries who
had so generously thrown themselves upon their liberality.
They nevertheless professed their entire willingness to accept
these missionaries into their service until funds adequate to
their support could be raised by the Commissioners in America.
Early in the year 1812, the first American missionaries
sailed in two separate companies for the distant scene of their
yet untried labors. Messrs. Judson and Newell, with their
wives, sailed from Salem in the ship Caravan on the 19th of
February; and Messrs. Hall and Nott, with their wives, and Mr.
Rice, sailed from Philadelphia in the Harmony on the 24th of
the same month. Both these vessels, thus freighted with the
heralds of Christianity to the heathen, were bound to Calcutta;
and from thence the missionaries were instructed to proceed to
the Burman Empire, or, if this should be impracticable, to some
other unoccupied field in India in which they might find them-
selves able to establish a mission.
It was during his long passage across the Atlantic and Indian
Oceans, and while engaged in the critical study and the transla-
tion of the Scriptures, that the views of Mr. Judson, on the
question of baptism, underwent the change which has had so
important a bearing on the course of his subsequent life and on
the history of American Missions. While thus removed from
the controversies of men, amid the trackless solitudes of the
ocean, and specially occupied in the earnest study of the Word
of God, he adopted the belief that none but professed believers
in Jesus Christ are intended to be subjects of baptism, and that
immersion alone is the primitive mode in which the rite was
administered. To the same conclusion Mrs. Judson was at
length slowly conducted, and a few months later Mr. Rice pro-
BAPTISM OF MESSRS. JUDSON AND RICE. 7
fessed his faith in the same general views. They were subse-
quently baptized, though at different times, in the chapel at
Serampore, by Rev. Mr. Ward, of the English Baptist Mission.
As a feature in the character of these independent young
missionaries, this adoption of new views respecting the ordi-
nance of baptism was in every way singular and remarkable.
It was a step directly against all the prejudices of their educa-
tion and their early associations, and contrary to all their present
interests and engagements. It must inevitably separate them
from the sympathies of friends to whom they had always been
attached, and from the respected and honored Board by whose
appointment they had gone to a distant continent as mission-
aries to the heathen, and on whose funds they were now depend-
ing for their support. On the other hand, the change would
connect them with a denomination to whose members they were
strangers, who had as yet manifested but little active interest in
missions, and who, more than all, were without any missionary
organization on which they could rely for guidance and support.
No persuasive invitation was addressed to them, no prospect of
advancement was placed before them. Never were inquirers
after truth more entirely removed from the influence of any
external bias. In circumstances like these we are compelled
to believe that they abandoned their former opinions and adopted
new, in accordance with the simple dictates of their own un-
biassed understanding and conscience; and that, in the words of
one of their number, “if there was ever an action performed
from one single motive, unblended with any minor considera-
tions, their baptism was an action of this description.”
8 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
C H A P T E R II.
Messrs. Judson and Rice at Serampore. — The Difficulties they Encounter. —
Mr. and Mrs. Judson settle at Rangoon. — Mr. Rice returns to America.-
Interest awakened in the Churches here. — Formation of a Society for
Propagating the Gospel in India. — A Meeting of Delegates proposed.
THE establishment of Mr. and Mrs. Judson in Burmah and
the enlistment of the American Baptists in the support of their
mission, it has been often observed, were brought about by a
train of events of the most remarkable and providential char-
acter. No human wisdom or foresight selected the field in
which were to be put forth their earliest labors, and no sponta-
neous charity furnished the means which were to constitute their
support. The honor of commencing the missions of the Amer-
ican Baptists, let it be confessed, is to be ascribed rather to
the divine Head of the Church, than to any leading movement
or agency of the denomination itself. The way was prepared
and the field was opened by God alone, and it only remained for
true-hearted men to enter in and prosecute the noble work to
which they had thus been summoned.
The little band of American missionaries had arrived on the
shores of India; but here they were destined to meet with pri-
vations and discouragements such as might well have appalled
any but the most resolute faith, in that early infancy of the
missionary enterprise. The country to which they had come
was under the government of the British East India Company,
whose Directors and Agents were at that time unfriendly to
the introduction of Christianity among the nations of the East,
and who, at all events, were determined not to endure within their
jurisdiction the presence of missionaries from America. Mr. and
Mrs. Judson and Mr. Rice were at Serampore, where they were
enjoying the hospitality of Dr. Carey and his associates of the
English Baptist Mission. While here, they suddenly received
an order from the government requiring them immediately to
repair to Calcutta. On presenting themselves at the Govern
DIFFICULTIES WITH THE EAST INDIA COMPANY. 9
ment House, they were told that they must return without delay
to the United States, and that the captain of the ship which
had brought them to Calcutta should not receive a clearance
from the port unless he would engage to take them back. The
order also included all the missionaries who had accompanied
them from America. Their friends at Calcutta informed them
that there was no hope of the decree being reversed, and their
only alternative was either to obey the order and return to the
United States, or to obtain permission to embark for some part
of India beyond the jurisdiction of the East India Company.
Their first wish was to proceed, according to the original in-
structions they had received from the Commissioners, to some
part of the Burman empire; but the disturbed relations then
subsisting between that empire and the English seemed to ren-
der such a movement impossible. They accordingly obtained
permission to embark in a vessel lying in the river, bound to
the Isle of France, in the hope that there they might plant a
mission, and labor for the object which had brought them from
America. The vessel, however, possessed accommodations for
but two passengers, and those were assigned, by common con-
sent, to Mr. and Mrs. Newell, whose circumstances required
that they should speedily be settled in a place of quiet and re-
pose. The others remained in Calcutta, waiting the departure
of another vessel, and anxiously watching the course of events,
in order to determine what steps their duty might require them
to take for the accomplishment of their mission. At the end of
three months the officers of the government, who had watched
them with constant jealousy, and who doubtless supposed that
they intended to remain in the country, issued another order,
more peremptory than the former, requiring them immediately
to take passage in one of the Company's ships which was bound.
to England, and caused their names to be printed in the official
list of passengers about to sail.
At this crisis, when their last hopes seemed to be cut off, and
all their plans were about to be frustrated by the stern decree
of arbitrary power, Mr. Judson and Mr. Rice learned that a
10 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
ship was about to sail for the Isle of France. They immedi-
ately applied to the government for a passport, but were re-
fused. The crisis, however, was too important, and escape
from the Company's hostile jurisdiction was too desirable, not to
call forth their utmost exertions to secure their passage to some
other part of India. The captain was induced to consent to
their embarking in his ship without the usual papers from the
government. Accordingly, their baggage having been conveyed
on board, they embarked under cover of night, and the ship
proceeded on her voyage down the river. At the end of two
days they were overtaken by a government despatch, which
commanded the pilot to conduct the ship no farther, as she had
on board passengers who were ordered to England. They now
found all their designs completely foiled by the officers of the
Company. With heavy hearts they went on shore, where they
procured temporary lodgings near the bank of the river, and the
ship proceeded on her voyage to the sea. In this desolate con-
dition they remained four days, using every inducement they
could offer to the vessels that passed, to take them on board,
but without success. At the end of this time a letter was
brought to Mr. Judson, from some unknown friend, enclosing a
certificate of permission to go on board the ship which they had
so lately been compelled to leave, and which, if she had not al-
ready gone to sea, was now lying at Saugur roads, a distance
of seventy miles. They immediately embarked in boats, and
after rowing a night and a day they reached the ship, and pro-
ceeded on their voyage to the Isle of France.
It had been their design in going to the Isle of France to es-
tablish a mission on the adjacent island of Madagascar, but they
now found this to be impossible, and they directed their atten-
tion to several other countries of the East, though without de-
ciding which one should become the scene of their missionary
labors. Yet, even here, they did not escape the hostile influence
of the Directors of the East India Company. The governor
of the island was warned of their presence, and directed “to have
an eye on those American missionaries.” Their residence was,
DIFFICULTIES AT MADRA.S. - 11
however, made as pleasant to them as circumstances would per-
mit, and the governor, it would appear, had little sympathy
with the spirit which at that time ruled at the council board of
the Honorable Company; for he informed the missionaries that
they were at liberty to go wherever they wished upon the isl-
and. After a residence of three months in the Isle of France,
Mr. and Mrs. Judson embarked for Madras, still undetermined
as to what should be their future course, and calmly waiting the
indications of Providence to point them to the spot whereon
they should commence their labors as Christian missionaries.
At Madras they encountered new proofs of the violent oppo-
sition to missionary labor, which had become so deeply seated
in the minds of the Directors of the government in India. Their
friends, Rev. Messrs. Hall and Nott, in a neighboring presiden-
cy, had just been ordered to embark for England, and it was ap-
prehended, if their own arrival at Madras should be reported at
Calcutta, that a similar order would be issued for their depart-
ure. War had now broken out between England and America,
and the officers of the Company were pleased to stigmatize the
missionaries as political spies, whom it was not safe to leave un-
watched in any of the English Dependencies. In these circum-
stances their first inquiry, on their arrival at Madras, was what
ships were lying in the harbor ready for sea. The only one they
found was bound for Rangoon, the chief port of the Burman
empire, and without delay they secured their passage.
More than sixteen months had now elapsed since Mr. and
Mrs. Judson sailed from Salem, to encounter the unknown trials
and discouragements of a missionary life. The career that then
lay before them was one with which they were wholly unac-
quainted, and it would be strange if the imagination had not
lent to it some of the colorings of romance. Yet how checkered
and troubled had it been l How marked at every stage by the
superintending care of Him who shapes the ends of his servants,
and out of trial and discouragement educes their highest spirit-
ual good! Defeated in the plans they had formed, driven from
the countries which they had entered, harassed and perplexed
12 MISSIONS IN BURMIA II.
with the opposition of men who ought to have befriended them,
separated, by their change of sentiments, from those with whom
they had always been associated—alone, and at a distance from
country and friends, the situation of these noble-hearted mission-
aries was one of no common trial and embarrassment. But
Heaven had them in keeping, and had appointed them to its
own chosen work in the land to which they were now about to
sail — a land presenting, indeed, no attractions of domestic com-
fort or of social refinement—dark with idolatry and heathen
cruelty, but soon to be illustrated by signal displays of divine
grace, and by the heroic labors of devoted missionaries.
It was on the 22d of June, 1813, that Mr. and Mrs. Judson
set sail from Madras for Rangoon. The passage was boisterous
and dangerous, and more than once the ship was near being cast
upon some of those hidden reefs that line the coral shores of the
Indian seas. After a passage of three weeks they at length,
on the 14th of July, came to anchor in the harbor of Rangoon,
and gazed for the first time at the pagodas and temples that deck
the town, and the hills which rise in the distance.
Rangoon is the principal seaport of the Burman empire, and
is situated about thirty miles from the sea, on a broad bay, known
as Rangoon river, and forming one of the outlets of the Irra-
waddy. It has a harbor of the amplest dimensions for the largest
ships, but the town is built on a marshy meadow which stretches
along the banks of the river, and, as you approach it from the
sea, presents a vast assemblage of low bamboo houses, resting
on piles, with here and there a dwelling of brick or of wood to
vary its monotonous aspect. In 1813 it was supposed to con-
tain about 40,000 inhabitants, a small portion of whom were of
Armenian and Portuguese extraction. The great mass of its
people, however, were of the Mongolian race, over whom Eu-
ropean civilization had exerted no meliorating influences. It
was at that time subject to the sway of a fierce and cruel viceroy,
who maintained there the dark despotism of his imperial master,
and governed the wretched natives with a stern and arbitrary
RANGOON. 13
rule that crushed, with its iron hand, all freedom of action and
opinion.
Rangoon had been the seat of a mission planted in 1807 by
the English Baptists, and placed under the direction of the mis-
sionaries at Serampore; but that mission was now abandoned,
and those who had been engaged in prosecuting it had all left
the city, with the exception of Mrs. Felix Carey, the wife of one
of the missionaries. This lady, though of European extraction,
was a native of the country, and still dwelt at the house which
had been erected for the accommodation of the mission, in a re-
tired spot without the walls of the town. On their arrival at
Rangoon, Mr. and Mrs. Judson might well have shrunk from
the cheerless scene which lay before them, and recorded the day
which brought them there as the gloomiest and most distressing
of their lives. The perils which they had escaped in their re-
cent voyage, the disappointments which had followed them ever
since their arrival in India, the separation and the loss of their
friends and associates,” the ill health of Mrs. Judson, and the
darkening prospect of the cheerless heathen land that stretched
on every side around them,-all reminded them how far they
were now removed from human sympathy, and brought them,
in humble hope and trustful reliance, to the feet of their heaven-
ly Father. In the unoccupied apartments of the spacious mis-
sion house they took up their abode, and immediately com-
menced their preparation for the great work of making known
the gospel,-which, amid all the disasters and discouragements of
their course, had been constantly before them, like a serene and
'benignant star peering through the mists and clouds of a stormy
sky. It had shone upon them in all their wanderings from
country to country, till it seemed to rest upon that to which
they had come. Their other plans had been frustrated—other
# On their arrival at the Isle of France, the missionaries were informed of
the death of Mrs. Harriet Newell, who died on her passage to that island, No-
vember 80th, 1812. She had long been on terms of the greatest intimacy with
Mrs. Judson, by whom her early death was mourned with all the tenderness of
a sister's affection. -
3
14 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
fields of labor had been closed against them, and Burmah alone
seemed to be the land which Heaven had selected as the scene
of their humble mission.
Here let us leave them for a time, and turn to follow the
fortunes of Mr. Rice, hitherto their associate in the work of
founding the missions of the American Baptists. While the mis-
sionaries were detained at the Isle of France, waiting for the
events of Providence to determine the course of their action,
.it was decided that Mr. Rice should return to America for the
purpose of awakening the interest of the Baptist churches here
in the work of propagating the gospel among the heathen of
the Eastern world. He accordingly set sail for San Salvador,
and arrived in the United States in September, 1813; choosing
this circuitous passage in order to escape the English cruisers,
which since the breaking out of the war had infested the ocean,
and ravaged the commerce of the Americans.
Immediately after Messrs. Judson and Rice had avowed
their change of sentiments respecting baptism, and had received
the rite according to its apostolic form at the hands of Rev.
Mr. Ward, they communicated the fact to the Secretary of the
American Board of Commissioners, and at the same time stated,
that should a missionary society be formed by the Baptists,
they were ready to place themselves under its direction in the
prosecution of their labors. They also wrote to Rev. Dr. Bald-
win, stating the same general facts, and urging the importance
of forming a Baptist Missionary Society. The same views were
also strongly urged by Dr. Carey and the other missionaries at
Serampore. These letters were received at Boston in February,
1813. The intelligence which they contained spread with
electric rapidity, and imparted to the spirit of benevolence and
the sense of Christian obligation a depth and fervor such as they
before had never experienced. Immediately on the receipt of
the letter of Mr. Judson, a meeting of several of the leading
ministers of Massachusetts was convened at the house of Dr.
Baldwin, in Boston, in order to consider the new attitude in
which these events had placed the churches. But one senti-
FORMATION OF FOREIGN MISSIONARY SOCIETY. 15
ment of deep and fervent thankfulness filled the minds of all
who were present. The indications of Providence were too
plain to be mistaken, and the clergymen who were thus assem-
bled proceeded immediately to form the “ Baptist Society for
Propagating the Gospel in India and other Foreign Parts.” The
Society was so organized as to admit of its coöperating with
any other societies that might be formed for the same purpose
in other sections of the country, and one of the articles of its con-
stitution plainly pointed to the organization of a General Con-
vention, composed of delegates from societies in every part of the
Union. The formation of this society was the first movement
that sprang from the new events in the East, and, though appar-
ently local in its character, is undoubtedly to be regarded as the
germ of the Triennial Convention of a later period, which for
so long a time managed the missions of the American Baptists.
One of the earliest acts of the new society was to direct the
secretary, Rev. Daniel Sharp, to communicate the circum-
stances of Mr. Judson to the Directors of the Baptist Mission-
ary Society in England, and to propose that he should become
connected with the mission at Serampore, and at the same time
receive his support from the churches in America.” The sec-
retary was also directed to communicate to Mr. Judson the
assurance that, whenever the Board of Commissioners should
discontinue their patronage, his support would be furnished by
the society. The Managers of the English Baptist Mission
declined the proposal, and Mr. Fuller, their secretary, sent a
reply, in which he urged the importance of having a distinct
missionary association, which should be entirely supported and
controlled by the Baptists of America.
# The letters which were addressed to Mr. Fuller in England, and Mr.
Judson in Burmah, have been placed in my hands by their now venerable
writer. They breathe a liberal and generous spirit, and show full well that
the views which prevailed in the Massachusetts Society were by no means
narrow or unworthy. The request to the English Directors seems to have
had its origin solely in the impression that Mr. Judson would be more useful
and happy if associated with the experienced missionaries at Serampore, than
if laboring alone.
16 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
At this juncture Mr. Rice arrived in the United States from
India, and by his personal narratives and his earnest appeals, was
immediately instrumental in imparting new energy to the inter-
est which had been already widely excited through the country.
In February, 1814, he was present at the meeting of the man-
agers of the new society, which was also attended by delegates
from the Haverhill and the Salem Foreign Mission Societies.
The great object of that meeting was to devise a method for
enlisting the interest and coöperation of the entire denomination
in the enterprise of Foreign Missions. It was arranged that
an address should be prepared and sent to all parts of the Union,
setting forth the great obligations which God in his providence
had imposed upon the Baptists of America, in consequence of
the secession of the missionaries from the American Board of
Commissioners. Rev. Mr. Rice was also appointed an agent to
travel in the Middle and Southern States, in order to promote the
formation of societies that should coöperate with those of New
England in sending the gospel to the heathen. The measures
which were thus adopted were every where attended with the
most gratifying success.
The intelligence that American missionaries in the East
had become Baptists, and had requested to be received and sup-
ported as the missionaries of the denomination, went through
the country like the sound of a trumpet. It was an event which
no one had anticipated, and it seemed to appeal to the Christian
zeal and the sympathies of all the churches with a power that
could not be withstood. It swept away alike the prejudices and
the indifference with which the subject had hitherto been re-
garded, and presented the cause of Eastern Missions as a mat-
ter of undoubted obligation, and of transcendent interest to every
one who loved the Saviour and was attached to the principles
and modes of worship of the Baptists. In the course of the
year after the formation of the society in Massachusetts, similar
associations were formed in nearly all the older States of the
Union, and the addresses which were put forth by many of them
still remain as delightful memorials of the eloquence and talent,
MEETING AT PHILADELPHIA. 17
not less than of the earnest piety and comprehensive zeal, of the
venerated men who at that day stood at the head of the Baptist
COIART) UIIllOIle -
It was soon agreed among these several societies that a meet-
ing of delegates from all the States whose churches had become
connected with the cause, should be held at some central place,
for the purpose of organizing a national society. Philadelphia
was fixed upon as the place, and the delegates were appointed
to assemble in May, 1814. After the proposed convention had
been announced, and the time and place of its meeting had
been fixed, it immediately became a subject of the most eager
and earnest expectations among the churches in all parts of the
land. No general meeting of the denomination had then ever
been held, and, as was natural, the one proposed was antici-
pated with feelings of interest and hope and Christian thank-
fulness, which, in these later days, we cannot easily estimate.
We may well believe, that to thousands of Christian hearts it
was the subject of many an humble prayer—the burden of
many a pious aspiration.
C H A P T E R III.
MEETING at Philadelphia. — Formation of the Triennial Convention.—Ap-
pointment of Messrs. Judson and Rice as Missionaries. –The Labors of
Mr. Rice.—Financial Basis of the Mission.
ON the 18th of May, 1814, there assembled in Philadelphia
a general meeting of delegates from missionary societies and
other religious bodies of the Baptist persuasion in various parts
of the United States. The great object of the meeting, as set
forth in its records, was “to organize a plan for eliciting, com-
bining, and directing the energies of the whole denomination
in one sacred effort for sending the glad tidings of Salvation to
3 *
18 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
the heathen, and to nations destitute of pure gospel light.” It
was an assemblage of plain and earnest-minded men, members
of a Christian sect which, alike in the old world and the new, had
struggled with unusual difficulties and deep-rooted prejudices.
It presented no array of clerical pomp or ecclesiastical author-
ity, and was, perhaps, but little noticed among the moving
throng of a great metropolis. Yet it was a meeting of no com-
mon importance, for it was destined to unite the interests and
concentrate the efforts of more than a hundred thousand Chris-
tians, in the execution of the great commission which the Saviour
of men has entrusted to his chosen disciples till the end of time.
The meeting was composed of twenty-six clergymen and
seven laymen, from eleven different States and from the Dis-
trict of Columbia, many of whom now for the first time look-
ed upon each others’ faces and grasped each others’ hands with
fraternal welcome. Their names stand upon the records in the
following order: —
Rev. Thomas Baldwin, D. D.
$6
Lucius Bolles, A. M. State of Massachusetts.
“ Stephen Gano, A. M. State of Rhode Island.
“ John Williams,
Mr. Thomas Hewitt, State of New York.
Edward Probyn,
“ Nathaniel Smith,
Rev. Burgiss Allison, D. D. l
“ Richard Proudfoot,
º Josiah Stratton,
“ William Boswell,
“ Henry Smalley, A. M. H State of New Jersey.
Mr. Mathew Randall,
“ John Sisty, |
“ Stephen tºtick. -
Rev. William Rogers, D. D. *
“ Henry Holcombe, D. D.
“ William Staughton, D. D.
“ William White, A. M.
* John P. Peckworth State of Pennsylvania.
“ Horatio G. Jones, • :
“ Silas Hough, !
* Joseph Mathias, -
* Daniel Dodge, State of Delaware.
* Lewis Richards,
* Thomas Brooke,
* Luther Rice, A. M.
} State of Maryland.
* Robert B. Semple, }
District of Columbia.
* Jacob Grigg, State of Virginia. . .
: James A. Ranaldson, State of North Carolina.
“ Richard Furman, D. D.
Hon. Matthias B. Talimadge, State of South Carolina.
Rev. W. B. Johnson, State of Georgia.
CONSTITUTION OF THE GENERAL CONVENTION. 19
The meeting was organized by the choice of Rev. Dr. Fur-
man of South Carolina, as President, and Rev. Dr. Baldwin
of Massachusetts, as Secretary, and the appointment of a com-
mittee, consisting of Rev. Drs. Furman and Baldwin, and Rev.
Messrs. Gano, Temple and White, to draft a constitution which
should give definite character and aims to the body. The fol-
lowing is the Constitution as it was finally adopted, after being
fully discussed and amended article by article, by the unani-
mous vote of the Convention :
WE, the delegates from Missionary Societies, and other religious bodies of
the Baptist denomination, in various parts of the United States, met in Con-
vention, in the City of Philadelphia, for the purpose of carrying into effect the
benevolent intentions of our constituents, by organizing a plan for eliciting,
combining, and directing the energies of the whole denomination in one sacred
effort for sending the glad tidings of Salvation to the heathen, and to nations
destitute of pure Gospel light, Do AGREE to the following rules as fundamen-
tal principles, viz:
I. That this body shall be styled “THE GENERAL MissionARY CoNVEN-
TION OF THE BAPTIST DENOMINATION IN THE UNITED STATES of AMER-
ICA For For EIGN MISSIONs.” -
II. That a Triennial Convention shall, hereafter, be held, consisting of
Delegates, not exceeding two in number, from each of the several Missionary
Societies, and other religious bodies of the Baptist Denomination, now exist-
ing, or which may hereafter be formed in the United States, and which shall
each regularly contribute to the general Missionary Fund, a sum amounting
at least to one hundred dollars per annum. ~~~~
III. That for the necessary transaction and despatch of business, during
the recess of the said Convention, there shall be a Board of twenty-one Com-
missioners, who shall be members of the said Societies, Churches, or other
religious bodies aforesaid, triennially appointed by the said Convention, by
ballot, to be called the “Baptist Board of Foreign Missions for the United
States:" seven of whom shall be a quorum for the transaction of all business;
and which Board shall continue in office until successors be duly appointed;
and shall have power to make and adopt by-laws for the government of the
said Board, and for the furtherance of the general objects of the Institution.
IV. That it shall be the duty of this Board to employ missionaries, and, if
necessary, to take measures for the improvement of their qualifications; to
fix on the field of their labors, and the compensation to be allowed them for
their services; to superintend their conduct, and dismiss them, should their
services be disapproved; to publish accounts, from time to time, of the Board's
transactions, and an annual address to the public; to call a special meeting
of the Convention on any extraordinary occasion, and, in general, to conduct
the executive part of the missionary concern.
W. That such persons only, as are in full communion with some regular
20 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
church of our denomination, and who furnish satisfactory evidence of genu-
ine piety, good talents, and fervent zeal for the Redeemer's cause, are to be
employed as missionaries.
VI. That the Board shall choose, by ballot, one President, two Vice-Pres-
idents, a Treasurer, a Corresponding, and a Recording Secretary.
VII. That the President, or in case of his absence or disability, the
senior Vice-President present, shall preside in all meetings of the Board, and
when application shall be made in writing, by any two of its members, shall
call a special meeting of the Board, giving due notice thereof.
VIII. That the Treasurer shall receive and faithfully account for all the
monies paid into the treasury, keep a regular account of receipts and disburse-
ments, make a report thereof to the said Convention, whenever it shall be in ses-
sion, and to the Board of Missions annually, and as often as by them required.
He shall also, before he enters on the duties of his office, give competent se-
curity, to be approved by the Board, for the stock and funds that may be
committed to his care.
IX. That the Corresponding Secretary shall maintain intercourse by letter
with such individuals, societies, or public bodies, as the interests of the in-
stitution may require. Copies of all communications made by the particular
direction of the Convention or Board, shall be by him handed to the Record-
ing Secretary, for record and safe keeping.
X. That the Recording Secretary shall, ex officio, be the Secretary of the
Convention, unless some other be by them appointed in his stead. He
shall attend all the meetings of the Board, and keep a fair record of all their
proceedings, and of the transactions of the Convention.
XI. That in case of the death, resignation, or disability of any of its offi-
cers, or members, the Board shall have power to fill such vacancy.
XII. That the said Convention shall have power, and in the interval of
their meeting, the Board of Commissioners, on the recommendation of any one
of the constituent bodies belonging to the Convention, shall also have power,
to elect honorary members of piety and distinguished liberality, who, on their
election, shall be entitled to a seat, and to take part in the debates of the
Convention: but it shall be understood that the right of voting shall be con-
fined to the delegates.
XIII. That in case any of the constituent bodies shall be unable to send
representatives to the said Convention, they shall be permitted to vote by
proxy, which proxy shall be appointed by writing.
XIV. That any alterations, which experience may dictate from time to
time, may be made in these articles, at the regular meeting of the Convention,
by two thirds of the members present.
The Convention having thus completed its organization, pro-
ceeded to its only remaining work, - the election of a Board of
Managers, who should be charged with the executive labors
and trusts of the institution, during the three years which should
elapse before the convention would meet again. Thus ter-
MODIFICATIONS OF THE CONSTITUTION. 21
minated the first general meeting of American Baptists for
the purpose of promoting missions among the heathen. It
formed a new era in their history, and produced results of
the most beneficial character. Not only was a new missionary
organization added to the institutions of national philanthropy,
but a new efficiency and energy were created in a large and
growing body of Christians whose churches had hitherto been
widely separated, and whose ministers, comparatively few in
number, had hitherto wanted the confidence and the enter-
prise which generous union always imparts to the spirit of phi-
lanthropic men.”
The constitution of the new society was framed with but lit-
tle experience, and almost without the aid of models; yet it
was perhaps well suited to the condition and spirit of the de-
nomination, as it then was, in this country. It originally con-
tained provisions only for the support of Foreign Missions; but
at subsequent meetings it was modified in several important
particulars, and made to include both Domestic Missions,
and the establishment of a “Classical and Theological Semi-
nary” for the education of young men, especially for the gospel
ministry. The introduction of this latter object into the organ-
ization of the convention had its origin in the deep sense of
the importance of a well-educated ministry, which at that time
pervaded the minds of the fathers and the leading men of the
denomination. This provision of the constitution gave rise to
the establishment of the Columbian College at Washington, D.C.
an institution which was founded and long managed by the Tri-
ennial Convention. In 1826 the constitution was again changed,
so as to exclude from its objects both the care of the college,
and of Domestic Missions. Some other important changes were
also made at different periods, but with these exceptions, the
Constitution, as originally adopted in 1814, continued to be the
fundamental law of the Convention, till May, 1846, when that
body was merged in the American Baptist Missionary Union.
# Of this Board, Rev. William Staughton, D. D. was appointed Correspond-
ing Secretary, and the seat of its business affairs was fixed at Philadelphia.
Mr. John Cauldwell of New York was appointed Treasurer.
22 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
Immediately on the adjournment of the Convention at Phila-
delphia in 1814, the Board of Managers was organized, and its
members entered upon the duties which had been assigned to
them. Their first work was formally to appoint Rev. Adoni-
ram Judson as their missionary, and to make provision for the
support of himself and his family. They also appointed Rev.
Luther Rice to the same office, but directed that he should con-
tinue, for the present, in the United States, in order to awaken
in the public mind throughout the country, a livelier interest in
missions, and “to assist in originating societies or institutions
for carrying the missionary design into execution.”
Mr. Rice had been already engaged in this work, for nearly
a year. He had traversed the Uniºn, and mingled freely
with the people alike of his own and of other denominations;
he had partaken of their hospitalities, and addressed to hundreds
of congregations the rapt predictions of the prophets, and the
thrilling exhortations of the apostles, concerning the extension
and the ultimate triumphs of the Redeemer's kingdom among
men. He had himself stood amidst the temples of heathenism,
and had witnessed their cruel abominations; and as, with his
ardent imagination, he drew the life-like pictures of those be-
nighted lands, multitudes would hang upon his lips, and follow
his footsteps with an enthusiasm that had seldom been known
since the days of the itinerant eloquence of Whitfield. He
had organized twenty-five new missionary societies, besides di-
recting to Foreign Missions the efforts and contributions of
many which had existed before, and had been enabled to create
an interest in the cause such as all other agencies combined
had failed to produce.
It was in circumstances like these, and at a time when ardent
and gifted minds were few, that Mr. Rice was invited to remain
at home, and assume, to a considerable extent, the management
of the new institution for Foreign Missions, instead of going,
according to his original design and appointment, as a pioneer
in their cause. He had every quality essential to the discharge
of a great executive office, excepting discretion alone,—that
one without which knowledge and piety, and zeal the most
FINANCIAL BASIS OF THE MISSION. 23
disinterested, are clearly unavailing. The inextricable confu-
sion in which his affairs were at length involved, proved so se-
rious an embarrassment to all the interests of the Convention,
as at last, in some degree, to cast a shade over his distinguish-
ed services, and almost to eclipse the singular disinterestedness
which shone so brightly through all his character. Yet, not-
withstanding his imperfections and errors—and these had their
origin in a too ardent and unrestrained imagination, — his
name deserves to be enrolled among the ablest and most devot-
ed of the founders of our American Missions, for he accomplish-
ed a work which no one of his contemporaries could have pos-
sibly achieved.
From the examinations of a committee who had been ap-
pointed to inquire into the number, state, and prospects of the
Baptist Foreign Mission Societies which had been formed in
the different States of the Union, it appeared that they had al-
ready paid into the treasury the sum of four thousand dollars,
and that, according to the best estimates which could be made,
the sum of five thousand eight hundred and fifty dollars might
safely be relied on as the annual income which they would fur-
nish for the support of the missions of the Board. Under
such circumstances, and with such resources, were commenced
the missions of the American Baptists. The beginnings were
indeed humble, and but little in proportion either to the num-
ber of our churches or their real ability. The country was at
that time, it is true, plunged in a war with England, and its
general prosperity was suffering a sad reverse. In addition to
this, it must also be remembered, that the era of public charity
had not yet commenced, and that the people of every class
throughout the land had not then formed the habit of making
pecuniary sacrifices in obedience to the requirements of duty,
or the promptings of benevolence. It was therefore deemed
a matter of special congratulation and thankfulness, that even
these inconsiderable funds could be raised for the support of a
species of philanthropy, whose subjects were the inhabitants
of a distant-continent, and whose claims could be addressed to
the sympathies only of truly Christian minds.
24 MISSIONS IN BURMLAH,
C H A P T E R IV.
LABORs of Mr. Judson at Rangoon. —Study of the Language. — Burmah:
its People: Government: Religion. — Arrival of Rev. Mr. Hough with a
Printing Press. – Translation of the Scriptures commenced. —Books print-
ed.— First Burman Inquirer.
IT was not till the 5th of September, 1815, that the packet
containing the intelligence of the formation of the Baptist Mis-
sionary Convention, with an account of its proceedings, reached
Mr. Judson at Rangoon. He had been residing there more
than two years, diligently engaged in the study of the
language, and in observing the condition of the country and
the character of the people. During this period Mrs. Judson
had suffered from alarming sickness, and was now absent at
Madras for the recovery of her health. In this solitary condi-
tion, thus separated from the only person on whom he could
rely for sympathy and society, we may imagine how welcome
were the tidings, which now came to him, of the organization
of the Convention, and the awakening of a missionary spirit
so widely among the churches. He contemplated these results
with a delight such as no other events could have awakened, and
recorded them in his journal with pious gratitude, as new proofs
of God's merciful designs for the benighted heathen.
The mission in Burmah might now be considered as fairly
started, and placed on a basis that promised to secure its per-
manency, and, with the favor of Heaven, its ultimate success.
The difficulties and obstacles, however, that lay before the mis-
sionary were such as might have dismayed any but the most
resolute faith, and the most indomitable perseverance. The
language was one which presented many difficulties, especially
to a person unaccustomed to the dialects of the East, and obliged
to commence its acquisition only with the most imperfect aids;
and, though possessed of unusual aptitude for this species of study,
- A*, *, *.
*WSE::::: **
º
* x: % ºle
Tºast from Gre
95 Lon.
ğNĚ-№-№
…???xſſ.&&！””N
·，≤ă
)givº �};$$$$�§§$?№.
$3-- ：） ：
%
ģ
�
°°. . . . . .... •**�
• • • • • • • • • • *
°°°.tae«.**tº
Ļº Zyzzºzº Ac o
\__

THE BURMAN EMPIRE, 27
and aided by a Burman teacher of considerable learning and assi-
duity, he yet found himself advancing but slowly in its acquisi-
tion. Some idea may be formed of the extreme difficulty he
encountered in mastering this language from the following ac-
count, written after he had been engaged in its study more than
two years and a half:—“I just now begin to see my way for-
ward in this language, and hope that two or three years more
will make it somewhat familiar; but I have met with difficulties
that I had no idea of before I entered on the work. For an Eu-
ropean or American to acquire a living oriental language, root
and branch, and make it his own, is quite a different thing from
his acquiring a cognate language of the West, or any of the
dead languages, as they are studied in the schools. One cir-
cumstance may serve to illustrate this. I once had occasion to
devote a few months to the study of the French. I have now
been engaged two years and a half in the Burman. But if I
were to choose between a Burman and a French book, to be
examined in without previous study, I should, without the least
hesitation, choose the French.”
The condition of the Burman empire, its people, and its in-
stitutions both civil and religious, have been often fully de-
scribed;* yet a brief notice of them seems necessary in a narra-
tive of the hinderances and encouragements which the missiona-
ries have experienced in their attempts to introduce Christianity
into this ancient home of despotism and superstition.
The country of Burmah is that part of India beyond the Gan-
ges, lying between Hindostan on the west and China on the
east. It formerly included the ancient kingdoms of Ava, Cas-
say, Arracan, Pegu, and Tenasserim, together with the territory
of the Shyans; but at the close of the war in 1826 Arracan and
Tenasserim were ceded to the English, and a large part of Cas-
say became independent. The imperial dominions were thus
* See Mrs. Judson's History of the Burman Mission, Crawfurd's Embassy to
Ava, and Malcom's Travels. Upon these I rely for the accuracy of the views
here presented.
28 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
reduced to two thirds of their former extent, and now embrace
Ava, Pegu, a small part of Cassay, and nearly the whole of
the Shyam country. The population of the original empire has
been exceedingly variously estimated; some travellers having
placed it as high as 30,000,000, while others have made it not
more than 3,000,000. It may, however, be safely put down as
not far from 8,000,000; but of these, Rev. Dr. Malcom sup-
poses that not more than 3,000,000 speak the Burman language
—the remainder, comprising the Arracanese, Peguans, Shyans,
and Karens, using dialects peculiar to the races to which they
belong, and to the provinces in which they live. -
The people are commonly described as unusually energetic,
ingenious, lively, and intelligent, when compared with other
Eastern races. In strength and activity, both of body and mind,
they are decidedly superior to the Hindoos, who border their ter-
ritory on the west, and they are in most respects fully equal to
the Chinese, who occupy the country nearest them on the east.
They are not fierce or revengeful, and in their domestic rela-
tions they are said to be affectionate and faithful; yet their char-
acter is marked by distrust, deception, and low cunning, -vices
which a bad government and a false religion invariably engen-
der in the minds of a people. Veracity is strictly enjoined in
their moral code, but it is seldom practiced where there is the
slightest temptation to depart from it, and a Burman's word is
never to be relied upon unless he is placed under oath, when he
seldom fails to speak the truth. Caste does not prevail among
them, as among the Hindoos, and, as rank is not hereditary, the
distinctions of social life are less marked than in most other coun-
tries, whether of Asia or of Europe. In the inferior rank which
they assign to woman, and in the reckless manner in which they
trifle with her rights and her happiness, they, however, present
one feature which always indicates a low stage of civilization.
The education of women is entirely neglected, and the little in-
tellectual culture there is in the country is confined to the men,
who are generally proud and self-confident in all ranks of life,
and disposed to think themselves superior to the rest of mankind.
BUIDDHISM. 29
The government is an imperial despotism of the most unquall-
fied character. The monarch is sole and absolute proprietor of
the life and the possessions of his subjects, and his word is irre-
sistible and irrevocable law. In the imperial edicts his name is
associated with the loftiest and most imposing titles, and he
styles himself, or is styled by his courtiers, “Lord of the land
and the sea,” and “Master of life and of death.” Four minis-
ters of state, called Atwenwoons, constitute his private council,
and constantly surround his person; and four or six others,
called Woongyees, are the heads of the several departments of
his government, and the only medium of communication between
him and his people; they also constitute the supreme court of
the empire. An oriental despotism knows no legislative assem-
bly ; the monarch is alike the maker and the executor of the
law, and the courts are but the promulgators and interpreters of
his will. The imperial domain is divided into districts, each
of which is governed by a viceroy with a subordinate court, the
presiding officer of which is called the Yahwoon ; but the char-
acter of the chief who sits upon the throne is impressed upon all
who bear the royal commission, and the stern decree which goes
forth from the palace at the capital, is transmitted by the
Woongyees through ministers of every grade, until it is executed
upon millions of subjects in every part of the empire.
The religion of the Burmans is Buddhism, one of the most
ancient and wide-spread superstitions now existing on the earth,
and one which, in its various branches, holds beneath its gloomy
sway the minds of nearly half the human race. In Burmah, it
arrays itself in a form imposing to the imagination, and stimulat-
ing to the hopes and fears of men, while it exercises over the
mind the power derived from immemorial existence, and from
the traditions and associations of a hundred generations. Buddh
is the general name for divinity, but the religion to which
it lends its name is a system of absolute atheism. It teaches
that there has been a succession of Buddhs, or incarnations of
divinity, though with long intervals between them, who, through
various transmigrations, have attained the highest merit of every
4*
30 MISSIONS IN BURMLAH.
kind in previous states of existence. According to the legends
contained in the sacred books, the last Buddh was Gaudama,
who was born in the seventh century before Christ, became
Buddh when thirty-five years of age, and continued so forty-five
years, after which he passed into the state of Nigban, which by
some is understood to mean quiescence, or eternal repose, and
by others, absolute annihilation. The next Buddh is to appear
in about ten thousand years from the departure of Gaudama,
and, though the precise time of his appearance is not fixed,
yet his stature and dimensions, and the outlines of his person,
are all fully described in the sacred writings. In the long in-
tervals between the departure and appearance of the Buddhs,
there is in reality no living God, and this system thus presents
to the faith of its followers no conception of an eternal being, or
a great First Cause, existing before the worlds were made, and
destined to exist when the worlds shall cease to be. It involves
innumerable contradictions and childish absurdities; yet it is
riveted, with all the tenacity of an oriental faith, upon the minds
of hundreds of millions of immortal beings.
The principal objects of worship among the Burmans are im-
ages of Gaudama, which are manufactured of different sizes in
great numbers, and for which the demand is so great that marble,
the favorite material of which they are made, is not allowed to be
used for other purposes. These images are kept in private
houses, or set up in the zayats or public halls of every village,
and attached to the pagodas or temples which are erected in
countless numbers in all parts of the empire. These structures
vary in size and architectural proportions and appearance, but
are for the most part solid masses of masonry, closed on every
side, with their small interior space filled with Sacred treasures,
relics and offerings consecrated to the divinity. With their
lofty spires or pointed minarets standing against the sky, they
constitute the most prominent feature of every landscape; they
tower far above the dwellings of every city, and rise from every
bluff and hill in all the inhabited parts of the country. Many of
them are beautifully decorated and covered with gilt “from turret
B10DDEIISM, - 31
to foundation stone,” and, when seen at a distance, they often pre-
sent an appearance of imposing magnificence. On some of the
pagodas are suspended small bells at different points, with fans
or sheets of iron attached to their tongues, so that, when moved
by a gentle breeze, they give forth a pleasant chime, and seem
to fill the air with mysterious music. Both temples and im-
ages are regarded with great respect by the people, though
neither are formally consecrated to the purposes of worship.
The priesthood is a very large and regularly organized body,
and its members are initiated into the order with peculiar cere-
monies. The rules regulating the lives and conduct of the
priests are numerous and exact, though they are but imperfectly
obeyed. The priests conduct no religious service at the zayats
or pagodas, and perform no rites of worship for the people.
Bound to celibacy, they live together in kyoungs or monasteries,
where they often occupy themselves in the gratuitous instruc-
tion of such male children as are sent to them for the purpose.
They wear a peculiar dress of yellow cloth, and are supported
by contributions of rice and other articles of food, which they
receive, in their daily rounds, from the people. They attend
funerals, and frequently preach when requested and paid for
the service; but their office is almost entirely a sinecure; though,
with all their indolence and indifference, they undoubtedly exert
a powerful influence over the minds of the people, and render
them far less accessible, than they would otherwise be, to the
truths of the gospel as they are proclaimed by the missionaries.
Though this religion imposes a multitude of ceremonies and
superstitious observances, it is remarkable for its entire want of
sympathy with any of the interests or the sufferings of human-
ity. It makes the attainment of merit the great end of life, but
this merit consists in any thing rather than the charities and
amenities which belong to man's higher nature; hence the in-
struction of the ignorant, the relief of the poor, the consolation
of the afflicted and the suffering, are not among the duties it en-
joins. Its moral code, however, sets forth the sins which are to be
avoided in five leading commandments: — 1. Thou shalt not kill;
32 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
2. Thou shalt not steal ; 3. Thou shalt not commit adultery;
4. Thou shalt not lie; 5. Thou shalt not drink any intoxicating
liquor. These prohibitions, so far as they extend, are sufficient
of themselves to exalt Buddhism far above many other false re-
ligions of the East; but it contains no positive precepts that are
fitted to raise and purify the nature of man. Its eommands
and its prohibitions are alike designed for selfish advantage; they
refer the doubting conscience to no sanctions of a superior being,
and point the soul oppressed with sin to no ideals of excellence
and holiness; they present “nothing as the ultimate object of ac-
tion but self; and nothing for man's highest and holiest ambition,
but annihilation.”
So soon as Mr. Judson had acquired a sufficient mastery of
the language to be able to write it with tolerable accuracy, he
prepared a tract on the nature of the Christian religion, con-
taining an abstract of its leading doctrines. This was his first
public labor; and, undertaken as it was when his constitution
was enfeebled by years of laborious confinement to his perplex-
ing studies, it gave rise to a disease of the nervous system,
which attacked his eyes and head so violently, that he became
unable either to study or even to hear reading in English.
He was on the eve of sailing to Bengal for the benefit of his
health, when he received the welcome tidings that Mr. and Mrs.
Hough and Mrs. White, a new company of missionaries from
America, had arrived at Calcutta, and would soon join the mis-
sion at Rangoon. This most gratifying intelligence decided him
at first to delay his intended voyage, and at length to abandon it
altogether.
Rev. George H. Hough, Mrs. Phebe M. Hough, and Mrs.
Charlotte White, had been appointed by the Board, mission-
aries to Burmah in the summer of 1815. Mr. Hough had been
bred a printer, and had worked at the trade in the United States.
They sailed from Philadelphia in the following December, and
arrived at Calcutta in April, 1816. Here they were delayed for
several months, during which time Mrs. White was married to
Rev. Mr. Rowe, of the English Baptist Mission at Digah, in
TRANSLATION OF THE SCRIPTURES. 33.
Hindostan. On the 15th of October, 1816, Mr. and Mrs. Hough
arrived at Rangoon, having already sent before them a printing
press and a font of Burman types, which had been presented to
the mission by their English brethren at Serampore. Here
they were welcomed by Mr. and Mrs. Judson with more than
common delight, both as fellow laborers in carrying forward the
mission, and as messengers from the distant but unforgotten
land of their birth and their affections. They had been exiled
for three years from civilized society, dwelling amid the rude
barbarities of the heathen ; and now, to receive to their secluded
home, intelligent associates, and Christian countrymen and
friends, was a source of joy and thankfulness, such as can be
fully appreciated only by those who have been placed in similar
circumstances. Mr. Judson's health was soon reëstablished,
and he set himself with renewed vigor about preparing a gram-
mar, to aid the newly-arrived missionaries in the acquisition of
the difficult Burman tongue.
From the commencement of the mission, the Burmans, when-
ever the new teachers were spoken of, had been accustomed to
inquire for the sacred books of their religion. In order to meet
this natural demand of a shrewd and sagacious people, it was de-
cided by the missionaries that portions of the Scriptures and brief
accounts of Christianity should be printed and put in circulation
as speedily as possible. To the tract entitled ‘Summary of
Christian Doctrines,” which Mr. Judson had already prepared,
he now added a Catechism, and immediately commenced the
translation of the Gospel of Matthew, in order that the minds of
the people might be prepared for the reception of the truth
when it should be publicly preached to them. The tracts were
immediately printed, the Summary in an edition of a thousand
copies, and the Catechism in an edition of three thousand copies,
and the Gospel of Matthew was published soon after.
Four years had now elapsed since Mr. and Mrs. Judson first
established themselves at Rangoon. In all this time, though no
one had been converted to the Christian faith, yet a great change
had gradually taken place in the circumstances and prospects of
34 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
the mission. Its efficiency had been greatly increased by the
arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Hough, and the donation of the printing
press. A church had been organized at Rangoon by the mis-
sionaries, and though they had as yet made no attempts publicly
to preach the gospel, their character and objects had become well
known by their conversations with the people, and by the tracts
which they had printed and circulated, copies of which had pen-
etrated the interior of the empire. In these circumstances, it
seemed as if a new era was about to dawn on the progress of the
mission, and as if the merciful Providence, which had hitherto
watched over the lives of the missionaries, was about to bestow
upon them still more encouraging proofs of its favor. Nor
were these indications destined to be wholly deceptive. In the
meetings which Mrs. Judson was accustomed to hold for the
religious instruction of the Burman women, much serious inter-
est was occasionally evinced in the truths of the new religion,
and the little circle would often leave the eloquent and gifted
teacher with a sense of the insufficiency of their own supersti-
tious faith deeply impressed upon every mind.
At about the same time, also, Mr. Judson was visited by the
first Burman who had ever come to him avowedly in the char-
acter and spirit of an inquirer. Others had visited him to gratify
an idle curiosity, or to dispute with him concerning the doctrines
of Gaudama, but no one before had come to ask “how he
might learn the religion of Jesus,” or to express a belief in the
existence of God. He was evidently a person of rank, and of
superior intelligence; he bore away with him copies of all the
books which had been printed, and left the missionaries with
hopes of approaching blessings such as never before had been
awakened in their minds. -
FIRST TRLENNIAL CONVENTION. 35
C H A P T E R V.
CoNVENTION meets at Philadelphia. — Appointment of Messrs. Colman and
Wheelock.-Mr. Judson sails for Chittagong.—Troubles of the Mission
during his Absence.--His Return.— Mr. Hough embarks for Calcutta. —
Arrival of Messrs. Colman and Wheelock at Rangoon.—Death of Mr.
Wheelock. — Opening of the Zayat.—Baptism of the first Convert.—
Jealousy of the Government. — Messrs. Judson and Colman go to Ava to
obtain Toleration from the King.
IN May, 1817, the Convention held its first triennial meeting
at Philadelphia. Most of the facts and the incidents which we
have narrated in the foregoing pages were at this time presented
to the meeting in the report of the Board of Managers. The
measures hitherto adopted by that body were fully approved
by the Convention; and several new ones of great importance,
the fruit of increased interest and of larger views respecting
the objects before them, were also recommended as the basis of
future action. The constitution was also modified in such a
manner as to embrace the domestic missions which might be
established in the United States, and also to authorize the estab-
lishment of a Classical and Theological Seminary, for the pur-
pose of educating pious young men who should be deemed to
possess “gifts and graces suited to the gospel ministry.”
At the same meeting communications were read from Messrs.
James Colman and Edward W. Wheelock, offering themselves as .
missionaries to Burmah. These young men were both residents
of Boston, Mr. Wheelock being a member of the second and
Mr. Colman of the third Baptist church in that city. They
were found on examination to be possessed of worthy talents
and of true Christian philanthropy; their testimonials were
approved by the managers, and they were gladly accepted as
missionaries. They embarked in the following November at
Boston, amidst many encouraging manifestations of sympathy
36 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
and love both for them and the cause in which they were en-
gaged. During this session of the Triennial Convention, the
Board of Managers appointed three several committees, one for
the Eastern States, one for the Southern, and one for the West-
ern, to examine such young men in these portions of the coun-
try respectively as might offer their services to the Board as
missionaries. By the agency of these committees, in different
portions of the United States, by the wider diffusion of the
American Baptist Magazine, which had now taken the place of
the Massachusetts Magazine, and especially by the pious and
devoted observance of the monthly concert of prayer, which was
formally recommended to the churches of the country, the
Convention aimed still further to rouse the energy and to enlist
the entire ability of the growing denomination, in the great
work which was now fully before them. At the close of the
session the members separated from each other with hopes
greatly raised, and with confidence stronger than it had ever
been before in their ability to maintain the mission and make
it a source of inestimable blessings to the heathen. They looked
forward to the day when they should hear of the happy results
of their pious efforts and deliberations, and when distant nations,
illuminated with the light of heavenly truth, should bless the
Convention for sending the glad tidings of salvation to their
benighted shores.
While these auspicious events were taking place in America,
and new indications of missionary interest were presenting them-
selves in all parts of the country, far different omens were
preparing for the little band of missionaries at Rangoon, and
the flattering prospects which just now lay before them, were
soon to be broken by dangers and alarms.
So long a period had now been devoted to the acquisition of
the language by Mr. and Mrs. Judson, and so much had actually
been accomplished in conversation with the natives, in the cir-
culation of the tracts and the Gospel which Mr. Hough had
printed, that it was decided by the missionaries to commence
preaching in a more public manner. Yet so many obstacles
ARREST OF MIR. HOUGH. 37
seemed to stand in the way of his going abroad among the Bur-
mans in his capacity of teacher of the new religion, that Mr.
Judson determined to secure the aid of the Arracanese converts
at Chittagong, in a neighboring province, whose people spoke the
Burman language. For this purpose, and also for the improve-
ment of his health, he embarked for Chittagong, expecting to be ab-
sent only for a brief interval, and leaving Mrs. Judson to continue
her meetings for the instruction of the Burman women, and Mr.
and Mrs. Hough to prosecute the study of the language. Mr. Jud-
son had intended to return at the end of three months with the
fellow laborers he hoped to find in Arracan. At the expiration
of this period, however, when his return was daily expected, a
vessel from Chittagong arrived at Rangoon, bringing the dis-
tressing intelligence that neither he nor the vessel in which he
had embarked had been heard of at that port. Similar tidings
were also contained in letters which Mrs. Judson.received from
Bengal.
While the missionaries were in this state of fearful suspense,
an incident occurred which was well calculated to increase the
perplexity and dismay in which they were plunged. Mr.
Hough, who had continued quietly studying the language at the
mission house, was suddenly summoned to appear immediately at
the court house, and it was rumored among the affrighted do-
mestics and neighbors who followed the officers that came for Mr.
Hough, that the king had issued a decree for the banishment of all
the foreign teachers. It was late in the afternoon when he made
his appearance before the despotic tribunal that was charged with
the execution of the imperial decree, and he was merely requir-
ed to give security for his appearance the following morning;
when, as the unfeeling magistrates declared, “if he did not tell all
the truth relative to his situation in the country, they would
write with his heart's blood.” Mr. Hough was detained from
day to day on the most flimsy pretences, himself unable to speak
the language, and with no one near him who would attempt to
explain his situation or vindicate his objects and his conduct.
The viceroy whom Mr. and Mrs. Judson had known, had recently
5
38 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
been recalled to Ava, and he who now held the reins of the
government was a stranger, and, as his family were not with him,
Mrs. Judson, according to the etiquette of the court, could not
be admitted to his presence. The order which had led to the
arrest was found to relate to some Portuguese priests whom the
king had banished, and Mr. Hough was at first summoned to give
assurance that he was not one of the number, and then detained
by the officers in order to extort money for his ransom. He
was at length released by order of the viceroy, to whom Mrs.
Judson boldly carried the cause and presented a petition which
she had caused her teacher to draw up for the purpose.
The anxiety occasioned by this arrest and its train of petty
annoyances, and still more by the protracted and mysterious
absence of Mr. Judson, was at this time greatly increased by
rumors which reached Rangoon, of an impending war between
the English and the Burman governments. There were but
few English vessels lying in the river, and the English traders
who were in the country were closing their business and pre-
paring to hasten away, at any new indications of hostilities that
should be presented. The condition of the missionaries was
rendered still more distressing by the ravages of the cholera,
which now, for the first time, made its appearance in Burmah,
and was sending its terrors throughout the empire. The poor
people of Rangoon fell in hundreds before its frightful progress.
The dismal death-drum continually gave forth its warning sound
as new names were added to the melancholy list of victims to
the desolating malady. In these gloomy circumstances, they
saw ship after ship leave the river, bearing away all the for-.
eigners who were in the province, until at length the only one
remaining was on the eve of sailing. Harassed with doubts
concerning the uncertain fate of Mr. Judson, and surrounded
with perils, they saw before them what appeared the last op-
portunity of leaving the country, before the threatened hostili-
ties should begin, and they should be exposed to all the merci-
less cruelties of barbarian warfare.
Mr. and Mrs. Hough decided to go on board and escape to
ARRIVAL OF MESSRS. COLMAN AND WHEELOCK. 39
f
Bengal, while escape was still in their power, and they urged
Mrs. Judson to accompany them. She at length reluctantly
yielded to their advice, and with a heart burdened with sorrows
she embarked with her companions, on the 5th of July, in the
only ship that remained to carry them from the country. The
ship, however, was delayed for several days in the river, and
was likely to be subjected to still further detention. Mrs. Jud-
son, who had gone on board rather in obedience to the entreaties
of her associates, and the dictates of prudence, than from the
suggestions of that truer instinct which often serves to guide the
noblest natures in great emergencies, now decided to leave
the ship and return alone to the mission house, there to await
either the return of her husband, or the confirmation of her
worst fears respecting his fate. It was a noble exhibition of
heroic courage, and gave assurance of all the distinguished
qualities which, at a later period and amid dangers still more
appalling, shone with unfailing brightness around the char-
acter of this remarkable woman. The event justified her de-
termination; and, within a week after her decision was taken,
Mr. Judson arrived at Rangoon, having been driven from place
to place by contrary winds, and having entirely failed of the
object for which he undertook the voyage. Mr. and Mrs.
Hough, however, after long delays, again embarked and pro-
ceeded to Bengal, taking with them the press and all the im-
plements of the printing house. Their removal was subse-
quently productive of many embarrassments to the mission, and
seems never to have been fully justified either by Mr. Judson
or by the Board of Managers in America.
In this broken and well-nigh ruined state of the mission,
when its members were about to be separated from each other,
and its prospects were darkened with clouds, Mr. and Mrs. Jud-
son were cheered and encouraged by the arrival of Messrs.
Colman and Wheelock and their wives, who in the year pre-
ceding had been appointed by the Board, missionaries to Bur-
mah. They arrived at Rangoon in September, 1818, after
having been detained several months at Calcutta, in waiting for
40 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
a passage. They were both young, the former being at the
age of twenty years, and the latter of twenty-three—of suitable
education and approved piety and zeal; and their arrival was
hailed as the assurance of new prosperity to the mission.
The hopes, however, which were thus excited, were doomed
soon to be disappointed, for they had scarcely arrived at the
post to which they were destined, when it became evident
that the health and constitution of neither would be able
to endure the assiduous study and toil which belong to the life
of a missionary in the East, and they soon began to give une-
quivocal indications that a fatal disease was already preying
upon their frames. At the end of a year, before he had ac-
quired the language of the country, Mr. Wheelock embarked
for Bengal, in the last stages of consumption, with no other
prospect before him than that of speedy death. While on
the passage, he was seized with a violent fever, accompanied
with delirium, and in one of its paroxysms he threw himself from
the window of his cabin into the sea, and was drowned. Mr.
Colman, though oppressed with feeble health, still remained
with Mr. Judson at Rangoon, determined to share with him the
changeful and uncertain fortunes of the mission, to whatever re-
sults it might please Heaven to conduct them.
At the period at which these missionaries arrived at the
place of their destination, the mission had been established near-
ly five years. Amidst many difficulties, its founders had ac-
quired the language of the country, and by means of conversa-
tion with the people around them, and the circulation of printed
tracts and the Gospel of Matthew, they had made their objects
and character as teachers of religion familiarly known far be-
yond the limits of Rangoon. Hitherto, however, the labors of
the missionaries had been comparatively private. A few Bur-
mans had been accustomed to visit them at their own dwelling
to converse with them, and receive the tracts which they kept
for distribution. No place for public worship or religious teach-
ings had yet been built, and no public labors had been underta-
ken. So numerous was now their little band, in consequence
OPENING OF THE ZAYAT. 41
of the recent accession, that it was determined immediately to
erect a zayat, in some spot less retired than the mission house,
that would secure for them the attention of the people. A site
was accordingly selected just without the limits of the town, on
the great Pagoda road, which derived its name from being lined
on either side with places of Burman worship. In April, 1819,
the Zayat was completed and opened for the sacred purpose to
which it was dedicated. It was a small, low building, of humble
pretensions in comparison with any one of the throng of pago-
das by which it was surrounded, yet it was well suited to the
purpose for which it was erected, and seemed an appropriate
emblem of Christianity standing amidst the magnificent temples
of heathenism. -
The opening of the Zayat was an event of no common im-
portance in the history of the mission, and was regarded by the
missionaries with the deepest interest. “Centuries had rolled
away, millions of Burmans had been ushered into eternity, and
God, the Creator of the universe, had never before seen an al-
tar erected for Himself; had never before heard the voice of
prayer and praise ascend in the Burman language.” This con-
sideration gave a sacred grandeur to the humble building, and
filled the mind with the "liveliest hopes that it would ere long
become the scene of new triumphs of Christian truth. Here
Mr. Judson, in the presence of a small congregation of wonder-
ing heathen, commenced the public worship of God in the Bur-
man language, and soon began to witness those results which
were early promised to all those who should faithfully preach
the gospel of Christ to their perishing fellow-men.
It was on the 30th of April, 1819, a few days after the open-
ing of the zayat, that Mr. Judson was visited by a man who
came to inquire about the new religion with a spirit very dif-
ferent from that which he had usually witnessed among the
Burmans. His visits were frequently repeated, and he soon
began to express sentiments of repentance for his sins and faith
in the Saviour of sinners, and to evince those deep and earnest
moral feelings which, alike in every land and through all ages,
5*
42 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
attend the conversion of a human soul to God. Other instances
of serious attention to the teachings of the zayat soon began to
present themselves. It was evident that the seed which had
been sown was already springing up, and giving promise of its
wonted and unfailing fruit. The new convert, after being faith-
fully examined by the missionaries, was baptized by Mr. Judson
in a small pond near the mission house, and was received into
the church on the 27th of June, 1819. The name of this ear-
liest Burman disciple was Moung Nau. He became a valua-
ble assistant to Mr. Judson, and, through all the trials and perils
to which the mission was afterwards exposed, he continued a
faithful soldier and servant of Jesus Christ unto the end. On the
7th of November, in the same year, two others were baptized
in like manner, and admitted to membership in the church.
It was at sunset that the solemn and significant rite was admin-
istered, in the waters of the same pond which had before been
made sacred by the baptism of Moung Nau. “The sun,” says
Mr. Judson, “was not allowed to look upon the humble, timid
profession. No wondering crowd crowned the overshadowing
hill. No hymn of praise expressed the exultant feelings of joy-
ous hearts. Stillness and solemnity pervaded the scene. We
felt, on the banks of the water, as a little, feeble, solitary band.
But, perhaps, some hovering angels took note of the event, with
more interest than they witnessed the late coronation; perhaps
Jesus looked down on us, pitied and forgave our weaknesses,
and marked us for His own; perhaps, if we deny IIim not, He
will acknowledge us another day, more publicly than we ven-
ture, at present, to acknowledge Him.”
Among the visiters who had long frequented the zayat to re-
ceive the instruction of the missionaries, and to engage in dis-
cussion with them concerning the doctrines they taught, was a
man of superior education, a teacher of science, and a person
of considerable distinction. His name was Moung Shwa-Gnong.
He was a Buddhist, but had received, in former years, some
vague ideas of spiritual truth, which were now struggling-with
the dogmas of Buddhism in which he had been educated. He
MESSRs. JUDSON AND COLMAN EMBARK FOR AVA. 43
was attracted to the zayat by the fame of the new teachers, and
by the reports which had gone abroad respecting their strange
doctrines. His frequent visits soon attracted the attention of
the priests, or of the officers of the viceroy, who mentioned him
to their master. The viceroy gave no decisive answer, but told
them “to inquire further about him.” This order was reported
to Moung Shwa-Gnong, and caused an immediate decline of his
interest in religion, and a suspension of his visits at the zayat.
Others, also, who had been in the habit of attending the instruc-
tions of the missionaries, fell off at the same time, and from the
same cause; so that, at the end of a few weeks, Mr. Judson would
sit whole days in the verandah of the zayat, without receiving
a single visiter; and that, too, in the pleasant season of autumn,
while the road was crowded with passers-by, going to or from
the great pagoda to which it led.
This single incident, though seemingly unimportant in itself,
served to assure the missionaries that the least opposition which
the government should make might at any time blast all their
prospects, and ruin all their plans; and it forced upon them the
conclusion that, so soon as their success should become sufficient-
ly important to attract particular attention, they would be sub-
jected to persecution, and, perhaps, to banishment from the
country. They accordingly decided to go without delay to the
capital of the empire, and make known their objects to the em-
peror himself, and solicit his favor, or at least his toleration for
the new religion. If this were granted, they would be able to
prosecute their pious work without fear of molestation; but if
it were denied, no future missionary attempts could be under-
taken with any hope of success.
Accordingly, on the 22d of December, 1819, Messrs. Judson
and Colman, now the only remaining missionaries at Rangoon,
embarked in a small boat of ten oars, to ascend the Irrawaddy,
to Amarapura,” at that time the capital of the empire, in order
# This place was subsequently abandoned, and the government established
at Ava, a large city seven miles below. The residence of the king, however,
is now at Amarapura.
44 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
to prostrate themselves at the golden feet, as a visit to the emperor
was called. They left their families at Rangoon, but took with
them the faithful Moung Nau, as an attendant in their perilous
passage. They were at a loss what to select for the present
which custom required that they should offer to the emperor,
but at length decided on a copy of the Bible, elegantly bound
in six volumes, and covered with gold leaf, and enclosed in a
richly ornamented wrapper. For the inferior members of the
government, they took pieces of fine cloth and other similar
articles, which were suited to the taste of orientals. The capi-
tal was three hundred and fifty miles from Rangoon, and the
banks of the Irrawaddy were infested with robbers, who almost
nightly committed depredations on the boats that were passing
along the river, and often murdered their passengers. The mis-
sionaries, however, were protected from harm by the great Be-
ing in whom they trusted, and after a passage of more than thirty
days they arrived safely at the proud capital of the Burman
empire, the seat of the imperious monarch whose favor they
had come to propitiate.
INTRODUCTION AT THE BURMLAN COURT, 45
C H A P T E R W I.
THEIR Introduction at the Burman Court.—Their Petition refused. — They
return to Rangoon. — Mr. and Mrs. Colman go to Chittagong. — Death of
Mr. Colman. — Converts at Rangoon. — Mr. and Mrs. Judson visit Calcutta.
— Progress of the Mission at Rangoon.
ON the day following their arrival at the Burman capital,
they presented themselves at the house of Mya-day-men, the
former viceroy of Rangoon, whom they had known, and whose
wife had shown much kindness to Mrs. Judson. He was now
attached to the imperial government, in the capacity of woongyee,
or one of the public ministers of the state. By him and by
his wife they were kindly received, and were promised such aid
as they desired in obtaining an audience of the monarch. Mya-
day-men commanded one of the officers about him to conduct
the missionaries to Moung Zah, one of the atwenwoons, or private
ministers of state, – giving at the same time such explanations
and orders as were necessary to secure the object they had in
view. The ceremony of their introduction to the golden face
took place on the third day after their arrival. They were first
conducted by the officer to whose care they had been committed,
to Moung Zah, to whom, after they had propitiated him with
suitable presents, they made known their real objects in com-
ing to the capital, declared themselves to be missionaries or
propagators of religion, and expressed a wish to present to the
emperor a copy of their sacred books, and a petition for his
royal approbation.
The manner of the minister was kind and familiar, but his
words expressed great doubt of their success. They however
followed his guidance, for it was announced that the golden foot
was about to advance. The day was that on which was cele-
brated a recent brilliant victory of the Burman arms over the
Cassays, and the emperor was about to inspect the troops
46 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
that were paraded in honor of the occasion. They entered a
magnificent apartment of the royal palace, which looked out
upon the extensive grounds on which the spectacle was to be
exhibited. The grandeur of the hall, the height of the dome,
and the number of the lofty pillars that supported it, all covered
with burnished gold, presented a gorgeous display of oriental
magnificence. Here the missionaries were placed, among the
company of officers of state who were waiting the appearance
of the monarch. As they looked through the hall, when his
approach was announced, they soon caught sight of the “Sove-
reign of land and sea.” The scene is well described by the
graphic pen of Mr. Judson. “He came forward, unattended, in
Solitary grandeur, exhibiting the proud gait and majesty of an
Eastern monarch. His dress was rich, but not distinctive ; and
he carried in his hand the gold-sheathed sword, which seems to
have taken the place of the sceptre of ancient times. But it
was his high aspect and commanding eye that chiefly riveted
our attention. He strided on. Every head, excepting ours,
was in the dust. We remained kneeling, our hands folded, our
eyes fixed on the monarch. When he drew near, we caught his
attention. He stopped, partly turned towards us, and said —
‘Who are these ?’ ‘The teachers, great king,' I replied. “What,
you speak Burman 2 – the priests that I heard of last night?”
“When did you arrive?’ ‘Are you teachers of religion ?”
“Are you like the Portuguese priests P’ ‘Are you married?”
‘Why do you dress so 2°. These and some other similar ques-
tions we answered, when he appeared to be pleased with us,
and sat down on an elevated seat, his hand resting on the hilt
of his sword, and his eyes intently fixed on us. Moung Zah
now began to read the petition, and it ran thus : —
“‘The American teachers present themselves to receive the
favor of the excellent king, the sovereign of land and sea.
Hearing that, on account of the greatness of the royal power,
the royal country was in a quiet and prosperous state, we arrived
at the town of Rangoon, within the royal dominions, and having
obtained leave of the governor of that town to come up and
THE PETITION REFUSED. 47
behold the golden face, we have ascended and reached the
bottom of the golden feet. In the great country of America,
we sustain the character of teachers and explainers of the
contents of the sacred Scriptures of our religion. And since it
is contained in those Scriptures, that, if we pass to other coun-
tries and preach and propagate religion, great good will result,
and both those who teach and those who receive the religion,
will be freed from future punishment, and enjoy, without decay
or death, the eternal felicity of heaven, – we ask that royal
permission be given, that we, taking refuge in the royal power,
may preach our religion in these dominions, and that those who
are pleased with our preaching and wish to listen to and be
guided by it, whether foreigners or Burmans, may be exempt
from government molestation. We present ourselves to receive
the favor of the excellent king, the sovereign of land and sea.’
“The emperor heard this petition, and stretched out his
hand. Moung Zah crawled forward and presented it. His
majesty began at the top and deliberately read it through. In
the mean time, I gave Moung Zah an abridged copy of the
tract, in which every offensive sentence was corrected, and the
whole put into the handsomest style and dress possible. After
the emperor had perused the petition, he handed it back without
saying a word, and took the tract. Our hearts now rose to God
for a display of his grace. ‘O, have mercy on Burmah I
Have mercy on her king !' But alas ! the time was not yet
come. He held the tract long enough to read the first two
sentences, which assert that there is one eternal God, who is
independent of the incidents of mortality, and that besides Him
there is no God; and then, with an air of indifference, perhaps
disdain, he dashed it down to the ground ! Moung Zah stooped
forward, picked it up and handed it to us. Moung Yo made a
slight attempt to save us, by unfolding one of the volumes which
composed our present, and displaying its beauty; but his majesty
took no notice of it. Our fate was decided. After a few mo-
ments, Moung Zah interpreted his royal master's will, in the
following terms: “In regard to the objects of your petition,
48 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
his majesty gives no order. In regard to your sacred books,
his majesty has no use for them,--take them away.”
“Something was now said about brother Colman's skill in
medicine; upon which the emperor once more opened his
mouth and said: ‘Let them proceed to the residence of my
physician, the Portuguese priest; let him examine whether
they can be useful to me in that line, and report accordingly.”
He then rose from his seat, strided to the other end of the hall,
and there, after having dashed to the ground the first intelli-
gence he had ever received of the Eternal God, his Maker,
his Preserver, his Judge, he threw himself down on a cushion,
and lay listening to the music, and gazing at the parade spread
out before him.”
After a repulse so decisive they were hurried from the palace
with but little ceremony. Their rejection was soon known to
every sycophant of the court, from the highest minister down
to the humblest menial of the palace; and they passed out of the
gates with less difficulty than they entered, and were conducted
to the residence of the Portuguese priest, to whom the emperor
had ordered them to be carried. He speedily discovered that
they were in possession of no secret art which would secure to
the emperor perpetual life or freedom from disease, and he sum-
marily dismissed them, without any proposal that they should be
attached to the corps of his majesty's medical advisers. On the
following day they made some further efforts to accomplish their
object, but they were all in vain. The policy of the Burman
government was not to be changed so as to admit toleration of
any foreign religion, and the missionaries soon discovered that
in presenting a petition to that effect they had been guilty of
an egregious blunder, an unpardonable offence. With their
hopes thus cruelly blighted, and their spirits dejected at the
darkened prospects of the mission, they betook themselves to
their boat, and made preparations for returning immediately to
Rangoon, more deeply impressed than ever before with the
conviction that they could expect no aid or countenance for
their holy enterprise, save from Heaven alone. -
RETURN TO BANGOON, 49
Their passage down the river was easy and rapid, but the
scenery along the banks was shaded with the hues of their own
sombre spirits. At Pyee, one of the towns at which they stopped
for the night, they met the teacher Moung Shwa-Gnong, who
had come up two hundred and seventy miles from Rangoon to
visit a friend who was sick. They narrated to him their adven-
tures at the capital, and the peremptory repulse which they had
received from the emperor, and made known their views of the
danger that would attend any further propagating or professing
the religion of Christ. He, however, manifested no such alarm
or dismay as they had anticipated; but, on the contrary, repeat-
ed, with a firm voice and with considerable emphasis, the prin-
cipal articles of the Christian faith. He told them of the prog-
ress he had made in the understanding of Christianity since he
saw them last; that he had endeavored to renounce his own
understanding, and trust in the Divine Word; that he had ceased
to worship at the pagodas, though he sometimes visited them
with the crowd to avoid persecution. “Now,” said he, “you
say that I am not a disciple, — what lack I yet?” To the ques-
tions of this speculative teacher they gave such replies as were
suited to his state of mind; and informed him that they would
probably leave Rangoon, since, now that the emperor had
refused to tolerate Christianity, no Burman would dare to
investigate, much less to embrace it. To this he replied, with
great appearance of interest, “Say not so ; there are some who
will investigate, notwithstanding; and, rather than have you
quit Rangoon, I will go to the Mangen teacher and have a pub-
lic dispute. I know I can silence him. I know the truth is on
my side.” -
On the 18th of February, after a passage of twenty days, they
arrived at Rangoon. They immediately called together the
three disciples, who, with themselves, composed the little Burman
church, and disclosed the melancholy result of their visit to the
capital. and the injurious influence which they apprehended it
would exert upon the future prosecution of the mission. They
anticipated that the disciples would be intimidated by these
6
50 - MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
tidings of the emperor's refusal to tolerate Christianity, and im-
agined that if one out of the three remained firm, it would be as
much as they could reasonably expect. But what were their
surprise and delight to find that they all remained unmoved, or
rather that their faith and zeal were strengthened and increased,
instead of being diminished by the intelligence. It was evident
that the new affections which had sprung up in the hearts of
these poor children of superstition were no ephemeral plants,
but germs of true Christian character which had been nurtured
by God's own Spirit. The missionaries had formed the design of
immediately abandoning the mission at Rangoon, and leaving
the empire for some country, where their objects would be re-
garded with more favor by the government, or where the people
would be less dependent on the monarch's favor than was the
case in Burmah. The district which they had selected was
that lying between Bengal and Arracan, inhabited chiefly by
Arracanese, but under the government of Bengal. This tract of
country contains about 1,200,000 of inhabitants, who speak a lan-
guage similar to the Burman. Its chief town is Chittagong,
where a missionary from Bengal had formerly resided, and bap-
tized several converts to the Christian faith.
No sooner, however, was this design of leaving Rangoon made
known by the missionaries to the Burman converts and inquir-
ers, than they commenced the most earnest entreaties that the
mission might not be abandoned. Two of the converts protested
that if the missionaries went away, they would go with them,
while the third, who had a wife and family, declared that,
though he could not go with the teachers, yet, if he must be left
alone, he would remain “performing the duties of Jesus Christ's
religion;” no other would he think of. Some of the inquirers
expressed the utmost desire that they would not leave them,
or at least, that they would stay till there were eight or ten dis-
ciples, – for, said they, the religion will spread; the emperor
himself cannot stop it. Such manifestations of interest in the
mission, on the part of these simple but earnest-minded disciples
and inquirers, could not fail to make the missionaries hesitate
CHITTAGONG. A. MISSIONARY STATION. 51.
in the execution of their design to leave Rangoon, and they
were induced by the entreaties which were addressed to them
from those who had attended their teachings, to reconsider, and
at length to modify their plans. It was finally determined that
Mr. and Mrs. Judson should remain at Rangoon, but that Mr.
and Mrs. Colman should remove to Chittagong, and establish a
station there, to which the other missionaries and the converts
might repair, in case any storm of persecution should drive them
from Burmah. In accordance with this arrangement, Mr. and
Mrs. Colman embarked for Bengal in March, 1820, and thence
proceeded to Chittagong, where they arrived in the following
June. Here, amid the Mahomedans and Buddhists who inhabit
the country, they hoped to gather again the scattered converts
whom the English missionaries had left, and, beneath such pro-
tection ag they could receive from the East India Company, to
acquire the language, and proclaim the truths of the gospel to
the people.
Immediately on their arrival they erected a dwelling, and
commenced such missionary labors as their acquaintance with
the language enabled them to perform. Mr. Colman was soon
visited by several of the native converts, and among them, by
Keepong, their most influential man and teacher. They were
overjoyed at finding a Christian teacher with whom they could
converse, and they eagerly solicited Mr. Colman to remain
among them and instruct them in the way of life more perfectly ;
for both they and their countrymen were in great need of
instruction, and their children, whom they would not intrust to
Buddhist teachers, were growing up in ignorance of letters and
of religion. He accompanied some of the converts to the villages
in which they dwelt, and listened to the sermon of their teacher
IXeepong; but, though he observed among them many interesting
features of Christian character, he was every where pained
at perceiving that the doctrines of Christ were mingled with
the dogmas of Buddhism, and that not a few of the converts
were still clinging to the belief that annihilation was the perfect
state to which the gospel was intended to introduce the soul.
62 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
In their petitions, he would often hear them pray that they
might attain to annihilation, and in their conversations they
would speak of it as the highest good which God could confer.
For the purpose of being more intimately connected with these
poor Arracanese and their countrymen, Mr. Colman decided to
remove from Chittagong, where he had received permission of the
East India Company to reside, and to take up his abode at some
one of the villages of Arracan, on the confines of the Burman
empire, where the native converts principally dwelt. He accord-
ingly selected Cox's Bazaar, a town of nearly twenty thousand
people, but distinguished for the unhealthiness of its climate.
He had been settled here but a few months, and was just begin-
ning publicly to preach the gospel, when, in the midst of the
unhealthy season, he was seized with the jungle fever, and fell
a martyr to his zeal, on the 4th of July, 1822. In the death
of this ardent and noble-hearted young missionary the Burman
Mission sustained a severe loss. It was his aim to reëstablish
the broken and scattered church of Arracanese which had been
formed by the English missionaries with but little acquaint-
ance with the language, and but little ability to instruct the
natives, and to plant a mission on the confines of the Burman
empire, which might also serve as a place of refuge to our
missionaries whenever persecution or war should endanger their
situation at Rangoon. These generous and important plans
were frustrated by his death, and all thought of having an out-
station, such as he had designed to form, was entirely abandoned.
Mrs. Colman returned to Bengal, where she entered into the
service of the missions as a teacher of female children. She
was subsequently married to the Rev. Amos Sutton, the well-
known and justly-esteemed missionary of the English Baptists
at Orissa, in Hindostan, where she has prosecuted, for many
years, the self-sacrificing labors to which in early youth she
dedicated her life.
Immediately after the departure of Mr. and Mrs. Colman
from Rangoon, Mr. and Mrs. Judson, now the solitary occupants
of the mission house, had the satisfaction to perceive that the
ACCESSIONS TO THE CHURCH AT RANGOON. 53
little circle of inquirers was gradually increasing, and that
the spirit of those who came to be instructed was becoming
more earnest and sincere, while the native Christians themselves
were evidently growing in the knowledge and faith of the gospel.
They entreated them to abandon the thought of leaving Ran-
goon, and seemed to feel assured that Heaven was about to
bestow new blessings on their benighted countrymen. In the
course of a few months after his return from the unsuccessful
mission to the capital of the empire, Mr. Judson baptized
seven additional converts, among whom was the speculative
and timid teacher Moung Shwa-Gnong, now thoroughly in-
structed in the Christian faith, and embracing it with the ful-
lest convictions of a discriminating and educated mind. In
striking contrast with this long-inquiring and hesitating convert
was another, Moung Shwa-ba, who, though of inferior educa-
cation, was yet marked by a fearless decision of character, which
led him in a few days to the adoption of the faith which the
educated teacher was engaged for many months in preparing to
receive. In these new converts, who were now so decided in
casting off the superstitions of Gaudama, and in receiving the
gospel, Mr. Judson recognized the proofs of Heaven's favor
to the mission, and the fruits of many years of labor, and of
many prayers which Christians in distant climes had mingled
with his own, that God would bestow his blessing upon the
Burmans. He was now bound to Rangoon by new ties, the
sympathies of Christian hearts, and the warm affections of those
who regarded him as their spiritual father and friend, their
guide to the kingdom of Heaven. -
When we consider that the refusal of the emperor to tolerate
Christianity among his subjects was well known both at Ava
and at Rangoon, we may form some conception of the circum-
stances in which the little company of Burman Christians were
placed, and appreciate the firm trust in God by which they
were made willing, in the face of an oriental despotism, to re-
nounce the religion of Buddh, and profess the forbidden and
proscribed faith of the gospel. The humble church was en-
6 *
54 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
vironed with innumerable dangers; for each one of its members
had adopted the new religion at the peril of his life. It owed
its safety in part, no doubt, to its obscurity and the smallness of
its numbers, and perhaps not less to the caution and watchful-
ness with which its ordinances were performed and its affairs
administered.
Amidst these encouraging indications of Heaven's favor to
the mission, it became evident that the health of Mrs. Judson
was seriously undermined by the pernicious influences of the
climate. Her strength was already so far reduced by insidious
disease as to require immediate attention and medical advice
superior to that which Rangoon could afford. She made ar-
rangements for embarking without delay for Bengal, and as she
was now too ill to go alone, as she at first intended, Mr. Judson
prepared to accompany her. They took passage on the 19th of
July, 1820, for Calcutta, where they arrived on the 8th of August,
after a pleasant voyage, during which, however, the health of
Mrs. Judson experienced no perceptible benefit. She was soon
removed to the purer atmosphere and the more congenial soci-
ety of Serampore. Here she was attended by physicians of
eminent skill, but for a long time without any favorable change;
until, so important was the presence of Mr. Judson at Rangoon,
he was about to leave her with her friends of the English
Mission and return alone to the post of his missionary duty.
It pleased Heaven, however, soon to open to her the prospect of
returning health; and it being no longer deemed indispensable
that she should remain in Bengal, she decided to hasten back
with her husband. They arrived at Rangoon on the 5th of
January, 1821, after an absence of nearly six months, and were
welcomed by the disciples and friends whom they had left, with
the warmest and most affectionate greeting. The little flock,
though so long deprived of the shepherd's care, and to some
extent scattered by the extortions of the petty tyrants of the
government by whom they were surrounded, had remained
unharmed amidst their foes. Not one had dishonored his pro
fession or proved recreant to the principles which he had em-
PROGRESS QE THE MISSION AT RANGOON. 55.
cº
braced ; and, as Mr. Judson on the day of his arrival joined with
them in their evening devotion at the mission house, the hearts
of all were alike subdued by one common sentiment of gratitude
and praise.
The missionaries were now quietly settled on the spot which
they had long since learned to call their home. The instruc-
tions of the Zayat and the translation of the Scriptures were all
resumed, and the mission began again silently to put forth its
influence upon the Burmans who came to inquire of Mr. Jud-
son concerning the Eternal God whose existence and govern-
ment he proclaimed, and the immortal life of the soul which he
taught was the great object of religion to secure. In the work
of translating the Scriptures, he employed the assistance of
Moung Shwa-Gnong, and in other parts of his missionary labors
he was aided by Moung Shwa-ba, both of whom proved them-
selves to be most valuable helpers, and furnished a striking
illustration of the superior advantage which persons of cultivated
intellect always possess over rude and unlettered men. Mya-
day-men, the former viceroy of Rangoon, who had befriended
Messrs. Judson and Colman in their visit to the capital, was
now viceroy for the second time, and, beneath his mild and
somewhat tolerant government, the complaints which were made
against the Christians were but little regarded; three new con-
verts were successively added to the church, and the sacred
Scriptures were slowly and constantly preparing, to be read in
the Burman tongue by the people of the whole empire.
56 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
C HAPTE R WIL
Mrs. Judson's Visit to the United States in 1822.-Her History of the Mis-
sion. — Arrival of Dr. Price at Rangoon. — Messrs. Judson and Price go to
Ava. —Interview with the King.—A Branch of the Mission established at
Ava. — Arrival of Mrs. Judson and Mr. and Mrs. Wade at Rangoon.-
Messrs. Hough and Wade at Rangoon.—Messrs. Judson and Price at Ava--
Removal of the Government to Amarapura.
THE mission had gone on thus prosperously for several
months after the return of the missionaries from Bengal, when
Mrs. Judson was again afflicted with that distressing malady,
the chronic liver complaint, which had never been entirely
eradicated from her constitution. All hope of her recovery
while she should remain in a tropical climate seemed now to
be at an end; and it was decided that she should take passage
to the United States, and try the efficacy of the air and scenery
of her native land, and the cheerful sympathies of the friends
and kindred from whom she had been so long separated. On
the 21st of August, 1821, she embarked for Calcutta, intend-
ing to take passage thence directly to this country. The feel-
ings with which she parted from those whom she left behind
may be well imagined, and they are briefly chronicled in
her own eloquent journal. Rangoon had become to her the
home of her affections as well as the place of her residence,
and as she saw its glittering pagodas fading in the distance,
and thought of her own declining health, of the dangers of the
voyage, and the uncertainties which still lowered like threat-
ening clouds around the prospects of the mission, she might
naturally apprehend that she was gazing for the last time on the
spot where were garnered up her richest earthly hopes.
On arriving at Calcutta she found no vessel in which she
could embark for America and after considerable delay, in ac-
cordance with the desire of her friends, she took a cabin which
was gratuitously offered her in a ship bound to England. On
MRS. JUDSON'S VISIT TO THE UNITED STATES. 57
arriving at Liverpool, her health, though decidedly improved
since leaving Rangoon, was yet far from being reëstablished.
In London she was received into the hospitable family of Mr.
Joseph Butterworth, a member of the Methodist persuasion,
and a gentleman of high public standing and of the greatest
excellence of character, where she made the acquaintance of
several of the distinguished philanthropists and statesmen of the
day. In the agreeable Christian society to which she was thus
introduced, and in travelling to Scotland, and visiting the min-
eral springs at Cheltenham, Mrs. Judson spent several months
in England, every where vindicating the character and objects
of the Christian missionary, and commending them to the re-
spect and admiration of mankind. -
In August, 1822, she took leave of her British friends, to
whom she had become warmly endeared, and embarked on
board the ship Amity for New York, where she arrived on
the 25th of the following September. The visit of Mrs. Jud-
son to the United States forms an epoch of no inconsiderable
importance in the progress of interest in missions, among the
churches of various denominations in this country. She visit-
ed several of the leading cities of the Union; met a large num-
ber of associations of ladies; attended the session of the Tri-
ennial Convention at Washington; and, in a multitude of social
circles, alike in the South and the North, recited the thrilling
narrative of what she had seen and experienced during the
eventful years in which she had dwelt in a heathen land. But
relaxation and travelling for health, and interviews with reli-
gious friends, were not her only occupation. In her retirement,
in addition to maintaining an extensive correspondence, she
found time to prepare the history of the mission in Burmah,
which was published in her name, in a series of letters address-
ed to Mr. Butterworth, the gentleman beneath whose roof she
had been a guest during her residence in England. These rec- .
ords, which were principally compiled from documents which
had been published before, contained the first continuous ac-
count of the Burman Mission ever given to the public. The
58 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
work was widely read both in England and America, and re-
ceived the favorable notice of several of the leading organs of
public criticism.*
The influence which Mrs. Judson exerted in favor of the
cause of missions during her brief residence of eight or nine
months in the United States, it is now hardly possible to esti-
mate. She enlisted more fully in the cause not a few leading
minds, who have since rendered it signal service both by eloquent
vindications and by judicious counsels; and by the appeals which
she addressed to Christians of her own sex, and her fervid
conversations with persons of all classes and denominations in
America, as well as by the views which she submitted to the
managers of the mission, a new zeal for its prosecution was
every where created, and the missionary enterprise, instead of
being regarded with doubt and misgiving, as it had been by
many even among Christians, began to be understood in its
higher relations to all the hopes of man, and to be contemplated
in its true grandeur and its ennobling moral dignity.
In the spring of 1823, the health of Mrs. Judson, though but
partially restored, was yet so far established, as, in her own
judgment, to admit of her returning to Rangoon. Accordingly,
though quite contrary to the advice, and even the urgent solicita-
tions of her friends, she prepared again to take leave of her
native land and hasten back to the distant shore which she had
so reluctantly left. At the meeting of the Convention, in May of
that year, Mr. Jonathan Wade of New York, and Mr. George
D. Boardman, then a tutor in Waterville College, Maine, had
offered themselves as missionaries to the East. Mr. Wade was
soon after regularly appointed by the Board, and with his
wife was directed to take passage for Calcutta in the ship with
Mrs. Judson. They sailed from Boston on the 22d of June,
amidst the most affecting demonstrations of personal affection
and of Christian sympathy. They bore with them a letter to the
emperor of Burmah, and a valuable present from the Conven
* See an article in the London Quarterly Review, Vol. xxxHI.
Events AT RANGooN. 59
tion, such as was thought to be fitted to excite the interest of
his Burman majesty and to conciliate his favor towards the mis-
sionaries. They arrived at Calcutta in the following October,
and at Rangoon on the 5th of December. Thus, after an
absence of two years and three months, was Mrs. Judson re-
stored to her husband and to the mission, with health and spirits
reinvigorated, with a reinforcement of additional fellow-laborers,
and with the happy consciousness that she had been enabled to
awaken a deeper interest for the heathen in the minds of multi-
tudes of Christians both in England and America.
From this brief episode in our narrative, let us return and
trace the fortunes of the mission at Rangoon, during the absence
of Mrs. Judson in America. They had been marked, as will
appear, by events of unusual interest and importance. -
In the autumn of 1821, while Mr. Judson was prosecuting
the labors of the mission alone, a complaint was brought to the
viceroy against the teacher Moung Shwa-Gnong, by several
of the leading men of the village to which he belonged, who
had conspired against him, for being an avowed enemy of
Buddhism. So determined were his enemies, that he deemed
it prudent to withdraw himself for a time from Rangoon, espe-
cially as the viceroy had declared that, if the complaints were
true, he was worthy of death. The priests and officers of the
government were also excited to new vigilance with respect to
the Burman converts, and Mr. Judson found himself soon oblig-
ed to close the zayat, and to spspend his public preaching on
the Sabbath. The native Christians came privately to the
mission house for instruction and sympathy, but the inquirers
withdrew altogether. Soon after these events, and before the
mission had recovered from their injurious influence, the solitary
condition of Mr. Judson was relieved by the arrival of Rev.
Jonathan Price, M.D. and Mrs. Price, who had been appointed
missionaries to Burmah in May, 1821, and soon after sailed
for Calcutta. They reached Rangoon, December 13th, of the
same year, and in the course of the following month Mr. and
Mrs. Hough also returned from Serampore, bringing with them
60 MISSIONS IN BURMAEI.
the printing press, whose absence had occasioned no small delay
and inconvenience to the labors of Mr. Judson. --
Thus reinforced by the arrival of additional missionaries,
and encouraged by the cessation of opposition, and by the re-
turn of the native converts bringing with them new inquirers,
Mr. Judson again opened the zayat and resumed his public
teachings. He soon had the happiness of baptizing several
more native converts on the profession of their faith, who made
the native members of the church seventeen, besides one who
had died. The fact that Dr. Price was a physician and pos-
sessed of medical skill being reported to the golden ears, he was
soon summoned to Ava by order of the king. It was of course
necessary that Mr. Judson should accompany him, as he was
yet ignorant alike of the language of the country and the
customs of the court. Mr. Judson also hoped to make this
summons to the capital an occasion of introducing the new re-
ligion again to the notice of the monarch and his courtiers. Ac-
cordingly the work of translation, which had lately been prose-
cuted with great assiduity, was reluctantly abandoned, and on the
28th of August the missionaries embarked for Ava, where they
arrived after a month's passage up the Irrawaddy, and presented
themselves at the palace of the king.
At the first interview his majesty inquired particularly of
Dr. Price concerning his medical skill, but took no notice of
Mr. Judson. He was, however, recognized by the minister,
Moung Zah, whom he had known on his former visit to the cap-
ital, and by him was privately encouraged to remain at Ava.
At subsequent visits to the palace, however, the attention of
the king was attracted to Mr. Judson, and he put many curious
questions respecting his character and his labors at Rangoon.
On his first noticing him, after having conversed with Dr. Price,
he entered into the following conversation: “And you in
black, what are you?—a medical man too?” “Not a medical
man, but a teacher of religion, your majesty.” After making
several inquiries about the new religion, “he then,” says Mr.
Judson, “put the alarming question whether any had embraced
MESSRS. JUDSON AND PRICE AT AVA. 61
it. I evaded by saying, ‘Not here.” He persisted, “Are there
any in Rangoon?’ ‘There are a few.’ ‘Are they foreign-
ers?’ I trembled for the consequence of an answer which
might involve the little church in ruin; but the truth must be
sacrificed or the consequences hazarded. I therefore replied,
“There are some foreigners, and some Burmans.’ He remain-
ed silent for a few moments, but presently showed that he was
not displeased, by asking a great variety of questions on religion
and geography and astronomy, some of which were answered
in such a satisfactory manner as to occasion a general expres-
sion of approbation in all the court present.” On another oc-
casion the king again inquired about the Burmans who had
embraced the Christian religion. “Are they real Burmans ?
Do they dress like other Burmans ?” “I had occasion to re-
mark,” says Mr. Judson, “that I preached every Sunday.
‘What! in Burman?’ ‘Yes,’ ‘Let us hear how you
preach l’ I hesitated. An atwenwoon repeated the order.
I began with a form of worship which first ascribes glory to
God, and then declares the commands of the law and the gospel;
after which, I stopped. ‘Go on,’ said another atwenwoon.
The whole court was profoundly silent. I proceeded with a
few sentences declarative of the perfections of God, when his
majesty's curiosity was satisfied, and he interrupted me.” In a
subsequent conversation, after answering some questions of the
king about Gaudama, one of the atwenwoons, who had not
hitherto been friendly to Mr. Judson, expressed his approbation
of what he had said, and proceeded to relate a conversation
which he himself had held with the American teacher about
God and Christ, and the doctrines of the gospel. Moung Zah
also, encouraged by the example of his associate, began to
speak of God before his majesty, and said, “Nearly all the
world, your majesty, believe in an eternal God; all except
Burmah and Siam — these little spots!” *
Mr. Judson also held frequent conversations with several of
the princes and princesses of the court, who were members of
the royal family, in the course of which they often gave him an
62 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
opportunity to speak of his religion, —to invite to it their per-
sonal attention, and also to invoke for it the toleration of the
government. At length, after repeated applications and delays,
he procured a lot of land, with the emperor's assent, situated on
the bank of the river, just without the walls of the city, and
built upon it a small house, – Dr. Price in the mean time hav-
ing been quartered by the emperor in a house near the palace.
When Mr. Judson called on the proper officer for the purpose
of paying for the land which he had purchased, the officer re-
fused the money which was offered, saying: “Understand, teach-
er, that we do not give you the entire owning of this ground.
We take no recompense, lest it become American territory.
We give it to you for your present residence only, and when you
go away we shall take it again.” He was very particular in his
wording of the writing of conveyance, and often called upon
those around him to witness that the land did not become the
property of the American teacher, evidently having in his mind
an apprehension that if it should, the American government
might at length establish its jurisdiction there, as the English
had done in Bengal.
The missionaries had now spent several months at the Bur-
man court. Dr. Price was in high favor with the monarch on
account of his medical skill, while Mr. Judson had become
familiarly acquainted with many of the high officers of the gov-
ernment, and had often been noticed with marked curiosity and
attention by the emperor himself. It was now, however, no
longer necessary that he should remain at the capital, and he
began to make preparations for returning to Rangoon in order
to meet Mrs. Judson, who might soon be expected back from
America. In taking leave of the members of the government,
he was invited by more than one of them to return to Ava
and settle there, and Prince M., a half brother of the king,
specially pressed him to hasten back, and bring with him all the
Christian Scriptures, and translate them into Burman; “for,”
added he, “I wish to read them all.” On going to take leave
of the king, his majesty asked him why he wished to go away,
ARRIVAL OF MISSIONARIES. 63
and expressed his fear that the other teacher, Dr. Price, would
be lonely and unhappy. On being informed that he was going
only for a short time to bring his wife, the female teacher, and
his goods, the king looked at him and said, “Will you then
come again? When you come again is it your intention to re-
main permanently, or will you go back and forth as foreigners
commonly do?” And on being answered that he intended to
remain permanently, his majesty expressed his approbation.
It was early in February, 1823, when Mr. Judson reached
Rangoon, after a passage of seven days from Ava. He found
that the little church had been again scattered by the extortions
and persecutions of the government, under a new viceroy, who
had succeeded the tolerant Mya-day-men. One of its members,
a female of great excellence of character and of steadfast Chris-
tian faith, had died during his absence, and, save those in his
own immediate employ, the others had all removed from Ran-
goon. Many of them, however, soon gathered around their
teacher, and he immediately resumed such public labors as he
deemed consistent with the safety of the mission, and devoted
his time especially to completing the translation of the New
Testament, and preparing an epitome of the Old Testament,
which should contain a complete though brief summary of Scrip-
ture history from the Creation to the coming of Christ, together
with an abstract of the leading prophecies relating to the Mes-
siah. Both of them were completed during the following sum-
mer, and were received with the utmost eagerness by the native
Christians, even before they could be printed by Mr. Hough, who
had left a portion of the Burman types at Bengal. In this man-
ner passed away the months at Rangoon till the arrival of Mrs.
Judson and her fellow passengers, Mr. and Mrs. Wade, which
took place, as we have already stated, in December, 1823.
In this new condition of the mission, it was arranged that Mr.
Hough and Mr. Wade, with their families, should remain at
Rangoon, and that Mr. and Mrs. Judson should proceed imme-
diately to Ava, and attempt to form a station there, beneath the
favorable auspices which seemed to be secured by the medical
64 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
reputation of Dr. Price. During the absence of Mr. Judson
from Ava, the king had often spoken of him, and inquired why
he delayed his return so long; and the queen had also express-
ed a strong desire to see Mrs. Judson in her foreign dress.
Their passage up the Irrawaddy was tedious and uncomfortable,
being six weeks in length. They would often leave their boat
and walk along the banks of the river, through villages in which
a foreign female was a sight never before beheld. They were
followed by crowds who were eager to witness the unwonted
spectacle, yet in no case did they receive the slightest insult or
rudeness. On their arrival at the golden city, they were soon
able to prepare for themselves a residence, and to commence
their missionary labors beneath the very eye of the monarch.
Mr. Judson preached on the Sabbath, and held worship in the
Burman language every evening at his own house, while Mrs.
Judson opened a school for the instruction of such Burman girls
as she could induce to join it. The king and queen were at
this time absent from the capital, and all foreigners were re-
garded with suspicion and treated with coolness by the minis-
ters of state, on account of the war with the English government
in India with which the country was now threatened. This,
however, did not prevent some of their former friends from re-
viving their previous acquaintance with them, and Mrs. Judson,
immediately on her arrival, was visited and welcomed to the
capital by the lady of the former viceroy of Rangoon — now a
widow, living in retirement from the court, having lost by the
death of her husband all the power and rank she had before
possessed.
In a few months after the return of the missionaries to Ava,
the government was formally removed, with great pomp and
ceremony, to that city. The king and the royal family, who for
two years had been living at Ava, in order to superintend the
erection of a new palace, about the time of Mr. Judson's return
went back to Amarapura, for the purpose of making the transfer
of the golden presence from one city to the other as striking
and impressive as possible. The ceremonial was one of unusual
IMPERIAL GOVERNMENT REMOVED TO AVA. 65
splendor and magnificence, and presented a scene well cal-
culated to fill the imagination with the sublimest conceptions
of oriental grandeur and wealth. There were the great officers
of state, the woongyees and atWenwoons, in their robes of of.
fice, the Saupwars of conquered provinces, with their troops
of attendants, heroes who had been distinguished in the wars
of the empire, and people of every degree, to the number of
hundreds of thousands, who had assembled to do homage to the
stern monarch of the land and sea, the master of life and death,
and lord of the celestial elephant. Shouts and acclamations
rent the air as the imperial retinue approached the gates of the
Golden City. At the head of the procession, and the most con-
spicuous and beautiful object which it presented, came the white
elephant, with his numerous suite, an object of Burman ado-
ration, covered with jewels and ornaments of gold; next were
seen the king and queen in plain attire, the only persons in
all the throng who appeared unadorned; following these were
the great councillors, both public and private, and the viceroys
of provinces and cities, who had come with their retinues from
the remotest confines of the empire to offer fealty to the mon-
arch, and to swell the grandeur of the festival.
Amidst this splendid array of all the insignia of power and
majesty, the king took possession of the new palace, and re-
established the imperial government in its ancient seat at Ava.
The missionaries, with a few European residents at the capital,
gazed with wonder upon this unwonted display of grotesque
magnificence, made to gratify the pride of the Burman monarch.
They were not noticed by the royal pair, and, although Mr. Jud-
son occasionally visited the palace, yet no inquiry was ever made
for the female teacher whom the queen had formerly expressed
her desire to see in her foreign dress. It was not long before
an order was issued that no European should enter the palace,
and in a few days afterwards the tidings of the approaching
war, which had hitherto been brought only in uncertain rumors,
were fully confirmed by intelligence that an English fleet had
arrived in the river, and that Rangoon had already fallen into
their hands. 7 * -
66 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
C H A P T E R W III.
WAR between the Burmans and the English. — Capture of Rangoon. — Perils of
Messrs. Hough and Wade, and their Families. – Advance of the English to-
wards Ava. –Imprisonment of the Missionaries there. — Their removal to
Oung-pen-la. — Their protracted Sufferings. – Heroic Services of Mrs. Jud-
son. — Liberation of the Missionaries.—Their Agency in Negotiations with
the English.-- Reception of Mr. and Mrs. Judson by Sir Archibald Campbell.
—Their return to Rangoon. — The Mission removed to Amherst. — Mr.
Judson joins the English Embassy to Ava. – Death of Mrs. Judson.
THE war which now broke out between the Burman govern-
ment and that of the English in Bengal, forms an important
era in the history of the mission. Its first effect was to put an end
to the labors of the missionaries, and to involve them in unspeak-
ble sufferings; yet, in accordance with a mysterious though be-
neficent law of human affairs, its ultimate issues have undoubt-
edly proved favorable, not only to the interests of our own par-
ticular mission, but also to the further extension of Christian
civilization among the thickly-peopled countries of eastern India.
The war had its origin in feuds which had long existed on the
frontiers of Chittagong. They were such as commonly spring
up along the borders of opposite and neighboring jurisdictions,
but were rendered unusually violent among the Burmans by
their jealousy of the wide extension of British power. Some
criminals and disaffected persons had escaped from the Burman
territory to that of Chittagong, where, as was alleged, they
were protected by the English government. The king, exas-
perated by the troubles which he thus experienced, and count-
ing on the rising of several of the neighboring provinces that
wished to throw off the British yoke, raised an army of thirty
thousand men, under Bandula, his greatest warrior, and was
preparing to make war on the governor-general, whom he felt
sure of bringing speedily to the terms he desired. In this state
of affairs the English determined to anticipate the Burman in-
vasion, and to avail themselves of the advantage of beginning
the war, which it was thought could now no longer be averted.
CAPTURE OF RAN GOON, 67
On the 10th of May, 1824, the English transports suddenly
appeared in Rangoon river and landed the forces of the gov-
ernor-general, consisting of European troops and sepoys, under
the command of Sir Archibald Campbell. Rangoon fell an
easy and almost unresisting prey to their attack, and the intelli-
gence of its fall was the first intimation of the commencement of
hostilities that reached the court at Ava. They were surprised
but not alarmed. They regarded it as a sudden incursion which
might easily be repelled, and were only apprehensive that the
English would escape from the river before the war boats
could reach them, and chastise them as they deserved. Army
after army was raised and marched from the capital, with all
the demonstrations of foolish confidence and absurd conceit
which belong to the movements of barbarian warriors. One of
the generals bore with him golden fetters, with which he was to
chain the governor of India; and another was commissioned by
persons connected with the government to bring them home
some white strangers, to row their boats or to manage their
horses—so confident were the officers of state of the triumph of
the Burman arms.” The armies often fought bravely, and
heroically vindicated the claim of their countrymen to be con-
sideréd superior to the other races of India; but they were
defeated in nearly every encouriter in which they were engaged.
The English after the capture of Rangoon were at first greatly
embarrassed by the incompleteness of their preparations for
prosecuting the war, and suffered exceedingly from the want of
suitable provisions, and from diseases incident to the season.
After the lapse of nearly a year, during which they had been
*The Burmans at this time had never come into collision with the English,
—they had the most extravagant ideas of their own invincibility, and imag-
ined that none but inferior races, like the effeminate Hindoos, would ever re-
main subject to the British power. The king of Burmah is taught to consider
himself the greatest potentate of the earth. He told Captain Canning, an Eng-
lish envoy to Ava in 1810, that if the king of Great Britain had but sent for
his assistance in the war with Napoleon, he would very soon have placed all
France at his disposal. The humiliation of this absurd national pride may .
have been one of the best results of the Burmese war.
68 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
often annoyed by Burman valor, the army proceeded up the
Irrawaddy, and slowly but steadily pushed their advance to-
wards the imperial capital. They stormed and captured town
after town along the banks of the river, while Sir Archibald
Campbell, at every step of their progress, offered proposals for
peace, which were uniformly rejected with disdain by the Bur-
man monarch. At Pugan, one of the oldest and most sacred
cities of the empire, another numerous army was destroyed, and
scarcely a stronghold now remained between the capital and the
advancing columns of the triumphaht English. The court and
the city of Ava were in consternation at the approach of an
enemy that had captured the strongest fortresses, and routed
and slain the bravest and most renowned generals of the em-
pire. The king now determined to accept the terms which the
English general had often proposed, and a treaty of peace was
concluded at Yandabo, the place at which the army was en-
camped. By the terms of this treaty the provinces of Arracan,
Maulmain, Tavoy, and Mergui, together with a part of Marta-
ban, were to be ceded to the English, and 5,000,000 of rupees”
were to be paid by the Burmans towards defraying the expenses
of the war. The treaty was signed on the 24th of February,
1826, and early in March, nearly two years after the commence-
ment of hostilities, the English army was withdrawn from the
advanced posts which it had occupied, and proceeded down the
river to Rangoon. -
From this brief outline of the public events of the Burman
war, let us now turn to contemplate the changes which they
wrought in the fortunes of the mission, and the scenes of suffer-
ing and peril into which they introduced the missionaries. -
At the time when the sudden approach of the English fleet
was reported at Rangoon, Messrs. Hough and Wade, with their
families, were the occupants of the mission house at that station.
In the universal consternation which was created by this intelli-
gence, the government issued an order that all persons in Ran-
* More than $2,400,000.
PERILS OF MESSRS. HOUGH AND WADE. 69
goon wearing a hat should be immediately arrested. Messrs.
Hough and Wade were seized, with other European residents
of the town, and hurried away to the prison, where they were
chained together and placed in close confinement under the
charge of armed keepers. On the following morning the fleet
had arrived just below Rangoon, and the keepers were ordered
to put them to death so soon as the first gun should be fired
upon the town. But no sooner did the firing commence than,
fortunately for the prisoners, the Burman guard, smitten with
fear, hid themselves in a corner of the prison, and, as the shot
fell thick and fast around them, they broke open the doors and
precipitately fled. Soon, however, the firing from the ships
ceased, and when the prisoners were hoping to hear the ap-
proach of the English to liberate them, the prison was entered
by fifty Burmans, who stripped the wretched captives of most
of their clothes, bound them tight with cords, and hurried them
at the point of their spears to a place where criminals were tried
and executed. Here their bodies were bent forward, and the
executioner, who, with his spotted face, stood ready at hand,
was ordered to behead them. -
Mr. Hough, being the only one among them who was entirely
familiar with the language, alone understood the order, and be-
sought the yahwoon to stay the execution, and send him on
board the frigate to entreat the English commander to cease
firing upon the town. The petition was seconded by the lin-
guists of the court, and the yahwoon assented, at the same time
declaring that if the English fired again there should be no
reprieve. Scarcely had he uttered this threat when several
shot fell very near the place where they were assembled. The
whole company, the yahwoon with the rest, fled as rapidly as
possible, taking care however to drive the prisoners before them,
the distance of a mile and a half from the town, where they
halted, and the petition of Mr. Hough was renewed. He was
at length sent on board the frigate that bore the English flag,
amid the most fearful threatenings to himself and the others
in case he should not succeed. The remaining prisoners were
70 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
confined in a strong building near the great pagoda, where they
spent the night, loaded with irons, and in the utmost anxiety
lest both they, and their families in Rangoon, might at any mo-
ment fall victims to the cruel vengeance of the Burman officers.
On the following day, the third after their arrest, the English
landed and liberated them from their painful and perilous con-
finement.
During this period of anxiety and alarm, the ladies of the
mission, deprived of their protectors, though not placed under
formal arrest, were exposed to the cruel persecutions of their
enemies. Most of the Burman converts, on the arrest of the
teachers, fled with their families to the jungle, but Moung Shwa-
ba remained at the mission house till Mrs. Hough and Mrs.
Wade were obliged to seek for safety in some less exposed situ-
ation. They disguised themselves as Burmans, and after being
twice driven by a Portuguese priest from the doors of the chapel
and the house in which they sought an asylum, they concealed
themselves in a bamboo shed, where they remained in safety,
though constantly sought for by the Burman rabble, and expo-
sed to the cannon balls which were falling all around them, till
they were rescued by the English officers and placed under
the protection of their friends.
After the taking of Rangoon, the place was completely de-
serted by the Burmans; the market was destroyed, and suitable
provisions could not be obtained at any price. The rainy sea-
son was just commencing, and a violent fever broke out among
the troops, and, before they had advanced a step into the
country, hurried thousands of them into the grave. It also
attacked Mr. and Mrs. Wade, but in a less malignant form. So
soon as they had sufficiently recovered from its power, they
embarked with Mr. and Mrs. Hough for Calcutta, where they
all remained during the continuance of the war, engaged in the
study of the language and in the publication of a Burman dic-
tionary, compiled from the collections of Burman words which
had been made by Messrs. Judson and Colman, and by Dr
Carey and his associates at Serampore. r
ARREST OF MESSRS, JUDSON AND PRICE. 71
The intelligence of the fall of Rangoon was communicated to
the imperial court at Ava on the 23d of May, about two weeks
after it had taken place. All was confusion and excitement at
the capital. An army of ten thousand men was immediately
raised and despatched to chastise the invaders and drive them
from the country, and the government began to inquire into the
cause of this so sudden arrival of the white strangers. The
idea that there were spies in the country did not fail to suggest
itself to the minds of the jealous Burman officers, and three
English gentlemen, who were residents at the capital, were im-
mediately placed under arrest. These gentlemen did not con-
ceal the fact that they were aware of the intended invasion of
the English, and they were accordingly detained in confinement,
which was made more rigorous as the hostile army advanced fur-
ther into the country. Long before the commencement of hostil-
ities, the missionaries had taken pains to assure the Burman min-
isters of state that they were Americans, and not subjects of the
English king, as they were very generally thought to be, in con-
sequence of the identity of their language and modes of life.”
But the Burmans either did not believe, or they refused to allow
the discrimination, but visited upon them the full vengeance of
their jealous and distrustful spirits. It was ascertained that one
of the English gentlemen had an account with the missionaries,
and was in the habit of paying them sums of money. The offi-
cers, knowing nothing of our system of banking and exchange,
concluded it could only be for services rendered the English,
and reported the fact to the king, who, in an angry tone, ordered
that the two foreign teachers should also be arrested.
It was on the 8th of June, 1824, that a company of Burmans,
* Mr. Judson, in a deposition made to Mr. Crawfurd, envoy from the gov-
ernor general of India to the court of Ava, in 1816, says, “The Burmese are
of opinion that all white men, except the French, are subjects of the king
of England. Since the overthrow of the emperor Napoleon, they even be-
lieve that France has become a part of England's dominions.” “The Ameri-
cans,” he adds, “were peculiarly liable to be confounded with the English,
from speaking the same language.” – Crawfurd's Journal of the Embassy, vol.
2, p. 87.
72 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
*
headed by an officer, and attended by a “spotted-faced son of the
prison,” came to the mission house, and, in the presence of Mrs.
Judson, seized her husband and Dr. Price, and after binding
them tight with cords, drove them away to the court house.
From this place they were hurried, by order of the king, with-
out examination, to a loathsome dungeon, known as “the death
prison,” where along with the other foreigners they were con-
fined, each loaded with three pairs of fetters and fastened to a
long pole, so as to be incapable of moving. Meanwhile, Mrs.
Judson was shut up in her house, deprived of her furniture and
of most of her articles of property, and watched for several days
by an unfeeling guard, to whose rapacious extortions and brutal
annoyances she was constantly exposed, without being able to
make any exertion for the liberation of the prisoners, or the
mitigation of their cruel sentence. She, however, at length suc-
ceeded in addressing a petition to the governor of the city, who
had the prisoners in charge. By a present of one hundred dol-
lars to his subordinate officer, their condition was somewhat
meliorated, and by the unwearied perseverance of Mrs. Judson,
and her affecting appeals to the sympathies of the governor, he
was induced to grant her occasional permission to go to the
prison, and at length to build for herself a bamboo shed in the
prison yard, where she took up her abode, in order that she
might prepare food for the prisoners, and otherwise minister to
their necessities.
At the end of nine months, they were suddenly removed
from Ava to Amarapura, and thence to a wretched place several
miles beyond, called Oung-pen-la, where it was arranged that
they should be put to death in the presence of the pakah-woon,
as a kind of sacrifice in honor of his taking command of a new
* In Burmah, the executioners are a class by themselves, hated and shun-
ned by all others. They are reprieved felons, bound in service to the prisons,
and marked by a tattooed circle on their cheeks, and often by the name of
their crime tattooed on their breasts. – Malcom's Travels in South Eastern In-
dia, vol. 1, p. 212.
The one here referred to was marked with the Burman word “Lu that,' or
*Man-killer.” . . .
IMPRISONMENT AT OUNG-PEN-L.A. 73
army of fifty thousand men about to march against the English.
This sanguinary chief had been raised from a low condition to
the rank of woongyee ; but in the height of his power, just as
he was about to march at the head of the army he had mustered,
he fell into disgrace, was charged with treason, and executed at
an hour's notice, with the unqualified approbation of all classes
of people at Ava. His timely execution saved the missionaries
from the fate which hung over them, and they were left uncared
for in the miserable cells of Oung-pen-la, till the near approach
of the English to the capital induced the king to send for Mr.
Judson, to accompany the embassy that was about to start for
the English camp, for the purpose of averting the destruction
that now threatened the Golden City.
During all this gloomy period of a year and a half Mrs. Judson
followed them from prison to prison, beneath the darkness of
night and the burning sun of noon-day, bearing in her arms her
infant daughter, — the child of sorrow and misfortune, who was
born after the imprisonment of its father, — procuring for them
food which Burman policy never supplies to prisoners, and
perpetually interceding for them with their successive keepers,
with the governor of the city, with the kinsmen of the monarch,
and the members of the royal household. More than once the
queen's brother gave orders that they should be privately put
to death; but such was the influence which Mrs. Judson pos-
sessed over the mind of the governor, that he evaded the order
each time it was given, and assured her that for her sake he
would not execute her husband, even though he was obliged
to execute all the others. And when at last they were to be
taken from his jurisdiction and driven to the horrid prison-house
of Oung-pen-la, at the command of the pakah-woon, the old
man humanely summoned Mrs. Judson from the prison where
he had permitted her to go and sit with her husband, in order
that she might be spared the pangs of a separation which he
had not the power to prevent. Her own pen has traced, in lines
that will never be forgotten by those who read them, the affect-
ing history of the dismal days and nights of her husband's
8
74 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
captivity. We follow her alike with admiration and the deepest
sympathy as she takes her solitary way from Ava, at first in a
boat upon the river and then in a Burman cart, in search of the
unknown place to which the prisoners have been carried. At
length, overcome with fatigue, with exposure, and the bitter
pangs of hope deferred, we see her in a comfortless cabin, pros-
trate with disease and brought to the very gates of death, –
while her infant is carried about the village by its father in the
hours of his occasional liberation, to be nourished by such Bur-
man mothers as might have compassion on its helpless necessities.
Such is a single scene from this melancholy record of mis-
sionary suffering. History has not recorded, poetry itself has
seldom portrayed, a more affecting exhibition of Christian forti-
tude, of female heroism, and all the noble and generous qualities
which constitute the dignity and glory of woman. In the midst
of sickness and danger, and every calamity which can crush
the human heart, she presented a character equal to the sternest
trial, and an address and a fertility of resources which gave her
an ascendency over the minds of her most cruel enemies, and
alone saved the missionaries and their fellow captives from the
terrible doom which constantly awaited them. Day after day
and amid the lonely hours of night was she employed in concili-
ating the favor of their keepers, and in devising plans for their
release, or the alleviation of their captivity. Sometimes, she
confesses, her thoughts would wander for a brief interval to
America and the beloved friends of her better days; “but for
nearly a year and a half, so entirely engrossed was every thought
with present scenes and sufferings, that she seldom reflected on
a single occurrence of her former life, or recollected that she
had a friend in existence out of Ava.”
The negotiations which had been commenced in the winter
of 1826 were conducted, from beginning to end, by the aid of
Mr. Judson and Dr. Price, though they were often interrupted
or entirely broken off by the caprice and jealousy of the Bur-
man monarch and his officers. The king placed no confidence
in the English, and, at several stages of their advance, sent com-
LIBERATION OF THE MISSIONARIES. 75
missioners to induce the general, Sir Archibald Campbell, to
abate his demands and otherwise to alter the terms which he had
uniformly proposed as the basis of peace. At length, to the
utmost disappointment and dismay of the Burmans, their last
army, which had been raised with many protestations of certain
victory, was totally routed at Pugan, a city endeared to the
people by its ancient shrines, and deemed impregnable by
its strong fortifications; and the defeated general, who fled to
Ava, was driven in disgrace from the presence of his despotic
master, and ordered to be immediately put to death. The
English army, which had steadily advanced almost without re-
pulse from the capture of Rangoon, was now encamped at
Yandabo, within forty miles of Ava, and was already threaten-
ing the capital itself. The king was convinced that he could
no longer escape the humiliating necessity of paying the entire
sum which had been demanded, and with ill-disguised mortifi-
cation he hastened to send forward the first instalment under
cover of night, in order to conceal as far as possible its payment
from the people. Mr. Judson and Dr. Price, who had been re-
peatedly sent to the camp of the English commander to ask a
modification of the terms which he demanded, were now com- .
pelled to go again with the officers who bore the money. The
European prisoners were all released by the conditions of the
treaty, and the cruel incarceration of the missionaries was thus
brought to a close. So important were the services which they
had rendered the government in negotiating the peace, that
they were earnestly invited to remain at the capital, and were
assured that they should be promoted and become great men.
Dr. Price was subsequently induced to accept the proposals of
the king; but Mr. and Mrs. Judson determined without delay
to leave the place which, before all others on earth, might well
seem to them the chosen abode of despotism and cruelty, and
repair to the English camp, to which they had been kindly in-
vited by Sir Archibald Campbell.
Mrs. Judson, to whose touching letter to her brother, Dr.
Elnathan Judson, we are indebted for most of the foregoing
76 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
facts and views, thus records her departure from Ava, and her
obligations to the English commander: “It was on a cool,
moonlight evening in the month of March, that, with hearts
filled with gratitude to God, and overflowing with joy at our
prospects, we passed down the Irrawaddy, surrounded by six
or eight golden boats, and accompanied by all we had on earth.
We now, for the first time for more than a year and a half, felt
that we were free, and no longer subject to the oppressive yoke
of the Burmese. And with what sensations of delight, on the
next morning, did I behold the masts of the steamboat, - the
sure presage of being within the bounds of civilized lifel . . .
We feel that our obligations to General Campbell can never be
cancelled. Our final release from Ava, and our recovering all
the property that had there been taken, were owing entirely to his
efforts. His subsequent hospitality and kind attention to the
accommodations for our passage to Rangoon have left an indeli-
ble impression on our minds, and can never be forgotten.”
In the long absence of the missionaries the little flock of dis-
ciples at Rangoon had become widely scattered, as sheep with-
out a shepherd. Many had been driven by the tumults of the
times far into the jungles of the interior; some had died;
others met the missionaries as they descended the river, over-
joyed at their deliverance from captivity, and prepared to follow
them whithersoever they should go. Moung Shwa-ba, faithful
through every adversity, alone dwelt at the mission house, await-
ing the return of the teachers. On their arrival at Rangoon,
Mr. Judson accepted the invitation of Mr. Crawfurd, the com-
missioner of Lord Amherst, at that time governor-general of
India, to accompany him on a tour of observation to several of
the districts which, by the recent treaty, had been ceded to the
English government. They proceeded up the Salwen, or
Martaban river; and at a point on the eastern bank, not far
from its mouth, they fixed on the site for a town, which was
designed to be henceforth the capital of the English posses-
sions in Burmah. The spot received the name of Amherst, in
honor of the governor-general, and was set apart as the future
MR. JUDSON JOINS THE EMBASSY TO AVA. 77
seat of a civilized and Christian government, with appropriate
ceremonies, and with religious services which were conducted
by Mr. Judson. Here he determined to remove his family, and
to plant a new missionary station, where, beneath the broad
protection of the British flag, he and his coadjutors in the mis-
sion might preach the gospel and labor for the salvation of men,
unharmed by Burman power.
No sooner, however, had the mission become fairly established
at Amherst, than Mr. Judson was earnestly solicited to accom-
pany, as translator, the embassy which Mr. Crawfurd was di-
rected to undertake to the court of Ava, for the purpose of ne-
gotiating a commercial treaty with the government. He at first
declined the appointment, but on being assured by the commis-
Sioner that he would use his utmost endeavors to have inserted in
the treaty a clause for securing religious toleration — the great
object for which he had toiled so long—he at length decided to
accept the office and join the embassy, which it was thought
would require an absence of only four or five months from
the mission. Leaving Mrs. Judson and her infant daughter
quietly settled in the house of the civil superintendent at Am-
herst, he sailed for Rangoon on the 5th of July, and after
considerable delay proceeded again up the Irrawaddy to the
Burman capital. The manner in which the embassy W3.S re-
ceived at Ava, and the character of the negotiations, all singu-
larly illustrative of oriental life, together with an account of the
services of Mr. Judson, have been fully set forth in the jour-
mal of the embassy by the excellent commissioner, Mr. Crawfurd.
The Burman king, however, refused to grant any legal tolera-
tion to the religion of the strangers, choosing to confine himself,
in all the stipulations of the treaty, exclusively to the interests
and relations of commerce. The hope which had alone induced
Mr. Judson to accompany the embassy was thus entirely frus-
trated, and the disappointment was made the more painful by the
tedious delays which protracted his absence from the mission
far beyond his original anticipations.
It was while thus detained at Ava that he received the sad
8 # *
78 - MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
tidings of the death of Mrs. Judson. A remittent fever had
settled on her constitution, already enfeebled by suffering and
disease, and she died on the 24th of October, 1826, amid the
universal sorrow alike of the English residents at Amherst and
of the native Christians who had gathered around her at her
new home. So soon as he could release himself from his en-
gagements with the embassy, Mr. Judson returned to Rangoon
and hastened to Amherst, that he might again clasp in his em-
brace his now motherless babe, and glean some tidings of the
latest moments of his departed wife. He arrived at his desolate
home on the 24th of January, and found his daughter already.
fading with the disease that soon hurried her away to rest with
her mother. From the attendant physician he learned all that
could be known of Mrs. Judson's sickness, and received the as-
surance that she was faithfully cared for by those who watched
around her bed. The native Christians also related to him her
parting conversations, and the words of love and piety which she
directed them to repeat to the absent teacher. Mr. and Mrs.
Wade had already arrived at Amherst, and were continuing the
missionary school which Mrs. Judson had commenced; but the
mission was still shrouded in gloom, and its now solitary foun-
der, though inured to privation and suffering, was overwhelmed
with affliction. Humanity knows no keener anguish than that
of blighted and broken affections; and when Mr. Judson again
settled at Amherst, amid the memorials of ruined hopes and
joys, it is not strange that he entered with diminished interest
upon the work of the mission. “The life which made his own
life pleasant was at an end, and the gates of death seemed
closed upon his earthly prospects.”
Mrs. Judson was buried at Amherst, and beside her grave
sleeps her infant daughter, who survived her but a few weeks.
The spot is marked by an appropriate though humble memorial,
on which is inscribed the affecting story of those who sleep be-
neath. It will be rendered forever sacred to Christians in every
land by the memory of one in whom genius and heroism and
piety were combined with the highest graces both of person
and of character.
SEAT OF THE BOARD ESTABLISHED AT BosTon. 79
C H A PTE R IX.
SEAT of the Board established at Boston.—Rev. Dr. Staughton.—American
Sympathy for the Missionaries. – Condition of the Mission.— Death of Dr.
Price.-Arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Boardman. — Their settlement at Maul-
main. – Removal of the Mission to Maulmain. —Labors of the Missiona-
ries--Mr. and Mrs. Boardman remove to Tavoy.— Condition of the city.
-They become acquainted with the Karens.—Character of the Karen Race.
DURING the period embraced in the foregoing chapter, many
important changes had taken place in the domestic condition
of the Board of Managers of the Convention in the United
States, a few of which require a passing notice on account
of their connection with subsequent events. The seat of the
business transactions of the Board, with the residence of its ex-
ecutive officers, was at first at Philadelphia, but after the estab-
lishment of the Columbian College at Washington it was remov-
ed to that city, in order to allow the Rev. Dr. Staughton to hold
the office of President of the College, and at the same time per-
form his duties as Corresponding Secretary of the Board.
Many inconveniences, however, were experienced, especially in
the management of the foreign missions, in consequence of
the remoteness of Washington from the principal sea-ports of
the country. At the triennial meeting of the Convention in
1823, the charter which had been previously granted by the
legislature of Pennsylvania was formally adopted, and what
was before only a voluntary association became a corporate
body recognized by the laws of the land. In the following
year the Board, impressed with the embarrassments which at-
tended its present location and modes of transacting business,
resolved to transfer the management of the Burman Mission to
the care of an executive committee at Boston; and in 1826
Dr. Staughton resigned the office of secretary, and the seat of
the entire operations of the Board was fixed at that city. At
80 Missions IN BURMAH.
the same time Rev. Lucius Bolles, D. D. was appointed Corres-
ponding Secretary in the place of Dr. Staughton, and Hon.
Heman Lincoln was appointed Treasurer.
The resignation of Rev. Dr. Staughton withdrew from the
immediate management of the missions one of their earliest and
most efficient friends. Born in England, and there ordained
to the ministry of the gospel, he had been present at Kettering
in 1792, at the celebrated meeting of Baptist ministers, at which
was formed the “Society for Propagating the Gospel among
the Heathen,” and his name stands among the earliest of those
who signed its constitution and contributed to its support. In
the fraternal intercourse of his native land he breathed the spirit
which then animated the bosoms of Carey and Fuller, of Ry-
land and Pearce; and on coming to America he still cherished
the same generous and philanthropic views. He had participated
in the organization of the General Convention, and from its com-
mencement, in 1814, he had held the office of corresponding
secretary, in which, with a discreet and conciliatory spirit, he
had conducted the correspondence, shaped the counsels, and
superintended the concerns of the Board, while, with an elo-
quence that lent a charm to every subject on which he spoke,
he had advocated the claims of the missions among the churches
of every portion of the country. During almost the entire
period of his official connection with the Board, his services
were wholly gratuitous, and though often extending far beyond
the demands of official duty, they were performed with a
fidelity and self-sacrifice which have never been surpassed.
The early character of our missionary organization, and the
rapidity with which it conquered the prejudices and secured
the increasing coöperation of individuals and churches in every
State of the Union, are in a great degree to be ascribed to the
labor, the zeal, and the eloquence of this first corresponding
secretary of the Convention.
For more than two years the missionaries who had remained
in Burmah were cut off from all communication with their breth-
ren in America, or indeed with every part of the civilized world,
AMERICAN SYMPATHY FOR THE MISSIONARIES. 81
It was a period of the utmost anxiety and suspense to the friends
of the mission both in Europe and America. Month after
month passed slowly away, but brought no tidings of their fate,
and nothing but a strong faith in the protecting providence of
God prevented the members of the Board from abandoning all
hope of their safety. And when at length the clouds of war
were lifted from the horizon, and the news of their deliverance
from captivity was received in America, it produced a thrill of
gratitude and joy in all Christian hearts. The story of their
privations and sufferings was repeated from the pulpit and read
by the fireside, every where exciting the deepest sympathy.
The duty of reinforcing a missionary band whose members had
suffered so much from heathen cruelty was strongly felt among
all the churches, and a desire to engage in the sacred work
was enkindled in the minds of several young men who were
preparing for the ministry of the gospel. Some of these soon
afterwards offered themselves to the Board and were appointed
missionaries. The enterprise began to assume a new aspect;
new fields of missionary exertion were opened, and new facilities
were presented for preaching the gospel among the people of
Burmah.
By the terms of the treaty which had been ratified between
the English government and the Burman, a considerable territo-
ry was ceded to the English as an indemnity for the expenses
of the war. As the Burman monarch had refused to add to the
stipulations of the treaty any guaranty for the toleration of
Christianity among his own subjects, it was decided by the mis-
sionaries to confine their labors for the present at least, to the
districts which had been ceded to the English. Accordingly
Mr. and Mrs. Wade had already established themselves at Am-
herst, where they were now joined by Mr. Judson. Dr. Price,
who had accepted the proposal of the king to remain in his service
as a physician, returned to Ava, where he established a school
for the education of the sons of several families connected with
the court. He gathered around him a large number of the young
men of rank in the capital, and began to teach them the rudi-
82 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
ments of science, and at the same time to impart to them the
truths of religion. He also lectured in public before the high-
est officers of the government on the leading principles of
astronomy, and of such other sciences as would have a tendency
gradually to undermine their faith in the dogmas of Buddhism;
for these are as contradictory to the principles of true science
as they are to the teachings of Christianity. His wide medi-
cal reputation and his connection with the court afforded oppor-
tunities for setting forth religious truth such as an ordinary
missionary could not have, and high hopes were entertained of
the results of his labors. But ere he had realized any of his
noble plans he fell a victim to a pulmonary consumption, and
died at his post at Ava in February, 1828.
Early in 1827, Mr. and Mrs. Boardman joined the mission-
aries at Amherst. They had received their appointment and
sailed from the United States two years before, but in conse-
quence of the troubled condition of Burman affairs had re-
mained in Calcutta, where they had been engaged in the study
of the language and in other preparations for their work as mis-
sionaries. Amherst, which had been originally selected as the
seat of the English government in Burmah, proved less conven-
ient than was anticipated, and Sir Archibald Campbell soon
decided to remove the head-quarters of the army to Maulmain,
a considerable town on the east bank of the Salwen river, about
twenty-five miles from its mouth. The former capital was
already beginning to decline, a large part of the population hav-
ing moved away with the troops, and it was decided by the mis-
sionaries that Mr. Boardman should commence his labors at
Maulmain, while Mr. and Mrs. Wade were to remain at Amherst,
and Mr. Judson was to divide his attention between the two
stations, as their respective interests might require. The Eng-
lish governor readily presented Mr. Boardman with a lot
of land about a mile from the military cantonment, sufficiently
large for the accommodation of the mission, on which he erect-
ed a small bamboo cottage, and began the work of preaching to
the natives. The hopes which this excellent missionary had
egu §§
#.
\B TDſ Jº
\
lºngº-Yº \
- Sº
TENASSIETRIMI
PROVINCES.
Scale of Miles
|- *
20 30 40
50 60
**-
l
| Tºi Tion.East from Greenwich
TY
M \ -
ſºi.
º:ź.Šs:\\Ma%
º§º* Thäl
Cº.
º__ s'
ng y £: wº N ºš *
sº - awº
wº SS S
Tº tha sº § āş §
** & L S ºf
jºS § H & ºr *
yºğ 93 sBootº S ºš
Sºś º RN AS *
\ *ś * Aºs 3.S
Ö ºs (\ 3. *º _r\S
|\ § º §
tº ºilº
ºs
º
i
:*
N
OO
:
§
ºR}
§
3
§
-*—
|13









MIR. BOARDMAN AT MAULMAIN. 85
cherished for many years seemed now to be fully realized. He
was dwelling in his own cottage, with his family around him,
and making known the truths of the gospel to the ignorant chil-
dren of a dark and cruel idolatry. His dwelling stood in a se-
cluded though beautiful spot on the bank of the river, directly
opposite the town of Martaban, now comparatively deserted and
the resort of banditti and marauders who prowled through the
neighboring villages and pillaged the houses of the inhabitants.
Mr. and Mrs. Boardman were scarcely settled in their new
home, when their house was visited in the night by a party of
these robbers. Their trunks were broken open and rifled of
their contents, and nearly every thing valuable in their posses-
sion was carried away. The thin walls of matting within which
they slept could afford no protection from the attacks either of
robbers or of wild beasts, and they were often startled from their
slumbers by the loud tumult of marauders seeking for plunder,
or the fierce growl of the tiger that seemed just ready to spring
into their very room. After the visit of the robbers, Sir Arch-
ibald Campbell sent them two sepoys to guard their premises,
and as new houses constantly sprang up around them, they
henceforth dwelt in comparative security. They were encour-
aged by the visits of many respectable natives who came, from
one motive or another, to inquire concerning the new religion.
In addition to his holding service on the Sabbath and conversing
as well as he was able with the visiters who came to his house,
Mr. Boardman opened a school for boys and Mrs. Boardman one
for girls; and to these they daily gave a portion of their atten-
tion. Most of the pupils in both of the schools were children
of the native Christians, some of whom had already learned
the leading facts of Scripture history from the teachings of their
parents. The schools however were intended to embrace such
others as could be induced to join them, and were regarded by
the missionaries as important means of improving the religious
condition of the people.
In November, 1827, the population of Amherst had become
so far reduced that the missionaries who were stationed there
9
86 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
determined on removing to Maulmain, which, though but two
years since an unoccupied jungle, was already the chief city of
the English provinces, and now numbered a population of nearly
twenty thousand. Many of the Christian families accompanied
them, and the school of Mrs. Wade was united with that of Mrs.
Boardman at Maulmain, and the two were placed under the
common charge of both these ladies, and were attended with the
most gratifying success. Two Zayats were soon after erected,
one for Mr. Wade, on the public road about half a mile south,
the other for Mr. Judson, in a populous part of the city about
two miles and a half north of the mission house. There the
two missionaries would sit through the livelong day, engaged in
such studies as they were able to prosecute, but especially con-
versing upon the doctrines of Christianity with the visiters who
soon came to them in great numbers. To these two places of
religious teaching it was soon determined to add a third, which
should be a kind of reading zayat, to which those who could
not read the Burman Scriptures might resort and hear them
read. To this zayat Moung Shwa-ba and Moung Ing, two of
the early converts at Rangoon, were assigned, and there they
alternately read the sacred Scriptures to all who would hear.
From the reports of the missionaries at this period, their la-
bors appear to have been arranged in several distinct classes,
each of which had a character and a sphere of its own. The
first and most important of these was the public worship of the
Sabbath. This was attended by the members of the mission, the
scholars, the native converts and inquirers, and such other per-
sons as might come in. The assembly would vary from twenty
to seventy or more. The second was the daily evening wor-
ship at the mission house. At this twenty persons were usually
present, being principally the scholars and the native Christians
who lived around the enclosure. . After worship, one of the
missionaries would spend the remainder of the evening in re-
ligious conversation with the men who chose to remain, while
the women would repair to the room of Mrs. Wade, to be in-
structed by her. The third was the schools of Mr. Boardman
STATION AT TAVOY. '87
for boys, and of Mrs. Boardman and Mrs. Wade for girls. The
fourth was attendance at the Zayats which had been estab-
lished, and to which the people were in the habit of . daily
resorting in great numbers, to converse with the missionaries,
or to hear the Scriptures read by the native assistants.
The permanent collection of so many of the missionaries at a
single station was not approved by the Board, or deemed de-
sirable by the missionaries themselves. In accordance there-
fore with instructions received from the Corresponding Secre-
tary, it was decided that Mr. and Mrs. Boardman should re-
move to Tavoy, the chief town of the province of Tavoy. It
is situated on a river of the same name, about thirty-five miles
from the sea, and one hundred and fifty miles south of Maul-
main, and had at this time a population of upwards of nine
thousand, of whom six thousand were Burmans.
The city itself is one of the leading strongholds of the reli-
gion of Gaudama, and when Mr. Boardman took up his abode
there in April, 1828, it was the residence of two hundred
priests. Temples and shrines dedicated to heathen worship
arose in every part of the city, and as the missionary wandered
through its regular and well-arranged streets in search of a
site whereon to build a zayat and a mission house, he could
find scarcely a spot that was not crowded with emblems of
idolatry. The largest pagoda of the city is about fifty feet in
diameter and one hundred and fifty feet in height; around it
are others of smaller dimensions, which, with the great pagoda,
are all gilt from the summit to the base, and surmounted with
an umbrella of iron, which is also loaded with gilding. In and
around the enclosure which contains these numerous pagodas and
shrines, stands an extensive and thickly-set grove of banyan
and other sacred trees, intersected with paved foot-paths which
lead to the various spots consecrated by the legends of religion.
Every object that the eye rests upon is covered with the marks
of idolatry, - with inscriptions and devices, the emblems of the
fabled deity whom the city worships.
On the days which are set apart for religious observances
38 MISSIONS IN BURMLA. H.
the grove is crowded with Burmans, who perform the rites of .
their superstition beneath the solemn shade of the banyan, while
the women festoon its branching trunks with lilies and flowers
of every hue, which they bring as offerings to propitiate the
divinity. Blending with the picturesque and sombre beauty of
the scene is heard the sound of innumerable bells, which are
hung around the spires of the larger pagodas, and which, when
moved by the slightest breeze, ring out their thousand varying
chimes, and seem to summon from afar the people of the vales
and the mountains to the observances of their ancient supersti-
tion. Tavoy alone contains nearly a thousand pagodas, besides
great numbers which crown the hill-tops and eminences in the
Surrounding country.
Thus given to idolatry, even beyond most other portions of
the empire, was the ancient city to which Mr. Boardman re-
moved, and where he now began to make known for the first
time the truths of Christianity. He was kindly received and
hospitably entertained by Major Burney, the Civil Superinten-
dent of the district, and, in ten days after his arrival, he had
taken a house in the city and was receiving visits from the in-
habitants. Early in July the zayat was completed, and he
commenced his labors in it with the most devoted zeal, and in
the full faith of the ultimate triumph of the doctrines he taught.
He looked out upon the strange magnificence of shrines and
temples that lay around him, - upon the monuments which had
perpetuated for many ages this idolatrous worship, — upon the
priests who taught it and the countless devotees who practiced
it; and as he prepared to strike the first blow at the hoary super-
stition which they all enshrined, he felt to the full the sublimity
and greatness of the undertaking. He stood alone, the herald
of truth, before this mighty array of ancient error, but he trusted
implicitly in the promises of revelation, and felt assured that
the day was at hand when all this empty adoration of Gaudama
would give place to the worship of the living God.
The priests of the city at first appeared to regard with indif-
ference, if not with favor, his humble and unostentatious en-
f
THE KARENS. - 89
deavors to instruct the people. He soon, however, learned that
they were arraying themselves against him, and cautioning those
within the reach of their influence not to listen to his teachings,
and on one occasion, soon after he opened the zayat, a priest,
who was passing by while he was talking with an intelligent
Burman, stopped to reprimand the affrighted man for listening
to his conversation. He was also sometimes visited by persons
of the higher classes in Tavoy, who in the presence of the
others would attempt with great subtlety to vindicate the doc-
trines of Gaudama, and blame the missionary for condemning
them before he had read all the sacred books in which they are
explained. But notwithstanding all these endeavors to frustrate
his labors, they did not fail to secure the attention and excite the
interest of the people, and many daily came to listen to his con-
versation, and to express to him the cravings, which even in
their darkened natures had not been wholly destroyed, for a
more satisfying faith than that which they had received. Two
of these soon avowed their adoption of Christianity, and, in the
course of the first summer of Mr. Boardman's residence at
Tavoy, were baptized and constituted the germ of a new Chris-
tian church. i
When Mr. Boardman removed to Tavoy, there was living in
his family a man of middle age who had been a slave, but
whose freedom had been purchased by the missionaries. When
he left Maulmain he was already a convert to Christianity, and
was baptized soon after he came to Tavoy. His name was .
Ko Thah-byu, one of the race of Karens; and he afterwards
for many years preached the gospel with singular zeal and suc-
cess to his despised and oppressed countrymen. His conver-
sion to Christianity was the means of attracting the attention
of the missionaries to the race to which he belonged, and of
founding a mission which, in point of interest and success, has
scarcely been equalled by any other of modern times. -
This singular people are widely scattered over the forests
and mountains of Burmah and Siam, and even of some parts of
China, and are called Karians, or Karens, a term in the language
9 * J f
90 * MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
> of the country, meaning wild men. They are entirely distinct
from the Burmans, by whom they are regarded as inferiors or
slaves, and though their origin cannot be clearly traced, yet,
from their features and language, they have been thought by
the missionaries to belong to the Caucasian variety of the hu-
man species. They have adopted many of the customs and
modes of life of the Burmans, but though inferior both in phys-
ical and intellectual strength, they are in general more indus-
trious, and less addicted to the vices of barbarian tribes. Their
condition however is a degraded one, and, addicted as they are
to intemperance, their character and habits of life in their na-
tive rudeness are often disgusting in the extreme.
They are every where cruelly oppressed by the Burmans
among whom they dwell; being compelled to cultivate the land,
to pay large tributes, and to perform every kind of servile la-
bor. Hence they lead a wandering life, and usually plant their
temporary villages in remote and inaccessible regions in order
to avoid the incursions of their oppressors, who often hunt
them out to kidnap and enslave them.
The Karens present the extraordinary phenomenon of a peo-
ple without any form of religion or established priesthood, yet
< believing in the existence of God and in a future state of rewards
and punishments, and cherishing a set of traditions of unusual
purity and interest, which they transmit from age to age in the
poetic legends of their race. These traditions contain many
doctrines strikingly similar to the truths of Scripture, which in
reality form the germs of a religion far superior in its influence
upon their moral natures, to that of their haughty oppressors.
The absence of a priesthood and of all the rites of superstition
undoubtedly renders them more immediately accessible to the
truths of the gospel, while the sanctions of virtue, the reverence
for the unseen deity and the anticipations of a future life which
are inculcated in their legends, tend to quicken and refine, to an
unusual degree, their sensibility to moral truth. Blended with
the traditions which they cherish are some singular prophecies,
relating to their future elevation as a people, and asserting that
LABORS OF KO THAH-BYU. 91
they are not always to be thus degraded, that a brighter day is
at length to dawn upon their race, and that white strangers from
across the sea would come to teach them “the words-of-God,”
and raise them from their degradation. Hence, when the mis-
sionaries first became known to them, they evinced the greatest
delight and welcomed them with the utmost enthusiasm. They
believed that the mysterious predictions of the “elders” of a
former generation were about to be fulfilled, and that the Karens
were now to be restored to a happiness and a dignity which
they had lost for ages. Singular as these predictions appear, we
shall perceive in the subsequent part of this narrative how im-
portant was the influence which they exerted over the character
of this simple people, and to how great an extent they were
literally fulfilled by the arrival and the labors of the mission-
aries.*
CHAPTER X.
LABors of Ko Thah-byu. — Superstitions of the Karens.—Their interest in
Christianity.— Mr. Boardman visits their Villages. – His agency in estab-
lishing Schools. – Insurrection in Tavoy. —Interruption of the Mission.—
Increasing interest of the Karens.— Arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Mason at Tavoy.
—Ill health of Mr. Boardman. — His last Visit to the Karens.—His Death.
MR. BoARDMAN soon after his settlement at Tavoy became
acquainted with several of the Karens in the city, who were
generally first brought to him by the disciple Ko Thah-byu— a
person who early evinced the most active zeal in the service of
the mission, and especially in enlisting the interests of his own
countrymen in the new religion. The intelligence that a white
teacher from across the sea had arrived at Tavoy was widely
circulated through the villages of the interior, and soon Karens
* Specimens of Karen traditions and prophecies have often been published
by the missionaries. Many are contained in Mr. Mason's Life of Ko Thah-byu.
92. MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
from the jungle, distant several days’ journey from the city, were
seen at the mission house, listening with curious interest to the
conversations of the missionary. He found them possessed of
a delicate sensibility and a spirit unusually teachable, and the
interest which they manifested in religious truth being so much
greater than that of the Burmans, soon made them the principal
objects of his attention and labor.
Among the illustrations of their singular susceptibility of mor-
alimpressions, Mr. Boardman relates an account of a book which
had been left at one of their villages twelve years before, by
a travelling Mussulman, who told them it was sacred, and
commanded them to worship it. The person to whose charge it
was delivered, though ignorant of its contents, wrapped it in
folds of muslin and enclosed it in a case, or basket, made of
reeds covered over with pitch. It was henceforth a deifiedbook,
and an object of religious veneration. The keeper of it became
a kind of sorcerer, and he and all the people of his village firmly
believed that a teacher would at length come and explain the
contents of the mysterious volume. When the arrival of Mr.
Boardman was reported in the village, the guardian of the dei-
fied book came with a chief of the tribe to the mission house, to
obtain his opinion respecting its character. The missionary, af.
ter hearing their story and speaking to them of the nature of
Christianity, proposed that they should return to their village
and bring him the book, that he might judge of its contents.
Accordingly, after several days, the sorcerer returned, attended
bº w numerous train and bringing with him the venerated vol-
ume. All seemed to anticipate Mr. Boardman's opinion as deci-
sive of its character, and were wrought to a high pitch of expec-
tation of its announcement. The sorcerer, at his request, stood
before him, with the basket containing the mysterious treasure
at his feet. He carefully unrolled the muslin and took from
its folds “an old, tattered, worn-out volume” which, creeping
forward, he reverently presented to the missionary. It proved
to be no other than the “Book of Common Prayer and the
Psalms,” of an edition printed in Oxford. “It is a good book,”
MR. BOARDMAN VISITS THE KAREN villa GES. 93
said Mr. Boardman; “it teaches that there is a God in Heaven,
whom alone we should.worship. You have been ignorantly wor-
shipping this book; that is not good. I will teach you to worship
the God whom the book reveals. Every Karen countenance was
alternately lighted up with Smiles of joy and cast down with in-
ward convictions of having erred in worshipping a book instead
of the God whom it reveals. I took the book of psalms in Burman
and read such passages as seemed appropriate, and having given
a brief and easy explanation, engaged in prayer. They stayed
- tw8 days, and discovered considerable interest in the instructions
given them.” The aged sorcerer, on hearing Mr. Boardman's
decision respecting the book, seemed readily to perceive that his
office was at an end, and at the suggestion of one of the native
Christians, he disrobed himself of the fantastical dress which he
had been accustomed to wear, and gave up the heavy cudgel, or
wand, which for twelve years he had borne as the badge of his
spiritual authority.
Though Mr. Boardman henceforth directed his principal
efforts to the Karens, he did not abandon his labors among the
Burmans. Indeed they were inseparably united, for in nearly
every assembly that he met, Burmans and Karens were mingled
together, and as the Karens at this time had no written language
his instructions were of necessity imparted in the Burman, with
which they seem to have been generally quite familiar.
At the beginning of the year 1831 Mr. Boardman had been
often visited by Karens from the interior, who stated to him
that their people had heard of his arrival, and were desirous of
being taught by him. They had come long journeys from the
neighboring province of Mergui and from settlements far to the
east, and all invited him to visit them in their own jungle and
instruct them in the ways of God. He decided to comply with
their repeated requests, and accordingly on the 5th of February
he commenced a journey to some of the less remote of the Karen
villages.
The little caravan, in addition to Mr. Boardman, consisted of
Ko Thah-byu, and another Christian Karen, two of the elder
94 * MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
boys of the school, and a native of Malabar, who was employed
as a servant and cook. They directed their course first to the
village of Tshick-koo, the residence of the sorcerer and the chief
Moung So, who had visited the mission house at Tavoy. Their
journey lay through a country studded all over with the monu-
ments of idolatry. Every cliff and peak along the mountains
which they passed, seemed crowned with a pagoda. At length,
on the third day, they reached the village to which they had
been invited. The villagers, who had been expecting them,
testified their joy on seeing the white teacher and exclaimed,
“Ah! you have come at last; we have long been wishing to see
you.” The travellers were supplied by the simple natives with
fowls, fish and rice, and entertained with the utmost hospitality
which the village could furnish.
Mr. Boardman found here a zayat which had been put up in
anticipation of his arrival, large enough to contain the whole
population of the village, numbering in all not more than sixty
or seventy persons. In the evening a company of about thirty
assembled, to whom he preached some of the simplest truths of
the gospel, his words being interpreted by Ko Thah-byu, so that
those present who were ignorant of Burman might understand
his teachings. They listened attentively and many of them re-
mained the whole night in the zayat with the missionary. On
the following day they came together in still larger numbers, of
both sexes and all ages, bringing presents to the teacher and his
companions. After they had heard him explain the salvation
which is offered in the gospel, five of them at the close of the
day requested him to baptize them, that they might also be disci-
ples of Christ. One of them was the old sorcerer who had been
the keeper of the sacred book, another was a disciple and asso-
ciate of his, while the remaining three were persons who had
often been at Tavoy and had requested baptism several months
before. He decided to defer the baptism of all of them for the
present, till he should have opportunity to instruct them more
fully and judge more accurately respecting the change which
they professed to have experienced. He explained to them the
ESTABLISHMENT OF SCHOOLS AMONG THE KARENs. 95
ten. commandments, and as they were without the division of
time into weeks, he was pleased to observe the arrangements
which they devised with much care, in order to recollect the
return of the Sabbath day. -
On his return, he stopped at other villages to which he was
invited by the inhabitants, by whom he was invariably received
with the greatest hospitality and respect. In one of these vil-
lages two men, who had often heard the gospel from Ko Thah-
byu, made a request for Christian baptism. He however ad-
vised them to wait still longer in learning the religion of Christ.
After an absence of nine or ten days, which he passed in these
visits to the villages of the Karens, Mr. Boardman returned
to Tavoy more than ever interested in the character of these
singular people, and full of hope and encouragement respecting
their early conversion to Christianity. He had formed a large
and comprehensive plan of missionary operations, embracing
both schools and a system of itinerant preaching among the vil-
lages of the province, which he had already submitted to the
consideration of the Board of Managers and of the Conven-
tion. The little church which he had founded at Tavoy, was
receiving frequent accessions, and though not without occasional
instances of apostasy, was yet in a highly prosperous condition,
while from every part of the surrounding jungle there came
the voice of inquiry for books that would make known the true
God, and for visits from the teacher to tell the people of the
new religion.
Mr. Boardman attached great importance to Christian schools
as a part of the agency of the mission. The schools for boys
and for girls which had been established by himself and Mrs.
Boardman, had been productive of the most beneficial results.
The school for girls at the close of a year from its establish-
ment contained twenty-one scholars, while that for boys had a
number still larger, of whom the five eldest had been bap-
tized and admitted to the church. Mr. Boardman had also
made many efforts to have schools established throughout the
city, but he encountered innumerable obstacles, and at the end
96 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
of three months, had been able to establish but one, the teacher
of which he was allowed to employ at the expense of the Eng-
lish government. During the second summer of his residence
at Tavoy, while the external condition of the mission was the
most encouraging, he was visited with a series of personal and
domestic afflictions, which proved not only a severe trial of his
spirit, but a serious detriment to the interests of the mission.
His own health had already begun to give alarming symptoms
of decline; that of Mrs. Boardman had become seriously im-
paired; their eldest born, a daughter of tender years, had sud-
denly fallen sick and died, and their only remaining child was
prostrated by disease and apparently destined soon to sleep
with his sister in the grave. But though encountering many
outward discouragements and oppressed with the poignant sor-
row of recent bereavement, these indefatigable missionaries
still labored on in the school and at the zayat ; wherever they
met the ignorant idolaters of Tavoy, there they sought to do
them good and lead them in the way of life.
On the 9th of August, 1829, the missionaries were roused
from their slumbers at an early hour, by a knocking at their
doors and windows, and their native friends crying to them,
“Teacher! Teacher! Tavoy rebels.” On inquiry they found that
the province had risen in insurrection against the English gov-
ernment, and that large companies of natives had attacked
the powder magazine, the dwelling of one of the principal offi-
cers and the prison. The utmost alarm existed in the city,
which was garrisoned only by a small party of sepoys with a
few English officers to command them. Their own premises
were surrounded by bands of the insurgents, and the balls
which they fired upon the city whistled above their heads, and
occasionally passed through their house. The sepoys were at
length after a severe conflict able to drive the rebels from the
city gates, but it was only to render the situation of the mis-
sionaries still more perilous; for their house was now directly
between the two parties and in the range of the fire of each,
and their enclosures seemed destined to be the battle-ground of
INSURRECTION IN TAVOY. 97
the insurrection. Early in the day, they were glad to avail
themselves of the invitation which had been sent them by Mrs.
Burney, the wife of the civil superintendent, who was himself
absent from home, to take refuge in the government house; they
had been here however but a short time, when it was determined
to evacuate the town and retire to a building at the quay on the
margin of the river. Here, in a wooden building of only six
rooms, were crowded together for several days the European res-
idents, the Sepoys, and two or three hundred women and children
of Portuguese and others, who looked to the English for pro-
tection. Several hundred barrels of powder were standing in
the rooms around them, and on the outside were raging the tu-
multuous hosts of the insurgents, elated with their possession of
the town and threatening destruction to the English and their
adherents. At length, on the morning of the 13th of August,
Major Burney arrived at Tavoy in the steamer Diana, and as it
was determined to send the vessel immediately to Maulmain for
reinforcements, Mrs. Boardman and her family embarked with
Mrs. Burney, leaving Mr. Boardman with the superintendent to
render such service as might be in his power, and also to look
after the articles of property belonging to the mission house,
which had been scattered and broken to pieces by the infuri-
ated natives. -
On the 15th two successive attacks were made upon the town
under the direction of Major Burney, which resulted in the en-
tire repulse of the insurgents, and the capture of several of their
leaders. When quiet was restored Mr. Boardman went into the
town, but found many parts of it in ruins. The mission house
was cut to pieces by the rebels, and every thing which had been
left behind by the mission family in their hurried flight had been
carried away or destroyed, and the premises and the adjacent
fields and roads were strown with the fragments of books and
furniture which had been wantonly ruined. He spent several
days in gathering together the relics which he found, and in re-
pairing the mission house; and then, taking with him such of
the scholars as were desirous of going, he joined Mrs. Board-
10
'98 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
man at Maulmain. The affairs of Tavoy were soon settled,
and the province made quiet beneath the sway of the English.
The mission house having been rebuilt, and other arrangements
for recommencing the mission completed, the missionaries with
their family and scholars returned to Tavoy on the 6th of Oc-
tober, and established themselves again at their familiar post
of labor.
The tumults of the rebellion had scattered the little band
of Karen disciples, and broken up the schools; but so soon as
it was known that Mr. Boardman had returned, the Karens
came back from the jungles to which they had fled, testifying
their joy at the safety of the missionaries. Three of them, who,
before the revolt, had asked to be baptized and had given satis-
factory evidence of piety, now renewed their request. One of
the three was sixty-five years of age, and the others were past
middle life, and it was regarded by Mr. Boardman as a most
gratifying proof of the power of the gospel on their hearts, that
these persons, uninduced by worldly prospects, should in their
old age give up the customs of their ancestors, and travel a dis-
tance of fifty miles, by difficult and perilous paths, to receive
Christian baptism. They were baptized according to their re-
quest, and were soon afterwards admitted to the ordinance of the
Lord's supper, which was now observed by the church with much
solemnity and spiritual preparation, for the first time since the
return of the missionaries. Mr. Boardman was also particularly
encouraged at observing that the congregations at the zayat
were larger and more attentive than they had ever been before,
and that the number of scholars in the school had very consid-
erably increased. Cheered by these indications, he commenced
a system of visiting in succession the villages around Tavoy,
preaching from house to house, and conversing with those
whom he met by the way. He usually took with him some
member of his church, and one or two of the boys from the
school, and in this way often visited three or four villages in a
week, meeting the Burmans in their houses, or conversing with
them in the fields and by the wayside, every where seeking to
DECLINING HEALTH OF MIR. ROARDMAN. 99
interest them in the religion which he taught. Several of the
Karen converts also asked of him permission to go to their jun-
gle, and communicate the gospel to their own countrymen; and
Ko Thah-byu, with two others, was often sent across the moun-
tains, with credentials from Mr. Boardman to preach to the in-
habitants of distant villages. Thus, like the early disciples, did
these simple-hearted converts go forth scattering the precious
seeds of spiritual truth through wide districts of the Burman em-
pire, and proclaiming to multitudes of degraded Karens the pre-
cepts and the invitations of the gospel of Christ. The results of
their travels and their simple-hearted preaching soon began to
appear. The missionaries were constantly visited by persons
dwelling beyond the mountains, and even on the borders of
Siam, who had heard the gospel from these wandering disciples,
or had read the Scriptures which they had given them, and who
now came to the teachers, to be instructed in the faith of which
they had thus been taught only the simplest rudiments. The
impression which was produced upon the minds of this singu-
lar people by the earnest teachings of a few early converts, har-
monizing, as it did, with all the legends and predictions of an
elder age, well illustrates the sensibility which belongs to their
nature, and the extraordinary readiness which they evinced to
receive the gospel.
In this manner, engaged in superintending the schools con-
nected with the mission, in sending forth the more intelligent of
the converts to distribute the Scriptures and to teach their
countrymen, in preaching the gospel and conversing with
numerous visiters, and in journeying from village to village
through the province of Tavoy, Mr. Boardman passed the first
two years of his missionary life. During this period his labors
had often been interrupted by sickness and death in his family,
by the insurrection of the people, and especially by the repeated
recurrence of hemorrhage of the lungs, – a malady to which he
had been subject for several years, and which had now serious-
ly undermined his constitution. Notwithstanding the frequent
interruptions he had experienced, he had been enabled to
100 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
accomplish an unusual amount of missionary labor. He had
gathered a native church of twenty persons, of whom fifteen were
Karens; he had carefully instructed many more in the doctrines
of the gospel who now gave evidence of being truly converted;
and in the districts around Tavoy, which he had visited, he had
the satisfaction of seeing more than one village of Karens
abandoning the practices of barbarian life, observing the Sab-
bath, and recognizing the institutions of Christianity. Mrs.
Boardman had already gone to Maulmain for the recovery of
her health, and for the purpose of meeting some missionary
friends who had arrived from America; and on the 27th of April,
1830, Mr. Boardman, too much enfeebled by disease to continue
his arduous labors, now sailed for Maulmain, where he arrived on
the 3d of May. The Karen disciples bade him farewell with a
sorrow which they could not repress, for they feared they might
not see him again. They asked the names of all the mission-
aries that they might mention each in their prayers, and they
also manifested much curiosity respecting the Indians of Ameri-
ca, whom they had been told they resembled in character,
and expressed their intention to pray for them, that they too
might receive the gospel.
The memory of scenes like these lingered in the mind of Mr.
Boardman during his residence at Maulmain, and was occa-
sionally renewed by the reports which he received from the
Karen Christians who travelled among the villages of the
country. While attached to the mission in that city he was
able, notwithstanding his feeble health, to perform a large
amount of missionary labor. Messrs. Judson and Wade were
at this time absent from the station, and a large share of its
public duties necessarily rested upon him. He preached on the
Sabbath twice in English and once in Burman, and once also in
Burman or in English during the week; he attended catecheti-
cal or other similar classes every alternate evening in the week,
and during each day was occupied in correcting proof-sheets for
the press, in religious conversation, or in the necessary over-
sight of the several interests and labors of the mission. Mrs.
BAPTISM OF KARENS. 101
Boardman gradually regained her accustomed strength, and at
Maulmain, as at Tavoy, was constantly employed in teaching
at the schools, and in conversing with the Burman women who
came to the mission house. Her infant son was suddenly taken
from her by death, and a still heavier calamity seemed to be
threatening her in the declining health of her husband. To him
the change of residence brought no benefit, and the horizon
seemed already darkening around him with the shadows of
death.
At length, after having spent seven months at Maulmain,
during which Mr. Boardman had gained only a temporary re-
spite from the insidious malady that preyed upon him, they re-
turned to Tavoy, and taking with them the scholars who had
accompanied them, entered again upon their accustomed labors.
They were also accompanied by several of the native Christians,
the principal of whom were Moung Ing, the native preacher of
Rangoon, and Ko Thah-byu, the earnest-minded and indefatiga-
ble Karen.
So soon as it became known in the jungle that the missiona-
ries had returned to Tavoy, they were visited by many of their
former friends, who came to them with expressions of joy, and
loaded them with the presents which they brought. The chil-
dren too came back to the schools, and the labors of the mission
were immediately resumed. Of those who came to them within
a few days after their return, five, whom they had often met
before, asked for baptism, and at the end of two weeks, Ko Thah-
byu, who had gone out to spread the tidings that the missiona-
aries had returned, came back, bringing with him about forty of
his countrymen. Among them were all the native Christians
whom they had not seen before, and a number of others,
who wished to be baptized. Three days were devoted to the
examination of the candidates who presented themselves for
baptism. Eighteen of them were accepted, and on the 20th of
December they were baptized by Moung Ing, under the direction
of Mr. Boardman, who was, at the time, unable to administer the
ordinance himself. At the close of the day he met the Karen
10 *
102 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
church, now increased to thirty-seven members, at the ordinance
of the Lord's supper, and at the solemn feast mingled his grati-
tude with theirs, for the auspicious event which had thus nearly
doubled their little band in a single day. Several others were
baptized a few weeks later, and many more had visited Mr.
Boardman, and having been approved by him, were waiting,
with others whom he had not seen, in their respective villages,
till he could visit them and admit them to the church by ad-
ministering the rite of baptism. -
His constitution was now rapidly yielding to the inroads of
the disease which had so long been consuming his strength, and
it was evident that his labors were nearly at an end. The
eager Karens, fearing he might not be able to fulfill the promise
he had long ago made them, had built a Zayat for his reception,
and offered to come to the city and carry him in a litter on the
journey, in order that they might secure his presence among
them. He had just decided to yield to their pressing impor-
tunities, and to spend the latest effort of his strength in making
the visit, when Mr. and Mrs. Mason arrived at Tavoy, as aux-
iliaries to the mission. He knew, by a fatal intuition, that he
had no time for delay, and, on the 31st of January, a few days
after the arrival of Mr. Mason, he set out upon the journey.
He was borne in a cot, on the shoulders of the Karens, and was
accompanied by Mrs. Boardman and the newly-arrived mission-
aries. At the end of three days they reached the zayat, which
stood on the margin of a beautiful stream, at the foot of a range
of mountains, whose sloping sides were lined with the villages
of the strange people whom they had come to visit. More than
a hundred were already assembled at the zayat, nearly half of
whom were candidates for baptism. Aided by Mr. Mason and
the native Christians who were present, he examined them in
the history of their Christian experience, and in the doctrines
of the gospel. But his strength was exhausted, and he could do
no more. At the close of the day, just as the sun was sinking
behind the mountains, his cot was placed at the river side, in
the midst of the solemn company that was gathered to witness
DEATH OF MR. BOARDMLAN. 103
the first baptism which that ancient mountain-stream had ever
beheld. Thirty-four native converts, whose examination had
been approved, were baptized by Mr. Mason. As he gazed in
silent gratitude upon the scene, he felt that his work was finished,
his last promise to these scattered disciples was now fulfilled;
and he was ready to depart in peace. He met them again at
their evening meal, and, still reclining upon his couch, uttered
to them a few words of parting counsel and took leave of them
for ever.
On the following morning the missionaries set out on their re-
turn to Tavoy, hoping that he might survive the journey, and die
at last beneath his own roof. But the hope was disappointed.
Ere the second day had passed, his eyes were closed upon the
scenes of earth, and his spirit was in heaven with God.
Thus ended the consecrated life of this noble-hearted and in-
trepid minister of Christ. He lived to witness a glorious tri-
umph of the faith which he taught, and died as every missionary
might well wish to die, in the service of his Master, and sur-
rounded by those whom he had been instrumental in converting
from heathenism and in reclaiming from barbarism. His tomb
is at Tavoy, in the midst of what was once a Buddhist grove,
and beneath the shadow of a ruined pagoda. It is covered
by a marble slab, placed there as a tribute of respect by three
gentlemen who at that time occupied the highest posts in the
provincial government, and inscribed with a simple epitaph, te
which points the traveller who visits it to the Christian villages
that skirt the neighboring forests and mountains, as the true
memorials of his useful and devoted life.
104 MISSIONS IN BüIRMAH.
C H A P T E R XI.
THE Missic: at Maulmain. —Labors of Messrs. Judson and Wade. — Ordina-
tion of Ko Thah-a. — He is stationed at Rangoon. — Messrs. Judson and
Wade visit Rangoon. — Circulation of the New Testament and Tracts. –
Mr. Judson ascends the Irrawaddy to Prome. — His labors at Rangoon in
Translating the Bible. — Return to Maulmain. — Arrival of other Missiona-
ries. – Mr. and Mrs. Wade visit Arracan. — Review of the Progress of the
Mission.
WE have lingered the longer upon the events narrated in the
preceding chapter, for the purpose of illustrating the origin of
the mission among the Karens, and the character of the excellent
missionary who first preached to them the gospel. We return
now to trace the changes which took place among the missiona-
ries who remained at Maulmain. x
After Mr. Boardman left that station in 1828, its affairs were
administered by Mr. Judson and Mr. and Mrs. Wade, with the
aid of such native assistants as they were able to employ in the
Schools, in translation and in the other services of the mission.
The blessing of Heaven was bestowed upon their labors. The
Schools were attended by large numbers and with increasing in-
terest, and of the people who came to the zayat to be instructed
by the missionaries not a few were converted to the new religion.
In 1828, thirty were baptized and added to the little church at
Maulmain, and in the year following twenty-eight more, of whom
several were soldiers belonging to the English regiments sta-
tioned there. These were subsequently formed into a church by
themselves. The hours of every week which could be rescued
from the more pressing necessities of the mission were devoted,
especially by Mr. Judson, to revising the translation of the New
Testament and the epitome of the Old, which he had prepared
while at Rangoon. Twelve tracts and other treatises on differ-
ent subjects belonging to the Christian faith were also written
or revised, and made ready for the press. The mission, how-
THE STATION AT RANGOON. | 105
ever, at this time was without any means of printing, and was
obliged to rely wholly upon the press at Serampore. This se-
rious impediment to the labors of the missionaries they had not
failed to represent to the Board of Managers, and in May, 1829,
Mr. Bennett, who had previously been appointed printer to the
mission, sailed from Philadelphia, with a press and a font of
types. He arrived at Maulmain in the following January, and
immediately engaged in putting to press the works which the
missionaries had prepared. & - e
In the year 1829, Ko Thah-a, a Burman convert of Rangoon,
who since the close of the war, in the absence of all the teach-
ers, had kept alive the little church amidst innumerable perils,
came to Maulmain, to represent the condition of his fellow dis-
ciples. The missionaries were delighted with his intelligence,
his fidelity, and his judicious and persevering zeal, and immedi-
ately decided to ordain him as pastor of the church at Rangoon.
He returned to his friends, the first Burman who was fully com-
missioned to preach the gospel and administer its ordinances.
Moung Ing, who, on the decline of Amherst, was withdrawn from
the station there, was soon afterwards ordained and associated
with Ko Thah-a. Their united labors were highly serviceable to
the nearly prostrate cause of Christianity in that deluded city.
Many native Christians, who had been scattered by the tumults
of war and the rigors of persecution, returned to the city, and in
the course of the year twenty were baptized and added to the
church. Early in 1830, Mr. and Mrs. Wade removed to Ran-
goon, where they remained several months, instructing the new-
ly-appointed ministers and strengthening the hold which Chris-
tianity was gradually establishing among the people. In the fol-
lowing May they were joined by Mr. Judson, who, in all the
changes of his life, still lingered with tender solicitude over the
spot where he first began to preach the gospel to the heathen.
This attempt to reëstablish the mission within that portion of
the empire which had not been ceded to the English, was made
with much apprehension and doubt. So stern was the frown
which the emperor had cast upon all former endeavors to prop-
106 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
~
agate Christianity, that, though attracted by the favorable tid-
ings from Rangoon, the missionaries did not venture to hope
to obtain a permanent foothold in his dominions. They were,
however, kindly received at Rangoon by the governor of the
city, who had known Mr. Judson at Ava, and their residence
began immediately to attract the attention of the people. The
subordinate officers of the government and the priests exercised
a perpetual vigilance, and often uttered complaints to the gov-
ernor; but the people came in great numbers for copies of the
Scriptures, and for religious tracts and books. Hundreds of
these were often given away, in a single day, to those only who
asked for them; and even then the demand was but imperfect-
ly supplied. Large numbers of Burmans from the interior
were at this time in Rangoon, and afforded to the missionaries
unusual facilities for making known the gospel. Some were
troops who had come for the purpose of enrolment and inspec-
tion. Many more were merchants who were travelling for the
purposes of traffic from distant portions of the empire. Though
watched by priests and officers and often warned not to go, yet
multitudes of them would flock to the mission house, saying,
“We have heard the fame of this religion, and are come to get
books.”
Nor was this, in most instances, an idle and transitory curi-
osity, that would allow them to throw the books aside and think
of them no more. They read them with attention, and then
bore them away to remote districts to be read by others, in con-
nection with the strange tidings which were reported of the re-
ligion of the foreign teachers. Thus, as the missionaries ascer-
tained by unequivocal testimony, were their earliest lessons of
the gospel conveyed to multitudes of Burmans, who at later pe-
riods came to inquire more fully concerning the faith which
they had imperfectly learned. The copy of the Gospels and the
religious tracts borne in this manner to the dwelling of some
thoughtful heathen, hundreds of miles from Rangoon, would be
received as a writing from Heaven. It would be often read
and its truths would be pondered, until at a future period their
MR. JUDSON ASCENDS THE IRRAWADDY. #67
true significance would break upon his mind and guide him to
the Saviour of sinners. Many an instance of precisely this re-
sult might be gathered from the journals of missionary expe-
T16. In Ce.
In the summer of 1830, Mr. Judson resolved on making
an excursion up the Irrawaddy, for the purpose of visiting
the towns along its banks. He had often sailed up and down
this broad and beautiful stream, and had observed the crowded
population of the cities and villages that line its banks; but he
had never found an opportunity of preaching among them the
religion of Christ. Taking with him the faithful assistant
Moung Ing and four other native Christians, he embarked again
upon the stream over whose sparkling waters he had been borne
so many times before, in the varied states of hope and disap-
pointment, of sorrow and of joy, through which he had passed.
The journey was marked by many striking incidents. He land-
ed at many of the villages, where his presence was always hailed
with eager interest. The people would assemble to hear him
preach, and receive his books and tracts, which they seemed
to read with unusual attention. He often beheld little groups
gathered around some one better able to read than the rest,
and listening to the reading of a tract or a Gospel, and when
it was finished they would follow the missionary to his boat, or
salute him from the shore, and ask for another writing.
Amidst incidents like these, occurring at every village, Mr.
Judson pushed his journey up the Irrawaddy as far as Prome,
a large and ancient city about midway between Rangoon and
Ava. Here he took up his abode with an English gentle-
man, the only European resident of the city; for the people
would not rent him a house, or a spot on which to build, so fear-
ful were they of being suspected by the government of aiding
foreigners again to come into the country. He at length ob-
tained permission of the magistrates to take possession of an old
zayat which stood near a pagoda, and those who came to the
pagoda were soon attracted to the teachings of the missionary.
Thus, beneath the shadow of this pagan temple, he daily pro-
108 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
claimed to the votaries of Gaudama the doctrines of Christ.
Among the crowds who now came to the zayat at Prome, im-
pelled by various motives, were often seen earnest inquirers,
both from the city and the neighboring country, whose moral
natures had been roused from the stupor of idolatry, and who
listened with anxious attention to the words of the missionary.
At length, however, they all suddenly disappeared. The zayat
stood open as usual from morning till evening, but not a solitary
Burman was attracted either by the conversation of the mission-
ary, or by the impressive services of the daily evening worship.
The cause of this sudden cessation of visits Mr. Judson was
for the time at a loss to understand. He learned after his return
to Rangoon that the emperor, annoyed that he had ventured so
far into the interior, and was distributing tracts and assailing
the Burman religion in the very heart of its dominions, had
given orders that he should be required to leave Prome and
confine himself to Rangoon. The intelligence that such an order
had been given was quite sufficient to account for the absence
of visiters at the zayat. The woongyees, however, were un-
willing to execute the order, and applied to Major Burney, who
was then the British Resident at Ava, to interpose his authority
and require him to depart from Prome. He assured them that
Mr. Judson, was in no way connected with the British govern-
ment, but simply a teacher of religion, and that to drive him
from Prome would be regarded by good men in all countries
as an act of cruel intolerance. But the emperor's orders are
never to be disobeyed, and are never changed, and Mr. Judson
unconsciously escaped their execution in this instance only by his
voluntary departure from Prome, when he returned to Rangoon
in September, 1830. During this excursion he preached the
gospel to thousands who had never before heard one of its pre-
cious truths. From some to whom he had preached he received
assurances of the deepest interest in what he had told them, and
many, he believed, had become so far enlightened that they
never again could bend the knee in the temples of idolatry with-
out remembering the great God whom he had proclaimed, and
feeling that they were in the wrong way. * - * * *
MR. JUDSON'S LABORS AT RANGoon. 109
He returned to Rangoon more impressed than ever before,
with the importance of hastening forward the translation of the
entire Scriptures, a work in which he had already made consid-
erable progress, but which he had hitherto postponed for the
more pressing duties of the mission. He accordingly took a
house, of which the lower part was principally assigned to the
several native assistants for receiving company and distributing
tracts, while he confined himself to the rooms above and gave his
time to completing the translation of the Psalms, which he had
commenced three years before. So numerous however were the
visits of inquiring Burmans to the house, that although only the
more serious and hopeful visiters were admitted to him, yet more
than half his time was consumed in the interruptions to which
he was daily subjected. It was in circumstances like these,
while separated from the other members of the mission and
dwelling alone with his Burman converts at Rangoon, that Mr.
Judson accomplished a large part of his noble work of translat-
ing the Scriptures into the language of Burmah. In the fresh
hour of morning and by the lonely lamp of midnight, he pursued
his solitary task, cheered by no sympathies of society, but urged
on by the sad spectacle of heathenism which lay around him.
His close confinement and assiduous application to the work
enfeebled his health, but he could not rest till it was finished.
The Board of Managers sent him an invitation to return to the
|United States in order to recruit his health, but he chose to
remain, that thus Burmah might sooner have the Bible in her
own tongue.
The external condition of the mission, meanwhile, presented
many features of the most encouraging character. The gov-
ernment, though still watchful and jealous and often urged to
put a stop to his teachings, yet did not interpose its authority,
and persons of every rank and condition, notwithstanding the
threats of the priests and of others who opposed the new reli-
gion, daily came in small companies to the mission house to
ask for tracts, to hear the Scriptures read, or to converse with
the Christian converts whom they met there. The minds of
11
110 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
the people in different parts of the empire had now become
strongly impressed with the accounts which had reached them
concerning the religion of the strangers, and few came to Ran-
goon without inquiring for the teacher and seeking access to his
conversations.
At the great Buddhist festival which was held at Rangoon in
March, 1831, Mr. Judson had a favorable opportunity to judge
of the interest which had been awakened by the labors of many
years, and by the tracts and books which the press had sent
forth through the land. The festival was in honor of Gaudama,
and was celebrated with great pomp in the magnificent Shway
Dagong pagoda, which is held in peculiar reverence, since in it
several real hairs of the divinity are believed to be enshrined.
The occasion brought together a countless multitude from all
quarters of the empire, —from every province of the interior,
from the frontiers of Cassay, and even from the distant borders
of China and Siam. From many of these remotest districts,
persons came to Mr. Judson, saying, “Sir, we hear that there is
an eternal hell, - we are afraid of it. Do give us a writing
that will tell us how to escape it.” Others, perhaps from oppo-
site frontiers of the empire, would say to him with equal eager-
ness, “Sir, we have seen a writing that tells us about an eternal
God. Are you the man that gives away such writings? If so,
pray give us one, for we want to know the truth.” Others still,
from districts less remote, had heard the name of Jesus Christ,
and asked, “Are you Jesus Christ's man? Give us a writing
that tells about Jesus Christ.” The number who came in this
manner to the mission house, to ask for books or tracts or for
Some kind of religious instruction, he estimated at not less than
six thousand, to all of whom he gave the writings which they
desired, and, had the supply been sufficient, he might have given
away twice the number without any apprehension of reckless-
IlêSS OT WaSte.
In the summer of 1831, it was arranged that Mr. and Mrs.
Wade should proceed to Bengal, and take passage to the United
States in order to recruit the health of Mrs. Wade, which had
THE STATION AT MAULMAIN. 111
long been declining. Their departure made it necessary that
Mr. Judson should return to Maulmain, to aid in managing the
interests of that station, now the leading station in the mission.
He arrived in July, and was delighted with the progress which
the doctrines of the gospel had made during the thirteen months
in which he had been absent. The mission had been strength-
ened by the arrival of Rev. Messrs. Mason, Kincaid and Jones,
with their wives. Mr. Kincaid together with Mr. Bennett
continued to reside at Maulmain, while Mr. Jones went to Ran-
goon to take the place of Mr. Judson. The little church had
become considerably enlarged by the baptism of Burmans, Ta-
lings and Karens, and the press had multiplied copies of tracts,
epitomes of the Old Testament and portions of the New Testa-
ment, to the amount of nearly two millions of pages. The
missionaries had also extended their labors far into the neigh-
boring jungle. They had made repeated journeys to distant
villages of the Karens, and at different places had baptized
twenty converts, fourteen of whom were formed into a separate
church at a place which now received the name of Wadesville,
in honor of the missionary who first preached there the truths
of the gospel. In an account which Mr. Judson gave of the
entire mission at the close of the year 1831, it is stated that the
number who had been baptized during the year was in all two
hundred and seventeen, – one hundred and thirty-six at Maul-
main, seventy-six at Tavoy, and five at Rangoon. Of these,
one hundred and nine were Karens, eighty-nine were Europe-
ans, and nineteen were Burmans and Talings.
The ship in which Mr. and Mrs. Wade embarked for Cal-
cutta was overtaken by a succession of violent gales, which
drove them far from their course and obliged the captain to
put into Kyouk Phyoo, a port on the coast of Arracan. Here
they were kindly received by Colonel Wood, the military com-
mandant, and finding that Mrs. Wade's health was greatly ben-
efited by the change of air, they abandoned their design of re-
turning to the United States. They remained at Kyouk Phyoo
five or six weeks, an interval which Mr. Wade devoted to
112 Missions IN BURMAH.
preaching, or to conversation with the people in the town and
the neighboring country, and distributing tracts and copies of the
Scriptures. In September they returned to Maulmain, and Mrs.
Wade's health being now reëstablished, they immediately pro-
ceeded, in accordance with the advice of their associates, to
Mergui, the capital of a province of the same name, situated a
hundred and fifty miles south of Tavoy. This place had been
visited in 1827, by Ko Ing, who spent a considerable time in
the service of the mission among its inhabitants. The residence
of Mr. and Mrs. Wade continued but six months; during which
time five persons were baptized and organized into a church,
of which Ko Ing was appointed the pastor, – when the mission-
aries were summoned away to Rangoon, to take the place of
Mr. Jones, who now removed to Siam, in order to commence
a mission in that country.
Eighteen years had now elapsed since the mission was first
established, amidst many discouragements, in the city of Ran-
goon. This crowded period had been marked by many pain-
ful and many joyous events, and we may well pause for a mo-
ment and consider what results had been accomplished through
all these years of missionary labor and sacrifice. The growth
of the mission had been slow but constant and healthy, and the
aspect which it now presented was one which the churches in
America might well contemplate with gratitude and joy. Its
stations had been multiplied till, in addition to its original seat,
it occupied three of the principal cities on that part of the coast
which was embraced in the possessions of the English. The
number of its missionaries had been increased to fourteen, seven
makes and seven females, besides several others who had been
appointed, but had not yet arrived in the country. The num-
ber who had been baptized and admitted to the churches at the
several stations was in all three hundred and ninety-three, of
whom two hundred and eighty were natives, and one hundred
and thirteen were foreigners, principally soldiers of the English
regiments to whom the missionaries had preached while they
were acquiring the language of the country. From the several
RESULTS OF THE MISSION. 113
churches eleven had been excommunicated for unworthy con-
duct, and eleven had died in the profession of the Christian
faith. The press had been kept in constant operation by Mr.
Bennett, who, with such assistance as he was able to employ,
had printed not less than two hundred thousand tracts and books,
which had been widely circulated throughout the empire.
The New Testament was now nearly complete, and many sep-
arate books and a full epitome of the Old Testament had
already been printed.
At most of the stations schools had been established, in which
were gathered, principally under the instruction of the ladies of
the mission, the children of the native Christians, and all others
who could be induced to join them; and far beyond the imme-
diate vicinity in which the missionaries dwelt, and in which
their zayats were opened, they had repeatedly gone on distant
excursions, preaching from village to village, distributing to all
who sought them tracts and copies of the Scriptures, and bap-
tizing those who gave satisfactory evidence of piety and faith
in Jesus Christ. In this manner there had been excited a
spirit of earnest and curious inquiry, the proofs of which were
constantly presenting themselves to the notice of the missiona-
ries. Mr. Judson speaks of it as the most prominent feature
of the mission at this period of its history, and, as he gazes upon
the scene which lies around him, he expresses the solicitude of
“a person who sees a mighty engine beginning to move, over
which he knows he has no control.” The gospel was beginning
to address its solemn precepts and its glorious promises to the
mind of the nation, and the ancient superstitions of the coun-
try seemed to be losing their power. - -
These results had been reported at the meetings of the Board
and the Convention in the United States, and had awakened in
the churches of the land the liveliest interest in the cause of
foreign missions. The contributions to the treasury of the Con-
vention had increased to the sum of $22,600, nearly four times
the amount with which the mission was originally established.
The enterprise also had become the source of great spiritual
11 *
114 MISSIONS IN BURMLA He
benefits to the denomination in America. It had united the
interests and sympathies of a multitude of widely-scattered
churches, and had offered to the whole body of American Bap-
tists a common object of philanthropic effort and of glowing
anticipation. The conception of giving the gospel to those who
know it not, always ennobles the mind into which it enters, –
and, animated by the spirit of the generous enterprise, the
widow came with her mite, and rich men with their gifts, to
contribute to the accomplishment of the magnificent design.
The appeal which it made for the services of Christian laborers
was responded to by several youthful candidates for the minis-
try, and at the close of the year 1831, not less than nine addi-
tional missionaries were ready to sail from the country, and join
the ranks of the Burman Mission.
C H A P T E R XII.
ProgREss of the Mission from 1832 to 1835. – Mr. Judson devoted to Trans
Hating the Bible.—Resolutions of the Board at Salem.—Establishment of
Out-Stations.—Christian Villages.—Excursions of Mr. Mason from Tavoy.
— Great changes among the Karens.—Their Language reduced to Writing
by Mr. Wade.— Mr. and Mrs. Wade obliged to sail for the United States.
Arrival of new Companies of Missionaries.— Mr. Kincaid at Rangoon and
at Ava. — Mr. Judson completes the Translation of the Bible.— Mr. and
Mrs. Wade in the United States.—Results of their Visit.—Their Return
with additional Missionaries.—Death of Miss Cummings.
THE period between the commencement of the year 1832 and
the commencement of 1835 was marked by signal blessings be-
stowed on the labors of the missionaries, and by the continued
growth of all the interests of the mission. So numerous, how-
ever, are the details, and so widely scattered are the scenes to
which they relate, that the limits assigned to this narrative will
admit only a rapid survey of their general character, with a brief
sketch of the results which they were instrumental in producing.
RESOLUTIONS OF THE BOARD AT saEEM. 115
Within this period five missionaries, with their wives and three
unmarried female assistants, arrived in Burmah and entered
upon their appointed labors. Several new stations were com-
menced, new enterprises for the extension of the gospel were
set on foot, and results of the greatest importance were brought
about in the general progress of the mission.
Mr. Judson, after his return to Maulmain in 1831, continued
to give his attention, with as little interruption as possible, to
the translation of the Scriptures into the Burman tongue, the
great work to which he had already consecrated some of the
best years of his life, and whose accomplishment was anticipated
with the liveliest interest, alike by the Burman converts and by
the friends of missions in every land. So assiduous were his
labors, that by the end of the following year he was able to
report to the Board that the New Testament had already passed
through the press, and that, if his life and health were spared,
he might reasonably expect to complete the translation of the
entire Bible in two years more. . *-
After Mr. Judson had completed the translation of the New
Testament, in accordance with principles which he had already
submitted to the Board, it became necessary for that body to fix
upon some rules for the guidance of their missionaries in all
their endeavors to translate the Scriptures into the languages of
the heathen. Accordingly, at the annual meeting which was
held at Salem in 1833, the following resolutions were adopted,
as an expression of their views and those of their brethren, in
relation to this important question. .
“1. That the Board feel it to be their duty to adopt all prudent
measures to give to the heathen the pure word of God in their
own language; and to furnish their missionaries with all the
means in their power to make the translations as exact a repre-
sentative of the mind of the Holy Spirit as may be possible.
“2. That all the missionaries of the Board, who are or who
shall be engaged in translating the Scriptures, be instructed to
endeavor, by earnest prayer and diligent study, to ascertain the
precise meaning of the original text; to express that meaning
116 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
as exactly as the nature of the languages into which they shall
translate the Bible will permit, and to transfer no words which
are capable of being literally translated.” - -
Whatever copies of the Scriptures, or portions of the Scrip-
tures, had hitherto been circulated by the missionaries, were
furnished at the expense of the American Bible Society. This
continued to be the case, even with Mr. Judson's translation,
till the year 1836, when that society adopted a resolution “to
encourage only such versions as conform in the principle of their
translation to the common English version.” This resolution
put an end to all appropriations from the American Bible
Society for the translation and circulation of versions of the
Scriptures made by Baptist missionaries, in accordance with the
instructions which the Board had adopted three years before. In
these circumstances, in April, 1837, was formed the American
and Foreign Bible Society, the leading object of whose organ-
ization was to coöperate with the Board of Missions in promot-
ing the translation and circulation of the Scriptures among the
heathen. In the twelve years which have elapsed since its
origin, the Board has received from this society upwards of one
hundred and fifteen thousand dollars, which have been appropri-
ated to the publication and circulation of the Scriptures trans-
lated by the agency of the several missions. The sum which
had already been contributed by the American Bible Society is
about thirty thousand dollars.
Hitherto the churches which were connected with the mission
had been planted almost exclusively in the larger towns, though
many of the natives, both Burmans and Karens, who had been
baptized, dwelt in the villages of the country, separated from
each other and removed from the immediate care of the mission-
aries. Their scattered condition was productive of serious
disadvantage to their own growth in Christian knowledge and
piety, and became a source of great inconvenience and of much
additional labor to those on whom they depended for instruction
and guidance. It was accordingly determined that an attempt
should be made to collect them together at central points easy
COMMUNITIES OF CHRISTIAN KARENS. 117
of access, in villages of their own, in which they might share
each others' Christian sympathy, and enjoy the regular ministry
and the appointed ordinances of the gospel, together with the
incidental advantages of schools for their children. In 1832
Mr. Judson made two separate journeys into the jungle for the
purpose of meeting the native converts and instructing the in-
quirers who might come to him, and in each of these journeys
he selected the site and laid the foundation of a new Christian
community. The first of these was not far from Wadesville,
and was called Newville, where he gathered the disciples from
the neighboring district into a separate church, and baptized
twenty-five additional converts. The second was on the banks
of the Salwen, sixty miles north of Maulmain, and received the
name of Chummerah. Here a considerable number of the na-
tive Christians, principally Karens who had been scattered over
the jungle, now took up their abode and were organized into a
church, to which nineteen were added by baptism during the
visit of the missionary. The foundations of both these little
communities were laid with religious services, and the highest
hopes were entertained that they would immediately become
oases in the social waste around them, and prove at length nur-
series of Christian civilization for the heathen of Burmah.
At about the same time, a still larger village was commenced
in the province of Tavoy, on the banks of the Tenasserim,
about two days’ journey from the city. The Christians from
Tshick-koo, Kan-tha, and seven other villages lying along the
margin of the river, were assembled by Mr. Mason; the disad-
vantages of their situation were explained to them, and the pro-
posal made, that they should abandon their present residences,
and, with their families, form a community by themselves, in
order that they might all be furnished with religious privileges
and with schools for their children. The people gladly accept-
ed the proposal, and a spot was selected whereon to build the
new Christian town. The site was upon an eminence rising in
the midst of a luxuriant plain of many miles in extent, and
skirted in the distance by the blue mountains of Tavoy. It had
118 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
formerly been occupied with the dwellings of men, and was
known as “the ancient city,” but all tradition of its former in-
habitants had utterly perished. A small mission house was
immediately erected, and around it the dwellings of the natives
soon began to appear, – still marked by rudeness and simplicity,
yet presenting some attractive features of social comfort and
dawning civilization. The new settlement was called Matah,
or City of Love. It soon became the seat of a flourishing church
and schools—the home of a Christian population; and now,
after the lapse of fifteen years, in which the people have been
constantly advancing in civilization, Matah presents a striking
illustration of the astonishing change which the labors of the
missionary accomplish in the manners and morals, in the lives
and characters of the heathen. The Christian Karens who
dwell here number upwards of three hundred; they have long
ago abandoned the wandering habits of their race, and com-
menced the regular industry of agriculture and trade. Cleanli-
ness, decency, and order mark their daily lives, and they are
already beginning, from the products of their own labor, to sup-
port the schools which have been established, and the institu-
tions of the gospel which have conferred on them such manifold
blessings.” -
This gathering of the Karen converts into separate commu-
nities was an undertaking of the utmost consequence to the
civilization and religious culture of this interesting, but hitherto
wild and wandering race of men. Scattered as they had been,
and exposed to all the evil influences of barbarian life, even
though they were converted to Christianity, their advancement
in piety and Christian knowledge must always have been slow
and uncertain. The religion of the Bible enjoins its highest
duties and confers its richest blessings only upon man in a
social state. The scattered dwellers of the mountain, or the
* Matah, and the other Karen villages under the care of the missionaries,
were visited by Rev. Dr. Malcom in 1836. For a description of them, see
Malcom's Travels, Vol. I., p. 41, et seq.
MR. MASON'S LABORS AT TAvoy. 119
unsettled wanderers of the wilderness, can but feebly compre-
hend the true significance or appreciate the real excellence of
the gospel; and, notwithstanding all the moral sensibility which
seems inherent in the mind of the Karens, it were vain to ex-
pect them to make much progress as a Christian people, until
they have abandoned their wandering habits and settled in
communities which admit the practice of the social virtues.
The towns which were begun at this period, though they have
not all proved permanent, have been productive of great ad-
vantage to the mission. Many others have since been estab-
lished, and the traveller amid those hitherto desolate regions
now beholds the germs of civilized society springing up beneath
the gentle influences of Christian truth.
In all the cities where stations had been established the
zayats and schools were constantly visited by people from the
country, who often expressed the utmost interest in the new
faith, and bore ample testimony to the impression which its pro-
mulgation was producing in the distant jungles from which they
came. In Tavoy the labors of the missionaries were now con-
fined almost entirely to the Karens. These people, alike in
the city and the country, had from the beginning received the
gospel far more readily than the Burmans, and in their visits to
Mr. Mason often solicited him to go out and preach in the villa-
ges of the interior, where many Christian converts were living.
Accordingly, early in 1832, he started with two native assistants
on a missionary excursion to the settlements which lie south-
east of Tavoy. They were the settlements to which Mr. Board-
man had made one of his earliest visits in the jungle. The
journey at first was along an unfrequented route, and through a
region marked by scenery of striking grandeur and beauty. Of
the people whom he met a few had heard Mr. Boardman preach,
and some had obtained tracts which they had read and thought
upon ; but the greater part were utterly indifferent to the teach-
ings of the missionary. At the end of a month, he came to the
villages under the jurisdiction of Moung So, the interesting
chief who had early visited the missionaries at Tavoy. The
120 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
tidings of his approach reached the Christian Karens, and they
came forth in troops to welcome him. He beheld with aston-
ishment the change which had been wrought in their condition
since they first listened to the gospel from the lips of Mr.
Boardman. As he talks with them of the truths of Christian-
ity, as he enters their dwellings and receives their hospitality, as
he looks upon the fruits of their industry, and breathes the spirit
of their well-ordered life, he records with enthusiasm the feelings
that possess his mind. “I no longer date,” he writes, “from
a heathen land. Heathenism has fled these banks. I eat the
rice and potatoes and fruit cultivated by Christian hands,
look on the fields of Christians, and see no dwellings but those
of Christian families. I am seated in the midst of a Christian
village, surrounded by a people that love as Christians, converse
as Christians, act like Christians, and in my eyes look like
Christians.”
Similar excursions were frequently made by Mr. Mason to
the scattered residences of the recent converts as well as to the
Christian villages of the Karens, in the course of which he
usually found some who were ready to be baptized, and often met
with persons who referred their change of religious belief and
character back to the early instructions of Mr. Boardman, or to
some book of the Scriptures in the Burman language which had
been given them to read. Though generally received with
kindness and hospitality, he was yet sometimes repulsed with
rudeness from the dwellings even of the Karens, especially
of those who had become Buddhists and identified themselves
with the religion of the country. His journal records occasional
instances of opposition, in which he was left to spend the night in
the open air, because none would admit him to their dwellings,
or in which, when he began to speak of Christianity, they re-
fused to hear him, and begged him to depart from their village.
This opposition he was often able to overcome by the interest
he manifested in their physical comfort, or by his attention to
the sick and the efficiency of the simple remedies which he pre-
scribed for their recovery. Thus, like the early apostles, does
º
KAREN LANGUAGE REDUCED TO WIRITING. 121
the missionary make himself all things to all men, that by all
means he may be enabled to save those to whom he is sent.
In addition to the scattered and unsettled condition of the
Karens, the missionaries, as their attention was directed to this
people, encountered another difficulty at the very threshold of
their undertaking. The Karen language had never been re-
duced to writing, and without a written language they could be
expected to make but little progress either in Christian culture
or in civilization. Mr. Wade had been the longest engaged in
the study of the spoken dialects which were in use among them.
In February, 1832, having gone to Maulmain for the benefit
of his health, which was seriously impaired, he was again brought
in contact with the Karen population, and immediately resumed
the careful study of their language. With such aid as he could
derive from Christian Karens who had learned to read Burman
or Taling, he ascertained the elements of which it is composed,
and soon arranged them in an alphabet made up, with the excep-
tion of only two letters, of Burman or of Taling characters.
By the month of August of the same year he had completed a
spelling book containing about fifteen hundred radical words,
and also made a translation of Mrs. Judson's Burman Catechism
and of the Scripture precepts comprised in the “View of the
Christian Religion.” The spelling book was immediately put
to press and introduced into the schools of the Karens, and
the comprehensiveness of the new alphabet was fully tested by
writing out an ancient Karen poem, which was contained in the
oral traditions of the people. The poem, to the surprise of the
missionary, was found to contain an account of the creation of
the world, of “man in a state of innocency, and his fall by par-
taking of the forbidden fruit through the suggestions of Satan,
just as related in the Bible.”
Mr. Wade having accomplished this important work for the
Karen department of the mission, was again attacked with that
*These and other similar coincidences led at one time to the supposition
that the Karens may be of Hebrew origin. — American Baptist Magazine, vol.
13, p.201. -
12
122 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
depressing malady, the liver complaint, which had already within
the year caused frequent interruptions to his labors. After
having tried every remedy short of a change of climate, he
Sailed for the United States at the close of the summer of 1832,
and arrived in the following May. He was accompanied by
Mrs. Wade and by two native Christians—Moung Shway
Moung, a Burman, and Ko Chet-thing, a Karen.
The absence of Mr. and Mrs. Wade at a time when the sta-
tions of the mission had become so numerous, imposed additional
burdens upon the missionaries, and, in consequence of the chan-
ges which it made necessary, delayed the execution of many
important plans. Mr. Cutter, a printer, had already joined the
mission, and brought with him a power-press, which, under the
direction of Mr. Bennett, he prepared to set in immediate oper-
ation at Maulmain. But before he had become acquainted
with the new language he was to print, his instructer and guide,
Mr. Bennett, was obliged to abandon the care of the press and
go and occupy the station at Rangoon, which Mr. Kincaid had
left vacant in order to visit Ava. Mr. Judson spent several
months at Chummerah, instructing the converts there, though
still prosecuting, as assiduously as he was able, his chosen work
of translating the Bible; while Mr. Mason, left alone at Tavoy,
was charged with the whole duties of that large and growing
station, and with the additional care of the Karen villages that
were scattered among the mountains. Thus, pressed with du-
ties greater than they could perform, they were obliged to listen
to many a call for religious instruction which they could not
answer, and to pass unheeded many an attractive spot in the
wide field around them, which they would have been glad to
occupy and cultivate. They had already, several months be-
fore, addressed to the Board of Managers and their brethren in
America an earnest appeal for additional missionaries, and they
were waiting with anxious interest the arrival of those who
were now far on their voyage to the shores of Burmah.
The first of January, 1833, was a glad day for the members
of the mission, for it witnessed the arrival of four missionaries
THE MISSION REINFORCED. 123
of whose appointment they had already received notice, and of
whose labors they were now in unusual need. These were Rev.
Thomas Simons, Mr. Royal B. Hancock, a printer, with his
wife, and Miss Sarah Cummings, a lady experienced in teaching,
who was to be employed as instructress at one of the stations.
In the following June the mission was still further strengthened
by the arrival of Rev. Messrs. Brown and Webb, with their
wives, and Miss C. J. Harrington, afterwards Mrs. Simons,—
all of whom, after spending the remainder of the year in study-
ing the language at Maulmain, removed together to Rangoon
in January, 1834. The former of these missionary companies
brought with them two additional printing presses, one large
standing press, a large fount of English types, and all the ma-
terials for a type foundry. The arrangements for printing were
now complete, and fully adequate to the wants of the mission.
A strong house of brick, sufficiently large for the accommoda-
tion of the several presses now at Maulmain, was immediately
erected, and the great work was commenced of multiplying
copies of the Scriptures and tracts in Burman, Taling and Ra-
ren, which have since been scattered to the remotest parts of
the empire, and have communicated to multitudes of minds their
first lessons of gospel truth.
The arrival of these missionaries revived the drooping spirits
of their brethren, and imparted new energy to all departments
of the mission. The tidings which they brought of awakening
zeal and growing philanthropy among the churches of America,
were fitted to encourage the missionary in his solitary toils, and
bring him in nearer sympathy with the scenes and the friends
of his native land. The effect was obvious in all the interests
of the mission, and is often mentioned in the journals which at
this period record its history.
Mr. Kincaid had now penetrated the heart of Burmah Proper,
and we turn to a brief review of his labors and those of his
associates at the exposed and perilous stations of Rangoon and
Ava. The scene which is here presented is that of a people
crushed to the earth beneath the combined oppressions of super-
124 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
stition and despotism. No British power is here exerted to
secure the safety of the unprotected missionary. The shrines
of heathenism are jealously guarded by imperial authority.
Despotism frowns darkly over the land, and priestly persecution
is constantly watching for those who dare desert the supersti-
tions of their ancestors. Yet the intrepid missionary toils
bravely on, blessed with the favor of Heaven, and encouraged
by many unexpected manifestations of an awakening spirit of
inquiry among the deluded votaries of Buddhism.
Mr. Kincaid first went to Rangoon early in the spring of
1832, at about the time of Mr. Wade’s arrival there from
Mergui and Maulmain. They called on the viceroy a few
days after their arrival, and presented him with a map of the
world, lettered in Burman characters, and other works relating
to geography, chronology and astronomy. He received them
with courtesy and expressed much interest in the map, which
was the first he had seen in Burman letters. What, how-
ever, particularly excited his curiosity was the account which
he had heard respecting the printing press; he wished to know
if it was true that it could multiply copies of a writing without
limit; and after inquiring the price of a press, he requested the
missionaries to order one for him. The schools which had been
established by Mr. Jones continued to flourish under the care
of Mr. Kincaid; and though he was yet unable to preach in the
Burman tongue, he constantly maintained many of the public
Services of the mission by the aid of his native assistants. At
the close of the year he went to Madras, where he was married
to Miss Barbara McBain, daughter of a military officer in the
service of the East India Company. During his absence the
two teachers to whom he had entrusted the schools and the
other concerns of the mission were seized, by order of an infe-
rior officer of the government notorious for his hostility to
Christianity, fined and imprisoned, and afterwards whipped in
a shocking manner. This act of malignant violence was the
means of breaking up the schools, and for the time of intimi-
MISSIONARY LABOR RESUMED IN AVA. 125
dating all the inquirers who had frequented the zayat and ex-
pressed an interest in the new religion.
On his return to Rangoon, notwithstanding these unfavora-
ble occurrences, Mr. Kincaid was soon visited by persons in
various conditions of life, who often came in great numbers,
some from the city and others from distant provinces, to ask him
questions and to hear him converse. Some of them would
confess their belief in the Eternal God; others would say they
had long been reading the books and thinking about Christianity,
exclaiming, “It is wonderful!”—“A great light that is visiting
the world.” At the period of the famous annual festival of
Gaudama, the visiters grew still more numerous; not all to in-
quire concerning religion, but many to ask about the truths of
science, or the operations of the printing press; and when they
obtained some dim idea of the nature and results of the press,
they exclaimed, “How ignorant the Burmans are! They do
not know any thing.” In February, 1833, three Burmans were
baptized; others had requested baptism, but it was thought
best to delay its administration on account of the vigilance of
the Burman officers. Many more were known to be secret be-
lievers in Christianity, who did not dare openly to express the
faith which they cherished.
The visiters who came to the zayat from the interior had often
said to Mr. Kincaid, “Why do you not go to Ava and to all the
great cities of the empire? Many have heard of the new re-
ligion and the books, and wish to understand them.” Since the
death of Dr. Price none of the missionaries had visited the
capital, though the desirableness of maintaining a station there
had been frequently forced upon their attention. It had long
been deemed unsafe for Mr. Judson to appear there, on account
of his supposed connection with the English conquest of the
country, but there was no reason to apprehend that serious
molestation would be offered to any other missionary who should
conduct his labors with prudence. In these circumstances it
was decided that Mr. Kincaid should go to Ava, and attempt
again to plant a station there should no absolute hinderance be
12*
126 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
offered on his arrival. Having obtained the requisite pass with
great difficulty from the viceroy, he left Rangoon on the 6th of
April, 1833, accompanied by Mrs. Rincaid and her sister and
three native assistants, carrying with him 17,000 tracts and a
large number of copies of the Gospels of Luke and John, of the
Acts of the Apostles, and the Epistles. Their passage up the
Irrawaddy was beset with dangers, yet marked by many occur-
rences of great interest, illustrative of the singular spirit of in-
quiry which, in spite of all dread either of the government or
the priesthood, seemed every where to pervade the minds of
the people. They landed at nearly three hundred towns and
villages along the banks of the stream, and in nearly every
place which they visited they found some traces of the influence
which had been exerted by the native Christians, by tracts and
books or other agencies connected with the mission.
They arrived at Ava on the 30th of May, where a very dif-
ferent spirit seemed at first to array itself in opposition to their
plans. Mr. Kincaid was greatly perplexed with the difficulty
of finding a house in which he could dwell with his family, even
for the briefest period. His application to the government was
answered by repeated delays, made on the most trivial pre-
tences; and, on his taking possession of a house without the per-
mission of the authorities, he was subjected to the gravest inso-
lence and violence by the assaults of a mob headed by the
king's physician, to whom the house had been assigned on the
death of its proprietor. At length the British Resident, regard-
ing Mrs. Kincaid and her sister as English subjects, addressed
a strong remonstrance to the woongyees, who, now thoroughly
alarmed at their conduct, immediately provided the missionaries
with a house in the midst of the city, and punished the physi-
cian who had threatened them with violence. Thus was a
branch of the mission again established in the proud capital
where in other days the religion of the Saviour had been de-
liberately rejected, and where its dauntless heralds had endured
the most cruel sufferings. -
Mr. Kincaid had resided here but a short time, engaged in
BRINTING PRESS IN A.V.A. 127
the distribution of books and the usual occupations of a mis-
sionary, when he began to witness manifestations of the same
eager spirit of inquiry of which he had met with so many indi-
cations at Rangoon and along the Irrawaddy. In his journal
of July 17 he writes: “The very thing that ought to rejoice
me often troubles me; it is the numbers that are flocking to the
verandah to read and to hear the word of God. If I would, I
could not resist the tide that is setting in. Our verandah is
pretty well filled during the day, and sometimes forty or fifty
come in at a time.” He was treated with civility by the offi-
cers of the government, and was invited to visit the prince,
Mekara, who was a man of education and able to speak Eng-
lish. The prince held a long conversation with him, and asked
him for several books of science. we
The verandah of Mr. Kincaid was now daily visited by per-
sons of all classes, to the number often of one or two hundred,
who engaged in discussions with the missionary and the native
assistants, taking sides for or against the new religion with such
zeal as made him fear they might excite the jealousy of the
government. Two persons were at length baptized, – one of
them a priest, a man of eminent learning, who had long been
one of the most popular preachers of Buddhism in Ava. His
conversion to Christianity was known throughout the city, but,
to the surprise of the missionaries, it did not provoke persecu-
cution or excite opposition. The supply of books and tracts
which Mr. Kincaid had brought with him was now exhausted;
and, as the king had expressed a curiosity about the operations
of the printing press, he sent to Maulmain for Mr. Cutter to
come up to Ava and bring with him one of the presses. The
plan being approved by the members of the mission, Mr. Cut-
ter set out for the capital, and arrived early in January, 1834.
The press was immediately put in operation, and the printing
of tracts commenced, and two other places of preaching were
opened in different parts of the city, to which hundreds resorted
every day. - gº
The establishment of the press at Ava, and the interest with
which the preaching and the books of the missionaries were
128 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
regarded by the people, at length called forth the interference
of the government. At first, they were only forbidden to circu-
late a particular tract, called “The Investigator.” In the fol-
lowing March, however, they were summoned before the high
court of the empire, and formally questioned concerning their
objects and employment in Ava. These they fully avowed
and vindicated, on grounds which Moung Zah, the minister, did
not choose to debate; for he closed the audience by saying,
“Rangoon and Maulmain are very good places, – go there.”
While they were waiting in hourly expectation of a written
order to depart, Major Burney, the British Resident, interposed
in their behalf, and the fear in which the authority of England
was held induced the minister to say that he only objected to
their living in the city. They accordingly immediately took up
their abode in a house without the gates, but continued, with no
farther interruption from the government and with but little
abatement of the interest of the people, the accustomed labors
of the mission.
The exhibition of curiosity and earnest inquiry concerning
the truths of Christianity which Mr. Kincaid was constantly
witnessing, is a remarkable phenomenon in the mission at this
period of its history. It seemed like the waking of the popular
mind to the light of Christian truth, – the commencement of a
mighty and speedy revolution in the religion of the country.
But though hundreds were ready to admit the doctrines of the
gospel, and expressed their utter contempt of the teachings of
Buddhism, yet, with few exceptions, they came to no positive
conclusion, made no progress, and failed to reach the kingdom
of heaven. They created in the missionaries hopes which
were never realized, and gave promise of spiritual fruits which
were never borne. Yet while so few embraced the religion of
Christ, it cannot be doubted that many a mind relinquished for-
ever its belief in the superstitions of Gaudama, and it may be
that some, whose history was never known to the missionaries,
silently accepted the faith of the gospel and trusted in the Sa-
viour whom it offers.
BURMAN BIBLE conſPLETED. 129
On the 31st of January, 1834, Mr. Judson wrote the last
page of his translation of the Bible into the Burman tongue.
It was the noble task which he had prosecuted amidst the changes
of many years, often in solitude, in sickness and in sorrow ; and
now that it was completed, he dedicated it with pious gratitude
and an humble sense of its imperfections to the service and the
glory of God. The scene, as incidentally mentioned in his
journal, is one of affecting interest and grandeur. Poets, histo-
rians and moralists have all recorded the feelings of exultation
with which they have completed some work which they imagined
“the world would not willingly let die.” But the missionary
retires alone, and with the last leaf of his imperishable work in
his hand, he prays for the forgiveness of Heaven on all the sins
that have mingled with his labors, and devoutly commends it to
the mercy and grace of God, to be used as an instrument in
converting the heathen to Himself. Thus was the greatest of
blessings conferred on the people of Burmah, and in its unculti-
wated soil was planted the tree of life whose perennial leaves
shall be for the healing of the nation. The translation re-
ceived the emendations and corrections of its author, and has
been pronounced by scholars and philologists acquainted with
the Burman tongue, to be unusually accurate and perfect, —
well fitted to transmit to successive generations the unadulterated
word of God. The entire Bible was put immediately to press,
and handsome appropriations were made by the American Bible
Society to aid its publication.
In the following April, Mr. Judson was married to Mrs.
Sarah H. Boardman, who since the death of her husband had
been constantly engaged in the service of the mission, and at-
tached to the station at Tavoy. The school which she here
conducted with unusual success for many years, was for a time
suspended on her removal to Maulmain, but was resumed by
Mrs. Wade after her return from America.
As has been already mentioned, Mr. and Mrs. Wade, with
their native companions, arrived in the United States in May,
1833. Mr. Wade's health was greatly benefited by the voyage,
130 MISSIONS IN BURMAEI.
but it was deemed advisable by the Board that his visit to the
country should be prolonged, and made tributary as far as pos-
sible to the interests of the mission. He was accordingly re-
quested to visit, with his missionary companions, the principal
cities of the Union, and attend the meetings of Associations and
other public bodies of the denomination. It had also been fre-
quently suggested that as the Burman language had now been
made comparatively easy of acquisition, our missionaries might
acquire it before sailing from the country, and thus materially
abridge the time requisite for preparation after their arrival.
There were now eight persons who had received appointments
as missionaries to the East and were waiting to proceed to the
places of their destination; and the presence of Mr. and Mrs.
Wade in this country, with two intelligent natives, furnished a
favorable opportunity for making the experiment which had
been proposed. The Board accordingly resolved immediately
to open a mission school at Hamilton, N.Y.; – a place already
consecrated to theological studies, and presenting to the newly-
appointed missionaries many advantages of congenial society
and literary companionship. It was commenced on the 20th
of June, 1833, and continued nine months. It was attended by
eight students, who under the direction of Mr. and Mrs. Wade,
aided by the native teachers, pursued the study of Burman and
Raren with the most gratifying success.
In addition to their duties at the school, Mr. and Mrs. Wade
made an excursion to Ohio in the autumn of 1833, and attended
a large convention of the Baptists of the Western States at Cin-
cinnati; and in the following spring they travelled with the
corresponding secretary of the Board to Georgia, and visited
in the course of their journey most of the cities of the Atlantic
States. At Augusta, in Georgia, they met the Rev. Evan Jones
of the Cherokee Mission, and with him two converted Chero-
kees, who were also ordained ministers, and who were now pre-
sented to the Burman and the Karen. The spectacle was one
of rare and extraordinary interest. It was the first time in the
history of the world that representatives of these ancient aborig-
LARGE REINFORCEMENT OF THE MISSION. 131
inal races, dwelling on opposite sides of the globe, had met
together in the sympathies of a common faith, and joined in
common acts of Christian worship, — a beautiful emblem of the
Christian church, uniting in its wide embrace people of every
tribe and kindred and tongue under the whole heaven.
The visit of Mr. and Mrs. Wade to their native land, though
productive of temporary interruptions in the immediate labors
and plans of the mission, was attended with many most benefi-
cial results, which were seen in the deeper interest and the
larger contributions of the churches. They were welcomed by
their brethren in America as persons who had suffered much in
the cause of Christian truth, and by whose labors many heathen
had been turned to righteousness; and the two native converts
who were with them — the first who had visited this country
from the East—were every where regarded with the utmost
interest. Their presence placed near at hand the distant scenes
of missionary labor; their simple-hearted piety and correct
Christian views won the admiration of all who saw them, and
rendered more earnest the desires of American Christians to
give the gospel to the entire nations to which they respectively
belonged.
The missionaries, with their interesting companions, sailed
from Boston on the 2d of July, 1834; and with them Rev. Messrs.
Howard, Winton, Dean, and Comstock, and Mr. Osgood, a print-
er, with their wives, and Miss Ann P. Gardner, a member of
Mr. Wade's family, who was to be employed as a teacher,-in all
fifteen persons; by far the largest missionary company which
had ever embarked under the auspices of the Board. They
were all destined for the Burman and Karen mission, with
the exception of Mr. Dean, who had been assigned to the
mission in Siam. The ship, thus freighted with messengers of
mercy to the heathen, arrived safely at Amherst, December 6th,
1834; and the missionaries, more fully acquainted with the lan-
guage and customs of the country than any who had preceded
them, entered immediately upon the labors that awaited them
at the several stations to which they had been assigned.
132 MISSIONS IN BURMAH. sº
In August, 1834, Miss Sarah Cummings, the only missionary
occupant of the station at Chummerah, died at Maulmain of a
fever which she had taken in the jungle. Her brief career was
one of singular zeal and devotion to the service of the mission.
Soon after her arrival, before she had acquired the language,
taking with her the Burman teacher whom she had engaged,
she went out to occupy the secluded station which had then just
been planted in the wilderness. Here, at a distance of sixty
miles from the nearest habitation of civilized men, she dwelt
alone for a year and a half, studying the language, superintend-
ing the school, and, even before she could converse with the
people about her, by her presence and activity winning their
confidence, and imparting energy and order to all the operations
of the station. When seized with the fever that prevailed in
the jungle she hastened to Maulmain, where she died amidst
the tender assiduities and affectionate watchings of the mission-
aries, – a victim, it may be apprehended, to the self-sacrificing
though unguarded zeal which led her to this comfortless and
unhealthy out-post of the mission.
After her death, the Christians at Chummerah were long
without a teacher, except the native assistants who dwelt
among them. They were once visited, for a brief season, by
Mr. and Mrs. Winton; but in 1836, in accordance with the
habits of their race, they abandoned the town and scattered
themselves among the villages of the district, settling princi-
pally at the village of Ko Chet-thing, where they have contin-
ued to reside with greater contentment and more gratifying
social improvement. -
MEETING of THE convention AT RICHMOND. 188
CHA PTE R XIII.
MEETING of the Convention at Richmond in 1885. – Rev. H. Malcom visits
the Missions.—Comparative Results among the Burmans and among the
Karens. – Modes of Life and of Labor adopted by the Missionaries. – Mul-
tiplication of Schools. – Theological School at Tavoy and at Maulmain.—
Growth of the Karen Mission in British Burmah. — Agency of the Press. –
Station at Dongyahn. — State of the Mission in Burmah Proper. — Persecu-
tion at Rangoon. — Arrival of Messrs. Vinton, Abbott, and Howard at Ran-
goon.— Mr. Kincaid at Ava. – His attempt to visit the Shyan States.—
Civil War in Burmah. — Missionaries leave the Country. —Return of Messrs.
Abbott and Kincaid.—Joined by Mr. Simons.—Labors among the Karens.
—Final Departure of Missionaries from Rangoon in 1840,
THE eighth triennial meeting of the General Convention was
held at Richmond, Va., on the 29th of April, 1835. No meet-
ing of this body had before been held so far in the South, and
its members came together from different portions of the Union,
with an earnestness of feeling and of hope greater than had
ever before been exhibited. The extent and variety of the mis-
sionary labors, and the gratifying results which they had pro-
duced, were set forth in the report of the Board of Managers,
and filled the minds of the Convention with the most animating
and encouraging views of the progress of the cause in which
they were engaged. The sympathies excited by the occasion
were strengthened and enlarged by the presence of the Rev.
Messrs. Cox and Hoby, delegates from the English Baptist
'Union, who had been sent to the Convention for the purpose
of establishing more intimate relations between the Baptist
churches and associations in the two countries. The generous
donations which for several years had been annually made to
the Convention by the American Bible and Tract Societies,
to aid in the extension of the gospel, were gratefully acknowl-
edged in the report of the Managers; and in the fulness of
confidence and hope with which the whole body was now
animated, resolutions were adopted, directing the Board to en-
13
134 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
large their operations, and to employ every properly-qualified
missionary, whose services could be obtained; and the sum of
one hundred thousand dollars was mentioned as the anticipated
revenue for the current year. For reasons which were assign-
ed in the report, it was determined, to increase the number of
executive officers of the Board, – to associate another secre-
tary with Rev. Dr. Bolles, who had hitherto performed the
duties of the office alone. In the following year, the new ar-
rangement was completed by the election of Rev. Solomon Peck
as Assistant Secretary.
The proceedings of the meeting at Richmond, though charac-
terized by unusual harmony and Christian feeling, were yet
founded on too sanguine expectations. The Convention reck-
oned too confidently on its ability to enlarge the field of its
missionary operations, and a debt which embarrassed the treas-
ury for many years was the result of its well-meant though
incautious resolutions.
In the autumn of 1835, the Board appointed one of their
number, Rev. Howard Malcom, to visit their missions in Asia,
in order, by personal observation, to ascertain the condition of
the several stations, to confer with the missionaries respecting
their labors, and in general to collect such information pertain-
ing to missions, as might enable the Board more wisely to dis-
pense the sacred charities intrusted to their management, and
more effectually to promote the spread of the gospel among the
heathen.
He sailed from the United States in September, 1835, in
company with fourteen missionaries, male and female, desig-
nated to the several missions of the Board in Asia. In March,
1838, he returned to the country, after an absence of two
years and six months, – during which he journeyed by land
and by sea more than 53,000 miles. He visited all the mis-
sions under the direction of the Convention in Burmah, Arra-
can, Siam and China, and assisted in planting a new mission
among the Teloogoos, on the shores of Southern India. He
also became acquainted with the missionaries of other Chris-
COMPARATIVE RESULTs. 185
tian denominations in the East, visited them at their stations,
and informed himself respecting their different modes of labor
and their success. The arduous and protracted service attached
to such a deputation was performed by Mr. Malcom in a man-
ner that received the approbation of the Board; and the results
of his wide and varied observations have been communicated
to the public in the volumes of “Travels in South Eastern
Asia” which he has published:—a work written in an ex-
ceedingly pleasant manner, and filled with valuable information
concerning the countries in which the missions are established,
and with striking exemplifications of the results which the
propagation of the gospel has already accomplished, and is
destined yet to accomplish among the heathen. -
On the return of Mr. Malcom, in 1838, he was elected
Financial Secretary of the Board. Mr. Peck was at the same
time elected the Corresponding Secretary for the Foreign De-
partment, and Dr. Bolles, the senior Secretary, was assigned
to what was now denominated the Home Department, of the
executive arrangements of the Convention. - y
Though the mission in Burmah has accomplished results of
the most gratifying character, yet the narrative contained in the
foregoing pages fully shows that these results have not been such
as were originally anticipated by its founders and friends. They
had in view the Burman people, but it is not upon them that
the mission has bestowed its greatest blessings. Though it
has not at any time wholly failed of its primal design, it has
lately won its noblest and most signal triumphs, not among the
Burmans, but among the obscure and oppressed Karens,— a
down-trodden and subjugated race, of whose existence even, the
missionaries were scarcely aware when they first landed in the
country. These simple dwellers in the mountains and jungles
of Burmah, coming forth timorously from the obscurity in which
they hid themselves, listened to the message of the missionary,
and received it gladly, as the realization of the predictions which
had descended from the prophets of an elder age. From village
to village the tidings had been carried, either by the visits of the
136 Missions IN BURMAH.
teacher or his disciples, or by the vague rumor of the wander-
ing Karens, till hundreds of them had received the gospel and
been baptized in the name of Jesus Christ; — while their
Burman oppressors turned haughtily away, and clung with
greater tenacity to the absurd dogmas of their atheistic idolatry.
At each of the principal stations were now several missionaries
entirely devoted to the instruction and care of the Karens.
The converts from among them were gathered in separate
churches, separate schools were established for their instruction,
and their hitherto unwritten language required peculiar and
special study, with types and printing arrangements quite dis-
tinct from those of the Burman tongue. It was found to exist
in two dialects, having many roots in common, though differ-
ing in construction, and spoken by two separate divisions of
the race — the Sgaus and Pghos or Pwos. Mr. Wade, be-
fore his visit to the United States, had reduced to writing the
former of these dialects, and on his return he performed the
same work for the dialect of the Pwos, and, assisted by Mr.
and Mrs. Mason, commenced the preparation of tracts and the
translation of portions of the Bible in both these languages.
The Burman character, with some modifications, was preferred
by Mr. Wade in writing and printing Karen, though the Roman
letters have been recommended by many considerations, and
have often been adopted by other missionaries in the reduction
of oriental tongues.
The modes of life and of labor adopted by the members of the
mission at this period, were such as were forced upon them by
the circumstances of their situation, and the nature of the ob.
jects they aimed to accomplish. Year followed year, compara-
tively without striking events, yet each bringing with it new
interests to be cared for, new labors to be performed, and new
difficulties to be overcome. The routine of duties to which the
missionaries were principally devoted still consisted in preach-
ing through the cities and villages, in superintending the schools
which were now becoming numerous and important, in trans-
lating the Scriptures and preparing books for the people, and in
EXTENSION OF THE MISSION AMONG THE KARENS. 137
directing the operations of the several presses under their charge.
During the rainy months of the year they were restricted to the
cities and large towns in which the principal stations were es-
tablished, and there they were constantly engaged in the labors
mentioned above. But around each of these stations were clus-
tered, at various distances, out-stations and Christian villages, at
which churches and schools had been established, and placed under
the immediate care of the native assistants and pastors. So soon
as the wet season was ended, they left their homes and went
forth to the distant settlements that skirted the field of their
operations,— travelling in litters or on foot far across the jungle,
or embarking in boats upon the winding river, to meet the Chris-
tian congregations, who, with their native pastors, were awaiting
the annual visit of the missionary. His arrival was every where
hailed with gratitude and joy. He examined the converts who
were ready for baptism, and often administered to them the sa-
cred rite; he instructed the pastors and their flocks in the true
discipline of a church, and in the doctrines and ordinances of
the gospel; corrected their errors, settled their doubts, strength-
ened their principles and their hopes, and thus built them up in
the faith of the gospel. - t
Every journey thus made by the missionaries would usually
lead to the establishment of additional out-stations, and to the
wider extension of the field embraced by the mission. The
journals in which the incidents of these itineracies are recorded,
can alone set forth the proofs which were constantly presented
of the wide extent to which the spirit of religious inquiry had
now spread among the settlements of the Karens. Wherever
the missionaries went, they found that tidings of the faith they
taught had gone before them, and they seldom entered a district,
however remote or untravelled, in which there were not some
who professed to be worshippers of the living God. The obser-
vations and facts recorded at this period in the journals of Mr.
Vinton at Maulmain, of Messrs. Wade and Mason at Tavoy,
and especially of Messrs. Webb, Abbott and Howard, in their
excursions from Rangoon to the out-stations of Bassein, Pan-
13%
188. MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
tanau and Maubee, are sufficient of themselves to show how
far from being in vain had been the vicissitudes of labor and
peril, of sorrow and trial, through which the mission had passed.
Schools were established almost at the commencement of the
mission at each of the principal, and at several of the minor
stations. The care of these at first devolved to a great extent
upon the female missionaries, whose first aim was to train up
pupils of superior talents and energy, to become assistants and
at length teachers in the schools. Their number and their im-
portance had been constantly increasing. The regular day
schools at Tavoy and Maulmain were now in part supported by
allowances from the East India Company, and the instructions
given in them were no longer confined to the simplest rudi-
ments of knowledge, but comprised the study of English and
of the languages of the country, together with arithmetic, geog-
raphy and other common branches of education. Several
boarding schools were opened, for both Burmans and Karens
who came from a distance in the interior, in which the pupils
were under the constant care of the missionaries. In the
schools supported by the government, the direct teaching of
Christianity was not sanctioned by the colonial officers who had
them in charge ; but in the other schools, and especially in the
boarding schools, it formed of course a part of the system of
instruction, and exerted the happiest influences upon the char-
acters of the pupils. Thus by the lessons of science as well as
by the teachings of religion, did the missionaries seek to reclaim
the minds of the young from the vain superstitions of their fa-
thers, and to direct them to the beautiful forms of Christian
truth. Many of the pupils of the Karen schools have been con-
verted to Christianity; and the faith of many more in the doc-
trines of Gaudama must have been irrecoverably shaken.
In addition to the schools above mentioned, a seminary was
established at Tavoy in 1836, for instructing native converts of
suitable talents and characters, in the doctrines of Christianity,
in order that they might thus prepare to preach the gospel to
their countrymen. It was placed at first under the charge of
THE PEGUANs. 139
Mr. Wade, and commenced in May with eighteen pupils, — of
whom twelve were Karens, five were Burmans and Peguans,
and one was a Hindoo. The first session closed in July, when
the students were subjected to an examination in the portions
of the Bible in which they had been instructed. In 1837, Mr.
Wade's health was again seriously impaired, and at the close of
the year the school at Tavoy was suspended. The Burman
pupils attached to it were removed to Maulmain, – where, in
1838, a school especially for Burmans was established and
placed under the charge of Rev. Edward A. Stevens, a young
missionary whose education had been conducted with special
reference to this department of labor.
So marked is the difference of races in Burmah that it has
generally been found expedient to have separate schools, and as
far as possible separate churches, for each of the different races
to whom the labors of the mission have extended. Schools have
accordingly been established at the principal stations, for the
Burmans, the Karens, the Eurasians, or half-castes, and the
Peguans" or Talings. These last are a people entirely distinct
from the Burmans in every thing but religion. They are the
feeble remnants of a race that once subdued and overran the
country, but who were soon driven back by the Burmans under
Alompra, the founder of the present dynasty. They are very
numerous in the neighborhood of Maulmain and Amherst, and
at the latter place a station, designed especially for them, was
planted in 1836, and placed under the charge of Rev. Mr. Has-
well. Before this time, the Peguans had often awakened the
interest of the missionaries, as they saw them mingled with the
congregations of Burmans or Karens to whom they preached
in the zayat or the chapel, and attempts had been repeatedly
made to master their language. Mrs. Judson, after her removal
to Maulmain, with characteristic energy and zeal devoted her-
self to its acquisition, and translated and caused to be published
* See Memoir of Mrs. Sarah B. Judson, chap. 12. Dr. Malcom estimates
the number of the Peguans in Burmah at 70,000.
140 Missions IN BURMAH.
in Peguan several tracts, her own compilations of the Life of
Christ, and a considerable portion of the New Testament. On
the arrival of Mr. Haswell, she surrendered to him her labor
and the fruits it was already promising, and returned to the
appropriate duties of her own station, having performed a task
of great difficulty and importance which no other member of
the mission was then able to accomplish. .
Nearly every year had witnessed the enlargement of the
means of multiplying copies of the Scriptures, and other books,
which the missionaries prepared for the instruction of the peo-
ple. The books used by the Karens and the Peguans at first
were in manuscript; but by the close of 1837 fonts of type
were prepared in each of the Karen dialects, and thousands of
copies of books for learning the Karen and Peguan languages,
as well as of tracts and portions of the Scriptures, were imme-
diately published. The printing operations were carried on
principally at Maulmain, though many of the Karen books were
printed at Tavoy, and a press had been employed at Rangoon,
and one at Ava. In 1838 four new presses were added to the
station at Maulmain and one to that at Tavoy, making ten in
all connected with the mission, together with a very large supply
of materials for printing.” The natives speaking the several
languages soon acquired the art of printing them, and were
successfully employed by the missionaries in the labors of the
press. Societies were also formed at Tavoy and at Maulmain,
which received contributions from the converts, both native
and English, and from English officers resident in those cities;
and by their agency tracts were printed and distributed, and
the preaching of the gospel was sustained at particular locali-
ties. Thus did those who had experienced the benefits of the
mission commence an attempt to defray the expenses of its
support, and the generous sacrifices they often made bear the
strongest testimony to its unspeakable value. The society at
* This number of presses was never in operation at any one time. The
power press proved useless, and two of the others were early removed to
DONG - YAHN. . . . 141
Tavoy, in 1839, supported from its own treasury not less than
thirteen native preachers, and also defrayed the expenses of
several of the Karen schools.
At the distance of thirty-five miles from Maulmain was the
out-station of Dong-yahn, the solitary residence of Miss Eleanor
Macomber, whose devoted and useful labors and early death
deserve to be recorded among the events of this period. She
entered upon the station in December, 1836, and found the peo-
ple, who were Pwo Karens, the slaves of intemperance and of
all the disgusting vices of heathenism. With the aid of two or
three native assistants, she maintained public worship on the
Sabbath, and morning and evening prayers at her own dwell-
ing; and also opened a school, which soon numbered ten or
twelve pupils. Before the close of the first dry season she had
the happiness of seeing twelve Karens baptized and formed
into a Christian church. She spent the period of the rains
from May to September at Maulmain, and on her return to the
jungle found the church and the schools prospering under the
charge of the native preachers. The little church was soon
committed to the care of Rev. Mr. Stevens, of the Theological
School, and was occasionally visited by other missionaries from
Mauhmain. Amidst the prejudices and the occasional persecu-
tion of the priests and the votaries of Buddhism, the gospel
continued to spread among the people; and Dong-yahn, by the
instrumentality of this indefatigable lady, soon became the seat
of a flourishing station, and the centre of religious light and
knowledge to a wide region crowded with benighted Karens.
Her influence upon her own sex was very extraordinary, and
its results were visible in numerous dwellings among the vil-
lages of the jungle. But her missionary career was destined
to be brought to an early close. She died after an illness of a
few days, on the 16th of April, 1840, just as the fruits of her
labors were beginning to adorn and cheer the secluded spot
which she had chosen for cultivation, —leaving behind her a
name and a memory which will long be gratefully cherished by .
142 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
the rude dwellers in the wilderness whom she was the first to
instruct in the gospel of Christ.
As we turn to trace the history of the missionaries who were
at this time stationed in Burmah Proper, we meet with scenes
widely different from the quiet and uniform progress that
marked the stations beneath the protection of the British flag.
Their labors were constantly exposed to interruption from the
caprices of jealous rulers or the violence of contending factions,
while the few who ventured to profess themselves disciples of
Christ were visited with the opposition of their friends, and
with all the evils incident to a corrupt public sentiment. In
1835, a persecution of the most violent character broke out at
Rangoon. It was commenced by some of the petty magistrates,
who had long viewed with jealousy the labors of the native
assistants as they were employed in preaching and distributing
books and tracts in and around the city. The chief object of
their hostility was Ko San-Lone, a man of superior intelligence
and piety, and of great boldness and activity in the service of
the mission. He was one of the three native assistants who
had accompanied Mr. Kincaid to Ava, and since his return had
been, with Ko Thah-a, the pastor of the church, almost the only
Christian who dared to distribute books, or lift up his voice
for God beneath the frowning despotism of Rangoon. On the
25th of February, the violence, which had long been threaten-
ing, broke out against him. He was seized and sent to the
prison, where he was beaten, loaded with irons, and subjected
to severe and ignominious labor. His heroic Christian faith
quailed not before this storm of persecution, and his character
continued to shine brightly amidst the clouds that lowered
around him. Before the tribunal of cruel magistrates, beneath
the lashes of his persecutors or in the felons' dungeon in which
he was immured, he still bore himself with the meek fortitude
of a martyr to the truth. Though repeatedly threatened with
death unless he would abjure his religion and worship Gauda-
ma, he still trusted, without faltering, in the God he served, and
presented a noble exemplification of Christian character. After
PERSECUTION AT RANGooN. 143
nearly a fortnight's detention he was released from prison, but
his entire property was confiscated and he was forbidden by the
woongyee to resume his labors as assistant in the mission. He
died soon after, much lamented by the missionaries with whom
he had been associated.
Nearly every Christian in Rangoon was subjected to fines or
to imprisonment, in the course of this attempt to extinguish by
violence the new religion taught by the missionaries. Nor was
the persecution confined to the city. Preaching excursions had
been made into the neighboring district of Maubee, and along
a stream known as the Karen Brook, and the number of Karen
converts thus made, and now living scattered through the coun-
try, far exceeded that of the Burman Christians of Rangoon.
These were all visited with fines and arrests, and officers went
through the villages to collect by force the heavy assessments
which had been laid upon all who refused to worship Nats, and
to acknowledge Gaudama. The persecuted Christians fled in
every direction to escape the exactions of their oppressors; but
they bore with them the faith they cherished, and preached the
gospel as they went in regions where it was before unknown.
Ko Thah-byu, the pastor of Maubee, with a portion of his flock,
was soon found in Pegu telling the story of the cross, and
teaching the precepts of Christ among the numerous popula-
tion of that hitherto unvisited district.
The first effect of the persecution at Rangoon was wholly to
suspend the operations of the mission. Not a Burman or a
Raren for a time dared to appear as a worshipper at the veran-
dah, and with a few exceptions, none ventured even to visit the
missionaries or to perform for them the commonest services of
life. The alarm, however, was not then of long continuance,
and the families attached to the mission continued to reside in
the city and to prosecute their labors, often with encouraging
success, until subsequent events compelled them to abandon the
station.
In October, 1836, Mr.Vinton arrived at Rangoon from Maul-
main. He was accompanied by the two native preachers, Ko
144 MISSIONS IN BURMLAH,
Chet-thing and Ko Taunah. As the open opposition to the labors
of the missionaries had subsided, an excursion was undertaken
by Messrs. Vinton, Abbott and Howard, up the Irrawaddy and
into the district of the Maubee Karens. They met with a large
number who, in spite of the persecution which had scarcely yet
died away, had embraced Christianity, and had long been wait-
ing for the visit of a missionary that they might be baptized.
In the course of their journey they administered the sacred
ordinance to one hundred and seventy-three, ninety-two males
and eighty-one females, nearly all of whom had received the
gospel from the preaching of their indefatigable countryman, Ko
Thah-byu. Of the persons baptized, eleven were head men of
villages or chiefs of small districts, and many of them had been
worshippers of God for two, three and four years. It was sup-
posed that not less than a hundred more were scattered over
the jungle, who had in like manner embraced Christianity and
were waiting to receive baptism. The Karens in and around
Rangoon evinced the utmost eagerness to be instructed in the
truths of the gospel, and though closely watched by the Buddh-
ist priests and forbidden the use of books, yet several hundreds
of them learned to read at their own dwellings, away from the
observation of their Burman rulers. These incidents occurring
unexpectedly in the wilderness, awakened anew the most glow-
ing hopes respecting the Karens, and satisfied the missionaries
that even beneath the oppressive rule that crushed them to the
earth in Burmah Proper, they were still a people whom God
had chosen to bless with a knowledge of himself.
Nor were the missionaries at Ava suffered to prosecute their
labors without frequent interruptions, dictated now by the jeal-
ousy of the priests, and now by the factious violence of rival ru-
lers. Messrs. Cutter and Brown, who had been associated with
Mr. Kincaid in the management of the station, returned to Ran-
goon in the spring of 1835, taking with them the press, but leav-
ing behind a large collection of books and tracts which had been
printed at the capital. Mr. Kincaid was joined in the autumn
of the following year by Mr. and Mrs. Simons, and early in Jan-
MR. KINCAID’s NORTHERN Excursion. 145
guary, 1837, by Mr. and Mrs. Webb, who brought with them addi-
tional supplies of printed works for the use of the station. No
‘place in the empire furnished to the missionary such opportuni-
*ties for disseminating a knowledge of the gospel, as did Ava.
: Being the seat of the Golden Presence, and the centre of author-
ity and interest to a numerous people, it was a place of constant
resort for persons from every portion of the realm. Hither came
‘caravans of merchants to bring the products of every district,
and hither resorted, with their bands of retainers, the princes of
distant provinces to settle the questions of state and offer their
allegiance to the monarch. It is the place where representatives
of every condition and of every district are accustomed to as-
semble, so that what is promulgated at Ava is likely to be
borne abroad in different directions as widely as the Burman
sway extends. - •
Mr. Kincaid had formed the acquaintance of several persons
who came to the capital in the train of some princes of the
Shyans, a people occupying the provinces on the northern fron-
tiers of Burmah. In his intercourse with them he inquired
carefully concerning the position of their country and its conti-
guity to China, and conceived that by pursuing a route in that
direction a missionary might not only introduce the gospel to
the Shyans, but also obtain access to the Chinese. For the
purpose of ascertaining the correctness of his views, and of be-
coming acquainted with the crowded population of the northern
provinces, he formed the design of an excursion to the frontiers
of Assam. The design having been approved by his brethren
of the mission he obtained permission of the government, though
with great difficulty and after many delays, to travel through the
provinces of the north. On the 27th of January, he embarked
on the Irrawaddy, with four native Christians for his attendants, in
a boat which was despatched in his charge, on the public service,
by Colonel Burney, the English Resident at Ava. He passed
through regions of great natural beauty and magnificence, often
landing at the large towns which lined the banks of the river,
and after twenty-two days reached Mogaung, a city distant three
14
146 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
hundred and fifty miles from the capital. Here, beneath the
shadow of the Himmaleh mountains, he found spreading before
him the vast wilderness which separates Burmah from Hindos-
tan, skirted by a territory crowded with people and abounding
in mines of amber and serpentine stone. He made several ex-
cursions into the valley around the city, but, finding himself un-
able to procure either provisions suitable for his journey or men
to accompany him, he was obliged again to set his face towards
Ava. A civil war had now broken out, and the country was
distracted with tumults and filled with hordes of banditti. In
his passage down the river he was suddenly attacked by one of
these marauding bands, plundered of every thing in his pos-
session, and then left to pursue his journey. On the following
day he was again seized by another band of robbers, who strip-
ped him of his clothes, bound him with ropes and compelled him
and his attendants to march with them to their village, where he
witnessed scenes of heart-rending atrocity among the prisoners
whom the freebooters had collected. His life was constantly in
danger; but with the assistance of a young Kathay who belonged
to the band and who had been at his house in Ava, he contrived
to effect his escape, and fleeing to the mountains he found his
way across a thinly inhabited district to the capital, having
passed through the greatest perils and escaped assassination only
by the merciful interpositions of Heaven.
Mr. Kincaid reached Ava on the 11th of March, and found
the city filled with alarm, and threatened with all the horrors
of anarchy and civil war. Prince Tharawaddy had risen against
his brother the king, dethroned him and sent his officers to
prison; and having established himself at Mokesobo, a garrisoned
city forty-five miles north of Ava, was now investing the capital
and the neighboring cities with his armies. Colonel Burney,
the English Resident, put his house in a state of defence, and, in-
viting the mission families to join his own, was able to keep at a
distance the marauding parties that desolated the neighborhood,
and to protect the lives and property of the missionaries. They
had cherished the hope that the new king, who had the reputa-
RARENS OF • SOUTHERN BURMAH. 147
tion of being liberal in his views, when fairly seated in power
would look favorably upon their labors. But in this they were
disappointed. At the first interview which they had with him
after his accession to the throne, he expressly prohibited the work
in which they were engaged: “I am now king of Burmah,”
said he, “and am therefore tha tha na da ya ka, (defender of
the faith,) and must support the religion of the country. You
must give away no more of Christ's books.” He, however, de-
clared that he had no objection to scientific books, and invited the
missionaries to bring a press to Ava and print and circulate
them. It was the aim of the new king to set aside the treaty of
Yandabo; and he informed Colonel Burney that he no longer
recognized him as English Resident, though he did not wish
him to leave the capital. The colonel, however, decided to re-
tire, and the missionaries, apprehending that war might again
ensue between the English and the new Burman authorities,
made preparations to accompany him. They left Ava, and the
little church of twenty-one members which they had planted
there, on the 17th of June, and arrived at Rangoon on the 6th
of July. The missionaries stationed at Rangoon had already
gone to Maulmain, in consequence of the threatening aspect of
the revolution, and the decrees which had been issued by the
viceroy of the province. Mr. Kincaid followed them after a
few weeks; Mr. Webb repaired to Calcutta in order to take
passage for America for the recovery of Mrs. Webb's health,
while Mr. Simons lingered for many months at Rangoon, en-
gaged in such labors as he was able to perform in the disturbed
condition of the city and the empire.
But while the labors of the missionaries among the Burmans
at Rangoon were thus nearly suspended, among the Karens in
the neighboring districts they were prosecuted with even un-
wonted success. In the spring of 1837 Mr. Abbott had again
come among them, and was now travelling through their villages
in the districts of Maubee and Pantanau. He every where wit-
nessed the effects of the oppressive taxation to which they were
subjected. The names of all the Christians were reported to
148 MISSION3 IN BURMAH.
the rulers, and they were fined in many instances so heavily that
they were obliged to give up their children as slaves, in order
to satisfy the rapacity of their persecutors. In December, 1837,
Mr. Abbott went to the province of Bassein, where, with many
others, a young chief of one of the Karen districts embraced
Christianity, and evinced the utmost interest in the conversion
and improvement of his countrymen. He came to Rangoon in
a few weeks, bringing with him nine of his people who had been
converted by his agency, and who he desired should learn to
read, that they might return and instruct the villages from which
they came. He was a person of unusual intelligence and in-
terest of character, and seemed to spring at once into a full
comprehension of the inestimable blessings which Christianity is
designed to bestow. In August, 1838, several months after-
wards, he came again to Rangoon to be instructed and to receive
an additional supply of books for his people. He had already
accomplished his object, and, in the highest spirits, with his fol-
lowers all laden with books, he had taken leave of the mission-
aries, when the whole company were seized by Burman officers,
loaded with irons, and put in the stocks and in prison. Thence
they were removed to the great pagoda, where they were
“offered in sacrifice,” as it is called, or sentenced to be per-
petual slaves—they and their posterity—to the gods. They
were, however, finally released from the ignominious bondage
to which they were doomed, by the intervention of the mission-
aries, and by the exertions of an officer attached to the British
Residency. Gathering as many of the tracts and books as had
escaped destruction, they concealed them about their persons
and returned to their native jungle, where the young chief was
long engaged in spreading the knowledge of the gospel among
his countrymen. * -
In November, 1838, Messrs. Abbott and Simons, finding that
the aspect of political affairs was becoming more threatening,
and still apprehensive of war between the English and the Bur-
mese, left Rangoon and went to Maulmain.
In November, 1839, a year after the departure of the mis-
PIOUS ZEAL OF KAREN CHRISTIANS. 149
sionaries, Mr. Abbott in company with Mr. Kincaid again visit-
ed Rangoon. They went at the special invitation of the viceroy
who had known Mr. Kincaid at Ava, and who, it now appeared,
was desirous that the American teachers should return in order
that the people, by seeing them at their usual work, might be
more fully assured of the public tranquillity. The viceroy re-
ceived them with great courtesy and invited them to bring their
families and settle again at Rangoon, assuring them that they
should be protected from all annoyance and that their condition
should be made comfortable. This was certainly a new spirit
to proceed from the viceroy of Rangoon, and was a source of
great encouragement to the missionaries, although they discov-
ered, in the feverish condition of the public mind and in the
fickle policy of the government, many hinderances to the imme-
diate prosecution of their labors. -
There were at this time upwards of three hundred mem-
bers of churches, Burmans and Karens, in the city and the
neighboring districts. These scattered disciples met the mis-
sionaries with the utmost delight, which was warmly reciproca-
ted when it was ascertained that they had generally been true
to their principles amidst innumerable perils, and, with the bless-
ing of Heaven on their endeavors, had won a multitude of
others to the faith they cherished. The assistants at Pantanau
and Maubee gave the most gratifying accounts of the success of
the gospel in those districts, and the tidings from Bassein showed
that a work of divine grace had been in constant progress there.
The young chief had remitted none of his activity in the cause
of Christ. His house was often visited by large companies of
his people who came to learn to read, and to hear the gospel; and
in that district alone, it was supposed that from six hundred to
one thousand were now waiting to be baptized. So wonderful
were the triumphs of the Christian faith in the wilderness of
Burmah I Though propagated only by those who themselves
had just received it and had scarcely learned to read the Gospels
in which it was contained, though persecuted and despised by
cruel priests and superstitious despots, it had taken possession
14*
150 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
of the hearts of hundreds of Karens, and was beginning to start
a whole people on a new career of social progress and spiritual
elevation.
Messrs. Kincaid and Abbott remained at Rangoon six weeks,
during which time information was received that the viceroy
was re-called on account of his liberal treatment of foreigners,
and that another was already appointed in his place. He soon
arrived and proved himself to be a man of stern, despotic tem-
per, which had before manifested itself in frequent acts of cruelty.
Decrees were immediately issued, designed to put an end to all
intercourse between the Burmans and foreigners; and the mis-
sionaries, despairing of being able either to go up to Ava or to
engage openly in their work at Rangoon, retired to Maulmain,
and soon after joined the mission in Arracan.
C HAPTE R XIV.
THE Province of Arracan. — Mr. and Mrs. Comstock settle at Kyouk Phyoo.
— Arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Hall. — Their early Death. — Messrs. Abbott
and Kincaid join the Mission.— Mr. Abbott at Sandoway. —Labors among
the Karens.—Their rapid Conversion to Christianity. — Burman Persecu-
tion of the Christian Karens.—Their Fidelity and its Results.-Sympathy
of British Residents.-Death of Mrs. Abbott, and Visit of Mr. Abbott to the
United States.— Mr. Kincaid at Akyab. — The Mountain Chief. — Sad
Changes in the Mission. — Death of Mr. and Mrs. Comstock. — Progress of
the Mission in British Burmah from 1840 to 1845; also in Burmah Proper.
— Changes in the Board. — Death of Rev. Dr. Bolles.
THE province of Arracan lies upon the eastern shore of the
Bay of Bengal, and is bounded on the north by Chittagong, on
the east by the Yoma Mountains, which separate it from Bur-
mah, while on the south and west it is washed by the waters of
the bay. It embraces sixteen thousand five hundred square
miles, and formerly belonged to the Burman empire; but in
1826 it was ceded by the treaty of Yandabo to the British East
AIRTRAC A.N.
Scale of Miles
tº 20 40 60

# -- ~ PROVINCE OF ARRACAN. 153
India Company. It is divided into four districts, Akyab, San-
doway, Aeng and Ramree,—the latter consisting of islands, of
which the largest is forty miles in length. The province con-
tains about a thousand villages, and is occupied by a population
numbering nearly two hundred and fifty thousand, of whom the
greater part are called Mugs, presenting some peculiarities,
though undoubtedly of the same general race and speaking the
same language as the Burmans.” A branch of the mission
was commenced in Arracan in March, 1885, by Mr. and Mrs.
Comstock, who established themselves at Kyouk Phyoo, a town
near the northern extremity of Ramree island. They were
hospitably received by Mr. Adams, the Master-Attendant of the
port; and, having obtained a suitable dwelling, they soon com-
menced the distribution of tracts, and conversation with the
people as far as their knowledge of the language would permit.
Early in 1836 Mr. Comstock made a journey to the district of
Aeng, for the purpose of becoming better acquainted with the
people of the province, as well as of spreading abroad a know-
ledge of the gospel. His preaching was every where listened
to with the curiosity which usually characterizes intelligent
heathen, particularly among the Kyens, a race inhabiting the
mountains, and resembling the Karens in many features of their
character and condition.
On his return to Kyouk Phyoo he established a school, in
which many of the pupils, as is usual in British Burmah, were
instructed in English. The English officers resident near the
station uniformly encouraged the labors of the missionaries,
and in many instances proved themselves their warm personal
friends. In December, 1836, the station was visited by Rev.
Mr. Malcom, and at his instance Mr. Comstock went to Akyab,
then the residence of Rev. Mr. Fink, of the Serampore Baptist
Mission, and procured an intelligent Arracanese convert to act
as assistant. Two other assistants were subsequently obtained
* For a full account of this province see “Notes on Arakan, by the late
* Rev. G. S. Comstock,” &c., published in the Journal of the American Orien-
- tal Society, Vol. I. No. 3, 1847.
154 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
from Maulmain, and upon these three subordinate laborers were
now devolved the principal active operations of the mission.
In May, 1837, the station was reinforced by the arrival of
Rev. Levi Hall and Mrs. Hall, whose accession was greeted
with the liveliest interest and hope. A church was soon after-
wards organized, which was composed only of the missionaries
and their native assistants, as none of the natives had yet em-
braced the Christian faith. Both the newly-arrived missionaries
however, fell victims to the fever of the country, and died before
their labors had begun, – Mrs. Hall in July and Mr. Hall in
September after their arrival. The following year Mr. and
Mrs. Comstock, in consequence of their own enfeebled health,
were obliged to spend at Maulmain. In February, 1839, they
returned to Arracan, accompanied by Rev. Lyman Stilson and
his wife, who had been designated to the mission before leaving
the United States. They also took with them four native assist-
ants; and, as their former station had proved unhealthy, they
now established themselves at the city of Ramree, where they
hoped to find a more salubrious climate than at Kyouk Phyoo.
The church was removed to the new station, and its number by
the recent accessions to the mission was increased to eleven
members. Schools were immediately established, tracts and
books were circulated in great numbers, and the preaching of
the gospel was constantly maintained, yet none of the supersti-
tious natives of the country had thus far been converted to
Christianity. - -
Thus through vicissitude and affliction had the mission in Ar-
racan been constantly passing for five years, when Messrs. Ab-
bott and Kincaid repaired to the province early in 1840. They
had been obliged to leave their stations in Burmah Proper, in
consequence of the opposition which was made to their labors, and
of the additional persecutions to which the converts to the gos-
pel were subjected by their continued presence in the country.
They however were determined still to watch over the fields they
had left, and so far as possible to maintain a communication—
Mr. Kincaid with the Burman converts at Ava, and Mr. Abbott
MR. ABBOTT AT SANDOWAY. 155
with the scattered Karens in the districts of Bassein and Ran-
goon. They at first regarded their residence in Arracan as
only temporary, and were prepared to hasten back to the posts
they had been compelled to abandon, so soon as the stern
despotism of the monarch should in any degree relax its
rigor. After a brief residence with their brethren at Ramree,
Mr. Kincaid went to Akyab, the largest town in the district
of that name, where he planted a station for the native Ar-
racanese; while Mr. Abbott repaired to Sandoway, a locality
which he selected as favorably situated for opening a communi-
cation with the Karens, who dwelt beyond the mountains of Ar-
racan, in the neighboring districts of Burmah Proper. Here he
was soon to be the witness of triumphs of the gospel over the
errors and superstitions of a heathen land, such as the history
of the Christian church has seldom recorded even on its bright-
est pages. -
He arrived at Sandoway on the 17th of March, and immedi-
ately sent two of the assistants who had accompanied him, across
the mountains, to inform the Karens of the adjacent district of
Burmah of his arrival and to invite them to visit him. They
were also directed to find the young men who had studied with
Mr. Abbott at Rangoon, and to persuade them to come and re-
sume their studies at Sandoway. The spirit of inquiry had
been deeply awakened in preceding years, and the tidings that
the teacher was again within their reach were borne from vil-
lage to village, and were every where received with enthusi-
asm. The passes between the two countries were guarded by
jealous Burmans; yet, in contempt of watchful rulers and in
spite of mountain barriers, large companies of Karens found
their way to the missionary, some asking for baptism, others
seeking books for their countrymen at home, and others still de-
siring to remain and study under the direction of Mr. Abbott. In
this manner came many of the assistants and their converts from
the regions of Maubee and Pantanau, and even from the vicin-
ity of Rangoon, from whom he was able to learn the condition of
the churches which had been planted there, and also the won-
156 MISSIONS IN BURMLAH,
derful spread of the gospel among the people. Many of the
assistants were of the opinion that the number of persons pro-
fessing to be Christians, in these districts of Burmah Proper,
could not be less than four thousand. Of those who came to
Sandoway many were baptized, and the school which Mr. Ab-
bott opened was soon filled with fifty pupils, of whom the greater
part had already been or were preparing to become assistants
in the mission.
The accounts which he thus received from the native Chris-
tians whom he had left in Burmah Proper, were generally of
the most satisfactory character. They had been subjected to
almost incessant persecution; but they had borne insult and in-
jury, fine and imprisonment, with the meek endurance which
the gospel enjoins, and had firmly kept the faith they had pro-
fessed in the doctrines and promises of Christianity. They had
also nobly aimed to communicate it to others; and through that
wide region, village after village, which had never heard the
voice of the missionary, had now received the gospel and be-
come obedient to its requirements. The Burman magistrates,
finding the number of Christians becoming so large, often re-
laxed their severity and said, “Let them worship their God, if
they pay their taxes and obey the laws,” — a policy which was
adopted in order to prevent the persecuted Karens from emi-
grating in a body to the British provinces. -
In January, 1841, Mr. Abbott started on an excursion to
visit the Karens scattered along the eastern frontier of Arra-
can. In the course of this journey he met a large number who
came from the Burman side of the mountains, who told him
more particularly of the sufferings they had endured for read-
ing the “white book” and receiving “the religion of the for-
eigner.” Their knowledge of the gospel was clear and full, to
a degree that often awakened the surprise of the missionary;
and their desire to be baptized and enrolled among the disciples
of Christ was unabated by the persecutions they had suffered.
He was absent nearly a month, and during the time he baptized
fifty-seven persons—a number which, in addition to those who
MR. ABBOTT's MISSIONARY Tour. 157
had previously received baptism, was by the end of the first
year of his residence at Sandoway increased to one hundred
and eighty-four.
At the beginning of 1842, he made a second visit to the same
frontier region, where he had now arranged to meet a large
number of the assistants who were preaching in Bassein and
other districts of Burmah, and with them such of their converts
as were ready to receive baptism. At Magezzin, a Christian
village four days from Sandoway, at which a church had been
planted the year before, he met several assistants and a num-
ber of converts who, were awaiting his arrival. Here, in a
stream many a time before hallowed by the sacred rite, he bap-
tized twenty-four men from different villages of Burmah, three
of them from the distant banks of the Irrawaddy north of
Rangoon.
At Magezzin, at Oung Kyoung and Sinmah, where churches.
had been planted the year before, the people had already erect-
ed commodious chapels, and were now maintaining the worship
of the sanctuary and the institutions of the gospel. In these
and in other villages where the Christians were numerous, Mr.
Abbott appointed assistants to watch over them, to preach to
them, and in all things, save in administering the ordinan-
ces, to act as pastors of the churches. The persons who
were thus appointed had long been known to the missionary;
they had been his pupils, and had received their views of pasto-
ral duty and of church discipline from his instructions; and they
proved themselves worthy of the confidence he reposed in them.
Some of them were subsequently ordained, and have since bap-
tized multitudes of their brethren into the faith of the gospel.
In this excursion Mr. Abbott was absent thirty-one days, in the
course of which he received visits from a large number of the
native preachers from Burmah, visited all the churches that lay
along the frontier of Arracan, and administered the ordinance of
baptism to two hundred and seventy-nine persons, who were
recommended by the assistants as giving satisfactory evidence
of conversion and of faith in Jesus Christ.
15
158 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
But it was not alone in excursions like these, which he made
at least once every year, that Mr. Abbott witnessed the power
of the gospel over the hearts of the Karens. They constantly vis-
ited him at Sandoway, often coming twelve or fifteen days’ jour-
ney, to converse with the teacher, to obtain books, or to receive
baptism. The school which he had established for their in-
struction, though at one time broken up by the frightful ravages
of the cholera, was generally attended by nearly fifty pupils,
among whom were frequently many of the native assistants,
who thus spent the intervals of their residence at Sandoway in
qualifying themselves more fully for their work as preachers
of the gospel. In this manner he saw the cause to which he
was devoted every where triumphant, and though obliged to con-
duct the mission unassisted and alone, he beheld over the fields
which it occupied a whole people turning to God. Within the
period of five years after his arrival in Arracan, the number of
persons baptized by him, or by the pastors under his charge, was
upwards of three thousand,- a number considerably larger than
had then been baptized in connection with all the other missions
of the Convention taken together.” The greater part of these
were baptized by the native preachers in Burmah Proper, where,
in multitudes of cases, without ever having seen the missionary,
they received the gospel from the heralds whom he had sent, and
boldly professed their faith in its doctrines in contempt of the
stern despotism that lowered around them.
During the winter of 1842 and '43, in consequence of a royal
order which had been issued, to exterminate the “white books”
and the “religion of the foreigner” from the country, the per-
secutions of the Christian Karens, which for a time had been
remitted, were renewed with the utmost cruelty and violence.
Whole families were seized at their homes, at places of wor-
ship, or while assembled to hear the reading of the Scriptures;
the men were often brutally beaten, while the women, separated
from their children, were chained together in pairs, and all were
*In the year 1844 alone, the number baptized by Mr. Abbott and his assist-
ants was 2,039. º .
PERSECUTION OF THE CHRISTIAN KARENs. 159
driven away to a distant prison, where, with no food save such
as the charity of the heartless Burmans allowed them, they were
left to drag out a wretched and starving confinement till they
could satisfy the rapacity of their persecutors. They were lib-
erated at length on the payment of nearly six hundred rupees,
—a fine which in many instances robbed them of their entire
possessions. Yet they bore their persecutions with heroic forti-
tude, and when released from imprisonment, refused to promise
that they would abandon the worship of God. The effect was
every where most favorable. “The noble, fearless testimony,”
says Mr. Abbott, “which those prisoners bear to the truth, has
given their cause notoriety and character. The common people
throughout the country generally look upon the new religion
with interest at least, and whisper their sympathies with its
suffering votaries.” -
So frequent and violent were the persecutions at this period,
that the Karens began to flee in great numbers from the ruth-
less violence which every where, in Burmah Proper, crushed
them to the earth. They left the harvests of paddy which they
had gathered, and the fields they could no longer cultivate in
safety, and fled to the mountains; and though the passes were
watched by officers and informers, in order to prevent their
emigration, yet hundreds of these persecuted Christians escaped
the jurisdiction of their oppressors, and took refuge in Arra-
can. During the winter and spring of 1843, Mr. Abbott re-
cords the arrival of upwards of two hundred emigrant families.
Whole villages would in this manner cross the mountains, in
company with their pastors, – bringing with them their buffa-
loes and the few articles of property which they could move,
but trusting to providence and the charity of their brethren for
the supply of their immediate wants. Their condition was often
pitiable in the extreme, and enlisted the kindliest sympathies
not only of the missionaries but also of the British residents of
the province. By Mr. Abbott they were regarded as a part of
his own scattered flock, and he exerted himself to the utmost
for the relief of their necessities. He encouraged them in their
160 MISSIONS IN BURMAEI.
afflictions, and aided them in forming new villages; and at his
instance Captain Phayre, the assistant commissioner of the prov-
ince, supplied them with food, allowing them a year in which to
make their payments, without interest. Though thus depend-
ent on the bounty of strangers, they were now secure in the
fruits of their own industry. Though they had come to a less
genial soil, they had gained the priceless privilege of freedom
to worship God.
Seldom do the checkered pages of missionary history record
a more affecting instance of persecution for conscience' sake,
than that which was thus visited on these simple-hearted, Chris-
tian Karens. Hunted down like the birds upon their own
mountains, beaten with stripes, loaded with chains and shut in
prisons, their infant faith was subjected to trials which that of
Christians even in the most favored lands might not always
endure unharmed. Yet they wavered not. They abandoned
their villages and their cultivated fields. They sacrificed their
property, they gave up their country and perilled their lives;
but they would not resign the faith and doctrines whose power
they had experienced. They would still worship God, even
though they were obliged to do it beneath another sky and in a
strange land. Their ultimate fate lends a still darker hue to
the melancholy picture of their sufferings. In the summer
after their arrival, just as they had become settled in their new
villages, and were beginning to enjoy the blessings of the free-
dom they had so dearly won, the cholera again laid waste the
country, and hurried these emigrant Karens by hundreds to the
grave. In the panic which it created many fled across the
mountains back to the persecuting land which they had left;
while many more, uncared-for and unknown, perished in the
jungle, victims of the pestilence they sought to escape. -
From the imperfect outline thus given it is possible to form
but a faint conception of the responsibilities and labors which
pressed upon the solitary missionary who at this period, from
behind the mountains of Arracan, conducted the entire opera-
tions of the mission in Burmah Proper. He was charged not
MR. ABBOTT's BEREAVEMENTs. - 161
only with the Superintendence of a wide missionary district, of
which the inhabitants with one accord seemed to be turning to
Christianity, but with the care and instruction of a rising minis-
try, who were perhaps to form the religious opinions and habits
of a numerous people, and also with the necessity of deciding the
questions and settling the interests of infant communities just
emerging from barbarism, and entering upon a career of social
progress. His position, as is often true of the missionary, more
than realized the classic fables that relate the deeds of the early
civilizers of the human race,—the founders of mythologies,
the teachers of letters and of arts; for with the aid of a far
purer civilization he was shaping the social and religious char-
acter of a whole people.
But the task was too great for a single, unassisted individual.
Aid was earnestly solicited ; but, in the straitened circumstances
of the Board, it could not be sent. His constitution, though
naturally strong, was prostrated beneath the labors of his post;
and when repeated domestic bereavement added its own poig-
nant sorrows to the weight of ceaseless responsibility, his health
was gone, and he was obliged to abandon the work he had at-
tempted to carry forward. During the summer of 1844, which
was very sickly in the province, he had two of his children
swept away by the hand of death, and in the following January
Mrs. Abbott, after a brief illness, followed them to the tomb.”
Mr. Abbott, thus broken in health and bereft of the dearest objects
of his affection, finding himself no longer able to sustain the
labors of the mission, was soon afterwards obliged to return to
the United States in order to recruit the energies of his enfee-
bled constitution. -
We turn now to other scenes of labor and of trial con-
nected with the mission in Arracan. It was in the month of
April, 1840, that Mr. Kincaid, as has already been mentioned,
* Mrs. Abbott was Miss Ann P. Gardner, who joined the mission at Tavoy
in 1835, on the return of Mr. and Mrs. Wade. She resided at Tavoy, and at
Matah and other out-stations ºf the mission, and was married to Mr. Abbott
in 1837.
15*
162 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
commenced the station at Akyab. Here, amidst a population of
16,000, he found a native church planted many years before by
the English missionaries, and now numbering thirteen members.
They had been long without any pastoral guidance or instruc-
tion, and, amidst the evil influences of heathenism, the doctrines
of the gospel had well-nigh faded from their minds. The mis-
sionary, however, assembled them together and immediately
established religious meetings for their instruction, and soon
had the happiness of seeing around him a large congregation,
some of whom were eagerly inquiring respecting the new re-
ligion. Among these were several persons of superior educa-
tion and of high standing; and one especially who several years
before had been appointed by the king at Ava, on account of
his attainments.in Buddhist learning, to go to Arracan as a mis-
sionary, to explain the sacred books to the priests and the people
of the province. During the first summer of his residence at
Akyab Mr. Kincaid baptized three native converts, and was
daily instructing about thirty others, who professed to believe the
gospel, but in the judgment of the missionary were not sufficiently .
established to receive baptism. The baptism of several persons
of influence at Akyab called forth a violent opposition from
many of the priests and their followers. Those who visited the
missionaries or read their books were obliged to encounter the
utmost hostility and scorn from their neighbors and friends, and
were often threatened and sometimes assaulted with actual
violence. The church gradually increased in spite of all oppo-
sition, and another was planted at Cruda, an out-station five
days’ journey from Akyab, at which twelve persons were soon
baptized. .
In May, 1841, Mr. Kincaid was visited by a chief and several
members of the tribe of Kemmees, a race inhabiting the moun-
tains, and resembling in habits and appearance the Kyens and
Karens. He was known as the “mountain chief,” and was at
the head of several subordinate clans and petty chiefs. They
listened to the conversation of the missionary in the Burman
tongue, and retired with their barbarian indifference, seemingly
THE MOUNTAIN CHIEF. 163
undisturbed by the doctrines which they had heard. After a
few months, however, Mr. Kincaid received a communication
signed by “Chetza, the mountain chief,” and by thirteen subor-
dinate chiefs, stating that they had thought of the new religion,
and that, as their people were ignorant, they desired them “to
know the true God and to be taught the true book.” - The com-
munication also contained the names of two hundred and sev-
enty-three children, whom they would place at school if he
would come to their mountains. The request was repeated a
little time after, by the principal chief in person, who came to
the mission house with a large retinue, just as Mr. Kincaid
and Mr. Stilson were setting out on a journey to the Kemmee
villages. He hastened back with the utmost joy to prepare for
their reception. So great was his interest in their visit and so
strong his desire to have them remain, that when the mission-
aries arrived, five days after his return, they found to their
surprise a zayat erected for their accommodation, and supplied
with many of the articles of comfort which the chief had seen
only in the mission house at Akyab.
The Kemmees, like the Karens, though in a far more limited
sense, seemed to be prepared, by their traditions and their sensi-
bility to moral truth, to receive the gospel. The chief offered
to build a house for the permanent residence of the mission-
aries, but they were unable to remain. A few months after-
wards, however, Messrs. Kincaid and Stilson, at different dates,
again visited this mountain people; and the latter in the course
of a brief residence studied their language, and finding it almost
identical with the Kyen which he had already mastered, he par-
tially reduced its elements to writing.” But the sickness of his
* This reduction has been carried still further by Mr. Stilson, who has re-
cently prepared and printed a spelling book and a Christian reading book in
the language of the Kemmees. They were visited in 1848 by Mr. Ingalls, and
have found an active friend in Mr. Crawfurd, the English Commissioner in
Arracan. By him they have been relieved from the tyranny of Burman mag-
istrates, and a Christian head man, of their own race, has been placed over
them. Several of them have already embraced Christianity, and as a people
they now present a most inviting field for missionary labor.
164 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
family compelled him to return to Akyab; and from the same
cause both Mr. and Mrs. Kincaid were required, a few months
later, to leave their post in the mission and go to Calcutta, and
afterwards to sail for the United States. Mr. Stilson was thus
obliged to occupy the station at Akyab, and abandon his design
of preaching to the mountain chief and his numerous clans of,
subject Kemmees, who represented themselves as all ready to
learn “the wisdom of the true book.”
Still darker clouds, however, were now lowering around the
mission, and heavier misfortunes were about to befall its inter-
ests. Mr. and Mrs. Comstock had, since 1840, been living at
Ramree, with Mr. and Mrs. Stilson for their occasional coadju-
tors, assiduously engaged in the prosecution of the mission of
which they were the earliest pioneers. Here, though but few
had been admitted to the church by baptism, they had witnessed
many most encouraging indications, and were anticipating still
other fruits of their labors, when, in the month of April, 1843,
Mrs. Comstock fell a victim to an epidemic then prevailing in
the town. Two of her children were soon after hurried away by
the same destroyer; and at the end of a year, in April, 1844,
the unfortunate mission was afflicted with the severest loss it
could sustain, in the death of Mr. Comstock himself. He was
a missionary of superior education and of the noblest qualities
of character, and during the nine years of his residence in
Arracan had been distinguished for his wisdom, fidelity, and
useful labors. In addition to his services in the mission, he had
nearly completed an elaborate work on the condition of the
province and its inhabitants, and the changes which had been
wrought by the missionaries and the English residents.” He
died at the age of thirty-five, ere he had reached the meridian
of his days, just at the period when the mission, already para-
lyzed by repeated bereavements, seemed most to need the ser-
* A part of this work has been published in the Journal of the American
Oriental Society, with the title of “Notes on Arakan,” and in the American
Baptist Missionary Magazine, vol. xxvii, p. 375, and has been already referred
to on a preceding page. .
MISSIONS IN THE TENASSERIM PROVINCES. 165
vices and the counsels which his sound discretion and long ex-
perience so well fitted him to bestow. •
Thus, one after another, had the missionaries of Arracan dis-
appeared from the fields of their labor, until, at the beginning
of 1845, Mr. and Mrs. Stilson found themselves alone, in the
entire province,—the solitary conductors of a mission which had
created the highest interest, and which still needed only addi-
tional laborers to insure for it the noblest results.
The two principal stations of the mission in the Tenasserim
provinces were at Maulmain and at Tavoy. These had now
become so extensive and had spread their branches so widely
from the central location, as henceforth to be designated in the
reports of the Board as independent missions. At Maulmain
there were residing in 1840, Messrs. Judson, Howard, Stevens,
Osgood and Simons, in connection with the Burman department,
and Mr. Vinton, in connection with the Karen department of
the mission. The wives of the missionaries were usually ac-
tively employed in the schools, some for the Karens and others
for the Burmans. At Amherst was a secondary station, at which
Mr. Haswell was still engaged in preaching to the Talings, or
Peguans, in translating the New Testament into their language,
and superintending the schools which with Mrs. Haswell he had
established among them. Around Maulmain were now seven
other subordinate stations, all for the Karens, which were under
the charge of native assistants, though visited by the missiona-
ries at least once during every dry season. The number of
churches thus connected with what was now called the Maulmain
Mission, was seven, containing in all four hundred and fifty-four
members. * º -
At Tavoy, though there was a small Burman church, yet the
missionaries were almost exclusively devoted to labors among
the Karen population. There were now dwelling there only
Messrs. Wade and Mason with their wives; Mr. and Mrs. Ben-
nett being absent on a visit to the United States, and Mr. and
Mrs. Hancock having been recently obliged to abandon the mis-
sion. Around Tavoy were eight out-stations, all of them having
166 MISSIONS IN BluRMAH.
churches whose members now numbered four hundred and sev-
enty-three. The church at Matah alone contained three hundred
and ten. In connection with this mission also was the impor-
tant station at Mergui, where Mr. Ingalls, a preacher in Burman,
and Mr. Brayton, a preacher in Pwo Karen, with their wives,
had been residing since the beginning of 1839. In the vicinity
of Mergui, and under the care of its missionaries, were also
eight out-stations with six churches, numbering in all one hun-
dred and thirty-one members. The most flourishing of these
stations was at Kabin, whose church now numbered seventy-five
members. Under the direction of the missionaries at Maulmain
were thirty native assistants, and seven schools of different
grades, for a population of several different races; and in connec-
tion with the mission at Tavoy were sixteen schools, nearly all
for IXarens, and twenty native assistants. Several of the schools
and the assistants however, both at Tavoy and at Maulmain, were
supported by the contributions of missionary societies in these
cities, or by benevolent individuals residing there. From these
sources was derived a yearly revenue of from two to three thou-
sand rupees,” contributed in great part by the English officers
and residents, but yet in no insignificant degree by the native
Christians themselves.
Of the missionaries to the Burmans, Mr. Osgood was mainly
occupied with the labors of the press and the superintendence
of the financial concerns of the mission. Mr. Stevens, in addi-
tion to his charge of the theological school, was pastor of the
church of Pwo Karens at Dong-yahn, and in connection with
Mr. Simons and Mr. Howard, who had charge of the other
schools at Maulmain, preached in the chapel of the English
church, which was composed of soldiers of the regiment sta-
tioned there. Dr. Judson, though in enfeebled health, still de-
voted his principal attention to a careful revision of the Burman
Bible, preached once on a Sabbath — all that his strength would
* In the year ending July 1, 1845, the Maulmain Society alone contributed
to the mission upwards of six thousand rupees, nearly two thousand nine hun .
REVISION OF THE BURMAN BIBLE. - 167
allow — to the Burman church, and superintended the labors
of the preaching assistants, who were employed among the Bur-
man population of the town and the neighboring villages. This
disposition of their labors left not a single missionary free from
other engagements, and able to give his undivided attention to
the work of preaching to the Burmans.
The Karen missionaries, both at Maulmain and at Tavoy,
though having schools and the preparation of books constantly
in charge, were yet able, from the circumstances in which they
were placed and the character of the people to whom they
ministered, to bestow a larger portion. of their time and atten-
tion upon their chosen work of preaching the gospel; and,
according to the plan which has been already explained, they
spent the dry season of each year abroad among the villages and
churches of the jungle; while in the rainy season they resided in
town, teaching at the schools, writing for the press, and preaching
on the Sabbath and on other stated days of every week. This
constant proclamation of the gospel by the preacher's own voice
is undoubtedly the instrumentality which, before all others, is
most blessed of Heaven for the conversion and religious in-
struction of mankind; and the fact has been singularly illustrated
in every year's experience of the mission to the Karens.
Of the revision of the Burman Bible, which had long en-
grossed his attention, Dr. Judson remarks that it cost him more
time and labor than the first translation. In prosecuting the
task he availed himself of the latest and best works of biblical
criticism, and spared no pains in selecting and incorporating in
the new edition the most approved results of the labors of Eu-
ropean and American philologists. Seldom, we may well be-
lieve, has a translation of the word of God been accomplished
with greater fidelity, or in a manner better fitted to bring the
unadulterated truth of revelation in contact with the mind of a
mumerous people. Hitherto they have despised and rejected it;
but the day is not distant when they will receive it as a most
precious gift, and write the name of the venerable translator
among those of their most honored benefactors. The last sheet
168 MISSIONS IN BURALAH.
of the revised translation was committed to the press in October,
1840; and a few months after its completion Dr. Judson, finding
his health seriously impaired, made a voyage with his family to
the Isle of France. He was absent nearly a year, and returned
with renewed strength in December, 1841, and soon after enter-
ed upon a work which he had long been meditating, — the prep-
aration of a Dictionary in English and Burmese, for the purpose
of facilitating the acquisition of both these languages. It was
undertaken in accordance with the repeated request of the
Board, and at the instance of missionaries and others who had
encountered the difficulties usually presented, especially in ac-
quiring the Burman tongue.
The Burman Theological School at Maulmain, whose mem-
bers had always been less numerous than was anticipated at its
commencement, was suspended at the close of its session in 1841,
in consequence in part of the small number of its pupils, but
more especially on account of the limited finances of the mis-
sion ; and from this cause several other schools were also closed
at the same time. The Theological School was reëpened in the
summer of 1844, but with only six Burman candidates for the
ministry. During the interval in which the school was sus-
pended Mr. Stevens, in addition to his other duties, devoted him-
self to editing a monthly journal in Burmese, designed especially
for the native Christians. It was found to subserve an impor-
tant purpose in exciting the interest of the people and diffusing
valuable information, and is still continued under the title of the
“Religious Herald.” A similar journal, the “Morning Star,”
was commenced for the Karens at Tavoy, in 1843, and has
been sustained with equal benefit. -
But amidst these efforts of unwearied zeal, and this ceaseless
employment of learning and ability, of labor and money, in the
Burman department of the mission, the people for whom they
were all designed, it must still be confessed, continued to reject
Christianity, and to cling with their wonted tenacity to the su-
perstitions which enslaved them. The Karens on the contrary,
though furnished with less expensive means of instruction,
A KAREN THEOLOGICAL SEM.INARY. 169
were still accepting the gospel; and in city and jungle, in the
walleys and on the mountains, throughout the provinces of
Tenasserim, were now to be met Christian families growing in
the knowledge of the truth, and making constant progress in the
kindly charities and domestic comforts of civilized life. The
officers of the East India Company every where favored the
arrangements which were adopted for their social advancement,
by protecting them from molestation and injustice, and appoint-
ing their more intelligent chiefs to petty offices in the govern-
ment of the country. Under the influence of the efforts which
were thus made, and of the freedom which they enjoyed, their
progress in industry, temperance, neatness and thrift was very
remarkable. The entire New Testament was not printed in
their language till near the close of 1843; yet long before this
time, their churches had become so numerous in many districts
of British Burmah, as far to transcend the ability of the
missionaries to give them the attention and the instruction which
they required. Both the churches and the schools that were
connected with them were of necessity left almost entirely to
the care of assistants who, though the best that could be se-
lected, yet themselves often required scarcely less instruction
and supervision than their pupils and flocks.
The need of a seminary, especially for the training of preach-
ers for the Karens, had now become most urgent, and Was
strongly set forth in all the communications of the missionaries.
Classes of native assistants had been formed at different periods
and instructed by Mr. Abbott at Sandoway, by Mr. Vinton at
Maulmain, and by Mr. Mason and others at Tavoy. But with the
numerous other duties constantly pressing upon these missionaries,
little could be done for the theological education of the assistants;
and many of them had entered upon their labors with no more
knowledge of letters than they had been able to obtain in six
months' or a year's residence at school. These men, amidst all the
imperfections of their training, proved themselves faithful, labo-
rious and successful; yet they were destitute of the knowledge
and discipline, the energy and judgment, which mental training
16
170 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
alone can give, and which are indispensable in forming the
Christian character of a people just learning their first lessons of
the gospel.
These views were fully presented to the Board at its meeting
in 1843, and though its treasury was still embarrassed, it was
determined immediately to attempt to supply this most pressing
necessity. In resolutions, which were then adopted, the Acting
Board were instructed “to direct special attention to the work
of diffusing among the Karens the blessings of education, and to
take immediate measures to furnish the native assistants among
that people with such theological education as will enable them
most successfully to preach the gospel among the heathen.” In
these circumstances the Acting Board, impressed with the ne-
cessity of having experienced men designated to a service so
important to all the future interests of the Karen people, imme-
diately opened a correspondence with the Rev. J. G. Binney,
pastor of the First Baptist Church in Savannah, Ga., and in-
vited him to enter the service of the Board as a missionary.
He yielded to the solicitation, and was appointed to the charge
of the Karen Theological School at Maulmain. At about
the same time, Rev. E. B. Bullard, pastor of the church in
Foxborough, Mass, decided to relinquish his parish, and offer
himself to the Board as a missionary to Burmah. He was most
readily and thankfully accepted, and appointed to labor as a
preacher and a translator among the Pwo Karens at Dong-yahn
and its vicinity. They sailed from Boston, with their wives, in
November, 1843, and with them also Mr. T. S. Ranney, a
printer, Mrs. Ranney, and Miss Julia A. Lathrop, all appointed
to reside at Tavoy, and to aid the suffering mission among the
Karens. These were followed in the succeeding autumn by
Rev. E. B. Cross, appointed to the charge of the theological
school at Tavoy, who, with his wife, sailed from Boston in Oc-
tober, 1844, and arrived at Maulmain in the following February.
Thus were a portion of the wants of this most interesting
mission happily supplied; and though the early return of Miss
Lathrop, occasioned by her loss of health, and the premature
KARENS OF MERGUI AND THE SELoNGs. 171
death of Mr. Bullard, have blighted many of the hopes raised
by this arrival of efficient helpers, yet the labors of the others
have strengthened the hands of their brethren, and opened a
brighter prospect to the Karen churches scattered over the jun-
gle of Burmah. -
A new impulse was also at this time given to the improve-
ment of the Karens at Mergui, by the very liberal and well-
directed measures of Major Broadfoot, then just appointed com-
missioner of the province. He aimed, in all his official acts, to
raise their race from degradation and servitude, to reward with
suitable promotion, industry and intelligence, and to awaken
within them a confidence in themselves and an aspiration for a
higher and more independent position. The missionaries too
had the happiness of witnessing the most beneficent results fol-
lowing from their labors. The churches constantly increased
in numbers, and the native Christians, beneath the approving
smile of the government, were assiduous in their endeavors to
acquire useful knowledge and to form worthy characters.
Among the islands that line the coast between Mergui and
Penang were found a singular people, known as the Selongs,
resembling the Karens, but far more ignorant and degraded,
and often made the sport and the prey of their more powerful
neighbors. They were visited several times by Mr. Brayton,
in 1843, by whom many of them were baptized and formed
into a church; and in the following year their peculiar dialect
was reduced to writing by Mr. Stevens, at the request of Major
Broadfoot, who contributed a thousand rupees in aid of the
object, and for the establishment of schools for their instruction.
In all this time no missionary had resided at Rangoon. Mr.
Abbott at Sandoway had attempted to maintain a communication
with the native Christians, but in consequence of the great dis-
tance and the ceaseless espionage of the government he had not
been successful. The station was visited by Mr. Vinton in 1842,
and again in 1844 by the same missionary, in company with
Messrs. Stevens and Ingalls,-in the latter instance for the
purpose of deciding on the expediency of reëstablishing the
172 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
mission there. The church was still under the charge of the
Burman pastor, Ko Thah-a, though languishing in the absence
of the teachers, and exposed to the combined assaults and evil
artifices both of Buddhist and of Roman Catholic priests. Its
members, however, had remained faithful, though many who
had formerly met with them at their places of worship had been
turned by evil influences away from their company. Twelve
Karens were baptized in one of these visits, and the hopes and
faith of the little band of Christians were greatly strengthened
by the sympathy and instructions of the missionaries, who, they
had been told by their foes, “had taught them a false religion,
and then abandoned them.” It was, however, regarded as still
inexpedient for them to attempt again, at present, to reside at
Rangoon, notwithstanding the many evils attendant on their
absence, and they were compelled reluctantly to withdraw till
some change should be effected in the cruel and persecuting
policy adopted by the government.
In 1842 the health of Rev. Dr. Bolles had become too infirm
to admit of his discharging all his duties as one of the corres-
ponding secretaries, an office which he had held since the remov-
al of the Board to Boston in 1824, and Rev. Robert E. Pattison,
D. D. was appointed associate secretary, in addition to Rev. Solo-
mon Peck, who had been appointed in 1835. In September of
that year, soon after Dr. Pattison had entered upon the duties of
his office, Dr. Bolles finding his health still declining tendered
his resignation to the Board. It was accepted by them with the
sensibility due to his long and faithful services; and though he
was released from all official responsibility he was requested
still to retain his post at the missionary rooms, and to render to
the other secretaries such aid and counsel as his enfeebled
health might allow. He, however, soon found it necessary to
withdraw entirely from all connection with the Board, for the
malady with which he was afflicted pressed heavily upon him.
His life's work was done; and he was waiting but a brief inter-
val of calm reflection and Christian hope ere he entered upon
the scenes of a higher existence. After a lingering illness, he
FINANCIAL EMBABBASSMENT OF THE BOARD. 173
died at Boston, January 5, 1844, in the sixty-fifth year of his
age. He had been an officer of the Board for twenty years,
and for nearly seventeen years had held the office of Correspond-
ing Secretary. Under his judicious management the enterprise
of foreign missions had steadily advanced, until it had now be-
come the most important charity of the Baptist denomination in
America. His gentle spirit and amiable manners had won
friends for the cause among all classes of people, – while the
-wise Christian counsels, which went forth in his correspondence
from the retirement of the secretary’s office, had shaped the
early character of the missions which had been planted in the
most distant lands. The tributes which have been paid to his
memory, by those who knew him best, bespeak his exalted
worth; but the noblest monument of his life and character is the
success of the enterprise which he so faithfully labored to
promote.*
C H A P T E R XV.
FINANCIAL Embarrassment of the Board. — Its Causes.—AQuestion of Slave
ry. — Correspondence of the Board with the Alabama State Convention.—
Formation of the Southern Baptist Convention. — American Baptist Mis-
sionary Union.—Visit of Rev. Dr. Judson to the United States.—His re-
turn to Burmah with other Missionaries. – Changes in the Missions during
his Absence. — Executive Officers of the Board. — Return of Mr. Abbott to
Sandoway. —I(aren Converts waiting for Baptism. — Appointment of new
Missionaries. – Latest Reports from the Missions in Burmah.
DURING the entire period whose events we have narrated in
the foregoing chapter, the treasury was constantly embarrassed
by the want of sufficient funds, and the action of the Board
was in consequence straitened and confined. Many of the mis-
sions were suffering for the want of reinforcement or from the
*For a delineation of the character of Dr. Bolles, and a full record of his
services, see a Discourse delivered at his funeral by Rev. Daniel Sharp, D. D.
Also, American Baptist Missionary Magazine, vol. xxiv, p. 49.
16*
174 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
curtailment of their supplies, and some even were on the point
of being abandoned. This embarrassment arose in part from
the financial pressure which at that time spread over the whole
country, and of course curtailed the charities of all classes of
the people ; but also, and it is to be feared to a still greater
extent, from the dissensions which had sprung up in different
portions of the Union respecting the institution of slavery in
the Southern States. .
The great question whether Christianity sanctions the hold-
ing of slaves had long been debated through the country and
was now agitating the entire Christian community. Among
the Baptists, as well as among several other denominations, it
was immediately blended with the action of each one of their
great national societies. Many individuals and a few churches
in the North had already refused to contribute to the treasury
of the Convention, alleging as the reason their unwillingness
to mingle their funds with those derived from the holders of
slaves. At length the Alabama State Convention addressed to
the Acting Board a series of resolutions, declaring their views
concerning their own rights and immunities, and demanding an
“explicit avowal that slaveholders are eligible and entitled
equally with non-slaveholders” to any appointments, either as
agents or as missionaries, in the gift of the Board. To this
communication the Acting Board replied, that in the principles
contained in the resolutions they fully concurred,—that all the
members of the Convention, alike from the South and the North,
whether slaveholders or not, were unquestionably entitled to
all the privileges and immunities which the constitution grant-
ed or permitted; — but that the constitution of itself guarantied
to no one the right to be appointed to any office, agency or
mission; that the appointing power was conferred solely upon
the Board, they holding themselves accountable to the Conven-
tion for its discreet and faithful exercise. With respect, how-
ever, to the immediate question which was implied in the reso-
lutions, whether a person holding slaves, but possessing in other
respects the requisite qualifications, would be appointed a mis-
-º
ORGANIZATION OF THE MISSIONARY UNION. 175
sionary, the Acting Board explicitly declared, that “if any one
should offer himself as a missionary having slaves, and should
insist on retaining them as his property, they could not appoint
him.” -
So soon as this declaration was made public, the churches in
all the Southern States withdrew from the Convention and
formed a separate organization, adopting as a title “The South-
ern Baptist Convention.” In this state of things it was deemed
necessary that the friends of missions in the Baptist denomina-
tion in other parts of the country should organize themselves
anew, under a constitution better adapted to their altered cir-
cumstances. A special meeting of the Board of Managers was
accordingly held at Philadelphia, in September, 1845, at which
it was determined “to request the President of the General
Convention to call an extra session of that body, to be held in
the Baptist Tabernacle in the city of New York, on the third
Wednesday of November next, at 10 o'clock, A. M.” The Con-
vention assembled agreeably to the summons of its President;
and after a full consideration of the imperfections of its present
organization, entered upon the work of forming a new constitu-
tion that should be better suited to the high ends to be accom-
plished by a missionary body. The Convention had hitherto
been composed of triennial members who individually contributed
the sum of one hundred dollars each year, or who were elected as
members or delegates by churches or societies contributing that
sum. It was proposed in its reërganization to limit its opera-
tions to one object, and to have it henceforth composed of actual
and permanent members, who should be admitted on payment to
the treasury at any one time of the sum of one hundred dollars.
A constitution embodying this provision was framed and
adopted by the Convention, and arrangements were made for
procuring, from the legislature of Pennsylvania, such modifica-
tions of the original charter as were required by the changes
which had been introduced in its organization; and also, as the
property of the association was principally at Boston, to procure
from the legislature of Massachusetts an additional charter of
176 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
incorporation. These and other necessary legal measures hav-
ing been accomplished, the Convention with its modified charter
and its new organization went into operation in May, 1846,
under the name of the “AMERICAN BAPTIST MISSIONARY UN-
Ion.” The debt of the Convention, amounting to forty thousand
dollars, was fully provided for by a subscription which was
completed before that time; and all its property, together with
its engagements and liabilities, was transferred to the Union.
Rev. Mr. Shuck, of the mission in China, entered the service
of the Southern Convention, while all the other missionaries
continued their connection with the Missionary Union.*
Thus amicably and honorably was accomplished a local sepa-
ration of the Baptists of the South and the North, which had
been anticipated only with apprehension and alarm by many
of the wisest and most patriotic members of our communion in
both parts of the country. Such a separation could not be other
than painful, for it drew a dividing line between those who had
from the beginning been warm personal friends, and efficient
fellow-laborers in the sacred work of giving the gospel to the
heathen. The bad consequences, however, which were antici-
pated from it, the Social disunion and strife which were deemed
likely to ensue, have thus far been averted, and the cause of
true piety and the enterprise of Christian missions have appa-
rently suffered no material detriment. Each missionary organ-
ization is now engaged in its appropriate sphere, without rivalry
or opposition, in promoting a common object and advancing a
common interest of the human race. The churches which are
connected with each are learning a loftier piety and practising
a larger liberality than ever before; and we may well indulge
the animating hope that, in the overruling providence of God,
this event, which at first seemed fraught with disaster and strife,
will be made to contribute to the more rapid advancement of
the Redeemer's kingdom on the earth.
* For details relating to these transactions see American Baptist Magazine,
vols. xxv and xxvi. -
VISIT OF DR. JUDSON TO THE UNITED STATES. 177
At the special meeting of the Convention which was held at
New York, in November, 1845, was present the Rev. Dr.
Adoniram Judson of Burmah, who a few weeks before had
arrived in his native land, after an absence of thirty-three years.
The venerable missionary was introduced to the Convention in
an impressive manner, by Rev. Dr. Cone, one of the oldest
members of the Board who were present, and was welcomed
by its President, Rev. Dr. Wayland, in an address of great
eloquence and beauty, to which, with a feeble voice, he made a
brief but touching response. The scene was one of subduing
interest, and will never be forgotten by those who beheld it.
Hundreds were gazing for the first time upon one, the story of
whose labors and sorrows and sufferings had been familiar to
them from childhood, and whose name they had been accustomed
to utter with reverence and affection as that of the pioneer
and father of American missions to the heathen. They recalled
the scenes of toil and privation through which he had passed,
they remembered the loved ones with whom he had been con-
nected, and their bosoms swelled with irrepressible emotions of
gratitude and delight.
To the missionary himself the spectacle must have been still
more impressive. He had been absent for more than thirty
years, the life-time of an entire generation, dwelling among a
heathen people, studying and speaking strange languages; and
now, for the first time in his life he was standing among the
brethren and friends on whom he had long leaned for support,
but whose faces he had never before seen. He was in the
land of his birth, – but how changed from all the recollections
which dwelt in his mind Art, commerce, civilization and
Christianity had multiplied their wondrous triumphs over every
spot with which he was once familiar, till he might well doubt
the reality of the scene on which he gazed, and believe himself
“the subject of some supernatural illusion or wild and magical
dream.”
He had embarked at Maulmain in April, 1845, in company
with Mrs. Judson, whose health had so far declined as to afford
178 Missions IN BURMAH.
no hope of recovery save by a voyage beyond the tropics.
Reluctantly, yet in obedience to the promptings of affection
and duty, he set his face towards the beloved land he had thought
never to revisit. In order to continue the preparation of the
Burman Dictionary, in which he had been long engaged, he
took with him two assistants who were in his employ, intending
to devote a portion of every day during the voyage to the prosecu-
tion of his task. The health of Mrs. Judson began speedily to
improve beneath the bracing airs of the ocean, and on arriving
at the Isle of France he sent back the assistants to Maulmain,
intending himself to return soon after. But the hopes of
Mrs. Judson's restoration proved illusory. She grew constantly
feebler as they proceeded on the voyage, till, on arriving at St.
Helena, she died on ship-board, September 1, 1845. Her re-
mains were carried on shore and entombed the same evening,
amidst the tenderest demonstrations of sympathy and respect
from Christian friends and residents of the island. Early on
the following day the solitary missionary, with his three eldest
children who had accompanied their parents from Maulmain,
pursued his voyage to his native land, and arrived at Boston on
the 15th of October.
His arrival at Boston was greeted by the officers of the Board
and by the ministers and churches of that city with the liveliest
interest and delight. At a public meeting which was held on
the following day, he was welcomed back to his native land by
Rev. Dr. Sharp, the President of the Board, in a touching ad-
dress which uttered the sympathies of a crowded auditory; sim-
ilar greetings were offered him in other cities which he visited,
and in every part of the country he was received with an in-
terest and respect such as are seldom publicly accorded to a per-
Son of merely private station. These manifestations of regard
were not confined to the religious denomination to which he be-
longs; members of every Christian communion and citizens of
every rank were eager to do honor to the man who possessed
So many titles to public veneration and gratitude; who had
toiled and suffered, as few of the present generation have ever
MAULMAIN MISSION REin FORCED. 179
done, for the benefit of his race and the spread of the gospel in
the world. It was no sectarian adulation offered to a distin-
guished name, but rather the natural homage which Christian
civilization pays to the cause of Christian philanthropy; the
instinctive admiration of an intelligent and religious people for
the character of one who has proved himself a great benefactor
of mankind. The lesson is not without its value to the aspirants
for renown. His life had been that of the self-denying mission-
ary of the cross; his sphere of duty had been far removed from
that in which honor and distinction are wont to bestow their
glittering rewards, yet without intending it, he had won them all,
and that in the largest measure. For not the scholar who has
adorned the literature of his age, not the statesman who has
guided by his eloquence the counsels of a senate, has ever gained
for himself the sincerer respect of his countrymen, or secured
for his name a more honorable place in the annals of fame.
Dr. Judson remained in the United States till the following
July; and though he was unable to address public assemblies, yet
the influence of his presence at two meetings of the Convention
and in the social circles of many different cities, largely contrib-
uted to the increase and developement of an interest in the mis-
sions which he represented. In June, 1846, he was married to
Miss Emily Chubbuck of Hamilton, N. Y., and on the eleventh
of July he set sail from Boston on his return to Maulmain, ac-
companied by Mrs. Judson, by Rev. Messrs. Harris and Beecher
and their wives, and Miss Lydia Lillybridge. Mr. and Mrs.
Harris were appointed to the Karen department of the Maul-
main mission; Mr. and Mrs. Beecher were to go to Arracan,
while Miss Lillybridge was to be associated with Dr. and Mrs.
Judson as a teacher in the Burman department of the mission,
The missionaries arrived at the port of their destination on the
fifth of December, and in due time repaired to the spheres of
duty severally assigned them.
During the absence of Dr. Judson, Mrs. Mason and Mrs. In-
galls had been removed by death, Mr. Simons had returned to
the United States, and Mr. and Mrs. Osgood had retired from
180 MISSIONS IN BURALAH,
the mission in consequence of ill health.* A change of very
great importance had also taken place in the government of the
Burman empire. The brutal and tyrannical monarch, Thara-
waddy, who usurped the throne in 1837, had been driven from
power by his own ministers, and a regency had been formed.
which, it was hoped by the missionaries, would no longer hinder
their attempts to reëstablish the mission in Burmah Proper.
A few weeks after his arrival, Dr. Judson repaired to Rangoon
in order to ascertain the disposition of the new government with.
respect to the promulgation of Christianity. After a brief visit
he returned to Maulmain, for the purpose of carrying Mrs. Jud-
son with him to Rangoon. They continued to reside there from
February 1847 to the following September, but without any
countenance either from the local or the imperial government.
The little Burman church was much scattered, and, beneath the
ceaseless vigilance of priests and officers, few ventured to assem-
ble for worship, and none came to inquire concerning the doc-
trines of Christ. Dr. Judson, however, baptized two Burman
converts, and was gradually gathering together the scattered
disciples, when he learned that a private order had been issued
to watch the missionary’s house, and “apprehend any who might
be liable to the charge of favoring Jesus Christ's religion.” The
services on the Sabbath were immediately discontinued, and he
determined to proceed to Ava in order once more to solicit tole-
ration from the imperial government. But the funds then in
the treasury of the mission at Maulmain were insufficient to
meet the expense. The visit to the capital was therefore tem-
porarily abandoned, and Dr. and Mrs. Judson soon returned to
their post at Maulmain, where they have since continued to
reside.
In May, 1845, Rev. Dr. Pattison, Corresponding Secretary
for the Home Department, resigned the office. Its duties were
* Mr. Mason was also obliged to leave Tavoy on account of enfeebled health.
He embarked for the United States, but on reaching Calcutta found his consti-
tution so far recruited that he returned to Maulmain in May, 1847, and is now
again at his station at Tavoy,
RETURN OF MR. ABBOTT To sanDowAY. 181
discharged by Rev. Mr. Peck, the Corresponding Secretary for
the Foreign Department, until May 1846, when Rev. Edward
Bright, jr., was chosen Assistant Corresponding Secretary, and
assigned to the same executive post which had been before filled
by Dr. Pattison. Mr. Bright has since been elected to the office
of Corresponding Secretary for the Home Department. In
June, 1845, Mr. Richard E. Eddy was appointed Assistant
Treasurer in the place of Mr. Levi Farwell deceased; and,
subsequently, in September, 1846, was chosen Treasurer on
the resignation of Hon. Heman Lincoln, who had held the office
for twenty-two years, and during the whole period had fulfilled
its obligations and borne its responsibilities without pecuniary
compensation. -
Mr. Abbott left the United States on his return to Arracan
in August, 1847.* Proceeding by the way of England, he has-
tened by the overland route to Calcutta, where he arrived No-
vember 4th, and reached Sandoway early in December. He
made his journey thus rapidly in order to be able to fulfill an
engagement with the native assistants attached to his station, —
that if his life was spared he would meet them in January,
1848, at Ong-kyoung, the place at which he parted from them
three years before. Immediately on his arrival he sent abroad
a circular announcing his return, and appointing the meeting
which had been agreed upon. In January, Mr. Abbott accom-
panied by Rev. Mr. Beecher repaired to Ong-kyoung, where
he met the assistants and a large number of Christian Karens.
The meeting was one of unusual interest. The pastors and
preachers whom he had left in charge of the churches scattered
over this district of Arracan and the neighboring portion of
Burmah Proper, reported the condition of their several flocks.
** The visit of Mr. Abbott to this country was productive of unusually
beneficial results. He was fresh from the field of a most interesting mission,
and in many churches, over all the land, he narrated the thrilling story of the
suffering yet faithful Karens. The interest which was thus awakened in be-
half of these remarkable people, we may hope, will not die away till they
shall all be converted to Christianity,
17
182 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
The confidence of the missionary in the men whom he had ap-
pointed to the work of preaching the gospel to their country-
men, was fully sustained by their fidelity and labors during his
absence. Of the two ordained ministers, Tway-Poh, who was
at the head of the churches in Arracan, had baptized six hun-
dred converts, and Myat-Kyau who, though living in Arracan,
preached most frequently to the Karens from Burmah, had
baptized five hundred and fifty. At no period in the history of
the mission had the progress of the gospel been more remarka-
ble; and the scene which presented itself to the delighted mis-
sionary on his return, was fitted to impart the highest encour-
agement and awaken the liveliest gratitude. Of the twenty
native assistants appointed by Mr. Abbott, but not ordained to
the gospel ministry, two had died and one had been suspended,
while sixteen others had been added to the number, —so that
he found on his return thirty-six native preachers, who reported
not less than twelve hundred converts in their several districts,
waiting to be baptized and admitted to the churches.
In the autumn of 1847 Rev. W. Moore and his wife, and in
1848 Rev. Messrs. Van Meter, C. C. Moore and Benjamin,
with their wives, sailed from this country as reinforcements to
the missions in Burmah; one of these was designated to the
Burmese of Arracan, and the three others to the Karens in
the districts of Maulmain, Sandoway and Tavoy.
Since the return of Rev. Dr. Judson to Maulmain, he has
assiduously devoted his labors to the preparation of the Burman
and English Dictionary, one part of which is now passing
through the press, while the other is far advanced towards com-
pletion. While at Rangoon, in 1847, he was frequently urged
by the government interpreter there to go up to Ava, in order
to avail himself of literary aids which could be found only at the
capital, and without which he could not perfect the work in
which he is engaged. He was then prevented from going;
but his subsequent experience has satisfied him of its necessity,
and his latest communications to the Board bear tidings of his
intention soon to take passage to Rangoon, and again ascend
f
GENERAL PROGRESS OF THE MISSIONS. 183
the Irrawaddy to the Burman capital. Though the immediate
object of the visit is the perfection of the Dictionary, yet it may
obviously have an important bearing upon the interests and
prospects of the missions. Twenty-three years have elapsed
since he was last at the Burman court. In that time a new
dynasty has occupied the throne, and new influences have been
at work among the people; and it may be that the toleration
which the monarch then sternly refused may now be granted,
when again asked for by one who has proved himself the life-
long friend of the Burman people, and has conferred the most
important benefits upon their language and their literature.
The return of the missionary to Ava in these altered circum-
stances, and with these new claims to the respect of the king
and his courtiers, cannot fail to awaken the profoundest interest
among the friends of the missions, and to inspire the animating
hope that it may be attended with results that shall favor the
introduction of Christianity into this idolatrous empire.
Few other changes have taken place in these missions of
a character requiring that they be recorded in this general
narrative. Although they have been crippled by the death or
the departure of several of the missionaries, yet the blessing
of Heaven has constantly attended the labors of those who re-
main. At each of the stations Christianity has made a gradual
progress; the churches have received frequent accessions, and
the schools have instructed their numerous pupils in the precepts
of the gospel. Of the latter, the Burman Boarding School con-
ducted by Mr. Howard, and the Karen Normal School which
has been commenced by Mrs. Binney, possess a peculiar interest
and importance. Both of these schools are designed to separate
children in early life from the evil influences to which they are
exposed in their daily associations, and, without changing their
national characteristics, to train them up in the industrious hab-
its, the useful knowledge, and the domestic virtues of Christian
society. The Normal School was commenced in 1846; it has,
almost from the beginning, numbered thirty pupils, — most of
whom are boys, – who will remain under the teacher's charge
184 MISSIONS IN BURMAH,
until they have received the rudiments of an education that will
fit them to become instructers and exemplars for their country-
men. Some changes have also taken place in the schools which
are designed especially for theological instruction and the more
efficient training of native preachers and assistants. The Bur-
man class, which has been under the care of Mr. Stevens, has
been greatly reduced in number, most of its recent members
being now engaged in preaching in the city and the districts of
Maulmain. Of the schools for the Karens, that which is the
most strictly theological in its character is the Seminary at
Maulmain under the charge of Mr. Binney. The course of
instruction here is becoming more thorough, and is awakening
with every succeeding session a more hearty interest in the
minds of the pupils. The Seminary has now twenty-five mem-
bers, who, with suitable vacations, continue at their studies
through the entire year. In addition to this, the leading insti-
tution for the training of Karen preachers, the native assistants
during every rainy season are assembled in classes and instructed
at Tavoy by Mr. Cross, and at Sandoway by Mr. Abbott and
Mr. Beecher. The number thus collected during the last sea-
son at Tavoy was twenty-eight, and that at Sandoway was thirty.
In this manner are the missionaries establishing the institutions
of the gospel among these untaught people, and spreading over
them the amenities of social and intellectual culture as well as
the saving influences of Christian truth. -
Large editions of the Burman Bible had already been printed,
but the press has been multiplying copies of the New Testament
in both dialects of the Karen, and also in the Peguan, or Ta-
ling; and in addition to these it has printed, and sent forth over
the whole empire, millions of pages of tracts and other writings
which explain to the people the doctrines taught by the mission-
aries. Many of these undoubtedly perish, uncared-for and
unread; but the greater number, there is reason to believe,
find their way to the mind of the nation, and in city and coun-
try, by rivers and mountains, are sowing the seeds of a purer
religion and a happier civilization for the inhabitants of Bur-
THEIR RESULTS ESTIMLATED. 185
mah. Assiduous labor and threatening disease have thinned
the ranks of the missionaries, and compelled many of them to
return to the United States in order to recruit, their declining
health.” Here, however, they are for the most part engaged in
the prosecution of works commenced at the missions, or in the
no less important service of setting forth the degraded and
darkened condition of the heathen, and urging their claims upon
the philanthropy of the Christian public. In addition to those,
however, who are still detained in their native land, the num-
ber of missionaries who are now attached to the several mis-
sions in Burmah is twenty males and eighteen females,— of
whom nineteen are ordained ministers of the gospel, two
are connected with the press, while the ladies at each of the
stations are engaged in the instruction of the schools. There
are also employed in the various departments of missionary
labor, not less than one hundred and ten native assistants, –
of whom twenty-six are Burmans, or Peguans, while all the
others are Karens. The entire appropriations of the Board for
these several missions in all their departments, for the year
ending March 31, 1849, amounted to thirty-four thousand
“dollars. The whole number of churches under their care is
about sixty-five, connected with which are not less than six
thousand five hundred members. . - •
... The missions in Burmah formed the earliest enterprise of
Christian philanthropy in which our churches were enlisted, and
on this account, if on no other, they are fraught with the most
interesting associations and the most affecting memories. They
had their origin with the men of a generation most of whose
representatives have passed from among the living; and, through
the lapse of more than thirty years, they have been the subject
of earnest solicitude and hope, – the burden of humble prayer,
$
# For this cause Mr. and Mrs. Winton, and Mr. and Mrs. Wade, are now in
this country—the former having arrived in the spring, and the latter in the
summer of 1848. Mr. Vinton is accompanied by two Karens, a Pwo and a
Sgau, with whose assistance he is revising the version of the New Testament
in each of the Karen dialects.
17+
186 MISSIONS IN BURMAH.
and the incitement of Christian effort to our whole denomination.
But apart from all these associations of the past, their history
is crowded with vicissitudes of the most striking character—
with instances of heroic self-devotion and life-long labor, — with
scenes of trial and suffering, and with spiritual successes and
triumphs, such as are seldom chronicled in the records of
modern missions; and if with these features of their character
we connect the simple story of the Karens,— their oppressions
and their untold wrongs, – their mysterious traditions and their
wonderful conversion to Christianity, -the missions in Burmah
become invested with the deepest and most thrilling interest to
every Christian mind. They present the extraordinary specta-
cle of a whole people turning to the worship of God; coming
forth from their mountain retreats or from the depths of their un-
visited jungle, and eagerly accepting the doctrines and the faith
of the gospel of Christ. To those who have visited their sta-
tions, and especially to the philanthropic English officers * who
govern the provinces in which they are established, they have
commended themselves as agencies of the highest importance
and of unexampled success in promoting the social and the spirit-
ual culture of the people for whom they are designed. To the
Ameriean public, and especially to the members of the Chris-
tian denomination by whom they were planted, they appeal
by the strongest considerations for liberal support and continued
enlargement; for they present a field of philanthropic effort,
of encouraging missionary labor, such as is rarely to be found in
any other missions upon the globe.
*Among these I record with peculiar pleasure the names of Majors Burney
and Broadfoot and of Capt. H. M. Durand. Each of these gentlemen has filled the
office of Civil Commissioner in the Tenasserim provinces, and each has ſent a
generous aid in promoting the interests of the missions. Captain Durand es-
pecially, during his residence in Burmah, was a warm personal friend of the
missionaries, and an active and zealous fellow-laborer with them in establish-
ing schools, in erecting chapels, and in advancing the social and spiritual
Progress of the people. Sinee his return to England he has borne the most
unequivocal testimony to their industry, piety and fidelity, and in many a circle
of the doubting and the uninformed, has delighted to narrate the progress of
the gospel among the Karens as a triumphant vindication of the cause of
Christian missions.
MISSIONS IN SIAM AND CHINA.
C H A P T E R XVI.
ARRIVAL of Rev. J. T. Jones at Bangkok. — Character of the Siamese. - Arri.
val of Mr. Dean.—His Labors among the Chinese at Bangkok. — A Chinese
Church.- Arrival of other Missionaries.—Progress of Chinese Department.
—Death of Mr. Reed and Mrs. Jones.— Printing the Scriptures in Siamese.
— Arrival of Messrs. Slafter and Goddard.— Death of Mr. Slafter.—Prog-
ress of each Department of the Mission.—Temporary Station at Macao. —
Chinese War. — Its Results. – Removal of Missionaries to Hongkong.—
Death of Mrs. Dean. — Station at Ningpo. — Treaty between China and the
United States.—Its Results. – Death of Mrs. Shuck. — Prospects of the
Station at Hongkong. — Condition of the Mission at Bangkok. —Translations
of the Bible in China. —Labors of Messrs. Dean and Goddard. –Present
Attitude of these Missions.
THE Mission of the American Baptists in Siam is designed
in part for the Siamese, and in part for the Chinese, who are
found there in great numbers, and until within a few years have
been wholly inaccessible in their own country. It was com-
menced in March, 1833, by Rev. J. T. Jones, formerly of Ran-
goon, who with Mrs. Jones at that time established his residence
at Bangkok, the capital of the kingdom. The city had already
been visited at different times by Rev. Mr. Gutzlaff of the
Basle Missionary Society, Rev. Mr. Abeel of the American
Board, and more recently by Rev. Mr. Toumlin of the London
Missionary Society. These gentlemen however had all gone
to other fields of labor; and the latter on his departure had writ-
ten to the Baptist Missionaries in Burmah, urging them to send
some of their number to Siam. In was in these circumstances,
and by the appointment of his brethren at Maulmain, that Mr.
Jones went to Bangkok for the purpose of commencing a mis-
sion there.
188 MISSIONS IN SLAM AND CHINA.
The city stands upon the river Meinam, the chief river of
Siam, about twenty-five miles from the sea. It is built in part
upon an island in the middle of the river, and in part upon eith-
er bank, along which it extends for several miles. Its appear-
ance, to one approaching it from the sea, is far from imposing,
though it is said to contain many magnificent buildings, and to be
distinguished for its profuse display of oriental wealth and splen-
dor. The population has been variously estimated; by some it has
been put as low as 40,000, while by others it has been reckoned
at upwards of 400,000. Mr. Malcom, who was at considerable
pains to form a correct estimate, makes the number of inhabi-
tants in the city and its immediate suburbs, about 100,000, of
whom not more than 3,000 or 4,000 live within the walls. They
are made up of many different races, and present a motley variety
of costume, manners, language and modes of life. The Chinese
are the most numerous, and number not less than 60,000. Of the
remainder 30,000 are Siamese, and 10,000 are of other races,
such as Cochin Chinese, Peguans, Malays and Portuguese. -
The religion of Siam, as of Burmah, is Buddhism, though in
Bangkok it is not a little modified by the variety of forms in
which it is professed by the different races composing the popu-
lation. The Siamese are a grade lower in civilization than the
Burmans. They are less active and intelligent, and are equally
addicted to the vices of half civilized life. In personal appear-
ance they are said to be among the least attractive of the
Asiatic races, but they are by no means among the most de-
graded. Though mean, slothful, crafty and rapacious, they are
described as possessing qualities which indicate that they are
not wanting in capacity for civilization. Their language is ex-
ceedingly simple, and is far more easily acquired than the Bur-
man, though it contains but little literature, and the number of
Siamese who can read is said to be unusually small. -
On arriving at Bangkok in 1833, Mr. Jones was courteously
received by several of the officers of the court to whom he be-
came known, and was soon able, without opposition or molesta-
tion, to commence the labors of the mission. His house became
SLAM MISSION ESTABLISHED. 189
a place of frequent resort for a large circle of persons,— Chi-
nese, Burmans and Peguans,— who came to converse with him
concerning the doctrines which he taught. He found the Chi-
nese part of the population by far the most accessible and
inquisitive; but as he was unacquainted with their language
he was able to reach only those who could speak the Burman
or the Peguan tongue. The four earliest converts were Chi-
nese. Two of them had formerly been instructed by Messrs.
Gutzlaff and Abeel,—and seemed to have been converted by
their instrumentality. They were all baptized by Mr. Jones
on the 8th of December, 1833; and one of them, named Chek
Bunti, was immediately appointed an assistant in the mission, to
take charge of a school for Chinese boys, and also to conduct
worship in Chinese on the Sabbath.
Mr. Jones soon acquired such familiarity with the language
as to feel justified in commencing the translation of the Scrip-
tures. The Gospel of Matthew was completed in 1835, and a
catechism of the New Testament was also gotten ready for the
press. He accordingly repaired to Singapore in order to have
them printed at the press of the mission of the American Board,
which was established there. A large edition of each of these
works was speedily printed, and in the following June he re-
turned to Siam, furnished with additional means of carrying
forward the labors of his mission.
The mission at Bangkok had been commenced without waiting
to obtain the sanction of the Board of Managers; they however
immediately gave it their full approbation. A treaty of amity
and commerce had recently been concluded between the gov-
ernment of the United States and the King of Siam, and the
attention of the Board had already been directed to that country
as furnishing, on account of its intimate relations with China,
a suitable field for missionary operations among the Chinese.
On learning that Mr. Jones had gone to Bangkok, they immedi-
ately determined to carry out their design and to send additional
missionaries to the station. In this manner Bangkok became
the seat of missionary labors both for the Siamese and for the
190 MISSIONS IN SLAM AND CHINA.
Chinese, great numbers of whom reside in Siam or are constantly
drawn thither in the intercourse of trade.
In pursuance of this design, Rev. William Dean and his
wife sailed from the United States in September, 1834, and
arrived at Singapore in February, 1835, during the visit of Mr.
Jones at that port. They determined to remain at Singapore,
engaged in studying the Chinese language, until the printing of
the Gospel of Matthew should be completed; but during the in-
terval Mrs. Dean was suddenly summoned away by death, only
a few weeks after their arrival. Mr. Dean accompanied Mr.
Jones to Bangkok in the following June, and entered immediately
upon his labors as a missionary to the Chinese. In December,
three other Chinamen were baptized and added to the little band
of disciples. Indeed the Chinese inhabitants of Siam soon be-
gan to evince a greater interest in the teachings of the mission-
aries than the native Siamese, and even to the present day
nearly all the spiritual fruits of the mission at Bangkok have
been among them.
So strong however is the appetite for opium among these
people, and so ruinous are the effects of its use, that the missiona-
ries early found it necessary to adopt special precautions in order
to fortify the converts against its seductive influence. They
were formed into an association, in which they pledged them-
selves to each other to abstain from the use of the intoxicating
and enervating drug. But in spite of every precaution, Chek
Bunti, the assistant in the mission and one of the earliest con-
verts, yielded to the tempation and fell away from the faith
which he professed. Others also were at first corrupted by his
evil example; but most of them soon returned in penitence, to
confess the shame they had brought upon the cause of the new
religion. * -
In March, 1836, Mr. Jones having completed the translation
of the Acts of the Apostles, went again to Singapore to obtain
fonts of types both in Siamese and Chinese, in anticipation of
the arrival of a press which had been promised from America.
He extended his voyage to Penang and Malacca for the benefit
LABORS OF THE MISSIONARIES. 191
of Mrs. Jones's health, and on his return to Singapore found that
Rev. Messrs. Davenport, Reed, and Shuck, with their wives,
had arrived during his absence, bringing with them the expected
press, and the necessary materials for printing. Messrs. Daven-
port and Reed soon accompanied him to Bangkok, the former to
be attached as preacher and printer to the Siamese, and the lat-
ter to be associated with Mr. Dean in the Chinese department
of the mission, while Mr. Shuck remained at Singapore, intend-
ing soon to commence a station either at Macao or at Canton.
The mission was now fairly started at Bangkok. A commo-
dious printing house was erected, together with a strong store
made of brick, for containing the paper and other materials, and
keeping them secure from dampness and from the insects that
might destroy them. The press was kept constantly in opera-
tion under the direction of Mr. Davenport, printing books and
tracts, both in Siamese and in Chinese. Mr. Dean occupied a
floating house on the river; and was constantly engaged in labors
for the Chinese population, having at his house on Sundays and
other days of preaching, congregations varying from thirty to
fifty persons; while Mr. Jones still devoted himself to the trans-
lation of the Scriptures into Siamese, the preparation of tracts,
and to visiting the Wats, or places of worship, for the purpose of
conversing with the people and preaching to them the doctrines
of the gospel. He also made several excursions up the river
Meinam and short distances into the interior, in order to become
acquainted with the population and to distribute tracts and books
which he had prepared for their instruction. Schools were also
established in which the few pupils who could be induced to at-
tend were instructed by the ladies of the mission. The parents,
both among the Siamese and the Chinese, generally refused to
allow their children to attend the schools of the missionaries, al-
leging as reasons that they did not wish them taught not to wor-
ship priests and idols, and that in case they were in need of
money they might choose to sell them as slaves. Indeed a
considerable portion of the scholars, who have been retained in
the schools long enough to receive even the rudiments of an edu-
192 IHISSIONS IN SLAM AND CHINA's
cation, have been such as were redeemed from slavery either
by the influence or the direct purchase of the missionaries
themselves. -
In the summer of 1837 the mission at Bangkok was visited
by Rev. Mr. Malcom, in his official tour in the East, and while
he was there its several members, together with the three
Chinese converts who still remained faithful, were formed
into a Christian church. Three others were added soon after-
wards, and the labors of the mission, particularly among the
Chinese, continued to prosper until they were interrupted by
changes and bereavements which filled the hearts of all its mem-
bers with sorrow. The first of these was the death of Mr. Reed,
which took place in August, 1837, just as he had completed his
novitiate as a missionary, and was commencing the work of
preaching in Chinese, for which he had been long preparing.
In October of the same year Mr. Dean, having seen his fellow-
laborer smitten down by his side, found his own health seriously
undermined, and was obliged to make a voyage to Singapore
for its recovery. While the mission was thus reduced in num-
bers and in strength, it pleased Heaven again to visit it with an-
other heavy affliction in the sudden death of Mrs. Jones. She
was seized by that dreadful scourge of the East, the spasmodic
cholera, and died in March, 1838. She had been a missionary
for nine years, and, in feeble health, amidst many disadvantages,
had mastered both the Burman and the Siamese language, and
performed an unusual amount of service, especially among her
own sex, in the missions with which she had been connected.
In addition to this she had translated into Siamese two books of
the Old Testament, and prepared a dictionary of several thou-
sand words of that language. She died happy in the conscious-
ness that her efforts to give the gospel to the heathen had not
been in vain; for she had seen many of her own sex, so neglect-
ed and degraded by the social systems of the East, raised by
her instrumentality to the liberty and dignity which the gospel
of Christ alone can confer.
Mr. Dean having extended his voyage from Singapore to
THE MISSION REINFORCED AND BEREAved. 193
Macao and Canton, was married at Macao to Miss Theodosia
Ann Barker, an English lady resident there, with whom he re-
turned to Bangkok in May, 1838. Mr. Jones had for some
time been engaged in revising his translations of the New Tes-
tament. He had now completed the Gospels of Matthew, Mark
and Luke, together with the Acts of the Apostles, and was
already commencing some of the Epistles, and at the same
time enlarging and perfecting the dictionary which had been
begun by other hands, whose labors, alas! were now closed by
death. The arrangements for printing, which had proved ex-
ceedingly defective on account of the imperfection of the types,
were also perfected in the summer of 1838 by the arrival of
the necessary material for a type foundry, which was procured
at Malacca by Mr. Jones of Mr. Dyer, a gentleman in the employ
of the London Missionary Society. A second printing press -
was also added to the property of the mission in Decem-
ber, 1838. With these additional facilities the work of print-
ing was resumed ; tracts and copies of the gospel and other
portions of the Scriptures were rapidly multiplied, and nearly a
million of pages were also struck off for the use of the mission-
aries of the American Board who were stationed in Bangkok.”
In June, 1839, Rev. Messrs. Slafter and Goddard with their
wives arrived at Singapore, having been appointed by the
Board as a reinforcement of the mission in Siam. Mr. Slafter
carried with him an additional press and proceeded immediately
to Bangkok, where he became associated with Mr. Jones in la-
bors among the Siamese. His career as a missionary was brought
to an early close. He speedily acquired the language, and made
several excursions in different directions into the interior for the
purpose of circulating books and conversing with the people;
but ere he had scarcely begun the work of preaching the gospel,
he fell a victim to disease, and died on the 7th of April, 1841.
Mr. Goddard, who was originally designated to the Chinese
*The mission of this Board at Bangkok was commenced in 1834, before it
was known to the Commissioners in the United States that Mr. Jones had
gone to Siam.
18
194 MISSIONS IN SLAM. A.ND CHINA.
department of the mission, remained at Singapore for more than
a year, studying the language, and in other ways preparing
himself for the labors of his post. He went to Bangkok in Oc-
tober, 1840, and immediately entered upon the routine of duties
which there awaited him. -
The operations of both branches of the mission have been
frequently interrupted by changes occasioned by the ill health
of the missionaries, yet they have been attended with very
different measures of success. Among the Siamese, the gospel
has been preached, and that too with scarcely any opposition
from either the government or the priesthood of the country.
The entire New Testament * and several books of the Old Tes-
tament have been translated and printed, and tracts and books
have been given to the people in unusual numbers, and with
all desirable care on the part of the missionaries to insure their
being read, but no corresponding results have thus far followed.
Not a single Siamesef has been converted to Christianity, and
scarcely any durable impression has been made on the imper-
turbable indifference with which the mind of the nation seems
to regard religious truth. It is true they appear to have read
the books, and often to have expressed opinions concerning
them. The priests have in many instances acknowledged the
utterly false and fabulous character of their own sacred writ-
ings; yet neither priests nor people have thus far recognized
the obligations of Christianity, or been attracted by the simple
beauty of its heavenly message. This department of the mis-
sion at Bangkok has in consequence failed to create the interest
which its connection with a populous kingdom would of itself
naturally inspire. Its missionaries, always few in number,
have often been obliged to remit their labors in consequence of
enfeebled health. Mr. Jones has twice visited the United
States. Mrs. Reed and Mrs. Slafter, who were for some time
engaged in schools, have both withdrawn from the mission; and
* This was accomplished by Mr. Jones, in 1839.
f The conversion of the first Siamese is reported in a recent letter from the
mission. See American Baptist Magazine, March, 1849. -
PROGRESS OF THE CHINESE I) EPARTMENT. 195
Mr. and Mrs. Davenport, unable longer to labor in the climate
of-Siam, returned to this country in 1845, and have since ceas-
ed to be missionaries.
In 1843, Mr. Chandler, a machinist and type-founder con-
nected with the mission at Maulmain, went to reside at Bangkok.
He has been attached to the printing department, and has ren-
dered much valuable incidental service in introducing the me-
chanic arts into the kingdom. For this purpose he accepted
the invitation of Prince Momfanoi to aid him in building sev-
eral kinds of machinery after American models. The arrange-
ments which were adopted were designed to be specially favor-
able to the improvement of the Siamese artisans; and so re-
spectful was the prince to the religious principles of Mr. Chand-
ler, that he directed his laborers to cease from work on the
Sabbath, – and though they were often hurried in their labors,
yet the rule was faithfully observed for more than a year. But
notwithstanding these and other incidental results which have
been accomplished, it must still be confessed that little hold
has thus far been gained upon the mind of the Siamese; and
after fifteen years of the labors of the missionaries, prosecuted
amidst all the advantages of the press and of the translated
Scriptures, Siam now presents not a single Christian church for
her own people rising among her countless temples of heathen-
ism, and scarcely a single worshipper of the true God kneeling
in spiritual devotion amidst her millions of idolaters.
The branch of the mission among the Chinese population of
Bangkok has been attended by many encouragements. This
station, and the station at Macao, where Mr. and Mrs. Shuck
went to reside in September, 1836, were designed to be points
of approach from which the missionaries might at length extend
their labors to China itself. They were both commenced at a
period when the teachers of religion and the agents of com-
merce were alike studiously excluded from the empire, and
when of all its countless population, the doctrines of the gospel
could be made known only to those who were living away from
its scornful prejudices, and beyond the jurisdiction of its haughty
196 MISSIONS IN SLAM AND CHINA,
despotism. It was found at these, and at other neighboring
posts at which Christian missions had been planted for their
benefit, that the Chinese were far more accessible than had been
imagined; and that, when away from China, they evinced far
less of their characteristic contempt for the civilization and re-
ligion of Christian nations. They are separated from the rest
of mankind by a language of the greatest difficulty; yet, when
this has been fully mastered by the missionaries, they have
proved themselves by no means indifferent to the appeals of
moral truth; and though even to this day but little has been ac-
complished by the combined efforts of all the missionaries who
have been sent to them, yet many of the strongest barriers to
the diffusing of the gospel have been removed, and both among
the learned and the unlearned there are now found those who
have received the religion of Christ.
At the Bangkok station, Mr. Dean and Mr. Goddard were for
two years after the arrival of the latter the only missionaries
among the Chinese. Mr. Dean was employed as a preacher
and preparer of books and tracts, and also instructed the native
assistants in Christian theology, and in other ways directed
them in the performance of their labors. Mr. Goddard, with
here and there a brief interval of interruption, has been up to
a recent period assiduously engaged in the service of the mis-
sion as a preacher and a translator of the Scriptures. In 1840
the members of the church were nine in number; in the follow-
ing year seven more were added, and each succeeding year has
witnessed some accession to the little band. Portions of both
the Old and the New Testament have been prepared and print-
ed by the missionaries, and tracts and books have been circulat-
ed among the people, and also, by means of the sailors and mer-
ehants who come to Bangkok from every port in China, have
been scattered along the entire coast, and it may be far into the
interior of the empire.
At Macao, a port under the jurisdiction of the Portuguese,
Mr. Shuck met with the same facilities for laboring among the
Chinese. In September, 1841, Rev. Issachar J. Roberts, who
CHINESE WAR. 197
had for some time been residing at Macao as a missionary of a
society then existing in the Western States, entered into the
service of the Board, and became associated with Mr. Shuck.
Two or three Chinese were baptized at this station, and tidings
of the gospel were borne widely abroad by the wanderings of
those who had conversed with the missionaries or read the
tracts and books which they distributed. Small, however, and
quite inadequate were the fruits which had been borne at this
station, when, in 1841, missionary labors among the Chinese
were for a time interrupted by the breaking out of the war be-
tween England and China, and the blockade of the port of
Macao.
This war was regarded by the religious public, both in
England and in this country, as one whose objects were wholly
unjustifiable, and whose results would probably tend still further
to alienate the empire from all Christian nations. Serious
difficulties had been pending for three years between the two
nations, arising mainly from the attempts of the emperor to
suppress the trade in opium in which the English were largely
engaged. Several acts of hostility were perpetrated in 1840;
and in the following spring, having collected large naval and
military forces at the island of Hongkong, the English proceed-
ed to invest Canton and several other leading cities along the
coast. It was not till after the sacrifice of immense treasure
and the lives of thousands of his subjects, that the emperor would
accept the terms dictated by the English minister plenipoten-
tiary, in a manner so humiliating to imperial pride. At length,
in August, 1842, a treaty of perpetual amity was concluded,
which has altered the relations of China to the entire civilized
world. By the terms of the treaty the island of Hongkong,
lying at the mouth of the Canton river, was ceded to “the
queen of England, her heirs and successors forever,” and the five
ports of Canton, Amoy, Fuhchau, Ningpo and Shanghai, were
opened to British commerce, and the residence of British
officers and merchants. Thus, as has often happened in the col-
lisions of nations, did a war which was begun in order to promote
*
18%
198 Missions in stix AND CHINA,
an iniquitous traffic, finally terminate in the extension of Chris-
tian civilization and in preparing the way for the ultimate intro-
duction of the gospel into the most populous empire of the
globe.
The result was hailed with thankfulness and joy by the
friends of missions in all parts of the world as most auspicious
to the cause which they were engaged in promoting; and
in England especially, it awakened new feelings of obligation to
send the blessings of Christianity to the distant people thus
subjugated by her arms. The English immediately began to
occupy the ports which were opened for their residence, and
the American missionaries to the Chinese, who had been re-
siding at Bangkok and Macao, determined to remove to China,
and establish the mission at such of the free ports as might
prove most advantageous and inviting. Mr. Roberts had al-
ready gone from Macao to Hongkong in February, 1842, and
was followed a few months later by Mr. and Mrs. Shuck. Mr.
Dean also left Bangkok in February, 1842, and after lingering
at Singapore and Macao for the benefit of his health, arrived
at Hongkong in the following June. Though the treaty had not
then been ratified, yet the free ports were all in the hands of
the English, – and the missionaries, availing themselves of the
protection afforded by the British flag, immediately set about
ascertaining the different points at which stations might most
advantageously be planted. For this purpose Mr. Dean ac-
cepted the invitation of the captain and supercargo of the
Lowell, the first American ship which entered the eastern har-
bors of China, to take passage to Kulangsu, Chusan and Amoy.
At each of these places he made inquiries and observations re-
specting the object he had in view, and also obtained much
valuable information concerning the other cities on the coast
which were likely to be opened to the commerce of the English.
He returned in October apparently most favorably impressed
with Amoy as the future seat of the mission; but as the extent
of the toleration which would be granted to a foreign religion
was not yet fully known, it was decided to plant the principal
§ Nań-kang
ºš Nan-yong
Cha
º ſº -
3 Chui-che
> *): t
%a ! • ºlº. NS
% -
f
ºr ºº
SS.
is
s
SS#
.*
&ººms
º
!
º
Nº. 3 º'

A STATION PLANTED AT HONG KONG. 201
station for the present at Hongkong, which was already pre-
isenting a most inviting field for missionary labor. The island
:has several towns, all of which, beneath the freedom and secu-
rity of the English rule, are rapidly growing in population, and
are evidently destined to assume a commanding importance.
Messrs. Dean and Shuck accordingly established themselves at
the principal city of Hongkong— now known as Victoria, while
Mr. Roberts went to Chek-chu, a smaller town on the south side
of the island.
At Victoria a lot was granted by the government on which
a mission house was erected; two commodious chapels were
also built, to be used alike for public worship and for schools;
and the expenses of these buildings were defrayed principally
by English gentlemen then residing at Hongkong and Macao,
among whom was Sir Henry Pottinger, the negotiator of the
treaty. A church of five members, in addition to the missiona-
ries, was organized and placed under the care of Mr. Shuck, to
which four others were added by the close of 1842. A chapel
was also erected at Chek-chu, in which Mr. Roberts conducted
service both in English and in Chinese, and also superintended
a school for Chinese youth, which was instructed in part by one
of the disciples who had come up from Siam. Thus, under the
supervision of these three missionaries, were planted the earliest
missions of the American Baptists in that ancient and hitherto
unknown empire, which embraces beneath its sway nearly a
fourth part of the human race. They had long been laboring
among the Chinese, but now for the first time were their stations
established in China. Though for the present limited to a single
island, yet both the missionaries and their friends in America
exulted in the thought that the barriers of ages were at length
broken down, and that the way was now open to the country on
whose confines they had long been eagerly waiting.
In March, 1843, the mission was bereft of Mrs. Dean, a lady
of superior culture and most exemplary piety. Born at Thet-
ford, England, she had come to China in 1836 in the service of
202 MISSIONS IN SIAM AND CHINA,
the “Society for Promoting Female Education in the East.” At
the period of her marriage to Mr. Dean she had already ac-
quired the language; and an extensive acquaintance with the
manners and religious opinions of the people and their acquire-
ments, together with the eminent advantages which she had
enjoyed in England, fitted her for high usefulness in her subse-
quent capacity as the wife of a Christian missionary ; and,
whether at the solitary station at Bangkok or beneath the victo-
rious flag of her own countrymen at Hongkong, she ever proved
herself a judicious adviser and a devoted laborer in the mission
which she had adopted. Mr. Dean, from the commencement of
his labors among the Chinese, had been accustomed to the Tie-
Chiti dialect, and hence most readily directed his attention to the
people of that province who resided at Hongkong or occasion-
ally visited the island for the purposes of trade. He had
maintained public worship in this dialect for several months;
and in May, 1843, a second church was constituted at Victoria,
composed of three members from the Tie Chiú province. The
church was placed under the charge of Mr. Dean, whose health
however had now become so far enfeebled as often to interrupt
his labors, and intimate to him that he must soon suspend them
altogether and go to a more genial climate.
The mission at Hongkong, though still subjected to interrup-
tions and bereavements, soon became highly prosperous. Its
interests and objects were favored by many of the English officers
and residents, and the Chinese people heard the gospel preached
in their different dialects, or read its precepts in the written lan-
guage which is common to them all. Accessions were made to
the churches, and all the interests of the station assumed a most
encouraging aspect. In the spring of 1843 Dr. D. J. Macgowan
arrived at Hongkong, and became connected with the mission.
He, however, soon went up to Canton, and, after spending sev-
eral weeks with Dr. Parker in professional observations and
practice in the hospital there, he took passage to Chusan and
Ningpo, and at the latter place established a mission-hospital, in
TREATY BETWEEN CHINA AND THE UNITED STATES. 203
which he has since been usefully employed in connection with
various labors as a religious teacher.” º
The treaty which had been concluded between Great Britia
and China had created the deepest interest in the commercial
circles of both Europe and America; and other nations were
eager to obtain for themselves the commercial advantages which
it was supposed were secured to England by its stipulations. In
the summer of 1843 the government of the United States de-
spatched an embassy to China, at the head of which was placed
Hon. Caleb Cushing, for the purpose of opening diplomatic in-
tercourse with the emperor. Mr. Cushing arrived at Macao
in the following February. He was there met by the commis-
sioner appointed by the emperor, and the terms of a treaty were
mutually agreed upon, which was signed by the representatives
of the two countries on the 3d of July, 1844, at Wanghia, a small
town in the vicinity of Macao. The new treaty embodied all
the important features of that which had been negotiated with
the English; and in addition provided for the erection of chapels,
hospitals, and cemeteries, at each one of the five ports, and at the
same time for other commercial advantages, which were also
to be extended to all nations. Its effect has undoubtedly been
to secure to the American missionaries and other American
residents many privileges, which without it they would have
had only by sufferance from their connection with the Eng-
lish. It has given to the missions from this country a per-
manent footing in China, and distinctly recognized them as
among the interests that are to receive the protection of the
government.
# This hospital appears to have been at first the joint establishment of Dr.
Macgowan and Dr. Macartey, of the American Presbyterian Mission. Dr.
Macgowan has now associated with him Rev. E. C. Lord as preacher, thus
making what has always been found the most useful combination of labors
among the Chinese.
# At present it is said that we are held in special favor by the Chinese.
Our merchants have undoubtedly profited by the fact, and our missionaries
have on several occasions been saluted with péculiar regard, as belonging
to “the nation of the flowery flag.”
204 MISSIONS IN SLAM AND CHINA,
But these fair prospects of the mission have also been shaded
by afflictive events, which for a time diminished its efficiency
and tended to discourage its members and friends. In Novem-
ber, 1844, Mrs. Shuck died at Victoria, after a brief illness.
She was the daughter of Rev. Addison Hall, of Virginia, and
sailed from the United States with her husband in the autumn
of 1835, destined for the mission in Siam. Their resideněe,
however, was at Macao, where Mrs. Shuck early began to de-
vote herself to the duties of her station. In her sudden death
many tender ties were sundered and many fond hopes were
blighted, for she was summoned away just at the beginning of
the new era of the mission to which she had long been attach-
ed.* Mr. Dean also, at nearly the same time, was obliged tem-
porarily to abandon his post and return to the United States in
order to recruit his health. He arrived in New York in March,
1845, and after spending upwards of a year in this country, f
returned with recruited energies to the station at Hongkong.
The mission had also been strengthened by the arrival of
Dr. Devan and his wife in the autumn of 1844. They sub-
sequently removed to Canton, where a mission-house was erect-
ed and several assistants were employed. Their connection,
however, with the mission in China was brief. Mrs. Devan
died, much lamented, at Canton, in October, 1846, and her
husband, finding himself unable to reside permanently in the
climate of the tropics, returned to the United States, and has
since been transferred to the mission in France. Mr. Shuck
also returned to this country in the spring of 1845, when, at his
own request, he was transferred from the service of the Mis-
sionary Union to that of the Southern Baptist Convention, by
whom the mission buildings at Canton were purchased. But,
* A valuable memoir of her useful life has been prepared by Rev. J. B.
Jeter.
f Mr. Dean was accompanied by Ko Abak, a Christian Chinaman, with
whom he visited many of the churches in the Northern and Western States,
every where addressing crowded auditories, on the religious condition of
China. His visit was to many a church the beginning of a new interest in
Christian missions.
THE MISSIONS REINFORCED. 205
amidst all these changes, some of them causing serious interrup-
tion to the labors of the mission, its interests have continued to
prosper in some humble manner, and its churches have gradu-
ally increased.
The station at Hongkong is represented as especially prom-
ising. Though long regarded with doubt by the missionaries
of other societies, and occupied by our own not without hesita-
tion, this island is now admitted to possess advantages which
belong toinone of the neighboring ports. The people here are
entirely accessible and free from many of the jealousies which
characterize those of Canton and the districts around it. Here
too, in connection with the station, and under the care of the
missionaries, is the largest and most flourishing Christian church
in all China. Rev. John Johnson and his wife” were added to
the station in 1848, and Rev. E. C. Lord and his wife were
added to that at Ningpo in the year preceding; and the mis-
sion, though still in its infancy, has already taken an honorable
rank among the agencies which are now employed by a benig-
nant Providence, in introducing the blessings of Christian civil-
ization into the most ancient empire of the world.
... In the mission at Bangkok, after the close of the war in China,
all preaching in the Siamese department was for a time suspended
in consequence of the absence of Mr. Jones. He returned to the
station in January, 1847, accompanied by Mrs. Jones and Miss
Harriet H. Morse, the latter lady being appointed to teach in
the Siamese schools. Since that period the labors of the mis-
sionaries have been prosecuted with renewed hope, and have
evidently been regarded by the people with less indifference
than before. The presses have been generally kept in opera-
tion under the direction of Messrs. Jones and Chandler, and
have furnished multitudes of books and tracts in Siamese,
Peguan and Chinese, for both departments of the mission.
. Among the Chinese, Mr. Goddard has continued the work of
preaching and translating, to which he early devoted himself
* Mrs. Johnson died soon after her arrival at Hongkong.
19
206 MISSIONS IN SIAM AND CHINA.
with singular assiduity, interrupted only by occasional ill health.
The church of which he has had the charge, though frequently
diminished by deaths and removals, now numbers twenty-three
members, and constitutes the germ of a Christian society which
is deemed exceedingly important on account of its bearings,
not upon Bangkok alone, but upon the multitudes of Chinese
who frequently visit that city in their widely extended traffic
along the shores of Eastern Asia. In 1846 an accession was
made to this department of the mission by the arrival of Rev.
E. N. Jencks and his wife. The health of Mrs. Jencks, like
that of most of the ladies who had preceded her at the station,
began almost immediately to decline, and she has since died
while on a passage with her husband to the United States.
The vacancy thus created in the station at Bangkok has been
supplied by the appointment of Rev. Samuel J. Smith, a young
man born in the East and educated in this country, to whom
the language of Siam is almost vernacular. He sailed in Octo-
ber, 1848, and was designated especially to the work of preaching
to the Siamese, – a work which he would be able to enter upon
soon after he should arrive at Bangkok. -
In 1843 several meetings of both English and American
missionaries to the Chinese, of different denominations, were
held at Hongkong, for the purpose of adopting measures to
secure a standard version of the sacred Scriptures in the lan-
guage of the country.” After repeated consultations it was
* The entire Bible had long before been translated into Chinese by Rev.
Dr. Morrison, the earliest English missionary to China, assisted by Rev. W.
Milne. It was printed at Macao in 1818, at a press sent out by the London
Missionary Society. Another translation was also made by Rev. Dr. Marsh-
man of the Serampore Baptist Mission, which was printed at the mission press
in 1822. The expenses of both these editions were principally defrayed by
the British and Foreign Bible Society. Both have been pronounced unusually
faithful and correct translations, considering the circumstances in which they
were made, though that by Dr. Marshman, on account of its foreign dress, has
never been much circulated in China. A dictionary of the Chinese was also
prepared by Dr. Morrison, and published in 1823 in six quarto volumes, at
an expense of £12,000. For an account of the various missionary labors in
China, see Medhurst's History of China, and Williams's Middle Kingdom,
vol. ii, ch. 19.
IMPORTANCE OF THESE MISSIONS. 207
proposed that a general committee should be formed, who should
submit a portion of the New Testament for translation to each
of the several missionary stations that might be willing to share
in the undertaking; that the portions thus translated should be
returned for the revision of the general committee, and by them
submitted for final examination and approval to the Bible Soci-
eties of England or America. The project was at first regarded
with favor by the American Baptist missionaries, and by them
recommended to the Board, who authorized the removal of Mr.
Goddard from Bangkok to Hongkong in order to engage in
the work of translation. His departure however at that time,
in the absence of Mr. Jones from Bangkok, would have left the
station there entirely unoccupied, and it was on that account
delayed. Since then doubts have been entertained respecting
the practicability of the plan, and some disapprobation of the
arrangement having been expressed by the American and For-
eign Bible Society, the missionaries, with the approbation of
the Board, have decided not to enter into it but to make a ver-
sion of their own. This Mr. Goddard and Mr. Dean have
been for some time engaged in executing. In order to facilitate
the work, and to prosecute it in the most favorable circumstances,
Mr. Goddard has left the station at Bangkok and is now settled
at Ningpo. The translation of the Scriptures into Chinese is
a task of peculiar difficulty, arising from the genius of the lan-
guage; but they have already completed several books of the
New Testament which are soon to be printed, and it is hoped
that their version when finally accomplished, with the use of all
the aids at their command, will not be inferior to any other by
whatever hands it may be executed.
If the importance of these missions may be estimated by the
extent of the countries in which they are established, or the
numbers and characters of the people for whom they are de-
signed, we may surely rank them among the foremost of those
in which our denomination is now engaged. It is not its past
success which gives character to either. The people of Siam
have thus far entirely refused the gospel, while but here and
208 MISSIONS IN SLAM AND CHINA,
there a few among the Chinese have embraced its truths;
yet the present attitude of each of these missions, thus offering
the blessings of Christianity to two powerful nations, is one of
unusual interest. Their career and their destiny will undoubt-
edly be greatly affected by the changes which may take place
in the East,-now just beginning to be deeply stirred by the
influences of western commerce and western civilization. The
events of every month are accumulating new proofs of the amaz-
ing superiority of Christianity over all the systems of oriental
faith, and are loosening the hold of Buddhism upon the minds
of the people. The religion of the Bible is thus gaining a freer
course and a fairer opportunity, for continued progress. -
Among the Chinese the mission is just entering upon a new
era of its history. Long excluded from the empire and confined
to her exiled and wandering people, it has at length planted
itself within the walls; and, side by side with the missions of other
societies and other nations, it has commenced the work of giving
the gospel to the most populous country of the globe. Its sta-
tions at Hongkong and at Ningpo are fortunately selected, and its
missionaries are men of large experience and of tried wisdom.
Its character partakes of the grandeur of the field which it oc-
cupies, and its prospects, dim and shadowy as they now appear,
open far into the vistas of that eventful future which is mani-
festly in reserve for China.
+'|6 №țAstraalſº urog Įseºſ uoT?|6
ȘaeŠ&º§§§2ÑŅĶŠŠ）.
ſvº
§žpº*&s，
§№ț¢{};\，\！x\，\！
~~
º
º:
\ſuſ tre og søDIL 7， įſtºsſº
º dłGjųQI, -*IWIV S SV
ox{（ax +
JeſſſſſſſſſoȚa 1O
șowº–
----




MISSION IN A S S A. M.
C H A P T E R X W II.
THE Country of Assam and its Inhabitants. – Reasons for establishing a Mis-
sion there.—Messrs. Brown and Cutter go from Burmah to Assam. — They
settle at Sadiya. — Arrival of Messrs. Bronson and Thomas.- Death of Mr.
Thomas.-Labors of the Missionaries.— Mr. Bronson removes to Jaipur.
— Coöperation of British Residents. – Insurrection of the Khamtis. – Mr.
Bronson settles among the Nagas. – Arrival of other Missionaries.—Sta.
tion at Sibsagar. — Station at Nowgong. — Generous aid of British Officers.
—Translation of the Gospels. – Mr. Barker at Gowahatti...— Growth of the
Mission at the several Stations.—Schools.- Conversions to Christianity.
—Need of Reinforcement. — Appointment of new Missionaries.— Present
Prospects of the Mission.
THE country of Assam lies on the northwestern frontier of
Burmah, and from that frontier stretches across the plains of the
Brahmaputra, from seventy to one hundred miles in breadth,
towards the mountains of Himmaleh; while on the northeast it
extends to the borders of China. Its inhabitants are of many
different races, but are known by the general name of Shyans
or Shans — a term which, in the changes of Indian language,
has given rise to the English name Assam. The country was
formerly independent, but in 1822 it was added to the Burman
empire, and since 1826 has been wholly under English rule.
The tribes which occupy it differ widely in character and de-
grees of civilization, and are known under various names, – the
Assamese, the Khamtis, the Singphos, and the Nagas, being the
most numerous and important.
The attention of the Board was first directed to these people
through the agency of Captain Francis Jenkins, commissioner
of the governor-general of India for Assam, who resided at
Gowahatti. This gentleman, distinguished alike as a philan-
212 MISSION IN ASSAM.
thropist and a ruler, conceived the liveliest interest in the sin-
gular population whom he was appointed to govern, and in
1834 addressed a letter to Rev. W. H. Pearce, an English.
Baptist missionary, and Mr. E. C. Trevelyan, an officer of the
civil service at Calcutta, making known their character and con-
dition, and requesting them to invite some of the missionaries of
the American Baptists to come and settle in the country. The
invitation was sent to the members of the mission at Maulmain,
and by them it was conditionally accepted and immediately
commended to the favorable consideration of the Board, by
whom the question of its acceptance could alone be decided. It
was accompanied by an offer on the part of Captain Jenkins to
contribute a thousand rupees in aid of the mission on the arri-
val of the first missionary, and a thousand more on the estab-
lishment of a printing press. The proposal reached the man-
agers in 1835, a few months after the meeting of the Conven-
tion at Richmond, at a period when they had been specially
directed by that body to enter every unoccupied field that
should be presented, and to extend their missionary operations
as widely as possible. They were therefore already prepared
favorably to entertain an invitation to enter a new district,
which thus emanated from a source fitted, on every account, to
command their confidence and respect.
The plan of establishing a mission in Assam was also recom-
mended by other important considerations. The language of
the Shyans was similar to the Burman, and might easily be
acquired by a missionary who had resided in that empire, while
the characters used in printing were essentially the same. The
plan seemed also likely to promote a nearer access to the Chi-
nese than had hitherto been attained, under the exclusive policy
at that time pursued by the imperial government. It was
hoped that beneath the protection afforded by the East India
Company, missionaries might join the caravans that yearly
traded to the interior of China, and thus, while the jealous
mandarins were excluding foreigners from the ports, they might
plant Christianity in the heart of the empire. In this manner
THE MISSION COMMENCED AT SADIYA. 213
it was expected that a chain of missionary posts might be estab-
lished among kindred races, commencing in Siam and stretch-
ing through the Tenasserim provinces and the Burman empire
into Assam, -and thus circling the western frontiers of China
with influences and agencies that must sooner or later penetrate
its hitherto impassable barriers.
In these circumstances, the managers determined to accept.
the proposal of Captain Jenkins, and immediately referred the
matter to the missionaries at Maulmain for the arrangement of
the details and the execution of the plan. By them Messrs.
Brown and Cutter, who had then just been obliged to abandon the
station at Rangoon, had already been appointed to commence the
mission at Sadiya,—the place which was recommended as the
most eligible for the purpose. These gentlemen were deemed
eminently qualified for the undertaking, Mr. Brown having for
two years been engaged in the study of the Burman language,
and Mr. Cutter having had considerable experience in eastern
printing. They reached Calcutta with their families in Sep-
tember, 1835, where they provided themselves with a printing
press, a standing press, a hundred reams of paper and other ma-
terials for printing, — receiving at the same time the assurance
from the Board that an additional press and a complete appa-
ratus should soon be sent them from this country. At Calcutta
they embarked in boats on the Brahmaputra, and after a tedious
passage of four months through the windings of this far-rolling
river, they reached Sadiya, the place of their destination, on the
23d of March, 1836. They were welcomed to the country by
Captain Jenkins, who immediately fulfilled his promise to the
mission, and has since repeatedly proved himself its liberal ben-
efactor and active friend.
Sadiya is the name applied both to the district and its principal
village. They are situated in the northeastern portion of
Assam, four hundred miles north of Ava, and about half that
distance from Yunnan, a large mart of trade within the boun-
daries of China. The town was found by the missionaries to
be “beautifully situated in the centre of a spacious plain, sur-
214 MISSION IN A SSAM.
rounded by mountains which form an amphitheatre and bound
the horizon on all sides, except for a short distance at the south-
west.” The people among whom they originally designed to
establish the mission were the Khamtis, who had been repre-
sented as the most interesting portion of the population, and as
decidedly superior to the Burmans in intelligence and charac-
ter. They found, however, that the great body of these people
dwelt farther east, and they accordingly commenced their labors
among the Assamese and other native tribes composing the
heterogeneous population of Sadiya. So soon as a suitable
building could be erected, the ladies of the mission established
schools—Mrs. Brown for boys and Mrs. Cutter for girls — both
of which soon became well attended and flourishing. Mean-
while Mr. Brown and Mr. Cutter were exploring the field,
arranging their future labors, and giving their attention to the
study of the language, in the reduction and printing of which
they decided to adopt the Roman character instead of the Bur-
man, or any other of the oriental alphabets, – a decision which
was subsequently approved by the Board, and has uniformly
been found advantageous in the instruction of the people. Mr.
Cutter soon printed a spelling book for the use of the schools,
and Mr. Brown began to prepare works for the press both in
Assamese and in the Shyan.
On the 17th of October, 1836, Rev. Miles Bronson and Rev.
Jacob Thomas, with their wives, sailed from Boston for Calcutta,
having been appointed missionaries for the people of Assam.
They took with them the additional printing press which had
been promised, together with a full supply of all the requisite
materials for printing, and after a prosperous voyage arrived at .
Calcutta on the 11th of the following April. In a few days,
they again started in a budgerow, on their long and circuitous
passage up the Brahmaputra for Sadiya. The passage was
begun under the most favorable auspices, and was prosecuted
against the rapid current of the winding river week after week,
till it was nearly accomplished, when it was interrupted by a
most afflictive event, and at length closed amidst circumstances
1) EATH OF ME, THOMAS. 215
of the deepest sorrow and mourning. Within a few days’ jour-
ney of Sadiya, Mr. Bronson became dangerously ill of the jun-
gle fever, and as it was impossible to hasten the budgerow
forward in consequence of the sickness of the crew and
the rapidity of the current, Mr. Thomas started in a small boat
in advance of his companions, in order to procure medical assist-
ance. Using the utmost expedition he had come within sight of
the mission premises at Sadiya, when two trees whose roots
were united fell from the loosened bank of the river directly
upon the boat in which he was seated, crushing the boat, and
causing Mr. Thomas immediately to sink and drown. An event
so sudden and calamitous might well chasten the hopes of the
surviving missionaries, and impart to all their plans and labors
a graver and more serious energy. The remains of Mr. Thom-
as were taken to Sadiya and interred in the mission premises,
and a few days afterwards, on the 17th of July, his afflicted
widow and companions in travel were welcomed by the mission
families to the place of their destination.
The labors of missionaries in founding their stations and com-
mencing their system of measures for the conversion of a hea-
then people, are substantially the same in every land. The open-
ing of schools, the operations of the press, conversations at the
zayat and other places of public resort, together with frequent
excursions into the country around them, must always be made
the principal agencies on which they rely for the promulgation
of the gospel. Their object is to invite the attention of the peo-
ple to the claims of a new religion, and hence they make use of
every occasion which presents itself, to contrast its most im-
pressive and striking doctrines with the empty mummeries of
heathenism. Such were also the methods now adopted by the
members of the mission at Sadiya. The labors of Mr. Brown
were devoted principally to the Assamese and the Khamtis;
those of Mr. Bronson were designed originally for the Singphos;
while Mr. Cutter was constantly employed at the two presses
now at the station, and in superintending the schools which
were under the immediate charge of the ladies of the mission.
216 MISSION IN ASSAM.
In establishing the mission in Assam, the Board had been
governed in no small degree by the expectation that they
should thus open an avenue by which the gospel might be more
effectually carried to the northern parts of Burmah and Siam, and
also introduced into the upper provinces of China. Their in-
structions to the missionaries all contemplated this result as the
ultimate object of the undertaking, whatever subsidiary ends
might be accomplished by the way. It was in accordance with
this general idea that Mr. Kincaid attempted the journey from
Ava to Sadiya in the early part of 1837. As has been already
narrated, he penetrated the country as far as Mogaung, where
he met multitudes of Kakhyens, an interesting and susceptible
people, whom he conjectured to be the same as the Karens, and
also the same as those called Singphos by the English in Assam.*
He failed however of reaching Sadiya, and from Mogaung re-
turned to Ava, amidst the imminent perils incident to a wide
spread insurrection. For the same general object the mission-
aries at Sadiya made several excursions eastward, through the
districts known as the Shyan provinces, and proceeded almost
to the confines of China. The result of these excursions, how-
ever, usually satisfied them that, even without entering China,
there were more races of heathen already accessible than it was
possible for them to instruct in the doctrines of the gospel; but
the favorite plan was not wholly abandoned by the Board till
the barriers of the celestial empire were broken down by the
arms of England, and its ports were opened to the missionaries
of every land.
In May, 1838, Mr. Bronson and his family removed to Jai-
pur, one of the principal posts of the East India Company in
Assam, situated on the Dihing river, at a distance of three or
four days’ journey in a southwesterly direction from Sadiya.
His object in removing was to be nearer the settlements of the
*Many questions have been raised concerning the Singphos and other races
in the Shyan provinces, which are still unsettled. Too little is thus far known
of these various tribes to enable us to judge confidently of their identity with
other races in the East. -
INSURRECTION OF THE KHAMTIS. 217
Singphos, the people to whom he had been specially designated.
The measure was strongly urged by the other missionaries, and
also by Mr. Bruce, a warm friend of the mission, who resided at
Jaipur as the agent for promoting the culture of the tea plant in
the country, - then just becoming the favorite enterprise of the
East India Company. The station was also recommended by
its proximity to the Nagas, a people dwelling among the neigh-
boring hills, who had excited the interest of the British residents,
and had been visited by the missionaries. Mr. Bronson and his
family were cordially welcomed at Jaipur by Mr. Bruce and the
other English residents, and by the formergentleman they were
received into his house and provided with many comforts, until
arrangements could be made for their settlement. The officers
who were living there contributed liberally to aid the infant
station, and several of the ladies of their families joined with the
missionaries in opening schools and in teaching the rude heathen
children who came for instruction. At about the same period -
Captain Jenkins, who was the originator of the mission and had
ever been the faithful guardian of all its interests, also contribut-
ed five hundred rupees for replenishing the fonts of type, and
also offered five hundred more towards the support of a super-
intendent of the schools whenever one should be appointed by
the Board. Indeed so warm and generous was the interest felt
by this gentleman in the prosperity of the mission, that he made
frequent communications directly to the Board, setting forth its
condition and wants, and recommending the measures he deem-
ed important for its growth, and coupling with his suggestions
the most liberal offers of aid in carrying them into execution.
The operations of the mission at each of its stations were
quietly and regularly advancing, when they were suddenly
interrupted by an insurrection of the Khamtis, which threat-
ened the lives of the missionaries and for a time put an end to
their labors. The East India Company had been gradually
extending their sway over the country, until several of the
more powerful tribes combined in an attempt to regain the in-
dependence which they had lost. The insurrection commenced
20
218 MISSION IN ASSAM.
*
with an attack upon Sadiya on the 28th of January, 1839, and
extended through several of the neighboring villages. A large
number of the soldiers and adherents of the English were slain
in the fierceness of the first assault, and quiet was not restored
till the natives had been made severely to feel the pressure of
English power. The missionaries at Sadiya fled to the can-
tonments of the troops, where they were protected by the
English officers till the insurrection was quelled, when they
removed to Jaipur. At the time of the outbreak Mr. Brenson
was absent on a tour among the Nagas, concerning whola he
was making many interesting observations preparatory to the
establishment of a station for their benefit. On hearing of the
revolt he hastened back, amidst many perils, to his family at
Jaipur, where he found the schools broken up and the whole
population distracted with alarms and rumors of approaching
Wºr,
At Sadiya the people continued in still greater agitation.
Many of them were leaving the town, and those who remained
were in so disturbed a condition that it was deemed best imme-
diately to remove the entire mission to Jaipur. The expenses
of the removal were generously defrayed by Mr. Bruce, and the
new station promised many advantages which had never been
attained at the old; yet many months elapsed before the labors
of the missionaries were fully resumed, or the mission entirely
recovered from the shock it had sustained. In a few months.
the military and civil officers followed the missionaries to
Jaipur, and Sadiya, deserted by its inhabitants, “was aban-
doned to the tigers and jackals.” The missionaries, however,
in the interruption of their ordinary labors, devoted their at-
tention the more earnestly to the acquisition of the several
languages spoken by the people around them, and to the pre-
paration of books for the press. Mr. Brown soon completed
the translation of the Gospel of Matthew, in Assamese and in
Khamti, and Mr. Cutter, having been to Calcutta for a supply
of additional type, returned in April, 1839, and commenced
printing the books which had been prepared.
*
"...º.
*
- (>
CHANGES AND AFFLICTIONS. 219
In January, 1840, Mr. Bronson made a second visit to the
Nagas, who dwelt among the neighboring hills, and finding
them now in a quiet condition and eager for instruction, he de-
termined at once to establish among them the mission which
had long been contemplated. He was encouraged in the un-
dertaking by the generous interest expressed in these people by
the English officers and residents, of whom Mr. Bruce con-
tributed five hundred rupees and Captain Hannay two hundred
and fifty for the establishment of schools. Mr. Bronson moved
his family to the hills in March, and having already acquired
the language and being furnished with books, he immediately
commenced his labors among the people there.
On the 14th of May the mission, which was now extended
to several different tribes in Assam, was gladdened by the ar-
rival of Rev. Cyrus Barker and his wife, and Miss Rhoda
Bronson, sister of Rev. Mr. Bronson, who had sailed from
the United States in the preceding October. These missiona-
ries were originally designated to the department among the
Nagas, but on their arrival at Jaipur, Mr. Barker, finding that
Mr. Bronson had already removed to the hills, made prepara-
tions to engage in labors for the Assamese. Miss Bronson,
however, soon joined her brother at the new station which he
had commenced among the Nagas.
The year following the arrival of the new missionaries was
marked by many changes not unmingled with afflictions. Mr.
and Mrs. Brown were obliged to leave the mission and make a
passage to Calcutta for the benefit of their health. Mr. Bron-
son had been settled among the Nagas but a few months when
he and several of his family were afflicted with severe illness,
and obliged in consequence to abandon the station and remove
to Jaipur. But even here health did not return to all; the
constitution of Miss Bronson, though originally strong, yielded
to the fever which she took among the hills, and she died at
Jaipur on the 8th of December, 1840, ere she had scarcely
begun her work as a missionary. Mr. Barker resided for a
time at Jaipur, engaged in studying the language of the As-
- *
º,
{}
220 Mission IN Assam.
samese, and making frequent excursions into the country for the
purpose of selecting a place for his future residence. He at
length determined on Sibsagar, a flourishing post of the East
India Company, on a branch of the Brahmaputra, three days'
journey below Jaipur. With the approbation of his brethren,
he removed to this place with his family in May, 1841, and in
the following July he was joined by Mr. and Mrs. Brown.
The expectations which were entertained concerning Jaipur
had not been fully realized. The population had diminished,
and the efforts of the East India Company to promote the cul-
ture of tea had been partly withdrawn and bestowed on other
places. In addition to this, the station had proved less healthy
than was expected, and the missionaries accordingly determin-
ed, without wholly abandoning Jaipur, to make Sibsagar the
principal seat of the mission. The tea culture here promised
to be a permanent interest, and with a population of eight thou-
sand, with a salubrious climate and many advantages derived
from the residence of the English, the place commended itself
to their judgment as the most suitable which could be selected,
especially for labors among the Assamese.
Mr. Bronson, on the recovery of his health, deeming it no
longer wise to return to the station among the hills, removed,
in October, 1841, to Nowgong, a flourishing town in the midst
of a populous district in Central Assam, to which he had been
specially invited by Capt. J. T. Gordon, an English officer who
had long been a friend and benefactor of the mission. The
population of the town and the district was made up of many
different races, among whom the Nagas were quite numerous.
But now that the station among these people had been sus-
pended, and both the Singphos and Khamtis were still compar-
atively inaccessible, the missionaries at all the stations were
obliged in a great degree to restrict their labors to the Assamese
population. With the aid of Captain Gordon, Mrs. Bronson
Soon opened a large mission-school at Nowgong, in which two
native Christians from. Calcutta were employed as assistants,
PRINTING OPERATIONS. 221
and which has continued to flourish now for many years, and
has proved a means of great good to its pupils.
Yet amidst all these changes, some of them of the most afflic-
tive character, the blessing of Heaven was not withheld from
the operations of the mission. A large amount of labor was
accomplished by the missionaries, and at Sibsagar two converts
early embraced Christianity and were baptized. Each of the
stations also continued still to receive the generous benefactions
of the pious and philanthropic officers and residents attached to
the civil and the military service of the East India Company.
Among these, Major Jenkins — for this is now his rank — has
not only fulfilled his early promises to the mission, but has also
presented to it a large printing press, and has annually contrib-
uted five hundred rupees for its support. Others have rendered
aid scarcely less valuable and important, by contributions of
money, by attentions to the comfort of the missionaries, and by
the erection of commodious dwellings and other buildings for
their accommodation. It may indeed be questioned whether, in
any other of our missions, so liberal contributions have been
made and so uniform and generous interest has been manifested
by the English residents of the country. These gentlemen are
the representatives of the power that has subjugated the coun-
tries of the East; but by the humane and generous policy which
they and many of their associates have adopted, both here and
in Burmah, they have smoothed the horrid front of war and
disarmed conquest of its terrors, – while, by their efforts in be-
half of Christian missions among the people, they have more
than compensated them for the loss of their former independence.
Mr. Cutter still continued at Jaipur superintending the opera-
tions of the presses under his charge. Though these operations
were somewhat restricted by the absence of the other mission-
aries, they were yet by no means unimportant. School books
in different languages were supplied to all the numerous schools,
and the Gospels of Matthew and John together with the Acts of
the Apostles, all which had been translated by Mr. Brown, were
carried through the press early in the summer of 1842. The
20*
222 MISSION IN ASSAM-
station at Jaipur, however, had now become inconvenient as a
place for printing, besides being too much exposed to the irrup-
tions of the still agitated Singphos and Khamtis of the district.
In the winter of 1842–3 the place was attacked by parties of
insurgents, and it was several weeks before they were entirely
subdued. During this time Mr. Cutter was obliged to take
down the presses and hide them away with all the types belong-
ing to the establishment, in order to secure them from the perils
with which they were threatened. The presses, however, were
soon set up, and their operations were resumed, but their ex-
posed condition rendered it necessary to fix on some other station
at which to place the printing establishment of the mission. Af-
ter a full consultation of the missionaries and an interchange of
views with the Board, it was determined that the presses should
be removed to Sibsagar, and the removal was accomplished in
November, 1843. In anticipation of the settlement of Mr.
Cutter at Sibsagar, Mr. Barker, with the advice of his associates,
went forth to seek a suitable place in Central Assam for the
location of another branch of the mission. He went first to
Tezpur, but after a few weeks removed to Gowahatti, the resi-
dence of Major Jenkins, and the most important town in the
province, and here commenced a new station to take the place
of Jaipur, which was now abandoned.
By the close of the year 1843 the missionaries were fully
established at their respective stations of Sibsagar, Nowgong
and Gowahatti, at which they have since continued to prosecute
their labors with comparatively few interruptions. These la-
bors have consisted principally of preaching, translating and
teaching, and have been chiefly confined to the Assamese
population instead of embracing the Khamtis, the Singphos and
the Nagas, as was originally designed. At each of the stations
a church was soon constituted, and though during the early
years of the mission but few were converted to Christianity,
yet these infant churches were gradually strengthened by an
occasional accession. Scattered among the Assamese population,
especially in the district of Gowahatti, are multitudes of Brah-
NOWGONG ORPHAN INSTITUTION. 223
mins, whose fanatical devotion to their own superstition has often
occasioned violent opposition to the mission. It has also occa-
sionally encountered the more subtile and secret hostility of a
few English missionaries who are scattered throughout the
province, preaching the dogmas of the “Tractarian” party of
the English church. The commissioner, however, and many of
the principal officers connected with the service have continued
to give to it their hearty and most efficient support, and every
year of its progress has opened with brighter prospects and
been crowned with more encouraging results.
Connected with each of the stations are one or more mission
schools, in which children and youth are specially instructed in
the doctrines of the gospel. In addition to these, schools have
been opened in the neighboring towns and villages, which are
instructed in part by the ladies of the mission, aided by English
ladies residing there, and in part by native assistants either be-
longing to the country or obtained from Calcutta. These schools
have become very numerous, and contain in all scarcely less
than a thousand pupils.
But the school to which the missionaries have attached the
highest importance, and which has thus far been most productive
of spiritual results, is the Orphan Institution at Nowgong. Its
design was to gather from all parts of the province, destitute
children bereft of their parents, and train them, under Christian
influences, to a knowledge of useful occupations and of the gos-
pel. The institution was projected by Mr. Bronson, with the
advice of the other members of the mission, and was established
by the contributions of the English residents in Assam. Up-
wards of twelve hundred rupees were contributed at the outset
for the erection of a suitable building, and the institution went
into operation in the beginning of 1844. During the first year
of its existence it contained twelve pupils, and the number has
since been increased to upwards of fifty. The amount re-
quired for its support has increased from year to year, as its
wants have been multiplied; yet such has been the generosity of
its friends, that its expenses until of late have been defrayed
without cost to the mission. -
224 MISSION IN ASSAM-
Mr. Brown has been steadily advancing in the translation of
the Scriptures, leaving to the other missionaries the work of pre-
paring tracts and books to be used in the schools. The whole
of the New Testament has been translated, and an edition of
it printed by Mr. Cutter. The translator is now engaged in
revising and perfecting his work, and expects immediately to
enter upon the task of rendering the other parts of the Bible
into Assamese. At Sibsagar Messrs. Brown and Cutter have
also commenced a monthly journal of a religious and miscella-
neous character, which is called Orunodoi, or “Rising Dawn.”
The first number was published in January, 1846, and since
that period it has attained a wide circulation among the native
population, and has been found in many respects to be more
efficient than ordinary tracts in breaking down their prejudices
and enlightening their ignorance.
But amidst all the favorable influences which from the be-
ginning had attended the mission, and all the labors which had
been performed for its advancement, but few converts were
made to Christianity during the early years of its history. The
missionaries at their respective stations baptized only here and
there a solitary wanderer from heathenism, who had embraced
the new religion with a living faith in its truths. At length in
1846, after nearly ten years of toil and of hope had passed
away, a brighter day dawned upon the mission. The elder
pupils of the Orphan Institution at Nowgong, who had experi-
enced most of the humane charity which the gospel enjoins, were
also among the first to experience its life-giving power. Seven
of them were baptized during the year, and with them others
at the same station; and from this period each of the three
churches connected with the mission has received frequent acces-
sions, until they now together number upwards of sixty disciples
of the Saviour, who have been reclaimed from the superstition in
which they were educated, and trained to the worship and
service of God. The church at Gowahatti, which was not or-
ganized till 1845, at the end of two years contained twenty-
Seven members.
NEED OF REINFORCEMENT. 225
... It is an unvarying law of the missionary enterprise that every
successful result imposes the necessity of additional effort. Not:
to advance is always to recede. The plans of one year, if faith-
fully executed, only lead to larger plans for the years that fol-
low. The station which a single missionary may commence, will
soon require the labors of several in order fully to maintain and
carry it forward. The law finds ample illustrations in the his-
tory of every mission that is earnestly prosecuted, and in the
history of none are they more numerous than of that among the
people of Assam. Its members soon found that the field which
lay around them was far too extensive to be cultivated by the
few scattered individuals who had entered it, and that the work
which they had undertaken was constantly outgrowing their
own ability to perform it. We accordingly find them, at the
period of the earliest prosperity of the mission, addressing to
the managers earnest appeals for additional laborers, and often
filled with sorrow and dismay because they could not be sent
in the numbers which their own success had rendered necessa-
ry. But amidst the multiplied cares and labors thus devolving
on the members of the mission, the health of nearly every one
became sensibly enfeebled. Mr. and Mrs. Cutter were oblig-
ed for a time to leave their station, and Mrs. Brown, after
being accompanied to Calcutta by her husband, took passage
with her children for the United States, and arrived in Febru-
ary, 1847. So disheartening did their condition become in
consequence of the excessive labors imposed by the exigencies
of the mission, that in 1845 several of the English officers, who
were witnesses of their failing health, expressed to the mana-
gers their strong convictions of the necessity of reinforcing the
mission. These appeals, however, like those which had pre-
ceded them, found the Board embarrassed by a debt which
every year was increasing, and perplexed by the sectional dif-
ferences which led to the formation of the Missionary Union.
But they were not forgotten or lightly considered. So soon
as the embarrassments had passed away the Executive Com-
mittee of the Union gave their earliest attention to the wants of
226 MISSION IN ASSAM.
the mission. The arrival of Mrs. Brown, and the representa-
tions which she gave, made these wants more sensibly felt, and
early in 1847, two missionaries, Rev. A. H. Danforth and Rev.
Ira J. Stoddard, offered their services, and were appointed to
Assam,-the former to join the station at Gowahatti, the latter
to relieve Mr. Bronson in the charge of the Orphan Institution
at Nowgong. In November of that year these gentlemen and
their wives sailed for Calcutta.
The present condition and prospects of this mission are fitted
to awaken the most animated hopes in the minds of its friends
and supporters. It still continues to receive the liberal aid of
the officers and gentlemen attached to the English service in
Assam, -a fact which of itself is no slight testimonial to its use-
fulness. Its schools are highly valued by the people, who
desire their establishment in far greater numbers than can at
present be accomplished. In addition to this it is already evi-
dent that Christian influences are beginning to loosen the hold
which Brahminism has had on their minds. Its dogmas are less
generally believed than formerly, and many even of the priests
openly confess the superiority of the gospel. With the auspi-
cious beginning which has been made, and with the incidental
advantages derived from the favor of the English residents, the
mission, in its increased strength and numbers, now promises to
confer invaluable blessings upon the people of Assam, and to
contribute in no unimportant degree to the ultimate triumph of
the Christian faith.
Tºt
TELO O GOO
COTUNTERY
Scale of Miles.
50 100 lºſ)
200
icomalee
\
& |
| W $oymron Boston.]
7||7 Ion. East, from Greenſwich.









------ -
& ºrt- > *-*. " ". . . - — = - s -
-
MISSION AM on G THE TELoo Goos.
C HAPTER XVIII.
* ,
Country of the Teloogoos. – Origin of the Mission.—Arrival of Rev. Mr. Day
at Vizagapatam.—His settlement at Madras.—Visit to Bellary. — Difficul-
ties Encountered by a solitary Missionary.—His Removal to Nellore...—
Arrival of Rev. Mr. Van Husen. — Mr. Day visits Madras. – Caste among
the Teloogoos. – Need of a Translation of the Scriptures. – Growth of the
Mission.— Health of the Missionaries fails. – They leave Nellore and re-
turn to the United States.— State of the Mission in their Absence.— Re-
turn of Mr. Day and Appointment of Rev. Mr. Jewett in 1848.
ON the western coast of the Bay of Bengal, over a region
stretching nearly eight hundred miles from the northern part of
the Carnatic to the borders of Orissa, are scattered a people
known as the Telingas, or Teloogoos. They are supposed to be
the descendants of one of the ancient races of India whose dy-
nasty once ruled over many nations, and, though now subject to
different jurisdictions, they are still united by a common lan-
guage and by common national traditions. They are generally
estimated at upwards of ten millions in number, of whom three
millions dwell within the northern circars or collectorates of the
Presidency of Madras and are subject to its government, while
the remainder are under the sway of the Nizam of Hyderabad,
or Golcondah. Though distinct from the races by whom they are
surrounded, they are without a country ruled by their power or
known by their name; and far beyond the limits of their peculiar
territory they are scattered over the whole of southern India,
and are particularly numerous in the districts of Tanjore and
Mysore, and also in the city of Madras. Their largest city
is Masulapatam, which has a population of 80,000. Their
other leading cities are Nellore, Guntoor, Vizagapatam, and Cica-
21 -
230 MISSION AMONG THE TELOOGOOS
cole, Burhampore, and Ganjam, which contain from 12,000 to
20,000 inhabitants each. The religion of the Teloogoos is
Brahminism, and, as in the other tribes of Hindostan, the sys-
tem of caste prevails among them, dividing them into different
classes between which it establishes impassable barriers. Every
separate trade or occupation is a caste by itself, and the members
of each, with their families and relatives, are prevented by the
system from ever becoming connected and even from associating
with those belonging to another.
The attention of our Missionary Board was directed to these
people by Rev. Amos Sutton, of the mission of the English Gen-
eral Baptists in Orissa, during his visit to the United States in
1835. They had long before attracted the notice of the London
Missionary Society, who in 1805 stationed its earliest mission-
aries in India among the Teloogoos at Vizagapatam. These
missionaries soon died, and, though others were sent to succeed
them, the station had often been vacant, and at the time of Mr.
Sutton's visit to America there was but a single missionary in
all the region inhabited by the Teloogoos. Though this district
was widely separated from the other missions of the Board, yet
its proximity to the Tamil missions of the American Board on
the south, and to those of the English General Baptists, on the
north, combined with its then unoccupied condition in rendering
it a most desirable field for Christian effort, and in awakening
a strong disposition to make it the seat of a new mission. Much
also had already been done by the missionaries of other societies;
a grammar and a dictionary had been prepared for the special
purpose of aiding the English in acquiring the language, and
the members of the Baptist Mission at Serampore had made a
translation of the entire Bible, of which the New Testament
and several books of the Old had already been printed.* The
*Two translations had been made of the New Testament, -one by the mis-
sionaries at Serampore, the other by a missionary of the London Society.
Both these had been printed,—the former at Serampore, the latter at Madras.
The Pentateuch and some other parts of the Old Testament had also been
printed at different periods by the Madras Bible Society.
ARRIVAL OF THE FIRST MISSIONARIES. 231
Teloogoos, too, were said to be among the most interesting and
intelligent of the peoples of India, possessing a language of un-
usual copiousness and variety, and evincing tastes and capacities
which, it was thought, would give them peculiar aptitude for
appreciating spiritual truth and Christian civilization. These
considerations, united with the special instructions of the Con-
vention then recently adopted at its meeting in Richmond,
directing them to establish new missions in every unoccupied
field where there was a reasonable prospect of success, decided
the Board to comply with the recommendations of Rev. Mr.
Sutton, and to establish a mission among the Teloogoos.
It was on the 20th of September, 1835, that Rev. Samuel S.
Day and his wife, and Rev. E. L. Abbott, received their public
instructions as missionaries to these people; and two days after-
wards they sailed from Boston in the ship Louvre, bound to Cal-
cutta, in company with Rev. Mr. Malcom and a large number of
missionaries designated to the East, among whom was also Rev.
Mr. Sutton of Orissa. On their arrival at Calcutta in Febru-
ary, 1836, it was deemed best that Mr. Abbott should become
connected with the mission among the Karens, which was then
suffering for the want of additional laborers. He accordingly
proceeded to the Burman empire, while Mr. and Mrs. Day im-
mediately repaired to Vizagapatam, where they commenced the
study of the language under the instruction of a learned Brah-
min, and with the aids of an English and Teloogoo dictionary,
a grammar, a translation of the New Testament, and other
books which had been prepared by the missionaries who pre-
ceded them. A &
Mr. Day found here two missionaries of the London Society,
Rev. Messrs. Porter and Gordon, the latter of whom was sta-
tioned at Cuddapah. These were the only stations of this Society
among the Teloogoos, and as the missionaries assured Mr. Day
that no others were likely to be established, he deemed it spec-
ially important to select a site for his own mission in Some
unoccupied portion of the Teloogoo country. In August, 1836,
he went with his family to Cicacole, where he commenced his
232 MISSION AMONG THE TELOOGOOS.
labors as a missionary. He here established a school which
was at first attended by thirty or forty scholars, who, it was soon
evident, came to be instructed with the hope of receiving some
trifling reward; for when they found that the sum which they
expected was not paid they were seen no more at the school.
In a little time however, as the aims of the missionary became
better understood, the school was filled with thirty-six boys
who attended regularly, and were pledged to remain in it at
least six months. In December another school was begun,
composed of boys of the lowest condition in life, who had awak-
ened the compassion of the missionary on account of their
extreme ignorance and stupidity. While at Cicacole Mr. Day
was solicited to go and reside at Arnee, where was then quar-
tered the regiment containing soldiers who had been baptized
at Maulmain; but he had arranged with Mr. Malcom to delay
fixing upon a place of permanent settlement until they should
have an opportunity to consult together upon the subject. In
January, 1837, in company with Rev. Mr. Gordon of Vizaga-
patam, he went on an excursion one hundred and twenty miles
into the interior, as far as Burhampore, in the course of which
he visited forty towns and villages and enlarged his acquaint-
ance with the character and superstitions of the people. Many
of these places were thought to present inviting fields for mis-
sionary labor, though in several of them a missionary or even
a Christian had never been seen before. -
In the following March Mr. Day went to Madras in order to
meet Rev. Mr. Malcom, who had now returned from his visit to
Farther India; and after a full consideration of the respective
advantages of the several places which had been visited, Madras
was fixed upon as the seat of the mission. Though it was
already the residence of several missionaries of different Soci-
eties, yet none of them were engaged in labor for the Teloogoos,
who constituted, as was estimated, at least one sixth part of the
population of the city and the villages in its suburbs. In one
of these villages, Wonarapetta, where was a large Teloogoo
population, he took up his residence, and with the aid of Mrs.
A CHURCH ongANIZED AT MADRAs. 238
Day and of Christian Poorooshothum, a native preacher from
Burhampore, he established three schools, containing in all
about seventy Scholars. He preached in English to the British
residents of Madras, and the assistant maintained public wor-
ship in the native language. He also distributed copies of the
Scriptures and religious tracts so far as was in his power, among
the higher and middle classes, a large portion of whom, espec-
ially of the males, were able to read.
In March and April of the following year he visited Bellary,
a small town in the North, which contained a branch of the
Maulmain English church, composed of soldiers belonging to
the regiment stationed there. During his visit he baptized
twenty-two persons in the presence of an assembly of three
thousand natives, drawn together to witness the unwonted spec-
tacle of a Christian baptism. On his return to Madras a
church of sixteen members—English, Eurasian, Hindoo, and
Burman—was organized in that city, and the little company
at Bellary were now constituted a branch of the new church,
and recognized as a part of the charge of the solitary mission-
ary. To this church he continued to preach in English, which
was understood by all its members and by thousands of the na-
tive population of the city; and so strong was the desire to learn
it that schools would not be long attended by pupils of the
higher classes of the people, unless the English language were
among the subjects of instruction.
So numerous, however, are the cares and so various the labors (
which pertain to a mission planted in a heathen land, that a
single missionary always works at great disadvantage. The
field lies all unoccupied around him, and in whatever direction
he turns, his eye rests upon nought but the wide waste of hea-
thenism. He has none to counsel him, none to share his labors; '
and if he pursues with appropriate zeal any particular interest
which has called forth his efforts, he must leave all others;
uncared-for. If he remains in the city, the people of the coun-
try may not hear the gospel; if he travels from village to vil-
lage, the schools he has planted and the advantages he has
21* -
234 MISSION AMONG THE TELOOGOO8.
gained in the city become scattered and lost. Every page of
missionary history illustrates the wisdom of our Lord's exam-
ple in sending forth his disciples, two and two, to preach to dis-
tant villages the doctrines he had taught them. Mr. Day had
been in Madras but a few months when he began to experience
the disadvantages of his solitary condition. The infant mission
was already spreading its branches in many directions, and re-
quiring more care and labor than it was possible for one person,
however active, to bestow. He frequently appealed to the
Board for help, but the limited resources with which they were
supplied allowed them to make no addition to the station. A
press was also needed; for though the presses of the other mis-
sions in that city were furnished with Teloogoo type they were
usually employed in other kinds of printing, and Mr. Day was,
in consequence, often unsupplied with the tracts and books
which he required in his daily intercourse with the people.
In these circumstances, often embarrassed and almost dis-
heartened, he saw the first four years of his labors pass away.
Several Eurasians and Tamils, as well as several English, had
been baptized; and in a second visit which he made to Arnee,
nine additional members of the regiment stationed there had
been added to the church. But notwithstanding these encour-
aging indications among other races none of the Teloogoos
had yet embraced Christianity, and it became evident that the
station at Madras, though possessing many important advan-
tages, was still not likely to succeed among the people for
whose benefit it was specially established. In the summer of
1839 Mr. Day therefore began seriously to think of removing
to some more favorable situation in another part of the Teloo-
goo country.
It chanced that one of the native assistants, a Tamil from
Tanjore, was at this time preaching at Nellore,” a large town an
hundred and ten miles north of Madras, in the midst of a numer-
* It is said there are not less than two millions of Teloogoos in the district
of Nellore.
MELLORE, - 235
ous population purely of Teloogoos. To this place Mr. Day
determined to remove the mission, though without entirely
abandoning the station at Madras, where, in case he should be
joined by another missionary, he hoped still to maintain the lit-
tle church which he had planted. He reached Nellore with his
family in February, 1840, and having rented of the government a
suitable lot he immediately erected a large building, a part of
which was to be used as a mission-house and a part as a zayat.
He also commenced the daily reading of the Scriptures, and
preaching on the Sabbath to congregations which averaged twen-
ty-five in number. A few weeks after his arrival at Nellore, he
had the pleasure of welcoming to the station Rev. Stephen Van
Husen and his wife, who had sailed from the United States in
October, 1839; and in the following September he baptized the
first Christian convert from the Teloogoos. A church was soon
afterwards constituted, and while Mr. Van Husen was learning
the language he devoted himself to the distribution of tracts, to
preaching in English, and also to instructing in Christian doc-
trines such of the assistants and others as he was able to hold
communication with. He also journeyed far into the interior
in company with the assistant, studying the character and su-
perstitions of the people, attending the heathen festivals and
distributing thousands of tracts and books to all who would re-
ceive them.
. In the spring of 1841 Mr. Day made a visit to Madras, the
first which he had been able to make since his removal to Nel-
lore. He found the church in a condition far from satisfactory.
Its members ceased to meet for religious worship, and many of
them either had become connected with other churches, or, what
was far more to be regretted, were living in total neglect of all
Christian culture. With pain rather than with surprise at their
fallen and scattered condition, he endeavored to rally them
again; but so infrequent and few must be the visits which could
be made to them either by Mr. Van Husen or himself, that, in
the present condition of the mission, he felt obliged to abandon
the hope of retaining them under its care. Several converts
286 MISSION AMONG THE TELOOGOO8.
were ready to be baptized, but the church was not worthy to
receive them, and Mr. Day was obliged to leave them to the
unfriendly influences by which they were surrounded,—rightly
deciding that as he and his associate had been sent to the Teloo-
goos, it was not proper for them to abandon their appointed
work, even for so important a labor as that which demanded
their attention among the English converts of their own denom-
ination at Madras. The church was accordingly dissolved,
though another was soon after constituted at Arcot, embracing
some of the same members together with several Tamil and
Teloogoo people who were baptized at Arcot, and placed under
the charge of an intelligent native assistant.
The only peculiar hinderances which the missionaries encoun-
tered arose from the system of caste, to which all classes of the
people in Hindostan are enslaved. In accordance with its pro-
hibitions the natives refused to receive the missionaries into
their dwellings lest they should lose caste; yet on public festi-
vals and at the corners of the streets they were suffered to preach
without molestation, and assemblies of fifty or a hundred per-
sons would often gather to hear them. This absurd system is
as capricious as it is despotic in its requirements. It permits
religious instruction to be given in schools by the missionary,
and Christian catechisms to be taught by the unconverted na-
tive teacher, but Christian native teachers it does not tolerate.
It allows children to be sent to the missionaries to be educated,
but it does not allow the missionaries to visit the families to
which the children belong. Schools have been established in
considerable number by the agents of the East India Company,
in which male children are taught English, and many of the
common branches of knowledge; and at Nellore and the neigh-
boring villages, additional schools—at one time twelve in num-
ber—were established by the missionaries, strictly for religious
instruction. These schools were attended with many good
results. The scholars were required to be present at religious
exercises both on week days and on Sunday, and were often
accompanied by their parents. In this manner an interest in
DIFFERENT VERSIONs of THE scFIPTUREs. 237
the mission and a knowledge of Christian truth were commu-
nicated to many families, and the impression was spread widely
abroad that Christianity is vastly superior to Buddhism or
Brahminism, and that it will at length universally prevail.
* In consequence of the views entertained by the Baptist de-
nomination respecting the mode and the subjects of Christian
baptism, our missionaries have seldom been inclined to adopt
the versions of the sacred Scriptures which have been made by
those who preceded them in the East. In most of these ver-
sions, the words relating to this ordinance are either transferred
from the original Greek, or are translated in a manner that
conflicts with the settled faith and practice of our churches.
The British and Foreign Bible Society early directed that all
translations which might be made under its auspices should be
strictly in accordance with “the authorized English version,”—
thus requiring the transfer and forbidding the translation of the
words relating to baptism. In March, 1841, while Mr. Day
was at Madras, the Bible Society of that city adopted the same
resolution. Against the extension of these words and their
perpetuation in all languages, the Baptists, however, both in
England and America, had very generally protested, and both
the instructions of the Board and the resolutions of the Conven-
tion had directed the missionaries to translate the words accord-
ing to their conscientious convictions of truth. In these cir-
cumstances, it was plain that any modification of the common
version which Messrs. Day and Van Husen might make, could
not be published by the Bible Society of Madras, on whose copies
they had hitherto been accustomed to rely. They accordingly
addressed a statement of the facts to the Board, and requested
that another missionary might be sent them, together with a
press which they had long needed, that they might have within
their own control the means of multiplying copies of the word
of God faithfully translated, in accordance with the principles
of their own faith and that of their brethren in America. How-
ever much it is to be regretted that the Scriptures are circu-
lated in heathen lands in versions essentially different from
238 MISSION ATIONG THE TELOOGOOS,
each other, yet in the present condition of the Christian world
this result seems unavoidable, and indeed had already taken
place from other causes, before it was brought about by the
views or the instructions of Baptist missionaries. The Board,
however, were at this time too much straitened in their means
to comply with the request, even had any person suitable for
the post offered his services for their acceptance; and though
they fully approved the principle maintained by the missionaries,
they were obliged still to leave them without the aid which they
required in carrying it into practice. • ,
Meanwhile the missionaries had divided the station and estab-
lished themselves in different parts of the city, for greater con-
venience in superintending the several schools, and also for
maintaining intercourse with a greater variety of the population.
In August, 1843, three additional converts were baptized and
added to the church,-one of them a Teloogoo and a member
of the boarding school, another a Tamil who spoke Teloogoo,
a young man of superior education, and the third a Eurasian
woman who resided in Mr. Day's family. Schools of different
grades were also established, not only in the city, but in several
of the adjacent villages, at the request of the inhabitants them-
selves; and it was plain that the population were beginning to
feel the influence of the gospel and to doubt the divinity of
their idols. The mission was thus increasing both in interest
and efficiency when the health of its members began to fail,
and many of its most useful labors were in consequence re-
mitted.
The climate of Nellore, though exceedingly warm, is reputed
to be not prejudicial to the health of Europeans; yet the mis-
sionaries were unable long to endure it. Mrs. Day, whose
health first began to suffer, regained her accustomed strength
after a brief absence from the station. Mr. Van Husen was
obliged to remit his labors in 1843, and, after repeated though
unsuccessful trials of every remedy which was prescribed, was
obliged to take passage for Calcutta, and at length to return to
the United States. He arrived with Mrs. Van Husen in Oc-
DEPARTURE OF THE MISSIONARIES FROM NELLORE. 239
tober, 1845, the victim of a distressing malady from which he
has not yet recovered.
The departure of these missionaries from Nellore was a se-
rious blow to all the interests of the mission. Two schools
which had been principally under their charge were immediately
suspended, and a third was soon after broken up by the appear-
ance of the cholera. The remaining duties of the station were
performed by Mr. and Mrs. Day, with the aid of the assistants;
but their health was no longer adequate to the task, and was
now becoming feebler every month. In October, 1845, Mr.
Day, who had for some time been unable to labor with his
accustomed assiduity, went to Madras in order to administer
baptism to several persons attached to one of the regiments
there; but on reaching that city he was wholly unable to per-
form the service. He was received into the families of several
Christian friends, and by the physicians whom he consulted was
advised to lose no time in commencing a protracted voyage for
the recovery of his health. His family, who were still at Nel-
lore, were immediately sent for, and, with the generous aid of
friends who compassionated their condition, were made ready
for their unexpected departure for America. Mr. and Mrs.
Day had then neither the time nor the means requisite for pre-
paring for a long and perilous passage across the oceans that
separated them from their native land; but every want was
supplied and every comfort provided by the attentions of their
friends at Madras. Christian missionaries and English officers
vied with each other in aiding the afflicted mission family,
as they reluctantly left the country to which they had come on
their errand of philanthropy.” They embarked at Madras in
December, 1845, and coming by way of England, arrived in
this country in the following June.
Leaving the station at Nellore thus abruptly and unexpected-
#Mr. Day acknowledges these acts of hospitality and generosity which he
and his family experienced, both at Nellore and at Madras, with special grati-
tude, in a communication addressed to the Executive Committee, written on
his passage home and printed in the Magazine for September, 1846.
240 MISSION AMONG THE TELOOGOOS.
ly, it was impossible for Mr. Day to arrange very perfectly for
its future continuance and guidance. The property of the mis-
sion then consisted of a dwelling house, part of which was used
as a zayat, and a small estate which had been occupied by the
missionary and his family, together with a school house which
had been purchased for the accommodation of Mr. Van Husen's
part of the station, — the whole valued at about twenty-three
hundred dollars. These were all left in charge of a Eurasian
preacher, who was placed at the head of the mission, and was
to be assisted by two native Christians, having also under their
care five schools,” each averaging twenty-five scholars. In ad-
dition there was a church of six or seven members, Tamils and
Teloogoos, in whose piety the missionary had the highest confi-
dence, and whose Christian characters have since continued
without reproach amidst many temptations and evil influences.
Thus deprived of its founder and principal conductor, the mis-
sion was regarded by its friends with peculiar solicitude. The
Executive Committee had long felt their inability to sustain it
with the energy which its exigencies obviously demanded; and
now that its only remaining occupant had been obliged to leave
it, they seriously entertained the thought of wholly abandoming
the country of the Teloogoos and confining their missions to the
regions of Farther India, where their stations seemed fortunately
placed in convenient proximity to each other. So earnest, how-
ever, were the views both of Mr. Day, and of Mr. Sutton who
wrote from Orissa, respecting the advantages offered by the
country as a field for Christian missions, and so interesting and
attractive seemed the character of the people, that the com-
mittee determined for the present at least not to advise a dis-
solution of the mission, but to wait for future indications of
Providence to decide the policy which they should pursue.
Thus continued the station at Nellore in the hands of native
assistants, who were able to do little more than maintain the
*Three Teloogoo, one Tamil and one English. The latter has since been
discontinued.
MISSIſ)NARY LABOR RESUMED. 241
schools which had been planted by the missionaries, until the
meeting of the Union at Troy, in May, 1848. Meanwhile the
question of continuing the mission had assumed a new aspect,
from the fact that Mr. Day had recovered his health and was
now ready to return to his station; and also that Rev. Lyman
Jewett, who had recently offered his services as a mission-
ary, was desirous of accompanying him to the Teloogoos. In
these circumstances, the Executive Committee submitted the
question to the Board in an elaborate paper prepared by the
Foreign Corresponding Secretary, Rev. Mr. Peck, and con-
taining a full view of all the considerations pertaining to it.
After being fully discussed by the managers, it was by them re-
ferred to the meeting of the Union for final decision; and that
body, after still further deliberation, voted to instruct the com-
mittee to reinforce the mission. In this manner has it been
saved from the extinction that threatened it, and raised to a ren-
ovated, and it is hoped, a progressive life. The action which
was taken by the Union upon the question of its continuance, is
to be regarded as a renewed pledge to give it the support and
carry it forward with the energy which shall insure its perma-
nence and success.
The Executive Committee immediately began to carry into
effect the instructions which they had received, by making
arrangements to furnish with missionaries the long abandoned
station at Nellore. On the 10th of October, 1848, Mr. Day,”
in company with Mr. and Mrs. Jewett, who had previously been
designated to the mission, sailed from Boston for Calcutta, and
are now probably at the place of their destination.
Thus, under new auspices, does the humble mission to the
Teloogoos again invite the sympathy and the aid of those by
whose direction it has been revived, and on whom it must con-
stantly depend for its pecuniary support. Already are its pros-
* Mrs. Day remained with her children in this country. Her husband's
present appointment is for the term of five years, and should the mission pros-
per as is hoped, Mrs. Day will return to Nellore at an early period.
22
242 MISSION AMONG THE TELOOGOOS.
pects brightening by reason of the progress of education, and of
the light which is reflected from the flourishing missions that
are established by other societies among the neighboring races
of India. Among many of these races there is a general prep-
aration to receive the gospel, and an impression widely prevailing
that Christianity is destined at length to supplant every other
religion. This impression is undoubtedly owing in a great de-
gree to the wide extension of British power in the East, — a
power so formidable and resistless to the people of Hindostan,
that they may well deem it likely to establish the language, the
laws, and the religion of England over the earth. Beneath its
broad protection the missionary among the Teloogoos dwells in
security, and pursues his sacred work unharmed, with no pecu-
liar obstacles to oppose him save those which arise from the
superstitions and the social habits of the people. Against these
he will continue to struggle on in the might which always at-
tends a holy cause, and with full confidence that his efforts will
at length be crowned with success by that gracious Spirit who
ever watches over the progress of truth among men.
MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA.
CHAPTE R XIX.
GENERAL Character of the Mission. —Lott Carey and Collin Teage.—Rev.
Calvin Holton. — Character and Death of Mr. Carey.—Rev. Benjamin
Skinner. — Failure of the Mission in consequence of the Death of Mission-
aries.—Arrival of Messrs. Crocker and Mylne. — Station at Edina among
the Bassas. – Madebli...—Character of the People.—Arrival of Rev. Ivory
Clarke. —Departure of Mr. Mylne.—Progress of the Mission.—Messrs.
Fielding and Constantine. — Failure of their Undertaking. — Departure of
Mr. Crocker.— Progress of the Mission in his Absence.—His Return and
Death. — Station at Bexley. — The Labors of Mr. Clarke: Translations:
Churches: Schools: his Death. — Close of the Mission.—Attempted Mis-
sion in Hayti.
No one of the missions planted by the Managers of the Gen-
eral Convention has had so serious obstacles to encounter, or has
been so often paralysed by their influence, as that on the west-
ern coast of Africa. Its history conducts us to a portion of the
earth pervaded by a pestilential climate and perpetually ravaged
by the cupidity of civilized man,—to a race degraded by the
barbarism and wrongs of ages, and, by common consent, long
doomed to slavery and oppression among almost every people of
Christendom. No relics of a departed civilization, no scenes of
storied events, attract attention to this gloomy region. No hoary',
superstitions blending with the rude traditions of an elder age
lend a philosophic interest to the people who inhabit it. It
presents only a blank and dreary waste of barbarism, occupied
by the lowest and most abject forms of humanity. Yet Chris-
tian Philanthropy, to her honor be it spoken, has not passed by
even this desolate land in utter neglect. She has braved the
pestilence that perpetually haunts its coasts, and has encoun-
244 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA.
tered the ferocity of its degraded and brutalized inhabitants;
and, finding arguments for her support in the very degradation
of their condition and in the wrongs they have suffered, she has
endeavored to communicate to them the truths of the gospel
and secure for them the blessings of Christian civilization. It
is true that these endeavors have been attended with the most
imperfect success; and the scenes in which they were put forth
are now marked by the graves of many of the heroic men who
made them. Yet they well illustrate the spirit of that compre-
hensive philanthropy which the religion of Christ alone is able
to inspire.
The mission of the American Baptists has been principally
confined to that portion of the western coast of Africa known
as Liberia, and has been planted only among the Bassa tribe
of its inhabitants, – a numerous people occupying a strip of
the coast ninety miles in length, lying between Junk river and
the river Sesters, and extending back nearly seventy miles in
the interior. They are supposed to be about one hundred and
twenty-five thousand in number.
The earliest missionaries sent by the Board were Lott Carey
and Collin Teage, two colored men, who were ordained at Rich-
mond, Va., in January, 1821, and soon afterwards sailed for
Africa as emigrants of the American Colonization Society.
The Society had not at this period established a colony upon the
coast, and Messrs. Carey and Teage went to Freetown, in the
English colony of Sierra Leone. Their residence here how-
ever was brief, in consequence of the unfriendliness of the
climate, and in February, 1822, they removed to Monrovia, a
settlement which had been planted by colonists from America.
Here they commenced their labors as missionaries and founded
a church. Six persons were baptized during the year 1823,
and in the year following nine more were added to their num-
ber, and a commodious place of worship was erected for their
use. Of this church Lott Carey became the pastor, his asso-
ciate in the mean time having returned to Sierra Leone. In
the performance of his duties as a missionary Mr. Carey evinced
\}
Bob GrèÈNr.ſº…º.º.， N
o»、„…ſå
ſaczory-Z.
¿ºçºçº§§
șŠŪNew Sesters ***§§
oººTarrah's?
©çº„Trađetoyn §�
et»géaltºſ.¿
�'ſ§§§§K${Bsº •
�Tittle§§g|BaręQë
§§
Riſſaſonſ
∞"№ć， albo
Œna.
īīīīīWTFGreenwich. 10




LOTT CAREY. 247
remarkable energy and faithfulness. He was born a slave in
Virginia, but many years before leaving Richmond he had pur-
chased his freedom and that of his two children, and had ac-
quired the rudiments of a superior education, and proved himself
worthy of the highest trusts in the business with which he was
charged. On the pestilential shores of Africa he soon found
occasion for all the knowledge he had acquired, both among his
fellow emigrants and the rude barbarians from the interior with
whom they became associated. By his acquaintance with medi-
cine, he healed their maladies; by his sagacity in civil affairs,
he settled their disputes and aided in the organization of their
infant society; and by his earnestness and power as a preacher,
he commended the gospel to their hearts and consciences with
unusual success.
Early in 1825 Rev. Calvin Holton was accepted as a mis-
sionary by the Board, and sailed for the American colonies in
Liberia. Almost immediately after his arrival, however, Mr.
Holton was seized with the fever which in that climate usually
attacks Europeans who come from other latitudes, and died in
July of the same year.
The mission continued to be sustained by Mr. Carey, with
the aid of two or three pious assistants from among the emi-
grants. The resources by which it was kept alive were sup-
plied almost entirely by his own efforts, as the funds which were
furnished by the Board were of necessity at this time exceed-
ingly limited. The labors of the mission were bestowed upon
the emigrant colonists, and also, as far as possible, upon the na-
tives of the country who had either been rescued from slave-
ships and settled upon the coast, or had voluntarily come in
from the neighboring wilderness to join the colonies of their
more civilized brethren. Mr. Carey in this manner preached
and maintained schools at Monrovia and also at Cape Grand
Mount, — at the latter place among a people known as the
Veys, one of the most powerful and intelligent of the tribes on
the coast. At these and other settlements he was the life and
soul of nearly all the religious efforts and operations that were
248 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA.
carried on. He preached several times every week, superin-
tended schools both for religious and for secular instruction, —
in some of which he taught himself, -travelled from one settle-
ment to another, and watched with constant vigilance and un-
remitting care over all the spiritual and the social interests of
the colonists. -
In September, 1826, he was unanimously elected vice-agent
of the colony, and on the return of Mr. Ashmun to the United
States in 1828, he was appointed to discharge the duties of
governor in the interim — a task which he performed during the
brief remnant of his life with wisdom, and with credit to himself.
His death took place in November, 1828, in a manner that was
fearfully sudden and extraordinary. The natives of the coun-
try had committed depredations upon the property of the colony,
and were threatening general hostilities. Mr. Carey, in his
capacity as acting governor, immediately called out the military
forces of the colony, and commenced vigorous measures for re-
pelling the assault and protecting the settlements. He was at
the magazine, engaged in superintending the making of car-
tridges, when, by the oversetting of a lamp, a large mass of
powder became ignited, and produced an explosion which re-
sulted in the death of Mr. Carey and seven others who were
engaged with him. In this sudden and awful manner perished
an extraordinary man,—one who in a higher sphere might
have developed many of the noblest energies of character, and
who, even in the humble capacity of a missionary among his
own benighted brethren, deserves a prominent place in the list
of those who have shed lustre upon the African race. . . . "
At the period of Mr. Carey's death, the church of which he
was pastor contained a hundred members, and was in a highly
flourishing condition. It was committed to the charge of Collin
Teage, who now returned from Sierra Leone, and of Mr. War-
ing, one of its members, who had lately been ordained a minister.
The influences which had commenced with the indefatigable
founder of the mission continued to be felt long after he had
ceased to live. The church at Monrovia was increased to two
IDEATH OF MISSIONARIES, 249
hundred members, and the power of the gospel was manifested
in other settlements of the Colonization Society, and even among
the rude natives of the coast, of whom nearly a hundred were
converted to Christianity and united with the several churches
in the colony.
In 1830 Rev. Benjamin Skinner was appointed a missionary
to Africa. He was ordained at Richmond, Va. on the 4th of
October, and before the close of the month sailed with his
family for-Monrovia, where they arrived in the following De-
cember. Soon after their arrival they were all seized with
the fever of the coast, and Mrs. Skinner and her two children
fell victims to the disease. Mr. Skinner partially recovered
from the fever, but his constitution was shattered by its ravages
and by the heavy bereavements with which he was afflicted.
He remained in the country till July, 1831, but without attempt-
ing any missionary labor, when he embarked for the United
States in hope of being restored by the voyage. The hope,
however, proved illusive, and he died at sea on the twentieth day
of the passage. -
Thus fatally terminated two attempts of the Board to settle
white men as missionaries on the coast of Africa. Those who
were sent had fallen victims to the climate almost as soon as
they came within its pestilential influence. The enterprise
seemed entirely hopeless, and the Board now directed their at-
tention to the finding of suitable men of color who might be
employed to carry forward the mission. Their efforts, however,
proved unsuccessful, and five years elapsed before any additional
missionaries were sent to Africa. The mission, however, during
this interval was not abandoned, but was even somewhat ex-
tended by means of the preachers and teachers who were ap-
pointed from among the pious emigrants. The most conspicuous
of these, in addition to those already mentioned, were Rev. A.
W. Anderson, Rev. John Lewis, and Rev. Hilary Teage, son
of Collin Teage. In the summer of 1834 Dr. Ezekiel Skinner,
father of the missionary, a practising physician and a minister
of the gospel from the State of Connecticut, went to reside in
250 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA.
Liberia. He was appointed by no society, but was prompted
by motives of philanthropy and by special interest in the neg-
lected race in whose service his son had already offered up his
life. This gentleman subsequently was raised to the office of
governor, and alike in his public and his private relations he
exerted a favorable influence upon the mission and upon all the
interests of the colony. By agencies like these the church at
Monrovia, whose branches had now extended through several
villages, was supplied with the regular ministry of the gospel,
and many of the schools which had been established were also
continued in operation. -
Early in 1835 Rev. W. G. Crocker and Rev. W. Mylne offer
ed themselves to the managers, and were appointed missionaries
to Africa. So painful had been the experience of the Board in
their attempts to establish this mission, that its officers could not
solicit persons to go to so unhealthy a station; yet if missionaries
offered their services with a full knowledge of the perils they
must encounter, the Board could not of course decline to send
them. These gentlemen were well educated, and in every way
qualified for the work of preaching the gospel to the heathen,
and on the 11th of July they sailed from Philadelphia for Mon-
rovia, where they arrived after a prosperous passage of thirty-
two days. By the instructions which they received they were
appointed to labor specially among the native tribes of the coun-
try, — it being deemed that these ought to be made the more
immediate subjects of Christian effort, rather than the emigrant
settlements of colonization societies that lined the coast. Im-
mediately on their arrival they repaired to Millsburg, one of the
towns of the Monrovia settlement, in order to go through with
the perilous process of acclimation. Here they were soon pros-
trated by the prevalent fever of the coast, and, though in the
midst of missionary friends who rendered every aid in their
power, Mrs. Mylne, the only lady of their company, fell a victim
to the disease within a month after their arrival. Mr. Crocker
and Mr. Mylne, however, survived the acclimation, and, though
MISSIONARY LABOR AMONG THE BASSAS. 251
in enfeebled health, were soon able to enter upon their labors
ºS mRSSIOIlariëS, t
At the instance of Dr. Skinner, and with the approbation of
the Board, they determined to establish their mission among
the Bassas, a tribe whose language was widely spoken in the
interior, and whose principal trading place was at Bassa Cove,
at the mouth of the Mechlin river, at this time a joint settle-
ment of the Colonization Societies of Pennsylvania and New
York. These people were also numerous at Edina, a small
town on the bank of the river opposite to Bassa Cove. Af-
ter examining several different localities, the missionaries fixed
upon Edina as the place of their future labors, and in Decem-
ber, 1835, they removed to Bassa Cove, in order to superin-
tend the preparation of buildings, and if possible immediately
to commence their labors on the opposite bank of the river.
On their arrival in the country the first aim of the mission-
aries had been to acquire the language, reduce it to an al-
phabet, and prepare it for writing. In doing this they were
assisted by a young colonist whom they employed, and who was
able to speak both Bassa and English. In February, 1836,
Messrs. Crocker and Mylne made an excursion up the Mechlin
river, a distance of twenty miles, to Madebli, the village of
Sante Will, a chief of whom they had often heard, and whose
children they desired to have at the school they were about to
open at Edina. The chief told them that he was only a gov-
ernor under king Bob Gray, who was then but two miles off
attending the funeral of a relative. The missionaries imme-
diately repaired to the king, who, on hearing their object for-
mally stated, warmly commended it, and proposed to his head
men that they should send their children to be instructed at the
school. He afterwards, however, decided to wait till he could
consult other chiefs who were away, that they might all act to-
gether; but he promised to send a dozen or twenty men to
build a school house at Edina, so soon as his people should com-
plete the work of the season upon their farms. It was after-
wards discovered that this king was only tributary to a mon-
252 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA.
arch of greater pretensions, known as king Koba, who, when the
proposal of Mr. Crocker was made known to him, replied, “I
am afraid of that white man; he comes and sits down softly in
my country; I don't know what he will do.” His prejudices,
however, were soon overcome,—for he invited the missionaries
to visit him, and interpreted their sermons to his people, and
when the school was opened at Edina he sent his son to join it,
as did also Sante Will and king Bob Gray. -
Though the mission was designed especially for the native
tribes, yet, while the missionaries were acquiring the language,
and becoming acquainted with the people of the country, they
were engaged in constant labors among the colonists. They
preached at Bassa Cove and also at Edina, and opened schools
at both these places. Mr. Crocker also obtained funds from
other towns of the colony to enable the church at Bassa Cove
to erect a suitable house of worship, which was completed in
July, 1836. Here Mr. Mylne continued to preach till the
church was supplied with a pastor early in the following year,
and during this period he baptized sixteen persons.
Mr. Crocker devoted himself to studying the structure of the
Bassa language, and by the close of the first year of his resi-
dence in the country, he had so far mastered it that he prepared
a spelling book and a small vocabulary of words and phrases,
to which he added a brief statement of some of the leading
facts of divine revelation. In December, 1836, he went to
Monrovia, and printed an edition of two hundred copies for im-
mediate use in the schools. Its effect upon the progress of the
native scholars soon began to be obvious. Several of the more
intelligent among them were speedily able both to read and to
write the language of their tribe. Much delay had been occa-
sioned in the erection of the mission buildings at Edina, by the
difficulty in procuring workmen who would labor with even
tolerable regularity and fidelity. A carpenter was at length
obtained from Monrovia, and the houses were completed and oc-
cupied by the missionaries and their schools in June, 1837.
During all this period they had been subject to frequent attacks
GROWING INTEREST OF BASSA CHIEFs. 253
of disease, which they warded off only by changing the place of
their residence, —going now to other settlements upon the coast
and now to the interior, in order to escape the malarious influ-
ence that constantly hung around them. They also frequently
went to Madebli, the village of Sante Will, where the chief soon
manifested so deep an interest in their labors that they deter-
mined to make it an out-station of the mission. A small house
was accordingly erected there, to which Mr. Crocker removed in
October, 1837, and immediately commenced the translation of the
New Testament. Several of the chiefs from the interior also visit-
‘ed the schools at Edina, and expressed warm approbation at their
condition; Sante Will even claimed the original patronage of the
whole plan, and boasted that he was the first to encourage it by
intrusting his sons to the care of the missionaries. The num-
ber of native children now under their charge was as large as
they were able to provide for, and many of them, as has already
been mentioned, were sons of the principal chiefs of the tribe.
Among them, the most distinguished both for the talents and
the moral spirit which he evinced, was Kong, the son of king
Koba, the head chief of the Bassas. He early made remarka-
ble progress in the studies of the school, and at length, with
some of his less distinguished associates, gave decided evidence
of Christian character.
Messrs. Crocker and Mylne had survived what were deem-
ed the greatest perils incident to their condition upon this un-
healthy coast, and had planted their stations under auspices far
more favorable than any which had hitherto attended the mis-
sion. As was natural new hopes began to dawn in their minds,
and new interests were awakened in their labors among their
brethren at home. Yet to one who inspects the journals in
which they recorded their daily experience, the prospect will
appear to have been far from attractive and encouraging. It
was only less gloomy and repulsive than it had hitherto been.
They were indeed near the emigrant settlements of the societies
for colonizing Africa with her own scattered children, yet the
example of many of the colonists was any thing but favorable
23 $
254 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA,
to the cause of Christian civilization. They were among a peo-
ple many of whom, it is true, evinced a readiness to be taught
the gospel, but they belonged to the most abject and degraded
portion of the human race,—so debased by barbarian passions,
so stupefied by the superstitions of their brutalizing grigri,” that
the impressions made upon their minds were usually as transi-
tory as figures drawn upon the shifting sands of their own des-
erts. And to add to the melancholy picture, almost side by side
with the stations of the missionaries arose the frowning front of
the slave factory; and in the same circles in which they preach-
ed the gospel of peace and love, was carried on that accursed
traffic which more than every other sin has blackened the annals
of human guilt and shame. They however still labored on,
though often disabled by sickness, and hindered by obstacles
such as missionaries seldom encounter; and they even began to
devise plans, and to appeal to their brethren in America, for the
extension of the mission to other tribes that dwell upon the coast
or that roam the interior.
In January, 1838, Rev. Ivory Clarke and his wife arrived at
Edina. Like their predecessors they were immediately attacked
by fever but in a form unusually mild, and they were soon able
to commence the study of the language and to perform such
duties in the mission as their inexperience would admit. They
resided either at Edina or at one of the neighboring villages,
and with better health and greater aids than had been possessed
by those who preceded them, they made rapid progress in ac-
quiring the language and preparing for their missionary labors.
Their arrival gave new animation to the hopes of their asso-
ciates and brightened the prospects of the mission. But it was
only for a brief season, — for the health of Mr. Mylne, which had
been shattered by repeated fevers, soon gave indications of hope-
less failure. In May, 1838, he returned to the United States,
and not long after, in consequence of his ruined health, withdrew
* Grigri is a species of Witchcraft, or sorcery, which constitutes almost the
only religion of the tribes on the coast.
AFFLICTION AND BEREAVEMENT. 255
from the service of the Board. The care of the station at Edina
now devolved upon Mr. Clarke, -aided by two of the colonists,
Messrs. Davis and Day, -the former the pastor of the emigrant
church, and the latter a teacher and preacher in the employ of
the mission. Mr. Crocker in the mean time resided at Madebli,
or Sante Will's town, where he was engaged in preaching, teach-
ing in the schools, and translating the Scriptures,—in the latter
of which he was assisted by his pupil, Kong Koba, the son of
the head chief who has already been mentioned, a youth whose
talents and character fully justified the hopes which the mis-
sionaries entertained concerning him. $
In September, 1839, the mission was still further strengthened
by the arrival of Miss Rizpah Warren, who had been accepted
by the Board as a missionary teacher, and had sailed for Edina
in the preceding July. Early in the following summer she was
married to Rev. W. G. Crocker, and went with him to reside at
the village of Sante Will. But scarcely had they reached their
secluded home ere disease and death began their frightful work,
and blighted the hopes which the missionaries had fondly cher-
ished. Mr. Crocker was first attacked, and after being brought
to the very verge of the grave, at length began to mend; but
ere he had regained his strength he saw his wife wholly pros-
trated by the fierce fever of the climate. Her sickness was fear-
fully brief; she died eight days after the attack, on the 28th of
August, 1840. Soon after these sad events Mr. Crocker, still
enfeebled by disease and depressed by sorrow, went to Cape
Palmas in order to recruit his health, and to procure the print-
ing of the Gospels of Matthew and John, and a book of hymns
which he had prepared, and also another edition of the Bassa
Spelling Book which was compiled by Mr. Clarke. He returned
to his station at Madebli on the 13th of October, with his health
improved and his spirits invigorated by the kind sympathies of
the Christian friends whom he met at the settlements, and again
commenced the labors of the mission in circumstances that
awakened in his mind the conflicting emotions of grief and of
hope.
256 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA.
The mission in Africa, notwithstanding the vicissitudes
through which it had passed, was at this time regarded with
increasing interest both by its members and their friends in this
country. The memory of the wrongs which the African race
had so long endured in every land combined with the urgent
appeals of the missionaries in awakening among the churches
of America a strong feeling of Christian obligation to send
them, if possible, the blessings of the gospel. Early in 1840,
Messrs. Alfred A. Constantine and Joseph Fielding offered
themselves to the Board as missionaries to the western coast,
or the interior of Africa. It was at a period when the impres-
sion prevailed that the climate of the interior might be found
less deadly to Europeans, than that of the coast had proved
itself to be. The British government also, with the coöpera-
tion of some philanthropic associations in England, were about
sending an expedition up the Niger for the purpose of explor-
ing the regions bordering upon its banks, and introducing to the
tribes of the interior the arts and the commerce of Europe, to
take the place of their inhuman traffic in slaves. High hopes
were entertained by the friends of missions both in England
and America, that this expedition might open the way for the
introduction of Christianity to some of the unknown races that
people this portion of the continent. In accordance with these
views, the newly-appointed missionaries were designated by the
managers to the country lying upon the Niger. Having re-
ceived full instructions from the Board, they sailed from Phila-
delphia with their wives, in September, 1840, and arrived at
Monrovia in November and at Edina on the 3d of December.
Though their destination was to the banks of the Niger, yet it
was deemed most prudent to wait at Edina until they had
passed through the inevitable trials incident to the period of
acclimation. They might also thus learn the results of the
English expedition, which was now just preparing to ascend the
river. Little did they then anticipate the melancholy issues of
that expedition, or the untimely close which was appointed to
their own career as missionaries.
FAILURE OF THE NIGEE EXPEDITION. 257
They were seized by the African fever, with its accustomed
violence, and within six weeks of their arrival both Mr. and
Mrs. Fielding fell victims to its power—the latter on the 3d,
and the former on the 16th of January. Mr. and Mrs. Con-
stantine, though they survived the fever, were unable either to
proceed to the place of their destination or to engage in the
labors of the mission. They remained at Edina, making occa-
sional excursions to different points of the coast or to the inte-
rior, in the hope of regaining their health, as well as for the
purpose of observing the condition of the country and the char-
acter of its inhabitants. Late in the summer of 1841 the Eng-
lish expedition, comprising three small steamers, proceeded up
the Niger. Though it was supposed that every possible pre-
caution had been taken for the health of the Europeans engaged
in the service, yet the passage up the river proved fearfully de-
structive. Two of the three steamers were despatched in suc-
cession to bear back those who were disabled by disease; and
when, at the end of eight weeks, the remnant of the expedition
returned to the coast, it had lost upwards of one eighth of the
Europeans who were attached to it. It was believed that a
salutary impression was made by the expedition upon the tribes
of the interior, but the hopes which were entertained of finding
there a more salubrious climate were utterly disappointed, and
the design of establishing a mission among them was entirely
abandoned. Mr. Constantine, still unable to labor continuously
in the climate of the coast, returned with his wife to America
in June, 1842, and soon after, at his own request, was released
from his engagements with the Board.
In July, of the year preceding, Mr. Crocker, whose health
had long been declining, had been obliged to return to the Uni-
ted States. He left the mission at a period when, to his own
mind at least, it was possessed of unusual interest and attended
with many encouragements. He had witnessed great changes
—all of them for the better—during the six years in which he
had resided on the coast. Several of his companions had fallen,
but the truth which he had come to proclaim had made percep-
22*
258 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA.
tible progress. The prejudices of the people among whom he
had lived had been overcome, and their suspicions and jeal-
ousies had died away. Children were no longer detained from
the schools, the preaching of the gospel was listened to with
attention, and its power had been witnessed in the conversion
of several of the natives and a large number of the emigrants.
The churches connected with the mission were both multiplied
and enlarged, and the interest felt among their members in
spreading the gospel through the surrounding region had greatly
increased. A new station was also established, under the charge
of Mr. Day, at Bexley, a small town on the river, six miles
from Edina. A printing press had been received by the mis-
sion, and Messrs. Crocker and Clarke were only waiting to
engage a printer, in order to put to press several books of the
New Testament, and other volumes which they had prepared
in the Bassa language. From all these interests and occupa-
tions, which bound him strongly to the mission, Mr. Crocker was
obliged to hasten away, in order to save the feeble remnant of
his constitution, which had so long been wasting beneath the
bad influences of that unfriendly climate.
In consequence of the absence of Mr. Crocker, after the re-
turn of Mr. and Mrs. Constantine, the care of the mission de-
volved entirely upon Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, who resided at Edi-
na, and had under their direction three or four assistants, em-
ployed either as teachers or preachers. The press was set in
operation in September, 1842, under the charge of a printer
obtained from the colony, and several books, designed to aid in
the acquisition of the language, as well as to impart religious
knowledge, were immediately issued. Two schools were sus-
tained at Edina and one at Bexley, containing together about
ninety scholars, of whom fifty-five were natives. Schools were
also held at both stations upon the Sabbath, and during certain
seasons on several evenings of the week, for the instruction of
adult emigrants in the doctrines of the Bible and in the princi-
ples of morals. The character of the population was obviously
improving, and the churches at the two stations were gradually
DEATH OF MIR. CROCKER, 259
increasing in numbers and advancing in the knowledge of the
gospel. Mr. Clarke finding himself too remote from the great
body of the Bassa people, recommended to the Board that the
mission be removed to Tradetown; but in its then reduced state
- the removal could not be easily effected, and the project was
abandoned. An out-station was, however, established at Dua-
wi's town, a large village in the interior, thirty or forty miles
from Edina. The chief invited Mr. Clarke to send a teacher
for his people, and promised to build a school-house and to
support both teacher and pupils. The station was commenced
by a young native who had for several years been under the
instruction of the missionaries.
Mr. Crocker, after his return to the United States, soon found
himself so reduced by disease that he abandoned all hope of
ever rejoining the mission, or engaging again in the labors to
which he had dedicated his life. He at length, however, re-
gained a portion of his strength and commenced a journey to
the south. After a residence of several months in a genial cli-
mate, during which his health seemed to be fully restored, he
presented himself to the Board as ready to return to his station
on the perilous coast which two years before he had so reluc-
tantly abandoned. The Board sharing his own confidence in
the restoration of his health, gladly accepted his services, and
having made the necessary arrangements, he sailed from Boston,
January 1, 1844. He had a few days before been united in
marriage with Miss Mary B. Chadbourne, of Newburyport, by
whom he was now accompanied on the voyage. He arrived on
the coast on the 24th of February, with health seemingly unin-
paired; yet a treacherous malady lurked in his constitution,
and on the second day after his arrival, while engaged in the
services of the Sabbath at Monrovia, he was seized with a vio-
lent hemorrhage of the stomach, of which he died after an
illness of two days. Thus fell in the midst of high raised hopes,
and at an unexpected moment, a missionary of no common zeal
and devotion to the cause. The joy which the tidings of his
intended return had awakened on that desolate shore, among
260 MISSION IN westERN AFRICA.
the natives whom he had formerly instructed, was suddenly.
turned into mourning, and a cloud again rested upon the mission
at the death of one of its earliest founders and most indefati-
gable laborers.”
Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, who were on their way to Monrovia to
meet the newly-arrived missionaries, reached the settlement
only to look upon the grave of him from whom they had hoped
so much, and to escort back to their station the widowed partner
of his hopes and his sympathies for the neglected sons of Africa.
Mrs. Crocker, on arriving at Edina, immediately set about pre-
paring for her work as a missionary, and was soon able to engage
in the labors and duties which the enfeebled condition of the
mission pressed upon her attention.
In January, 1845, the principal station of the mission was re-
moved from Edina to Bexley, in order to secure a locality more
favorable to health, and nearer the settlements of the Bassa
people. A subordinate station however was still maintained
at Edina, and additional out-stations were planted at Zuzo and
at Little Bassa,—the latter under the immediate charge of
Kong Koba, or Lewis Kong Crocker, as the young chief now
chose to be named, in honor of his early teacher and friend.
At these several points, but little separated from each other, the
mission, though often smitten and cast down, still maintained its
existence and assiduously prosecuted its sacred objects among
the people of the country. The assistants, most of whom were
men of tried character, under the direction or in the company
of the missionary, preached the gospel from village to village.
The ladies of the mission were engaged in the schools, while
Mr. Clarke gave himself as fully as possible to the work of
translating the Scriptures, and the preparation of books for the
instruction of the natives. He compiled a dictionary of the
Bassa language, which, together with the Gospels and several
of the Epistles of the New Testament, was ready for the press
* A memoir of this excellent missionary has been written by Mrs. R. B.
Medbery, from which several of the above-mentioned facts have been derived.
ADDITIONAL LABORERs NEEDED. 261
near the close of 1846, but which, in the pressure of other la-
bors, appears never to have been published.
In this manner, the mission continued to prosper to an extent,
in many respects, quite disproportionate to the number of labor-
ers who were employed in its service. For a considerable
period, Mr. and Mrs. Clarke, unlike the missionaries who pre-
ceded them, were blessed with uninterrupted health. Mrs.
Crocker, however, was less fortunate, and it soon became evi-
dent that her constitution was wasting away beneath the influ-
ence of the climate. After one or two unavailing voyages to
distant parts of the coast, she was obliged to abandon the mission
and return to this country. She arrived in the summer of
1846, and though she has recovered her health and is ready to
return to her station on the African coast, yet the recent
melancholy changes in the mission have hitherto rendered her
return impracticable, and she is now waiting among her friends
for some more favorable aspect of its darkened fortunes.
Nor did the remaining missionaries long escape the dismal
fatality that has so often attended the efforts of Christian phi-
lanthropy upon these pestilential shores. Even before the de-
parture of Mrs. Crocker, Mr. and Mrs. Clarke had been oblig-
ed to suspend their labors, and had accompanied their friend
on her voyage along the coast. Though they returned with
strength recruited by the voyage, yet it was only for a brief
season. Mr. Clarke had repeatedly set forth the wants of the
mission in his communications to the Executive Committee, and
had appealed in its behalf in the most earnest manner to those
who were about entering the Christian ministry. But none had
offered themselves for the service; and the lone missionary, now
conscious of declining health and sensible that his work would
be speedily closed, was compelled to look forward to the extinc-
tion of his hopes, and it might be the ruin of all that he and
his departed coadjutors had so long labored to accomplish.
He, however, toiled on, sorrowing yet not dismayed at the pros-
pect of the mission; and Heaven granted the renewal of his
strength, and enabled him, for upwards of a year, to prosecute
262 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA.
his labors with but little interruption and with encouraging suc-
cess. In addition to his general superintendence of all the
stations, he preached in many of the villages, visited the leading
chiefs of the tribe, and made considerable progress in the
translation of the Scriptures and the revision of the Bassa
Dictionary. He also witnessed many spiritual fruits of his
ministry and that of his assistants. Many of the natives, both
at the stations of the mission and in the villages where he
preached the gospel, embraced its truths and were baptized in
obedience to its precepts. Its influence also became more and
more perceptible in the character and condition of the tribe;
their manners and morals were improving, and all the interests
of their civilization were steadily advancing by means of the
instructions and agencies which proceeded from the schools,
the churches, and the books of the mission.
It was plain, however, that amidst all these beneficial results,
the life of the missionary was rapidly wearing away. He was
repeatedly invited by the Executive Committee to return to
this country, but he was unwilling to leave the station till some
one should arrive to take his place and enter into his labors.
In waiting for this he lingered too long. After a protracted
illness, which at first attacked him with exceeding violence, he
sailed from Liberia with Mrs. Clarke, on his passage to America,
on the 4th of April, 1848, and died at sea on the 26th of the
same month.
Thus closed the labors of the last in the worthy succession of
devoted missionaries sent to Africa by the American Baptists;
and thus too must close, with melancholy abruptness, the histo-
ry of the African Mission. Though it records many noble and
philanthropic labors and many valuable results, yet it is too
often only the sad recital of disaster and death to the heroic
men who have achieved them, - the same dread features that
characterize all the other missions upon that fatal coast. A
few assistants were left at the stations under the charge of Rev.
Jacob Vonbrunn, a native Bassa, and by them the mission
has been kept in being since the departure of Mr. Clarke.
ATTEMPT TO ESTABLISH A MISSION IN HAYTI. 263
The ladies belonging to it are still in this country, but are de-
sirous of returning to the scene of their recent labors and sor-
rows, so soon as arrangements can be made for the renewal of
the mission. The Executive Committee, however, await the
proffer of services from men who, in the spirit of those that
have gone before, are willing to encounter the perils of the
climate and the hardships of the coast for the sake of the glori-
ous objects that remain to be accomplished. When such men
shall offer themselves for the service of the mission, its stations,
now nearly deserted, will again be occupied; and the philan-
thropic hopes which have been warmly cherished concerning
the Bassas may yet be fully realized, by their progress in civil-
ization and their conversion to Christianity. -
In connection with the foregoing sketch of the mission in
Western Africa, may properly be mentioned here the attempt
of the Board to establish a mission, also for the benefit of the
African race, in the island of Hayti. It was made in 1835,
under auspices that were then deemed propitious, but it encoun-
tered obstacles that were not anticipated, and after a brief
experiment it was abandoned. The only missionary ever
employed in the service was Mr. William C. Monroe, an edu-
cated man of color, who was ordained at New York and sailed
for Port au Prince in April, 1835. On his arrival he immedi-
ately commenced public worship and the preaching of the gospel
at his own house, and by the following January he had gathered
a church of twelve individuals. In the course of the year, nine
others were added to the little company; but no suitable spot
could be obtained for the erection of a house of worship, and
the services were still held, though at great disadvantage, at
the dwelling of the missionary, where but few could attend.
Early in 1837, Mr. Monroe visited the United States for the
purpose of making known the wants of the mission and obtain-
ing aid for their supply. Meeting however but little encour-
agement, he returned to Port au Prince in June, and after
suffering much from sickness, and finding the mission still in a
264 MISSION IN WESTERN AFRICA. .
languishing condition, he withdrew from the service of the
Board. Since that period, no attempt has been made to renew
the mission, — which was perhaps at the beginning hastily un-
dertaken, with too little regard to the expenditures that would
be required, or the means that were available for their supply.
MISSION IN FRANCE.
CHAP TER xx.
CoMMENCEMENT of the Mission.— Agency of Messrs. Chase and Rostan-
Appointment of Mr. Willmarth. — Messrs. Willard and Sheldon join the
Mission at Paris. – Messrs. Willmarth and Willard settle at Douay. — The
Chapel at Genlis.-Mr. Willmarth leaves the Mission. — Mr. Sheldon goes
to Douay: returns to America. — Religious Freedom in France in the
Reign of Louis Phillippe. — Hostility to the Mission. — Civil Prosecutions.
-The Revolution of February. — General Progress of the Mission.— Visit
of Mr. Willard to the United States.—Dr. Devan joins the Mission.—Sta-
tioned at Paris— Religious Freedom under the New Constitution.
AT the meeting of the General Convention in 1832, a reso-
lution was adopted instructing the Board of Managers to inquire
into the expediency of establishing a mission in France. The
revolution which two years before had taken place in that coun-
try, and which had resulted in placing Louis Phillippe upon the
throne, had also done much, it was believed, to loosen the hold
of the Roman Catholic church upon the minds of the people,
and to prepare the way for the extension of evangelical truth.
The special objects proposed for such a mission were the revival
and increase of the Baptist churches there, and the general
dissemination of the gospel among the people. The Board,
after suitable inquiries, determined to send an agent to France,
in order to ascertain the condition of the churches and the op-
portunities which the country presented for the spread of Chris-
tian truth.
For this purpose Rev. Ira Chase, D. D., professor in the
Theological Seminary at Newton, was appointed, and sailed for
Havre in October, 1832. He was accompanied by Rev. J. C.
Rostan, a French gentleman of education, who had been re-
24
266 MISSION IN FRANCE,
siding in the United States. They proceeded immediately to
Paris, where they soon opened a small chapel in which services
were performed on the Sabbath and on other stated days of the
week. Mr. Rostan here became associated with Rev. Mr.
Cloux, a missionary of the English Baptist Continental Socie-
ty, and during the winter and spring of 1832–3, they con-
ducted together a system of preaching and lecturing, united
with pastoral visiting among the people who frequented the
chapel. Mr. Rostan also aimed to commend the cause in which
he was engaged to the consideration of persons of liberal sen-
timents, whose influence might aid in its advancement; and
for this purpose he held several interviews with General La
Fayette, and members of the Chamber of Deputies, to whom
he fully explained the nature and objects of his mission. He
was, however, soon invited to officiate temporarily, during the
absence of the regular incumbent, as lecturer upon Christianity
before the Society for Promoting Civilization, and while thus
employed he died of cholera in December, 1833.
Professor Chase, after spending several weeks in Paris, re-
paired to the Departement du Nord, where the Baptist churches
of France were said to be the most numerous. He found them
here in a scattered and dilapidated condition, — cherishing the
principles of uncorrupted Christianity, but often defective in or-
ganization and subject to the inroads of every species of error,
yet delighted to learn that he had come from those holding the
same Christian doctrines in America, and eager to receive the
aid which he proffered. He inquired particularly concerning
the condition of Protestantism in France, and on his return to
the United States submitted to the Board a full report of his
observations and the conclusions to which they led him, and
recommended the establishment of a permanent mission in the
country. *
This recommendation was adopted by the Board, and Mr.
Isaac Willmarth, then a member of the Theological Institution
at Newton, was appointed to commence the mission at Paris.
Having completed his studies at Newton and been ordained, he
ARRIVAL OF MESSRS. SHELD ON AND WILLARD. 267
reached the French capital in June, 1834. Here he soon asso-
ciated with his labors Rev. Anthony Porchat, a French Baptist
clergyman, and they together conducted religious services on
the Sabbath — twice in French and once in English—and also
on one evening at least during the week.
The instructions of the Board had directed Mr. Willmarth to
make it one of the principal objects of the mission to train young
men of suitable character for the ministry of the gospel. He
soon became acquainted with several of this description, in the
protestant circles in which he mingled, and two of them placed
themselves under his instructions So Soon as arrangements could
be made for the purpose. A church of ten members was also
organized in July, 1835, and additional preachers soon after
began to be employed both in the capital and at several places
in the provinces. In the summer of this year Mr. Willmarth
made his first visit to the Baptist churches in the Department of
the North, where he was soon joined by Rev. Professor Sears,
then on a visit to the Continent of Europe, and charged by the
Board with the duty of advising in the conduct of the mission.
They found the churches in this part of the country eager to
become connected with the mission, and expressing the warmest
gratitude for the aid and encouragement they were already re-
ceiving from America. Many of these simple people seemed
not to have been aware that there were others in the world who
held views of Christian doctrine and ecclesiastical order similar
to their own, and they repeated again and again to Professor
Sears, as he parted from them, their earnest desire that he
“would not let their brethren on this side of the Atlantic leave
them or neglect them.” -
In November, Rev. Erastus Willard and Rev. D. N. Sheldon
arrived in Paris and joined the mission. They spent the win-
ter at the capital, assisting Mr. Willmarth in preaching in Eng-
lish, distributing tracts and religious books and writing for the
press, and at the same time perfecting their acquaintance with
the French language. In the spring of 1836 Messrs. Willmarth
and Willard removed to Douay, a large and celebrated town in
*e J
tº Q
© º
©
268 MISSION IN FRANCE.
the north of France, for the purpose of establishing near there
a mission school, for the instruction of candidates for the minis-
try and others who might desire to study the doctrines of the
gospel. The place ultimately selected for the school was No-
main, a village about twelve miles from Douay, in which was a
Baptist church. The school was commenced, though in conse-
quence of subsequent events its design has never been fully
carried into execution. The church at Nomain, and also
those of Lannoy, Bertry and Orchies, were at their own request
adopted by the mission, and as some of them were without reg-
ular pastors, suitable persons were ordained and set over them.
From these central points the missionaries and their French
assistants went forth often through the surrounding country, and
subordinate stations were soon established in other villages for
the regular preaching of the gospel. Several other persons
were employed as colporteurs, who traversed the districts of the
North distributing tracts, books and Bibles, and in this way
călling the attention of the people to the simple truths of
Christianity.
In some of the excursions thus made, the missionaries or their
assistants found persons who had long been reading the Scrip-
tures for themselves, and had secretly renounced much of their
allegiance to the Romish church. At the town of Genlis and
some of the neighboring villages they met with eleven persons,
who, without guidance and without concert, had adopted the
most satisfactory views both of the doctrines and the ordinances
of the gospel, and were withal pious and exemplary Christians.
Seven of these were soon formed into a church at Genlis, and
Mr. Cretin, a pupil of the missionaries at Douay, was ordained
and placed over them. Among these persons was a Mr. Her-
signy, a plain man, who after long study of the Bible had left
the church of Rome, and embraced the Protestant faith with intel-
ligent convictions and warm-hearted zeal. He rendered much
valuable service for the mission, and built at his own expense a
neat and convenient chapel for the use of the church. Permission
was squght of the mayor of Genlis—for the law of France made
©
&
tº º
© tº • *** * * =
STATIONS IN NORTHERN PROVINCES. 269
this necessary—to open it for public service, but this function-
ary refused to grant the request; and, though it was often re-
peated, the little chapel long remained unoccupied, – a memento
alike of the generous faith of its humble builder and of the fool-
ish, though legalized, intolerance of the bigoted magistrate.
During this period Mr. Sheldon had remained at Paris,
though not without making several visits to the provinces of the
North. The chapel which he at first occupied was found to be
So inconveniently situated that it was at length relinquished,
and the public services of the mission were held at his own house
and that of Mrs. Rostan, or occasionally at those of members of
the church. The principal labors of Mr. Sheldon at Paris were
of a retired and private character, and were devoted to the dis-
semination of the gospel by other agencies than that of preach-
ing. In September, 1837, Mr. Willmarth, having long been in
feeble health, returned to the United States and was never after-
wards actively engaged in the service of the mission. His ab-
sence imposed many additional labors upon Mr. Willard, his
associate at Douay, who, besides the instruction of his pupils in
theology, was in the midst of a cluster of missionary stations
which had been planted by the agency of his assistants, and were
now requiring frequent visitations and almost constant superin-
tendence and care. He soon found himself thus, with every
month, more and more withdrawn from the work of instructing
and training the candidates for the ministry who were under his
charge. This was one of the chief objects of the mission, and
could not be neglected. It was therefore deemed best that Mr.
Sheldon should leave his station at Paris and become associated
with Mr. Willard at Douay. The step seemed necessary, though
it was taken with reluctance, for the prospects of the mission at
the capital were at that time unusually inviting. The removal
was effected in April, 1839, and Mr. Sheldon immediately as-
sumed the charge of the theological pupils, and conducted ser-
vice every Sabbath in the English chapel at Douay. In the
following November he returned to the United States, having
decided to enter other spheres of usefulness at home.
24%
270 MISSION IN FRANCE,
The charter which was made the fundamental law in France
by the revolution of July, 1830, contained a distinct provision
for the entire freedom of religious faith and worship. Its lan-
guage was, “Each one professes his religion with equal liberty,
and obtains for his worship the same protection.” But not-
withstanding this guaranty of the charter, the humble experi-
ence of our missionaries is alone sufficient to show that France
was at this time by no means the home of religious freedom.
Several articles of the penal code adopted by the legislative
chambers, were in direct opposition both to the letter and the
original spirit of this fundamental law. One of these articles
contained a statute decreeing that “no association of more than
twenty persons, whose object shall be to meet on stated days for
religious, literary, political, or other purposes, can be formed
but with the consent of the government, and upon the conditions
which the public authority shall impose.” Another statute in
the same code provided that “whoever without permission of
the municipal authority shall have granted or consented to the
use of his house or apartment, or any part thereof, for the meet-
ing even of an authorized association, or for the exercise of pub-
lic worship, shall be punished in a fine of from sixteen to two
hundred francs.” The power to grant this permission was vested
in the mayors of communes throughout the kingdom, and these
officers were generally Roman Catholics, and so fully under the
dominion of the priesthood and the church, that they seldom
favored the extension of privileges to persons whom they were
taught to despise and condemn as heretics and fanatics.
Under the operation of laws couched in terms like these,
stimulated as it often was by a virulent public sentiment, it is
obvious that the spirit of the charter might easily be perverted,
and religious freedom trampled under foot both by priest and
by magistrate. Accordingly we find that the Baptist preachers
and churches connected with the mission, soon began to experi-
ence every species of opposition and persecution in many of the
towns where they were established. The instance of the chapel
at Genlis, built by Mr. Hersigny on his own estate, has already
REIGN OF INTOLERANCE. 271
been mentioned. The request for permission to open the chapel,
on its being refused by the mayor, was carried to the Prefect of
the Department, and from him to the Minister of Worship at
Paris; but from none of these officers could a privilege so es-
sential to religious freedom be obtained. Meanwhile the little
church at Genlis was obliged to meet in the private houses of its
members, and even there they were often interrupted by inquis-
itorial visits from the police or the national guard, who came to
see that their number did not exceed the limit allowed by law.
The same hostility was encountered in several other places in
the provinces of the North. Meetings were broken up, the per-
sons in whose houses they were held were fined and imprisoned,
and the ministers of religion who preached at those meetings
were arrested and punished by the municipal officers, and some-
times were indicted in the higher courts. In the trials which
were held, though the boasted provisions of the charter were
constantly pleaded, the enactments relating to associations were
uniformly sustained by the courts, and the charter was virtually
abrogated.
Such was religious freedom in France from 1840 to 1848,-
the last eight years of the reign of the citizen King, Louis Phil-
lippe. Placed upon the throne by a revolution which pledged
him to a liberal policy, and restricted by a charter which con-
tained abundant provisions for the rights of the people, his gov-
ernment gradually became more and more tyrannical and odious.
Conceiving for himself and his family the most magnificent
schemes of ambition, he is said to have surrendered himself to
the control of the priesthood, and to have exerted his kingly
power, both among the sequestered hamlets of his own kingdom
and on the distant islands of the Pacific, for the suppression of
the Protestant faith. It is certain that in the instances we have
mentioned, and in many others which occurred both in our
own and in other communions, his ministers and their subor-
dinate officers were able to close the chapels, to suppress the
preaching of the gospel, and to arrest and fine and imprison
innocent and peaceful citizens for no other acts than the sim-
272 MISSION IN FRANCE,
ple exercise of their chartered freedom to worship as they
pleased. -
But the rights of the human soul, in a civilized land, are not
long thus to be outraged with impunity. The judicial trials
and investigations which grew out of these proceedings soon
attracted the notice of liberal-minded men of all parties, and
the murmurs of disapprobation began to sound through the land.
These acts of oppression were in some instances reported and
commented upon by the press; and petitions, signed by large
numbers, not only of those who were liable thus to suffer, but of
every class of Protestant Christians and by many Roman Cath-
olics, were sent to the Chambers, praying for the repeal of the
odious statutes and the security of the freedom of worship.
Many men of high standing, and among them several members
of the Chamber of Deputies, became warmly interested in a
question which thus obviously involved one of the dearest rights
of humanity. The petitions appear to have been little heeded
by the servile Chambers to whom they were addressed, but the
privileges which they claimed were sanctioned by the judgments
of thousands.
After suffering these restrictions and disabilities for several
years, during which they were constantly becoming more op-
pressive and iniquitous, two of the assistants connected with
the mission were seized and cast into prison for alleged viola-
tions of the statute relating to associations. Their names were
Lepoids and Foulon, — the former of whom, especially, was dis-
tinguished for superior talents and long-tried fidelity as a min-
ister of the gospel. Their arrest took place towards the close
of 1846, and they were brought to trial before a subordinate
court at Laon in January, 1847. They were of course con-
demned, and were sentenced to pay a fine of three hundred
francs each, – their crime being, in the language of the Judge,
that of “having associated with others in the name of a new re-
ligion, called the religion of the Protestant Baptists.” The case
was appealed to the Royal Court of Amiens, and Mr. Odillon
Barrot, the distinguished advocate, who is now prime minister
OPENING OF THE CHAPEL AT GENLIS. 273
in the Cabinet of the President of the French Republic, was
engaged to defend it. The trial came on in March, but Mr.
Barrot was unfortunately detained by illness. He sent an
advocate to appear in his place, who obtained a delay of fifteen
days; but the counsel was still unable to attend, and the trial
proceeded without him. The missionaries, however, were ably
defended by Mr. de Brouard, an eminent advocate from Paris,
assisted by Mr. Lutteroth, editor of Le Semeur,” who went out
to Amiens on purpose to countenance and aid them. The judg-
ment of the court below was modified in some important particu-
lars, and the fine was reduced from three hundred to fifty francs;
but the meetings of these ministers and their brethren were still
decided to be associations, and therefore to come within the
statutes. From this decision their counsel immediately made
an appeal, and carried the case up to the Court of Cassation
at Paris.f Here it was still pending, and its final trial was
approaching, when the revolution of February, 1848, dissolved
the Legislative Chambers, overthrew the monarchy, and drove
the faithless king from his throne and his palace to wander an
exile in a foreign land.
By this event the question at issue was decided without a
trial by the Court, and unrestrained religious freedom was pro-
claimed in France. The prefects and mayors and magistrates
of every degree, who had been created by the fallen govern-
ment, were now dispossessed of their ill-used authority, and the
meetings of the Protestant churches were relieved from the
odious espionage and visitation to which they had been so long
subject. On the 26th of March the chapel built by Mr. Her-
signy at Genlis, which had remained unoccupied for eleven
years, was opened with appropriate ceremonies for the public
worship of God. The occasion was one of more than common
interest, even at that period of stirring and wonderful events.
It brought together from a distance the scattered friends and
# The Sower, an ably-conducted religious newspaper.
# This is the highest Court of Appeals. It corresponds to a Court of
Errors, which has power to annul the proceedings of inferior tribunals,
274 MISSION IN FRANCE,
disciples of the mission, and was celebrated as the triumph of
a great principle which had long been overborne and crushed
by powerful foes.
Thus terminated the struggle of religious freedom in which
our mission in France had been involved almost from its com-
mencement. All its operations had hitherto been conducted at
immense disadvantage, subject to constant surveillance and fre-
quent interruption by bigoted magistrates and police, who were
always ready to carry into effect the intolerant policy that ruled
the councils of the government. Though the annoyances which
have been mentioned proceeded most frequently from Roman
Catholics, yet this was by no means always the case. They
were often instigated or openly sanctioned by members of those
Protestant churches which were authorized by the government,
and known as “National Churches,”—bodies in which the doc-
trines and the spirit of the Reformation were but imperfectly
recognized, and whose conduct in these instances but too well
demonstrated that intolerance is confined to no church, but be-
longs to human nature wherever it is clothed with the power
to oppress.
During the greater part of this period, however, the mission,
notwithstanding the hinderances and embarrassments it had to
encounter, made perceptible progress from year to year. Mr.
Willard continued to reside at Douay, and though, after the de-
parture of Mr. Sheldon the theological school was suspended,
he was still able, in addition to frequent preaching and super-
intending all the stations, to instruct the ministers and the other
assistants both in the doctrines of the gospel and in the princi-
ples of ecclesiastical order and discipline. These principles had
been singularly neglected in most of the Protestant churches of
the country, and the importance and the benefits of the church
as an organized body were but imperfectly appreciated. For
the purpose of diffusing juster sentiments concerning this subject
among those connected with the mission, he endeavored to make.
the church at Douay serve as a school in which candidates.
for the ministry, and others who were employed as assistants,
~
* -
GENERAL PROGRESS OF THE MISSION. 275
might become acquainted with the duties of Christian pastors,
and the government and action of a church. In this manner: . .
the principles of good order and discipline were spread through
the stations, and inculcated upon all who were concerned in
their management; and Mr. Willard had the satisfaction of
seeing the preachers who were connected with the mission
growing in knowledge and in piety, and becoming more efficient
ministers of the gospel. : .
At the beginning of 1840, just after the departure of Mr.
Sheldon, there were in the employ of the Board six ordained
ministers and five assistants, who preached or performed other
duties at seven stations and five out-stations, and, under the
direction of the missionary, had the care of seven churches,
numbering in all about one hundred and forty members. Four
years later the number of churches had increased to twelve,
and of members to two hundred and ten; and though the num-
ber of preachers had scarcely changed, the stations at which
they preached were upwards of twenty. In December, 1844,
Mr. Willard returned to the United States for the benefit of his
health, leaving the mission under the charge of two or three of
the most experienced of the pastors who were connected with
it. His visit here was at a period when the Board was em-
barrassed with debt, and the retrenchment of missionary expen-
ditures was strongly pressed upon the attention of its members.
By some among them it was thought that the missión in France,
inasmuch as it was planted among a civilized people and not
among heathen, ought first to be stricken off. At the special
meeting of the Convention which was held in November, 1845,
it was, however, decided that the mission should be continued ;
and early in the following summer Mr. Willard returned to his
station at Douay. -
During his absence the mission had made but little progress
even at the most favored stations, and at others it had obviously
lost ground. One minister and one assistant had died, and
amidst the intrigues of the National Protestants and the persecu-
tions of Catholic magistrates, several of the churches had declined
276 MISSION IN FRANCE,.
in regularity of worship and in unity of faith. Mr. Willard im-
mediately set about correcting the errors which had sprung up ;
but he encountered serious obstacles in the acts of violence done
to the cause of religious freedom, which, as has already been
mentioned, were both numerous and flagrant during the closing
years of the reign of Louis Phillippe. The result, however, as
a whole, he regarded as highly encouraging. Though the num-
ber of converts was not so large as he anticipated, yet the great
body of them stood firm even amidst the derision and persecu-
tion of their foes, and were obviously making commendable im-
provement in piety and knowledge of the gospel, and also in
ecclesiastical order and discipline.
Early in 1848 Dr. Devan, lately of the mission in China,
having been obliged by ill health to leave Canton, was requested
by the Board to join the mission in France. He reached Paris
on the 8th of March, while the city was still agitated by the
tumults and passions of the revolution. In a few days he re-
paired to Douay in order to consult with Mr. Willard; and on
his return to Paris he made it his first business to ascertain the
opportunities for commencing again the missionary labors which
had been discontinued on the departure of Mr. Sheldon. The
church had become scattered in the lapse of nine years, so that
not one of its original members could now be found. Dr. Devan,
however, soon met with several members of the churches in the
provinces who, with their families and associates, might form
the nucleus of a congregation for public worship. He immedi-
ately secured a suitable apartment and commenced his labors as
a missionary, intending to explore the provinces of the South
before finally settling in Paris. The fierce excitements and
frightful contests of which the city has since been the scene,
have naturally drawn the minds of men away from religion as
well as from all the pursuits of quiet industry; but should the
storm of revolution be now succeeded by political and social
tranquillity, we may hope that the mission both at Paris and
at Douay will yet contribute some humble agency towards
PROSPECTS OF RELIGIOUS FREEDOM. 277
blending the influences of evangelical truth with those of re-
publican freedom, in shaping the destinies of France.
The history of mankind teaches us by many an example that
true “soul liberty” depends far less upon the form of a nation's.
government, than upon the spirit that rules in the hearts of the
people. The new constitution of the French Republic, like the
charter of 1830, declares that “every one may freely profess
his own religion, and is to receive from the State equal protec-
tion in the exercise of his worship;” but in the same article it
also provides that “the ministers of the different religions.
recognized by law,” shall “have the right of receiving payment
from the State.” Words like these are alone sufficient to cast a
shade over the prospects of religious freedom in France. They
show how imperfectly it is understood either by statesmen or
people, and render it probable that, amidst the shifting currents
of public opinion, the constitution may yet be made to sanction
legislative enactments or executive decrees as intolerant as those
which disgraced the reign of Louis Phillippe. Indeed, indica-
tions of such a result have already appeared in here and there
an instance of civil interference with the rights of worship; but
they have been of the most inconsiderable importance, save on
account of the invaluable principle which they involve. The
tone of public sentiment is far more tolerant and free than during
the reign of the now exiled monarch, and the missionaries cher-
ish the sanguine hope that hereafter they may pursue, unharmed
and even unrestricted, their chosen work of preaching to the
people the doctrines of the gospel.
25
MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK.
C H A PTER XXI.
OBJECT of the Mission.— Visit of Professor Sears to Germany.—Rev. J. G.
Oncken appointed Missionary at Hamburg.—Extension of the Mission to
other States. – Decree of the Senate of Hamburg against the Mission. —
Petitions of the Board and of others in the United States and in England. —
Persecution in other States of Germany. — Growth of the Mission. — Change
of Policy in Hamburg and in other States.— Persecution most severe in
Denmark. —Imprisonment of the Danish Missionaries.— Visit of Mr. Onck-
en to England. — Persecution allayed.— Deputation of Messrs. Hackett
and Conant to Denmark. — The “Law of Amnesty.”—Troubles in the
Danish Churches. – Peculiar Features of the Mission. — Its Connection with
Religious Freedom. — The Recent Revolution.— Its Effects upon the Mis-
Sion. -
IN the northern and central provinces of Germany there are
said to be established many communities of the successors of the
ancient Anabaptists, who, under the various names of Remon-
strants, Mennonites and Galenists, have obtained for themselves a
kind of toleration from the government, and still cherish doctrines
and usages resembling in many respects those of the Baptists
of England and America. To revive religion among these scat-
tered communities, who were without the pale of the national
church, and to establish with them fraternal relations and
Christian sympathies, was the original design of the Board in
directing their attention to Germany. This design, however,
was early abandoned; and the mission, though devoted to far
other ends than those originally contemplated, has yet accom-
plished objects of great importance to the ultimate triumphs of
the gospel in that country.
In the year 1833, Rev. Professor Sears embarked for the conti-
nent of Europe with the design of spending some time at one or
THE MISSION ESTABLISHED. 279
more of the universities of Germany. He was requested by
the Board of Managers, at the same time, to make inquiries re-
specting the religious condition of the country, and to report
what missionary aid could be extended to those who had em-
braced the sentiments of the Baptists, and also what could be
done in general for the dissemination of the gospel. In prose-
cuting his inquiries, Mr. Sears met with many individuals who
held the faith of the Baptists concerning the ordinance of bap-
tism and the fundamental doctrines of Christianity, but they
were generally scattered through the Lutheran churches of the
country, or were cherishing their solitary faith apart from every
Christian communion. In the city of Hamburg he became
acquainted with a small circle who were of this description.
Among these was Mr. J. G. Oncken, a person of excellent judg-
ment and earnest piety, who, though without an university edu-
cation, spoke several European languages, and had made re-
spectable attainments in Christian theology. He was at that
time in the employ of the English Continental Society, and
also of the Edinburgh Bible Society, and was favorably known
to many of the leading evangelical ministers of Germany. Mr.
Oncken was already a Baptist in the convictions of his own
mind, and on the 22d of April, 1834, he was baptized with six
others by Professor Sears, in the waters of the Elbe at Ham-
burg. On the following day they were organized into a church,
of which Mr. Oncken was soon ordained the pastor.
In the report which Mr. Sears submitted to the Board, he
recommended that a mission be established in Germany, and
that Mr. Oncken be appointed to commence the undertaking.
The arrangements however were not completed till September,
1835, when he entered the service of the Board, though still re-
taining his connection with the Edinburgh Bible Society. At
about the same time Mr. C. F. Lange, who had previously been
associated with Mr. Oncken in the employ of the Continental
Society, was appointed colporteur and assistant in the mission.
The newly-appointed missionaries were directed to maintain
public worship with the little church at Hamburg, and also to
280 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK.
extend their labors, in distributing tracts and Bibles and in
preaching the gospel, to Bremen, Oldenburg, and other towns
in the north of Germany, - a district with whose religious
condition they had already become well acquainted. A small
room was accordingly procured at Hamburg, in which public
worship was conducted on the Sabbath, and meetings for prayer
and for instruction in the Bible were held on other days of
the week. A temperance society was also formed, which multi-
plied the friends of the mission, and soon became a useful aux-
iliary in circulating evangelical sentiments, as well as an efficient
agent of reform. The persons who thus became associated
with Mr. Oncken at Hamburg began immediately to take
measures for securing a more perfect observance of the Sab-
bath, and in other respects for creating a higher standard of
morals than generally prevailed among those of the same class
in the Lutheran and Romish churches of the city. The church
increased with a rapidity that even surpassed the hopes either of
the missionaries or of the Board, and a portion of its members
devoted themselves to voluntary and systematic labors in pro-
moting the objects of the mission.
The different States of Germany were at this period each
possessed of a national church, which could at any time sum-
mon to its aid the civil power in the suppression of heresy.
Such establishments, though they may check the progress of
free inquiry, can never repress dissent among a thoughtful
and intellectual people. The human mind, in proportion to
its intelligence, refuses to receive its religious faith by the pre-
scriptions of public law, and turns away in disgust from a
church which embraces in its fold all the citizens of a State,
whatever be the religious doctrines they hold or the moral
character they bear. Thus was it among the people of Germa-
ny at the period when Mr. Oncken began his labors. No
sooner did it become known that a Christian congregation had
been formed on the basis of a voluntary profession of faith and
of baptism by immersion, than many persons, not only in the
city of Hamburg but in the neighboring States, began to seek
PROCEEDINGS OF THE LUTHERAN CLERGY. 281
for information concerning it; and wherever the missionaries
travelled, they met with those by whom the new views were
readily received. In this manner, within three years from the
commencement of the mission, churches were established at
Berlin, at Oldenburg, and at Stuttgart, which, with the church at
Hamburg, contained a hundred and twenty members. In ad-
dition to these many had been baptized at Marburg, Jever and
other towns which had been visited by the missionaries. Mr.
Oncken was specially invited to Stuttgart, in Wurtemburg, by
Dr. Römer, an intelligent gentleman who had heard of the
character of the mission, and in a single visit he administer-
ed the ordinance of baptism to twenty-three persons. The
churches which were thus formed found each a pastor among
its own members — in most instances a person of intelligence
and some degree of education — whom they chose to be ordained
and set over them in the ministry of the gospel.
The rise and growth of a new body of Christians, distin-
guished for their zeal and purity of life, and united in a solemn
and earnest protest against some of the usages and doctrines
of the national church, soon became the subject of common
remark in private circles, and was not long in attracting the
official notice of the magistrates of the several States in which
their congregations were established. By the more serious
members of the Lutheran communion they were denounced as
heretics and schismatics, who, by their rejection of infant bap-
tism, were guilty of the crime of promoting discord and disunion
in “the sacred body of Christ,” as they styled their own
church, – while by others they were despised as fanatics, and
held up to the derision of the populace and the punishment of
the magistrates. -
The earliest open attempt of the magistrates to restrict the
labors of Mr. Oncken and his associates, was in September,
1837, just after eight persons had been baptized and added to
the church at Hamburg. Complaints were immediately made
to the senior of the Lutheran clergy in the city, who requested
the police to put a stop to their proceedings. Orders to the
25*
282 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK.
same effect were issued by the Senate of Hamburg, and Mr.
Oncken, with several members of his church, were summoned
before the magistrates and minutely questioned concerning their
faith and usages, especially in relation to baptism. No final
order, however, was taken against them; countenance was even
given them by one of the senators, and their meetings were
continued with fuller attendance and greater interest than be-
fore. A larger place of worship was obtained for the accommo-
dation of the increasing congregation, and the labors of the mis-
sion went on with little interruption from the police, — though
in the administration of the ordinance of baptism it was deemed
prudent to repair to a place on the opposite shore of the Elbe,
in the neighboring jurisdiction of Hanover. This season of
rest however was soon brought to a close. In April, 1839, the
senate again attempted the suppression of the labors of the
missionaries. It issued a decree enjoining the chief magistrate
of the police to summon Mr. Oncken and his associates, and
“to inform the said Oncken that the senate neither acknowl-
edges the society which he denominates the Baptist church nor
himself as its preacher: that on the contrary the senate can
only view it as a criminal schism of which he is the sole au-
thor.” The magistrate was further directed “to prohibit him
from all further exercise of his unauthorized and unrecognized
ministerial functions,” and also to prohibit his associates “from
all further participation in the same culpable and unlawful pro-
ceedings.” The members of the church, however, immediately
sent a petition and remonstrance to the senate, which was
seconded by an address from the members of the Board and
other individuals in this country, praying that Mr. Oncken and
his associates might be allowed the exercise of freedom of faith
and of worship.
Notwithstanding this decree of the senate, the church con-
tinued to hold its meetings unharmed for several months; when
at length, as was supposed on some new complaint being made
by the ecclesiastics of the city, Mr. Oncken was arrested and
cast into prison in May, 1840,—charged with having “continued
EFFORTS TO SECURE FREEDOM OF WORSHIP. 283
to preach, baptize and administer the Lord's Supper, according
to his own confession, notwithstanding the prohibition of the
authorities.” One of the members of his church was also im-
prisoned for allowing a religious meeting at his house, and one
of the assistants was arrested while preaching, and the congre-
gation was dispersed by the police. The imprisonment of Mr.
Oncken continued for four weeks, in circumstances of great
suffering and privation, and on his enlargement his furniture
was sold by the police in order to defray the charges of his
arrest and his keeping while in prison.
So soon as these persecutions became known to the Board
they determined to spare no endeavors, not only to effect the
liberation of the missionaries, but also, if possible, to secure
freedom of worship for the churches that were now springing
up in nearly every State in Germany and in the neighboring
kingdom of Denmark. They immediately appointed Rev. Dr.
Welch of Albany, a member of their body, to proceed to
Washington, for the purpose of conferring with the President
of the United States, and obtaining his influence with the gov-
ernment of Hamburg in behalf of persons whose only crime
was their membership of a communion which in this country
embraces a large and respectable portion of the Christian
public. The President, though distinctly declining all official
interference, received with favor the request of the Board, and
through the agency of the American Consul at Hamburg caused
a representation to be made which resulted in great advantage
to the persecuted missionaries and their followers. A memorial
was at the same time presented to the senate of the city, signed
by several eminent persons connected with the government of
the United States, and by many other distinguished citizens,
setting forth the high character of the American Baptists, and
testifying to the purity of their doctrines and the good order of
their churches. Memorials to the same effect were also present-
ed by the Edinburgh Bible Society and by a deputation from
the Baptist churches of England, the latter bearing five thou-
sand signatures. These representations were not without effect;
284 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK,
•º
though no immunity was specially granted to the members of
the church at Hamburg, the measures which had been com-
menced against them were discontinued; and from that time
they have enjoyed comparative freedom from official annoyance.
But these acts of persecution were not confined to the branch
of the mission which was established at Hamburg. They were
repeated, with greater or less aggravation, at Oldenburg, at
Berlin and other cities of Prussia; at Stuttgart, and in several
of the towns of Hessia, Bavaria, Pomerania, – and even in the
kingdom of Hanover, where, if in any portion of Germany, on
account of its connections with England, we might hope to find
the exercise of religious freedom unrestricted. To each of these
States the missionaries had extended their labors, and the
views of Christian doctrine which they put forth were embraced
by considerable numbers of the people; and in each were
ministers fined and imprisoned for preaching or for administer-
ing the ordinances of the gospel; congregations were broken
up by the police, and private members of churches were com-
pelled to have their infants baptized, and were punished for
their participation in the heresies promulgated by the mission-
aries. These punishments were inflicted, not on account of
any fanaticism and indiscreet zeal on the part of the ministers,
or any unworthy conduct on the part of their disciples; they
were all acts of intolerance, called forth by no crime but that
of dissenting from the established faith of the country, and dar-
ing to worship in accordance with the independent dictates of
their own conscience. They were the bitter yet unfailing
fruits of the vicious principle engrafted upon the constitutions
of these several States, by which the government was clothed
with authority to prescribe the religious faith as well as to pro-
tect the persons and property of its subjects, – a principle
which, in whatever part of the world it has been recognized,
has uniformly been productive of the most disastrous and in-
iquitous results.
It is true that in many of these places the disciples of the
new faith were generally of the humbler classes of society; yet
GRowTH of THE MIssion. 285
the restrictions which were imposed upon their worship were
not on this account the less wrong, or the less disgraceful to a
country which had once reëchoed with the doctrines of the Ré-
formation. The humble origin of the Baptist churches in Ger-
many may serve to explain the readiness with which the magis-
trates inflicted the penalties of the law upon their pastors and
members ; but the sanction which was given to these cruel pro-
ceedings by pious divines of the Lutheran church, and by dis-
tinguished theologians and expounders of Christianity, shows
the imperfect manner in which the rights of the human soul are
understood even by the wisest and most illustrious of the land.
They generally regarded the toleration of the Baptists as a
precedent fraught with the utmost danger to the interests of
true religion, which, they conceived, could be sustained only by
the enforcements of public law. This was especially true at
Berlin, where Rev. Mr. Lehmann was the pastor of a thriving
church. He was ordained in England in 1841, in order to
secure a higher respect for his ministerial character; and though
his foreign ordination undoubtedly proved advantageous to his
ministry, he did not long escape the punishments which both
church and state united in visiting upon those who ventured
to preach the gospel in forms not recognized by the law. To
the appeals which were made in his behalf it was answered,
even by men well known as friends of evangelical truth, that if
the Baptists were tolerated every species of dissenting faith,
and even infidelity itself must be allowed, – and that thus piety
would become extinct and Christianity would be destroyed. It
was by reasonings like these — which to an American citizen
appear childish and futile—that the most odious violations of
religious freedom were vindicated and justified at the enlight-
ened capital of the kingdom of Prussia; and that too by theolo-
gians and philosophers whose piety and learning have filled the
world with their fame. -
The rapid growth of the mission during the first three years
of its existence has been already mentioned. These years, and
several of those immediately following, were filled with persecu-
286 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK.
tions, and the missionaries were constantly harassed with ar-
rests and fines inflicted upon them by the government. Yet
they travelled through the States of Germany, every where
preaching the word and every where meeting with those who
received it gladly. In 1840 there had been established in four
of the German States and in Denmark, six churches, contain-
ing about two hundred members. In 1845 there were thirteen
churches in seven different States of Germany, besides three in
Denmark, numbering in all nearly fifteen hundred members.
This rapid increase was the result of no ephemeral sympathy
or transitory enthusiasm. The persons composing these church-
es, with few exceptions, continued firm amidst the persecutions
to which they were constantly exposed. They were often fined,
imprisoned or banished from their country; yet they evinced a
Christian magnanimity and mildness of spirit which extorted
respect even from their enemies, and which was undoubtedly
instrumental in advancing the cause of religious freedom. From
year to year, as the churches became more numerous, additional
ministers were ordained and assistants were appointed, whose
labors were gradually extended throughout all the leading
States of Germany, and into the kingdom of Denmark. Thus
the Bible was held out to the people as the only rule of faith,
the only guide in worship. Its simple truths were pressed up-
on the individual consciences of men as matters of the highest
concern, independently of formularies and creeds, of priesthoods
and churches. Several works relating to the principles and
history of the Baptist denomination were also translated and
published, and were circulated by thousands each year, through
the agency of colporteurs, along with Bibles, tracts, and other
religious books, in every part of Germany. All this was ac-
complished with an amount of pecuniary assistance from the
Board exceedingly small in proportion to the results them-
selves. Much of the labor by which they were brought about
was performed gratuitously, or was compensated by small con-
tributions from the churches; while sums of money were occa-
sionally contributed by benevolent individuals in this country
CESSATION OF PERSECUTION IN GERMANY. 287
and in England, for the erection of houses of worship or the
relief of those who were suffering from persecution.
After the representations which were addressed to the senate
of Hamburg from citizens of the United States and of England,
the policy of the government appears to have become more len-
ient towards the mission. No formal decree was ever passed
in its favor, yet the hostility of the magistrates was perceived
gradually to subside. Mr. Oncken was again imprisoned in
May, 1843, for “having administered the ordinances,” but he
was speedily released on application being made to the senate.
One of the members of his church was fined, and another was
exiled for a year, for distributing tracts. These, however,
and a few similar instances, were the last exhibitions of any
thing like legalized persecution towards the mission at Ham-
burg. In other German States toleration was not so readily
obtained, and in some it has been wholly withheld. In Prussia
a decree was passed in 1842, allowing the Baptists to assemble
as “a religious community” but not as “a church; ” also per-
mitting the administration of Christian ordinances on condition
that it be done privately, and that all baptisms be reported to
the rector of the parish and to the police. These conditions
rendered the concession well nigh nugatory, but even this re-
luctant and imperfect toleration was hailed as the harbinger of
a higher freedom. At Berlin the missionaries, though not free
from annoyance, enjoyed far greater immunity than in the
smaller towns of the kingdom; a fact which may have had its
origin in the interest manifested in their welfare by several
citizens of England and the United States, who visited the
Prussian capital. In the Duchy of Oldenburg, in Hanover, in
Hessia, and others of the minor states of Germany, far less has
been accomplished for the cause of religious freedom, and the
“bloody tenet of persecution” still sways the councils of the
government. But even here it has abated its rigors, and the
members of the mission have often passed long periods of ex
emption from its inflictions. -
In Denmark, however, the members of the mission encounter-
288 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK.
ed the most relentless persecution both from magistrates and
ecclesiastics. Mr. Oncken first visited Copenhagen in the au-
tumn of 1839, in company with Mr. Köbner, one of the assistants
at Hamburg, who had been there during the preceding summer.
He found at the Danish capital a small company of pious per-
sons who had already adopted the views of the Baptists concern-
ing the fundamental doctrines of Christianity. These he bap-
tized and formed into a church. The report of these proceed-
ings was speedily sent through the entire country, and as the mis-
sionaries were understood to pronounce the baptism of infants
invalid, they were vehemently denounced by all parties in the
established church. Letters were sent by the leading clergy to
different parts of the kingdom, warning ministers and their flocks
against the propagators of the new heresy, and representing them
as the successors of the ancient Anabaptists, against whom the
sternest laws had been enacted in a preceding century. Thus
all Denmark was made acquainted with what had been done at
Copenhagen by the missionaries. They were every where
spoken against, and by none more violently than by the most
orthodox and pious portion of the established church. By mul-
titudes of devout Lutherans the performance of the rite of bap-
tism by persons who had no ecclesiastical license, and the forma-
tion of a society of those who protested against all civil inter-
ference in matters of conscience, were regarded as frightful
disorders, fraught with every thing that is blasphemous and
revolting to a religious mind.
In this state of public feeling Mr. Moenster, the teacher of
the little church at Copenhagen, was called before the magis-
trates of the city, and, after him, each member of the church in
succession. They were minutely examined as to their articles
of faith, and each one was separately warned to abandon the
new doctrines and return to the national church they had de-
serted. A few days later the whole body was again brought
before the court, and each one was again warned by the public
inquisitor-who confessed, however, while discharging his office,
that instead of being, as he expected, a band of fanatics and de-
VIOLENT OPPOSITION IN DENMARK. 289.
ceivers, they had proved themselves persons of firm principles
and most Christian tempers. The affair was now referred to the
Department of State, and, after a delay of several months, a
decree was promulgated in April, 1840, that their meetings
should be discontinued, and that they should abstain from ad-
ministering the Lord's Supper, and from every thing relating to
ºre-baptism. A decree like this, however, they could not regard,
and their meetings, though privately held, were attended by
larger numbers than ever before ; new converts were frequently
baptized, and at the end of the year 1840 the church contained
thirty-two members. Within the same period other churches
were established at Langeland, an island in the Great Belt of
the Baltic, and at Aalborg in Jutland. At these places, scarcely
less than at Copenhagen, the labors of the mission encountered
the sternest opposition. Messrs. Oncken and Moenster, who
preached the obnoxious doctrines there, were hunted by the po-
lice and rewards were offered for their apprehension.
With hostility like this were the simple and inoffensive doc-
trines of the Baptists obliged to contend on their introduction into
Denmark, in the middle of the nineteenth century. These doc-
trines were the baptism of believers by immersion, the right of
private judgment in matters of religion, and the recognition of the
Bible alone as the sufficient rule of Christian faith and worship;
doctrines certainly containing nothing perilous to the interests
of religion or of social order, — yet they were regarded with
horror by many pious minds, and visited with relentless perse-
cution even in the land which three centuries before had been
the home of the Reformation.
But this hostility was soon to show itself in more violent
forms. In the autumn of 1840, Rev. Peter Moenster, the pas-
tor of the church at Copenhagen, was arrested by the police and
thrown into prison for administering the ordinances. He was
examined before the Court of Chancery, and directed immedi-
ately to leave the kingdom. He however refused to obey, for it
was his native country, and he was in consequence consigned to a
protracted imprisonment. His brother, Rev. Adolph Moenster,
- 26
290 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMLARK,
who had been a student of theology at one of the universities,
was appointed to succeed him in the ministry of the church;
but in a few weeks he also was sent to prison for administering
the ordinance of baptism. Severe penalties were in like man-
ner inflicted on many members of the churches in different parts
of the kingdom. They were subjected to fines and arrests, and
were compelled by the magistrates to have their children sprin-
kled by the Lutheran ministers, in order, as was declared in the
royal decree, that “they might not be debarred the blessing of
immediate admission into the Christian church.”
In this state of affairs Mr. Oncken, in the summer of 1841,
went to England for the purpose of making known there the
condition of these persecuted churches and their imprisoned
pastors, and of obtaining from prominent Baptist clergymen,
certificates that they regarded the Danish Baptists as their own
brethren, and their churches as regular and well ordered churches
of Christ. These certificates were readily obtained, and with
them were also sent several handsome contributions for the re-
lief of these suffering victims of ecclesiastical bigotry. Similar
certificates were at nearly the same time sent from the United
States; and in the course of the summer a deputation from the
English Baptists proceeded to Denmark, for the purpose of pre-
senting to the king still further representations and memorials
in behalf of their persecuted brethren. The gentlemen com-
posing the deputation were introduced at court by the British
Plenipotentiary, and were aided in all their efforts to promote
religious freedom by Joseph John Gurney and his sister, Mrs.
Elizabeth Fry, two philanthropic and distinguished members
of the Society of Friends, at that time on a visit at Copenhagen.
The views and memorials which were thus presented to the
king were received with courtesy, and with many expressions
of personal interest in the object they proposed, but no change
was made in the policy of the government. Some mitigation
appears to have been allowed of the severe sentences which had
been pronounced by the courts, but no disposition was mani-
DEPUTATION TO COPENHAGEN. 291
fested to tolerate the Baptists in the kingdom, and the same
measures were still continued for their suppression.
In November, 1841, the two Moensters were liberated from
prison, after a confinement of upwards of a year. They were
directed to abstain from all further exercise of their ministry—a
command which neither of them was willing to obey—and they
went forth from their imprisonment only to resume their labors
as preachers of the gospel, and to encounter again the same
annoyances and distraints from the public authorities. The
churches of the mission, however, were constantly becoming
larger and more numerous, and the question of toleration, which
their members every where raised, had begun to arrest the
public attention. Two advocates of distinction at Copenhagen
offered their services as counsel to the Moensters, and some of
the papers of the city also espoused their cause. -
In order to afford encouragement to the persecuted Baptists
of Denmark, and also to make still another endeavor to allevi-
ate their condition, the Board in 1842 requested Rev. Professor
Hackett of the Newton Theological Institution, at that time in
Germany, to repair to Copenhagen and communicate with the
church and its pastor, and also again to petition the king. He
was accompanied in his mission by Rev. Professor T. J. Conant
of the Hamilton Literary and Theological Institution, who went
at the request of the Board of the American and Foreign
Bible Society. These gentlemen reached Copenhagen in Au-
gust, and going as they did in behalf of two powerful bodies
of American Baptists, they were welcomed by their distress-
ed brethren with the deepest emotions of gratitude and joy.
They could not meet with the church in religious worship
without violating the laws of the country, but with small com-
panies of its members they often mingled their counsels and
sympathies and prayers. They also visited several persons of
eminence and station, both as ecclesiastics and civilians, and
commended to their sympathies the condition of these unoffending
disciples of the mission. The king was at that time absent
from the capital, but the Estates were in session, and Messrs.
292 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK.
Hackett and Conant held interviews with many of the members,
and stated to them the principles of religious freedom as they
are cherished by Christians in the United States. The influence
exerted by this deputation, especially when taken in connection
with the other agencies which were already in operation, is
thought to have proved highly beneficial. These gentlemen
also took pains to inform themselves concerning the state of
public opinion at Copenhagen, and were gratified to find that
it did not in all cases approve the intolerant measures of the
government. “Many individuals in public stations, even some
clergymen in the establishment, had declared in favor” of toler-
ating the Baptists; their cause “was advocated in some of the
public journals; pamphlets were written and published in their
defence, and the popular feeling was beginning to be enlisted in
their behalf.”
The only toleration, however, which the Danish king has ever
guarantied is contained in a “Law of Amnesty,” as it is termed,
which was put forth in December, 1842. This singular docu-
ment begins by declaring that inasmuch as the Baptists hold
doctrines which differ from those of the confession of Augsburg,
they cannot be allowed the free exercise of their religious rites
in the kingdom. It however grants them permission to establish
a separate church in Fredericia, where, upon certain conditions,
they may practice all the rites of their worship; and it also
allows Baptists in other parts of the country to assemble pri-
vately for worship and to administer the Lord's supper, but it
forbids the administration of baptism, and requires them to have
their children baptized by the parish minister within the age
prescribed by the law.
The law of amnesty was undoubtedly intended as a conces-
sion on the part of the Danish government, but it was so loaded
with restrictions that the toleration which it granted was nearly
valueless, and it has been but little regarded by the ministers
and the churches to whom it related. They did not confine
* The Report of this Delegation is in the American Baptist Missionary
Magazine, vol. xxii, p. 308.
TROUBLE IN THE DANISH CHURCHES. 293
themselves to Fredericia, but continued to hold their persecuted
worship in other parts of the kingdom. There they were
still subjected to frequent arrests and constant annoyances.
The ministers were thrown into prison for administering the
ordinances, and their brethren were fined in heavy sums for
worshipping in public, or their children were taken by the
police to be sprinkled by the parish clergy, and on their refusal
to pay the fees they were stripped of their goods. But the
religious influence of the mission was constantly extending; the
struggle in which these humble disciples were engaged attract-
ed the attention of thoughtful minds in all parts of the kingdom;
and while many of the most serious and orthodox of the Lu-
theran church have sanctioned the measures of the government,
a large number of influential persons, who were pledged to no
ecclesiastical system, have arrayed themselves on the side of
the advocates of religious freedom.
In the year 1845 the church in Copenhagen became distract-
ed by the “heresy of sinless perfection,” which is said to have
been introduced by the Swedish preachers. It infected, for a
time, the greater part of the churches in the kingdom, and both
the Moensters were dismissed from the service of the mission in
whose behalf they had labored and suffered for many years.
In the isolated condition of the Danish churches, surrounded by
foes and jealously watched by a persecuting government, they
were peculiarly exposed to evil influences. Mr. Oncken and
his coadjutors in Germany were forbidden to enter the country,
and the English or American Baptists who visited them could
meet them only in private circles; and with their brief experi-
ence of self-government and self-direction, it is not strange that
they were carried away by a doctrine which has often infected
the Christian church. The German missionaries, however, did
not abandon them; by correspondence with the ministers in
Denmark, by interviews which they held with them at Ham-
burg and at other places out of the kingdom, they endeavored
to withdraw them from their heretical views. Nor were these
efforts without success. The church at Copenhagen has been
26*
294 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK,
purified of its errors, and its members have returned to more.
scriptural views of human life and character. Other churches
are following the example, and a Danish minister, Mr. Förster,
who has long resided in London, has been sent back to his
country by an English missionary society, to instruct and coun-
sel his misguided brethren.
The mission in Germany, it has been already intimated, was
commenced at a period when the mind of the country was begin-
ning to call in question the authority of creeds and the right of
the civil power to enforce the doctrines of the church, and was
thus in a measure prepared for the reception of spiritual truth.
In this state of things, the missionaries and their earliest follow-
ers immediately became the pioneers of religious freedom, and,
in the providence of God, were placed in the front of the move-
ment which has since spread itself over all Germany. The
mission from its very beginning has been marked by peculiar
features. Without any leader sent from the United States, and
with comparatively small appropriations from the Board, it has
been conducted in all its various operations by ministers who
have been raised up among the people it is designed to bless.
Their sufferings for conscience' sake have endeared them to the
friends of freedom and of Christianity in every land, and their
pure and modest characters have gradually dispelled the preju-
dices with which their doctrines were at first regarded. Their
churches were gathered in the midst of persecution and hate,
and the members who composed them were men whose faith
was fired by a burning zeal. The laymen, scarcely less than
their pastors, early commenced of themselves the labors of mis-
sionaries among their countrymen, and these labors they have
ceaselessly pursued to the present time. In all their journeys,
whether of business or of pleasure, in all their intercourse with
their fellow men, they have every where asserted the unchar-
tered freedom of the conscience — the inalienable rights of the
soul; while at the same time they have sown the precious seeds
of heavenly truth in the minds of the people.
By agencies like these, the doctrines of Christianity, as re-
PECULIAR FEATURES OF THE MISSION. 295
ceived and practiced by Baptists, have been widely disseminated
in nearly all the States of Germany, in Denmark and Hol-
land; and the churches of the mission have sprung up in several
of the principal capitals and commercial cities, and in a large
number of the villages which belong to the extended district
lying between the Rhine and the Vistula, and between the capi-
tal of Denmark on the north and the capital of Austria on the
south. In no one of the missions of the Board—that among the
Rarens alone excepted—has the growth been so rapid, or the
number of converts annually added to the churches so consider-
able. The spiritual fruits it has borne are of the most gratify-
ing character. Though the members of its churches are gener-
ally of humble condition in life and wholly dependent on their
daily labor, yet they have evinced a Christian zeal and energy
which have gained for them many friends, and called down the
favor of Heaven upon the efforts they have made. The larger
churches have in many instances contributed to the aid of the
Smaller, while large sums of money have been received from
benevolent individuals in England and America, to aid in erect-
ing houses of worship, or in relieving the distresses of those in
prison or in exile. Messrs. Oncken and Lehmann have several
times visited England and Scotland to make known the wants
of the mission, and have always brought back with them sub-
stantial testimonials of the estimation in which it is there held.
It has been from the beginning, in an eminent degree, a self-
progressive mission; it has been sustained in a great measure
by the friends it has gained, and extended solely by the converts
its own doctrines have made. Amidst the contempt of ecclesi-
astics and the persecution of rulers, it has been honored by God
as the means of signal blessings to the people, and has raised
up in the heart of a powerful nation a band of converts and reso-
lute believers in the simple doctrines of the gospel, who, un-
daunted by opposition, will still labor to extend among their
countrymen and to transmit to other generations the precious
faith they have received.
296 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK,
Until within a recent period the annual appropriations of the
Board for the support of the mission have never exceeded
three thousand dollars. In the summer of 1848, in consequence
of the growing interest and the multiplying wants which it pre-
sented, the appropriation was raised to four thousand. In addi-
tion, however, to frequent donations from private persons both
in Great Britain and America, it has received constant aid from
the American and Foreign Bible Society and the American
Tract Society, and more recently from the American Baptist
Publication Society. The appropriations of each of these socie-
ties for this mission have been exceedingly liberal; those of the
Bible Society especially have in some years been nearly equal
to the amount annually appropriated by the Board itself. Its
origin and its entire progress have thus far been connected with
the labors of Mr. Oncken, whose generous struggles for religious
freedom and unwearied efforts to propagate the gospel among his
countrymen, while they have made him the victim alike of eccle-
siastical and of civil tyranny, have also made his name and char-
acter familiar to the Christian public of our own and other lands.
Beneath the favor which Heaven has bestowed upon his la-
bors and those of his coadjutors, the mission has constantly ad-
vanced, even in the darkest days of persecution and distress.
Its baptized disciples now number more than two thousand, and
its churches have gradually increased to fifty, and most of them
are supplied with pastors and organized into associations for
mutual sympathy and encouragement. Though embracing but
few persons who possess either wealth or social influence, they
are characterized by the same religious activity and benevolent
enterprise which mark the churches of our own land. They
have struggled long and suffered much in maintaining their
sentiments amidst the opposition of powerful foes, but it is be-
lieved that in all the States of Germany, if not in Denmark,
they have at length achieved a permanent triumph, and may
henceforth continue their worship and propagate their doctrines
without molestation from the government. The latest communi-
THE REVOLUTION IN GERMANY. 297
cations from the missionaries represent the whole land as now
open to their labors, and every where inviting them to enter in
and reap the harvests already ripening for the sickle. Private
Christians and agents of the mission are actively engaged in
distributing copies of the Bible and tracts in every part of the
country, and preparations are making for gathering new churches
in regions over which baptized believers are widely scattered,
and also for sending additional missionaries to preach the gospel
in the empire of Austria and in Hungary.
The popular struggle which has recently passed over Europe
has in Germany, far more than in France, been directed to the re-
dress of actual grievances and the attainment of substantial rights.
It was there not an insurrection against monarchy but against
despotism, and its aim was not to annihilate the government, but
to restrict its authority and make it responsible to the people.
Hence its results, though they are less brilliant and dazzling
than those which have been achieved in France, are likely to be
productive of no less enduring benefit to the interests of society.
In every attempt at reform, religious freedom, the noblest pre-
rogative of humanity, was distinctly proposed among the fore-
most of the ends to be secured. In the free city of Hamburg, in
the kingdom of Prussia, and in others of the German States, reli-
gious freedom is now guarantied in the constitutions which have
been established, and it has even been provided for in the funda-
mental law which binds together the confederate empire of Ger-
many. The great social movement, of which the mission was
one of the earliest pioneers, is likely to prove in every way most
auspicious to the progress of evangelical truth. It has changed
the policy of governments and broken the fetters of ecclesiasti-
cal tyranny; it has in a great measure emancipated the people
from the spiritual bondage of their national churches, and in the
place of vain traditions and powerless ceremonies hitherto pre-
scribed by law, it has opened to them the Bible for their guid-
ance on the road to Heaven. Results like these, aside from all
the civil triumphs with which it has been connected, give to this
298 MISSION IN GERMANY AND DENMARK,
~
movement a high religious importance, and render it worthy to
be styled in history a second reformation.
Beneath the auspices which have thus arisen, the members of
the mission are preparing to extend their labors to still wider
spheres, and to prosecute them with renewed vigor and zeal.
With this view they have recently held in the city of Hamburg
a convention of delegates from the churches which are scattered
over the German States. The convention was composed of
sixty members, and its object was to effect a more perfect union
of the churches and to secure a more efficient organization of
the mission. The delegates assembled on the 18th of January
of the present year, and continued in session eight days, during
which they deliberated fully upon all the interests and features
of their new condition as a Christian denomination, and adopted
a declaration of their faith and modes of worship which was to
be published to the people of Germany. The prospects of the
mission are now of the most gratifying and inviting character.
In every district from which delegates came to the meeting at
Hamburg, it is received with increasing favor and is requiring
the services of additional laborers. Multitudes of minds, espec-
ially among the humbler classes of the population, are dissatisfied
with the lifeless faith taught them in the national churches, and
are eagerly turning to the proclamations of a more spiritual reli-
gion which are made by the preachers attached to the mission.
By the agencies which have been thus put in operation a new
religious spirit is awakening among the common people of the
country, and the simple truths of the Bible are now addressing
themselves especially to those classes of society among which the
greatest changes in the social and moral sentiments of a nation
are found most frequently to commence. From the workings of
this spirit and the power of these truths we may anticipate re-
sults of no common importance to the interests of Germany,+not,
it may be, in the philosophy which is taught in the schools or in
the theology which is preached in the churches, but in the piety
which reigns in the hearts of the people.
MISSION IN G. R. E. E. C. E.
C H A PTE R XXII.
CoMMENCED in 1836. — Messrs. Pasco and Love at Patras. – Policy of the
Greek Church respecting the Scriptures. – Appointment of Mrs. Dickson,
—Return of Mr. Pasco. — Mr. Love removes to Corfu. —Baptism of Apos-
tolos. – Arrival of Rev. Mr. Buel. — Tumult on St. Speridion's day. —
Other Baptisms at Corfu. — Popular violence at Patras. – Mr. Love obliged
to return to the United States.— Labors of Mr. Buel at Piraeus. – Arrival
of Rev. Mr. Arnold at Corfu. — He preaches in English.-Slow progress
of the Mission. —Evils with which it has to contend. —Labors of Mr.
Arnold. — Prosecution of Mr. Buel at Piraeus. – General Aspect of the
Mission.
IN pursuing the subjects of our narrative from the nations of
Western Europe to the storied shores of Greece, we find our-
selves still beneath the shadow of a national church, which
holds in its keeping the consciences of its members, and wields
the civil sword for the suppression of heresy. The labor of the
missionary is still a struggle for religious freedom, and the
hopes of the Christian philanthropist are even more thickly
clouded with apprehension and doubt. We are in the land of
old renown, decked with the monuments of art, and covered
with sepulchres of the mighty dead, – the land in which the
doctrines of the Cross were early preached by apostles and
fathers, yet where genius and letters have become nearly extinct,
and where Christianity has been corrupted by vain traditions
and idolatrous superstitions. The emblems of the faith which
was preached with apostolic fervor in its ancient cities still re-
main, but the faith itself has died away—the temples of Chris-
300 Mission IN GREECE.
tian worship still stand on their original sites, but the candle-
stick has been removed from their altars, and their light has
been extinguished for ages.
Modern Greece is now divided into two separate States, the
independent kingdom of Greece, and the Ionian Republic which
embraces the islands of the Ionian sea, and is attached by a
kind of colonial relationship to the British empire. The former
is governed by a constitutional monarchy, and the latter is a de-
pendent sovereignty, of which the head is a Lord High Com-
missioner appointed by Great Britain.
The mission in Greece was commenced in 1836 by the ap-
pointment of Messrs. Cephas Pasco and Horace T. Love as
missionaries to that country. They were ordained in Septem-
ber, and in the following month they sailed from Boston for
Patras, where they arrived in December of the same year.
The instructions which they received from the Board left to
their own selection the place at which the operations of the
mission should be commenced. They first fixed their residence
at Patras, a town of considerable importance in the kingdom
of Greece, situated at the northern extremity of the Pelopon-
nesus, and containing about seven thousand inhabitants. Their
first work was to acquire the language, and to inform them-
selves concerning the opportunities for propagating the gospel
in the country to which they had come. While thus engaged,
on finding that there were in Patras but two schools, and those
designed exclusively for boys, they made application to the gov-
ernment for leave to open a school for both sexes, which, under
certain restrictions, was readily granted. The school was
opened in May, 1837, and soon contained forty scholars. In
addition to the instruction of their pupils and the study of the
language, the missionaries found means to circulate copies of
the Scriptures and religious tracts among the people. These
were readily furnished in great numbers by the missionaries of
the American Board who were stationed near them; and,
though they were required to report to the government a list
GREEK CHURCH AND THE SCRIPTURES. 301
of the works thus circulated, they yet contrived to scatter them
widely abroad through the town and the adjacent country.*
The Greek church, though tenacious of her ancient ortho-
doxy, her numerous Sacraments, and her apostolical priesthood,
yet wholly refuses to give to her members the Scriptures in a
tongue which they can read. The only versions of the Bible
which she sanctions are in the language of a former age, and
the only prayers which she admits in her ritual are unintelligi-
ble save to the learned few. The Scriptures had been trans-
lated into modern Greek by several different hands, but their
circulation had been exceedingly restricted, and the attempts
which the newly-arrived missionaries now made to extend it
were sure to awaken the jealousy of the rulers of the church.
The Holy Synod early manifested its opposition, and the Patri-
arch at length issued a decree prohibiting the reading of the
new Scriptures, and commanding that copies of them should be
burned wherever they were found. The decree, however, was
but little regarded. A few priests attempted to execute it, but
the attempt excited universal indignation, and served only to
stimulate the curiosity of the people to read for themselves.
In the autumn of 1838 the missionaries had acquired the
language, but had not yet decided upon a place in which the
mission should be permanently planted. Mr. Love made a tour
of observation to different cities in Greece, Turkey, and the
Ionian Republic, and obtained important information concern-
ing the respective advantages of these several districts. It was
at length determined that one of the missionaries should repair
to Zante, one of the Ionian Islands, and that the other should
remain at Patras. Meanwhile, notwithstanding the opposition
# The copies of the Scriptures which were circulated by the missionaries
were subsequently furnished by the American Bible Society, and the tracts
by the American Tract Society. The appropriations of the Tract Society for
the supply of the various missions amount in all to $55,880.
The missions have also received valuable aid from the American Sunday
School Union and the American Baptist Publication Society, whose publica-
tions have been furnished in great numbers for the use of the missionaries.
27
302 MISSION IN GREECE.
!
of the ecclesiastical authorities, the distribution of the Scriptures
in modern Greek was vigorously prosecuted, and the missiona-
ries had the satisfaction of seeing the New Testament introduced
as a reading book into the schools of the town, and of daily re-
ceiving requests from distant places for copies of the Scriptures,
or of religious books. These were generally sold, instead of
being given away, and were undoubtedly on this account more
valued by those who received them. The number of copies of
the Greek Bible thus circulated in the year was one thousand
of the Old Testament, and fifteen hundred of the New, besides
many in other languages than the Greek.
In July, 1839, Mrs. Harriet E. Dickson was appointed a
teacher in the mission, and came to reside at Patras. She was
a Scottish lady of education, who with her husband, now de-
ceased, had been connected with the government school in the
island of Corfu. She was familiar with the language of the
country, and prepared immediately to enter upon the duties of
her new station. In the autumn of the same year Mr. Pasco,
finding his constitution enfeebled by the climate of the country,
was obliged to return with his family to the United States. In
consequence of his departure the design of planting a branch
of the mission at Zante was of necessity abandoned.
The prospects of the station at Patras were now deemed
highly encouraging. The views of the gospel which had been
put forth by the missionaries, though strongly opposed, were
evidently gaining ground and making an obvious impression
upon the popular mind. The climate of the place, however,
was unhealthy, and was proving specially deleterious to the
constitution of Mr. Love. For many months he was obliged to
suspend his labors, and after repeated trials he became satisfied
that he could not safely resume them at Patras. Accordingly,
in April, 1840, he removed with his family to the island of
Corfu, which soon became the principal seat of the mission.
This island is the capital of the Ionian Republic, and contains a
population of about twenty-five-thousand, embracing along with
Greeks nearly ten thousand Italians, English, and Jews.
TUMULT AT CORFU. 303
The health of the missionary, though better than at Patras,
was still inadequate to the labors of his station, and he was able
for some time to do little more than preach to an English con-
gregation, and direct the work of a Greek assistant who had
become attached to the mission. In August, 1840, he adminis-
tered for the first time the ordinance of baptism to a Greek
convert. The spectacle arrested the attention of the people,
and was spoken of throughout the island; for the rite was per-
formed in the mode which has always been adhered to in the
Greek church. The subject of this baptism had long been
associated with the missionaries, and by them had been thor-
oughly instructed in the doctrines of Christianity. His name
was Apostolos. He was appointed to resume the station at Pa-
tras, where he labored among his countrymen for many years
with commendable assiduity and Christian zeal. The mission,
though occupying two separate stations, was yet sadly weakened
by the sickness and departure of its members; but in the sum-
mer of 1841 its prospects were for a time brightened by the
arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Buel as missionaries, and the return of
Mrs. Dickson, who had been absent for a year with her friends
in Scotland. --5
The missionaries were prosecuting their accustomed labors
with many encouraging indications, – the ladies as teachers of
the schools, and Messrs. Love and Buel as preachers, the former
in Greek and the latter in English, – when an event occurred
which spread alarm and confusion through the mission, and for
a time proved a serious interruption to its operations. It was
on the day preceding Christmas in 1841 — the feast of St.
Speridion—the greatest religious festival of the year. Mr.
Buel, as was his custom in his walks through the town, had
taken with him a bundle of tracts, and on approaching the
church dedicated to the saint began to distribute them among
the crowd that was there assembled. The anger of the multi-
tude seems to have been excited by some unexplained incidents,
which, acting upon the fiery temperament of the Greeks, imme-
diately impelled them to insult him with opprobrious words and
304 MISSION IN GREECE.
at length to assault him with open violence. He fled for refuge
to his own house, whither he was followed by the mob, who
broke into the house, smashed the windows and doors, and
destroyed in their fury the Bibles, tracts, and books of every
description which they found within. Mr. Buel and the ladies
of the mission were rescued from the imminent perils to which
they were exposed by the timely arrival of an officer from the
British garrison, who, at the head of his troops, conducted them
in safety to the citadel. The affair led to still more painful
consequences; for a few days afterwards, in the midst of the
excited feeling still subsisting between the Greeks and English,
a collision took place between some soldiers and the populace,
which was not ended without the sacrifice of several lives.
On inquiring into the occasion of the original tumult it
was found that it had been reported that Mr. Buel had dis-
tributed tracts against the favorite Saint Speridion, and had
also charged the people with idolatry in assembling to worship
his image. The report, however, was proved to be entirely
false, and the missionary was fully exculpated by the Lord High
Commissioner and other British officers who were conversant
with the affair. But the excited feeling of the Greeks was still
very strong, and it was deemed prudent that Mr. Buel should
withdraw from Corfu. He accordingly took passage in a vessel
kindly provided for him by the commissioner, and sailed first
to Patras and afterwards to Malta, where he continued to reside
with his family for nearly two years.
The hostility of the people of Corfu seems not to have ex-
tended to the other members of the mission, and they were soon
able to resume their accustomed labors. Mr. Love had for some
time been engaged in the preparation of tracts, and the transla-
tion of books for schools and for popular reading. He had also
obtained permission from the Commissioner of Instruction for
the Ionian islands, to furnish copies of the Scriptures and other
valuable works, for the use of the schools of the republic. A
similar undertaking was commenced by him during his resi-
dence at Patras, for the schools of the kingdom of Greece, and
POLITICAL ExCITEMENTS IN GREECE. 305
it was now resumed, and successfully carried forward by Apos-
tolos, who devoted himself, in his new station, to the improve-
ment of his countrymen. He was also assiduous in preaching
the gospel, and several Greeks who attended his instructions,
seemed to be converted to the faith which he taught. Two
of them, John and Kyriakes, who had for several months given
evidence of genuine piety, repaired to Corfu in order to be bap-
tized by Mr. Love, who was preparing to leave the country on
account of his declining health. They were baptized by the
missionary on the 4th of December, 1842, and on the following
day started with Apostolos on their return to Patras. Some
injurious suspicions, however, having been excited concerning
them and the object of their visit to Corfu, they were assailed
on their arrival by the rabble, who followed them to their
houses, shouting “Away with the pharmasonael (free masons).
Away with the antichrists!” On the following day the mob
again collected near their dwellings, threatening them with vio-
lence, and charging Apostolos with turning the people into
Americans, and breaking down their religion. They were pro-
tected by the police, but deemed it prudent to withdraw for a
time from Patras, and the mission there was in consequence
entirely broken up. Apostolos took passage to Piraeus and
Athens, where he immediately commenced such labors as his
own circumstances and the political excitements which then
existed in the kingdom would permit.
The baptism at Corfu was the last missionary service which
Mr. Love was able to perform in Greece. His health had long
been declining, and he had already made arrangements to re-
turn to the United States. He sailed a few days afterwards,
and arrived at New York early in the spring of 1843; and after
waiting for upwards of two years, in the hope of a restoration
of health and a return to Greece, he at length reluctantly with-
drew from the service of the Board. -
The kingdom of Greece, long distracted by violent parties,
was now on the eve of a revolution, the object of which was to
secure from the king a new constitution and the guaranty of
27* g
306 MISSION IN GREECE.
certain rights which had hitherto remained unsettled. The
revolution was effected in September, 1843, and the new con-
stitution which was established was deemed by the friends of
the mission to be favorable to the interests of religious freedom.
Its first article, however, while it freely grants toleration to the
rites of every kind of worship, expressly forbids “proselytism
and every other interference with the prevailing religion,” — a
provision which virtually annuls that which precedes it, and
indirectly clothes the magistrate with almost unlimited authority
to repress every attempt to introduce a purer faith. Soon after
its promulgation Mr. Buel, who had long been at Malta wait-
ing the progress of events, removed with his family to Piraeus
and Athens, where Apostolos, who now returned to private pur-
suits, had been residing for several months. His labors for the
first six months of his residence here were devoted to the pre-
paration of several works for schools and for popular reading,
and especially to the revision of a translation which had already
been made of the abridgment of “Wayland's Elements of Moral
Science,”— a work undertaken some years before, at the sugges-
tion of Mr. Love, by Dr. Maniakes, a distinguished Greek
scholar and a friend of the mission. The revision being com-
pleted, an edition of two thousand copies was published early in
the following year.” This valuable treatise on the principles
of ethics, which had already been widely circulated in this
country, was received with unexpected favor in Greece, not
only by friends of the mission, but by scholars, professors in the
university and teachers, and even by many of the ecclesiastics
themselves. In addition to the use made of it by the missiona-
ries, it has since been introduced into many of the gymnasia
and Hellenic schools both in Greece Proper and in the Ionian
Republic, and read by many of the educated men of the country.
Other works—the publications of the American Tract Society
or of the Sunday School Union — were also translated and
published under the direction of Mr. Buel and several attempts
* The expenses of the edition were defrayed by a special contribution.
-*
STATION AT corru. 307
were made to have an improved version of the Scriptures pre-
pared for general circulation.*
The station at Corfu after the departure of Mr. and Mrs. Love
was occupied alone by Mrs. Dickson, who still maintained the
school of which she had been for some time in charge. In Feb-
ruary, 1844, she was joined by Rev. A. N. Arnold, Mrs. Ar-
nold and Miss S. E. Waldo, who had been appointed mission-
aries in the preceding autumn. The ladies immediately engaged
with Mrs. Dickson in the charge of the school, and soon after in !
some of the government schools of the island, and Mr. Arnold,
while pursuing the study of modern Greek, commenced preach-
ing in English to a congregation composed principally of soldiers
belonging to the garrison. His labors here were attended with
valuable and encouraging results; in the course of the summer
after they were commenced, he baptized three members of one
of the regiments, and, at a later period, others received the same
sacred ordinance. Rev. Mr. Lowndes, who had long resided at
Corfu as the agent of several philanthropic societies in Eng-
land, and who had also been connected with the commission for
public instruction in the republic, at this time removed to Athens,
and many of the philanthropic labors and offices which he thus
left were assumed by Mr. Arnold. He was also soon able to
commence a meeting for reading the Scriptures in Greek, which
he designed should at length grow into a regular service of
preaching and public worship in the same language. In accom-
plishing this, however, he was subjected to delays, and encount-
ered hinderances which he did not anticipate, and was obliged
still longer to confine himself to preaching in English, and to
such incidental labors for the promotion of the gospel as he was
enabled to perform. The mission, considered with reference to
its original design of benefiting the Greeks, seemed now almost
at a stand, and the troubled affairs and threatened changes of
the country raised many doubts in the minds of its friends re-
specting the desirableness of its continuance.
# The version of Professor Bambas Mr. Buel hoped to induce the author to
amend in some essential points.
308 - Mission IN GREECE.
In these circumstances, united as they were with the then em-
barrassed condition of the treasury, the Board at its meeting in
Providence, in May, 1845, adopted a resolution authorizing
the acting Board to discontinue the mission so soon as it might
seem to them expedient. In the correspondence, however,
which was opened with the missionaries upon the subject, neither
Mr. Arnold nor Mr. Buel was willing to advise the extinction
of the mission; the former, though regarding Corfu as an un-
favorable station for exerting an influence upon the Greeks,
was yet of the opinion that the people were accessible to the
preacher of the gospel, while the latter, at Athens and Piraeus,
found many arguments for its continuance in the results which
he witnessed around him, and in the prospects which seemed to
be opening before him. It was accordingly determined to give
the missionaries, agreeably to their own solicitation, the opportu-
nity of making a still further trial before the question should be
finally decided.
In this uncertain condition, with the question of its future
policy and even of its permanent existence still unsettled, the
mission has continued to the present time, passing through the
ordinary vicissitudes incident to its situation. The labors of
the missionaries have been prosecuted with unremitted zeal,
and have produced many valuable results; yet the hopes
which were entertained alike by them and by the managers at
home have been but partially realized. In the autumn of 1846
Mr. Arnold commenced preaching in Greek to a small congre-
gation, which has usually embraced from thirty to forty hearers.
The English services have also been continued; but in the
changes which are constantly occurring among the English
population of Corfu, and especially among the soldiers of the
garrison, the congregation has often been greatly reduced.
The missionary school, however, under the charge of Mrs.
Dickson, has constantly prospered. It has been well attended
and has received many tokens of interest from individuals and
Societies, both in this country and Great Britain, especially from
a society of ladies in Edinburg. The mixed population of
**.
THE KINGDOM OF GREECE. 309
Corfu, the dependent condition of the Ionian Republic, and the
separation which is slowly going on between it and the kingdom
of Greece, combine to render the mission there comparatively
powerless over the Greek population. Many incidental results
of considerable importance it no doubt accomplishes and will
continue to accomplish; but the great objects had in view in its
establishment can never be reached by any agencies, however
judicious or well directed, that have their origin in the Ionian
Republic, and especially in Corfu.
If from the republic we turn to the kingdom of Greece we
find the mission in many respects more advantageously situated.
It is there planted among a homogeneous people, who have a
far stronger feeling of nationality, who boast their independence
of every foreign power, and who have a press, a literature, and
civil institutions all their own. The kingdom too comprises
most of the spots celebrated in the history alike of ancient and
of modern Greece, and the cities which have exerted the con-
trolling sway over the Grecian people from the days of De-
mosthenes and Pericles. Hence it is that every question
which is raised and every enterprise which is undertaken here
assumes an importance and awakens an interest which it could
not possess if it originated in either of the seven islands. There
is however, it must be admitted, one obstacle to be encountered
which does not exist to the same extent in the republic. This
is found in the ecclesiastical establishment of the country, -
styled in the constitution of 1843, the Eastern Orthodox Church
of Christ. In a country in which the church controls the civil
power, religious freedom, however guarantied in the words of
the constitution, can exist only in name; and the treatment
which both our own and other American missionaries have
experienced in Greece plainly shows the readiness with which
the government lends itself to the priesthood in suppressing the
Protestant faith according to the forms of law.
The legalized persecutions which were visited upon Rev. Dr.
King, a missionary of the American Board of Commissioners
at Athens, have awakened the sympathy and the indignation
310 MISSION IN GREECEes
of the Protestant world, and have well-nigh broken up the mis-
sion with which he was connected. Our own mission at Pi-
raeus was in the autumn of 1847 threatened with a similar fate.
Mrs. Buel and Miss Waldo had been teaching a small school in
that city, while Mr. Buel, in connection with other labors, had
held a meeting in his own house on the Sabbath, at which he
sometimés preached and always gave instructions in the Bible.
These meetings the priests and magistrates determined to
suppress, and the Demarch of Piraeus sent to Mr. Buel an or-
der requiring him to dismiss “the school illegally kept in his
house,” on pain of the penalty provided in the penal code for
teaching without a license. The order was complied with and
the school was dismissed, but the Bible class and the religious
teaching on Sunday, the object at which the order was aimed,
went on as usual. A few weeks afterwards he was summoned
to appear before the Court of Magistrates of Piraeus and an-
swer to the charge of having “assumed teachers’ duties without
the requisite permission, of having collected children of citizens
on feast-days and Sundays and taught them the sacred Scrip-
tures, and of having supplied them with books on affairs con-
templated in article 530 of the penal code.” The question
was whether the Sunday exercises were an assumption of teach-
ers’ duties, and the obvious intention of the prosecution was to
suppress the Protestant faith as held and expounded by Mr.
Buel. The Court at Piraeus decided that he had violated the
law, and imposed on him a fine of fifty drachmas, which, how-
ever, was the smallest sum allowed by the statute relating to
the offence. The case was immediately carried to a higher
tribunal, and was ably argued before the Court of Appeals at
Athens on two separate grounds, – first, that the act alleged was
not satisfactorily proved, and second, that even if it were prov-
ed it was not a violation of the article of the penal code. The
decision of the Court was made to rest wholly upon the first
ground, and upon this alone they reversed the sentence of the
Court below, and acquitted the missionary of the charge which
had been brought against him,- a result which was deemed
GENERAL ASPECT of THE MISSION. 311
both by him and his opponents a triumphant vindication of the
rights which he had maintained.
By this decision of the Court at Athens the mission was
saved from the extinction which threatened it in the kingdom
of Greece. Its progress since that period has not been marked
by important incidents, and the religious teachings of Mr. Buel
have continued without interruption from the magistrates,
though they have been attended by but few of the Greeks.
The school at Piraeus has not been resumed, and Miss Waldo
returned to Corfu, where she was associated with Mrs. Dickson
until August, 1848, when she went to reside in Zante.*
The work of preaching in Greek requires long preparation
and great familiarity with the language. Without this the dis-
course of a foreigner becomes offensive to the ear of a people so
wedded to harmony as the Greeks have always been. From
this cause public preaching was but lately commenced by the
present members of the mission; and since its commencement it
has of necessity been exceedingly limited at each of the sta-
tions, from the fact that but few have been disposed to join the
congregations which assembled for the purpose. It is on this
account, probably, that the mission has accomplished so few vis-
ible results. In other and minor departments of labor it has
been less restricted, and has undoubtedly performed an impor-
tant part in effecting the changes of opinion and feeling which
have been gradually taking place in Greece. Its schools have
been well attended, the books which it has introduced into the
country have been suited to the wants of the people, and the
copies of the Old and New Testament which it has scattered in
the cities and villages, both of the kingdom and the republic,
cannot fail to accomplish valuable results. The spirit of popu-
lar freedom which has manifested itself in the revolutions of
Western Europe has reached the shores of Greece, — those
storied shores which were once its chosen dwelling-place. It is
* Miss Waldo was at this time married to Mr. York, a resident of the island
of Zante.
312 MISSION IN GREECE.
evidently liberalizing the sentiments of the people, and, we may
hope, gradually undermining the despotism of the Greek church,
which has hitherto opposed the most formidable barriers to the
spread of evangelical truth. The missionaries, though gather-
ing but few fruits of their labors even in fields which have giv-
en the most abundant promise, are not discouraged. They now
ask of the Board to be permitted still to continue their stations,
and, amid the new influences which are beginning to prevail in
Greece, still to toil on for the spiritual elevation of a race whose
ancient sires were the early teachers of mankind.
MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
C HAP T E R XXIII.
GENERAL View of these Missions. – Earliest Missionaries to the Indians. –
Appointment of Rev. Isaac McCoy. — Station at Carey for the Putawato-
mies: at Thomas for the Ottawas. – Changes in these Tribes. – Care of the
Government of the United States for the Indian Race.— Mission among
the Ojibwas: its Progress and Results. – Mission among the Indians of
New York. — Commencement of the Mission among the Cherokees. –
Appointment of Messrs. Posey and Jones. – Stations at Valley Towns and
at Tinsawattee. — Civilization of the Cherokees: Emigration of a part of
them beyond the Mississippi. — Mission among the Creeks: their Emigra-
tion. —-Continuance and Close of the Creek Mission.
THE missions of the Convention among the Indians of North
America have been widely scattered over the extended territo-
ries that were but lately held in undisputed possession by these
sons of the forest. To describe them in full and to narrate the
progress of each of their several stations, with the results which
they have accomplished, would require a volume by itself. In
the few remaining pages of this general narrative it is possible
to present only a brief sketch of their origin and their most
important changes, without entering upon the details of their
history or attempting to discuss the questions connected with
their progress and destiny. For this purpose they may be
grouped in two distinct classes, – the first embracing the mis-
sions which have been planted among the tribes scattered along
the northern and western frontiers of the United States, from
New York to Wisconsin; and the second embracing those which
were established in the south among the Indians of North Car-
olina, Georgia and Alabama. In the changes which have taken
28
314 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANs of North AMERICA.
place in the fortunes of the aboriginal race most of the missions
of both these classes, within a recent period, have been brought
together in the territory west of the Mississippi, which is now
the only exclusive home of these reduced and subjugated tribes.
At the first triennial meeting of the Convention, which was
held at Philadelphia in 1817, the original constitution was
amended sô as to enable the Board to appropriate a part of
their funds to the purposes of domestic missions. At the same
meeting also several communications were presented concerning
the condition and wants of the Indians in the Southern and
Western States and Territories. In pursuance of the authority
granted them in the new provisions of the constitution, the Board
immediately appointed Messrs. John M. Peck and James E.
Welch as domestic missionaries, and stationed them at St. Louis,
directing them to preach to the destitute population of that re-
gion, and also to neglect no opportunity to promote the benefit
of the Indians of the West. At nearly the same time Rev.
James A. Ranaldson of New Orleans was appointed to visit
certain southern tribes that dwelt near that city, and to establish
Schools and religious worship for their benefit. These mission-
aries however soon found themselves entirely occupied with
preaching in the destitute American settlements that belonged
to their respective districts, and were on this account able to
execute the instructions of the Board relating to the Indians
only in the most imperfect manner.
In the autumn of 1817 Rev. Isaac McCoy received his
appointment from the Board as their first missionary exclusively
to the Indian race. He had been conversant with the habits
and modes of life of the American aborigines, and had often
had occasion to observe their character and condition, especially
among the tribes of the North and the West. In accordance
with the instructions he received, he repaired early in the fol-
lowing spring to Fort Wayne, on the banks of the Wabash, in
Indiana, – at that time one of the farthest outposts of western
civilization. In the unbroken prairies which then stretched
around this solitary fortress dwelt the several tribes of Miamies,
OTTAWAS OF MICEIIGAN. 315
Kickapoos, Putawatomies, and Ottawas, – speaking substan-
tially a common language, and presenting alike the same aspect
of unmitigated barbarism. He found the Indians full of prejudi-
ces against white men, and entirely averse to their religion, their
customs and all their modes of life. He was obliged to concil-
iate their good will and secure their confidence by slow and
careful steps; but by the end of the year he had so far suc-
ceeded as to obtain nine or ten native children to be boarded
and instructed in his family. The school which was thus com-
menced gradually increased till in 1820 it contained forty-eight
pupils, and had become instrumental in establishing numerous
friendly relations between the missionary and the chiefs and
leading men of the tribes.
In consequence of the changes that took place in the condi-
tion of these tribes after the treaty of Chicago, in 1821, it
became necessary to move the station two hundred miles west-
ward, to the banks of the St. Josephs, upon the borders of
Michigan. The removal was accomplished in the autumn of
1822, with much difficulty across the then untravelled wilderness,
and the new station, situated a hundred miles from the nearest
settlement of white men, received the name of Carey, in honor
of the distinguished missionary at Serampore. Two assistants
were at this time added to the mission, and the school soon be-
came the centre of a little community in which agriculture and
the arts of civilization were beginning to be practiced, and the
influences of Christianity to be deeply felt. The church which
had been formed in the mission family at Fort Wayne now
embraced thirty or forty members, many of whom were Indians,
and its exercises of public worship on the Sabbath often attract-
ed large companies of natives from the adjacent settlements.
These results however were confined almost exclusively to the
Putawatomies.
The Ottawas occupied a district farther north, and had hith-
erto steadily opposed the establishment of a mission among
them. Mr. McCoy, and Mr. Polk, another member of the sta-
tion at Carey, however, had made several visits to them, and at
316 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS IN NORTH AMERICA.
length received from them two pupils for the school, and a re-
quest from their chief, Noonday, that a missionary might be sent
to their settlements near the Grand river. The chief offered
to give a tract of six or seven hundred acres of land to the
mission, in case one could be established among his people.
The misssionaries, thus invited, determined to commence a
small station on the Grand river, which they were in turn
occasionally to visit and superintend until some one could be ap-
pointed by the Board to take it in charge. The decision was
hailed with joy by the chiefs and people of the Ottawas, who
seem suddenly to have laid aside their prejudices and to have
conceived a strong desire for instruction. This second station
was called Thomas, also in honor of an English missionary in
the East. It was conducted for upwards of a year by the mem-
bers of the mission at Carey, when, in the autumn of 1826, on
the arrival of additional missionaries, Mr. McCoy temporarily
removed his family and some of the assistants to Thomas, and
immediately commenced a school and other agencies for the in-
struction and improvement of the natives. In the following
summer he returned to Carey, and the new station was placed
under the permanent charge of Rev. Leonard Slater, and one
or two assistants who had been associated with Mr. McCoy.
But notwithstanding the favorable auspices with which the
mission at Carey was commenced, it soon reached a stationary
condition. The Putawatomies were wretchedly poor, and as
the white settlements were every year encroaching upon their
territory, they were constantly exposed, in common with most
of the neighboring tribes, to the corrupting influences exerted
upon them by unprincipled traders and settlers. Their lands
were at length ceded to the United States, with the exception
of a tract ten miles square, which lay around the mission settle-
ment. Confined within this narrow domain, and with the pros-
pect before them of a distant removal even from their present
possessions, they evinced less disposition to adopt habits of in-
dustry or to learn the arts of civilized life. In these circum-
stances, most of the missionaries in 1829 withdrew from the
oTTA was OF MICHIGAN. 317
station at Carey and settled at Thomas, leaving, however, Rev.
Mr. Simerwell, one of their number, to conduct the school and
to preach to the church among the Putawatomies.
Among the Ottawas the prospect was for a long time more
encouraging. Their chiefs were persons of higher intelligence,
and, what was of greater importance, they were further remov-
ed from the settlements of white men, and on this account less
exposed to evil influences and more likely to retain the lands
which they occupied. In the summer of 1830 the station com-
prised five missionaries, a superintendent of the farm and six
female assistants, all of whom were engaged in the work of in-
structing the Indians who were settled around them in the
doctrines of Christianity and in the rudiments of useful knowl-
edge. Such, however, was the organization of the settlement
at this time, that far too little was done for bringing its mem-
bers under immediate religious influence, and there was danger
of its coming to be regarded by the natives merely as a civil
community, in which they were to learn only the arts of social
life. This impression the missionaries soon took pains to re-
move, and began to make the instructions of the school, the
services of the Sabbath, and the daily religious worship more
serious and earnest; and as some of them were now masters of
the language, they were able to appeal more directly to the
consciences of those whom they taught. These measures were
productive of beneficial results. The truths of the gospel en-
tered into the minds of the Indians, and their characters began
perceptibly to improve, and in 1832 several of them gave evi
dence of Christian faith and were received into the church by
baptism. Among these earliest converts was Noonday, the
chief who had first invited the missionaries to his tribe. The
influence which he afterwards exerted over his people was in
every way salutary, and such as became a Christian chief. He
persuaded them to industry, temperance, and the observance of
the Sabbath, and united a large number of them in an associa-
tion for preventing the sale of whiskey and for promoting the
morals of the settlements.
28*
318 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANs of NORTH AMERICA.
From this period every year witnessed some improvement
in the social condition of the tribe, and some accessions to the
church. Several new missionaries were added to the station,
new schools were opened, and eight promising Indian youths
were sent to the academy at Hamilton, N. Y., in order to re-
ceive a fuller education than could be furnished them at the
mission. But the rapid extension of the white population soon
began to check these improvements, and to subject the Ottawas
to the annoyances and pernicious influences beneath which the
neighboring tribes had long been slowly wasting away. A
large portion of their territory near Grand river was already
covered with English settlements, and in 1836 its jurisdiction
was ceded to the United States, and the mission was removed,
with the Indians who were connected with it, to Richland, about
fifty miles south of Thomas. Here, through many changes,
Mr. Slater has since continued to reside. The larger portion
of the Ottawas long ago removed from the territory of Michi-
gan; but a small settlement still remains, in the midst of which
the missionary has been engaged in his often wearisome and
discouraging efforts for the benefit of this now wasted and well-
nigh exterminated people.
The condition and destiny of the Indian race within the ter-
ritories of the United States early engaged the attention of the
government, and though it has at different periods assumed obli-
gations which it subsequently failed to fulfil, yet there never
has been a period in which either the Congress or the Executive
of the republic could be justly charged with indifference to the
fate of these ancient occupants of the continent. Different plans
were recommended to Congress by successive Presidents, and
various schemes for their improvement were devised and advo-
cated by philanthropic citizens in different parts of the country.
In most of the treaties which were made with their several
tribes large sums of money were granted them for the support
of schools, and for their improvement in agriculture and the
useful arts, and in the year 1819 a bill passed both houses of
Congress, placing at the disposal of the President an annual
THE OJIBWAS, 319
º
appropriation of $10,000 for their instruction and civilization.
For several years preceding the moneys which were appropriat-
ed by the government for the benefit of particular tribes had
been disbursed mainly through the agency of the various Mission-
ary Boards of the country, and it was now decided by the Presi-
dent that the funds derived from the new appropriation should be
expended in the same manner. The stations at Carey and at
Thomas had from the beginning been nearly supported by sums
paid for this purpose to the Putawatomies and the Ottawas, and
in 1825 the Board began to receive a portion of the annual ap-
propriation, which, varying with the amount of service rendered,
has been regularly continued to the present time. The sums
which have been thus received from the government of the
United States amount in all to $104,684, and have constituted
an important aid in supporting the mission schools among the
Indian tribes.
In accordance with what had become the settled policy of the
government, the Board was invited by the President to accept
the disbursement of funds which were designed for the benefit
of the Ojibwas, a tribe numbering about four thousand, and scat-
tered over a wide territory including part of what is now the
State of Michigan. They accepted the trust, and in 1828 ap-
pointed Rev. Abel Bingham to establish a mission at Sault de
Ste. Marie, an ancient French settlement situated about fifteen
miles southeast of Lake Superior, and at that time one of the
principal trading places of the Ojibwas. A school was com-
menced with fifty scholars, and Mr. Bingham immediately began
to preach in English to the soldiers of the neighboring garrison,
and also, with the aid of an interpreter, to the Indians of the
settlement. Several female assistants were soon added to the
mission, suitable houses were erected for the accommodation of
the family and the boarding-school, and a temperance society
was formed which received the countenance of the officers of
the garrison and of the white population of the town. In No-
vember, 1830, a church was constituted, and two persons were
baptized; the Sabbath school increased in the number of its
320 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
members, and enlisted the active interest of several pious ladies
who then resided at the fort. The influence of these agencies
and of the faithful preaching of the gospel soon began to be felt in
both the English and the Indian congregations. Several indi-
viduals in each became decided and active Christians, and a
higher morality spread itself over the face of society, showing
itself in the better observance of the Sabbath and in the almost
universal practice of temperance. º -
Early in 1832 the attention of the people was specially in-
vited to their religious obligations in a series of public meetings,
in which the Presbyterian missionaries also participated. The
blessing of Heaven was bestowed upon these endeavors, and a
deep and general seriousness pervaded alike the settlement and
the garrison. Forty persons were baptized and added to Mr.
Bingham's church, of whom eleven were Indians, and a large
portion of the others were officers and soldiers of the regiment.
Among the persons who became connected with the church at
this time were Dr. Edwin James, the surgeon of the fort, Mr.
Cameron, who had been an Episcopal missionary in Canada,
and Shegud, a chief of the Ojibwas, – the two latter of whom
were subsequently assistants in the mission. Dr. James, who
had long been stationed among the Ojibwas, had at a previous
period translated the New Testament into their language, and
also prepared a spelling-book for their schools. The translation
having been carefully revised and pronounced worthy by several
persons capable of judging of its merits, was printed in 1833
under the supervision of the author at Albany. At this time
also Messrs. Meeker and Merrill, missionaries of the Board,
spent several months at Sault de Ste. Marie in such duties as
they were able to perform. They, however, soon removed, -
Mr. Merrill, with his wife and a female assistant, to the Otoes,
and Mr. and Mrs. Meeker to the station at Thomas, and after-
wards to Shawanoe, in the Indian territory west of the Missis-
Sippi. -
But this station, like those among the other tribes of the
North, soon began to experience fluctuations and reverses.
THE OJIBWAS. 321
The wandering habits of the natives, the presence of unprinci-
pled traders and the perpetual temptations arising from the sale
of whiskey, clouded the prospects of the mission almost as soon
as they opened before it. In 1833 the pious soldiers stationed
at the garrison were removed to other frontier posts, and the
school was for a time broken up and the Indian congregation
on the Sabbath greatly reduced, in consequence of the hostile
intrigues of some French Roman Catholic priests who had set-
tled in the neighborhood. Notwithstanding these adverse in-
fluences, the members of the mission still continued their labors.
The Indian school was soon resumed with nearly its former
number of pupils, and the preaching of the gospel and Bible
classes on the Sabbath were commenced among the new troops
who had arrived at the garrison. Messrs. Bingham and Cam-
eron also made frequent excursions to other native settlements,
for the purpose of awakening the interests of the people in the
objects, both spiritual and temporal, which the mission was de-
signed to accomplish, and an out-station was commenced at
Tikuamina bay, about thirty miles from St. Mary's, and placed
under the charge of Shegud, the chief who has already been
mentioned.
In May, 1837, Mr. Cameron was ordained a minister of the
gospel, and went to reside at Michipocoton, an Indian town in
Upper Canada, on the northern shores of Lake Superior, where
he remained for several months and baptized three natives who
gave satisfactory evidence of piety. His visit to this place was
repeated in the following season, and in the summer of 1839 he
removed from St. Mary’s and established himself on the north-
ern shore of the lake. The Indians whom he had baptized
were formed into a church, which, with the blessing of God
upon a regular ministry of the gospel, soon began to receive ac-
cessions, and in 1842 numbered thirty members. Mr. Cameron
had been engaged in a new translation of the Gospels into the
Ojibwa tongue, and having now completed those of Mark and
Luke, he returned to the station at St. Mary's, and the out-
station at Michipocoton has since been abandoned. In the
322 Missions AMONG THE INDIANs of NoFTH AMERICA.
retrenchments which had now become necessary the Board
seriously entertained the question of discontinuing the mission
among the Ojibwas, and in order more fully to ascertain its con-
dition and prospects, they requested the Foreign Secretary to
visit it in the autumn of 1842. The views which he submitted
to the managers on his return decided them not to relinquish it,
and it accordingly still continues, as before, under the superin-
tendence of Messrs. Bingham and Cameron. Since that period,
however, in consequence of the increase of the white population
at Sault de Ste. Marie, its importance as a station has been
gradually declining, while the station at Tikuamina Bay has
become more important; it has now a larger church, and em-
braces the greater part of the operations of the mission.
In the year 1821 the Board assumed the general care of the
mission which had several years before been established by the
Hamilton Missionary Society among the Seneca, Tuscarora
and Oneida Indians in the western and central counties of New
York. These tribes were mere remnants of what they had
formerly been ; but the first two closely resembled each other
in their language, traditions, and customs. The mission among
them was at three different stations, and though placed under
the general supervision of the Board for the purpose of secur-
ing a portion of the allowance made by the government, its
immediate management was intrusted to a committee of the
New York Baptist State Convention. In 1828, the Indians
having been reduced in number, the station among the Oneidas
was discontinued, and the other two stations were united in one
at Tonawanda, where suitable buildings were erected for the
accommodation of the school and the members of the mission.
The progress of the station has since that period presented the
same general features which mark the other missions among
the aborigines of the North. The church at Tonawanda has
varied from thirty to sixty members, and the school has usually
contained about the same number; while the natives in the
neighboring settlements, though becoming fewer with the lapse
of every year, have made a slow and fitful progress in civiliza-
THE CHEROKEES. 323
tion. In 1839 a church was established among the Tuscaro-
ras, and James Cusick, a chief of the tribe, was ordained and
placed over it as its minister. The remnant of this tribe seem
disinclined to remove from New York to the Indian territory
west of the Mississippi, and the church, numbering about thirty
members, still exists under the care of the missionary, Rev. A.
Warren ; and two schools also under his superintendence have
an average attendance of thirty-five scholars.
The missions of the Board among the Indians of the South
have been confined to the Cherokees and the Creeks in the
States of North Carolina, Georgia, and Alabama. That among
the Creeks was of short duration, while that among the Chero-
kees has been from the beginning by far the most interesting
and successful of all the missions which have been planted among
the aborigines of any portion of the continent. It was estab-
lished in 1817, at a time when the territory of the tribe em-
braced a wide tract lying on the borders of the States of North
Carolina, Georgia, and Tennessee. The Cherokees at this
period, like some other tribes of the South, had developed far
higher social capacities and energies, and had made more con-
siderable progress in civilization than any of their brethren in
the North. They had maintained an independent national ex-
istence, and had lived more widely removed from the settlements
of white men, while at the same time they had been induced to
adopt many of the customs of civilized life. Nor had they been
wholly neglected by Christian philanthropy. Early in the
present century they had been visited by Moravian mission-
aries, and a few years later by agents of the Presbyterian Synod
in Tennessee; and the schools which were thus established had
undoubtedly accomplished much for the intellectual and social
progress of the nation. They had now a regularly organized
civil government, and a code of laws fitted to the protection of
person and property, and making special provision for the educa-
tion of the young. -
In January, 1817, a mission of the American Board of Com-
missioners was commenced among the Cherokees, and in the au-
824 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
tumn of the same year Rev. Humphery Posey received his ap-
pointment as the first missionary of the Convention to the same
people. He soon repaired to their territory and established two
or three temporary schools for the instruction of children, but
during the succeeding year he was absent from them on a jour-
ney of exploration beyond the Mississippi. The mission there-
fore can hardly be said to have commenced till the spring of
1820, when Mr. Posey, with the necessary assistants, established
a station at Valley Towns, on the banks of the Hiwassee river,
just within the southern boundary of North Carolina. Eighty
acres of land were here enclosed as a mission farm, which was
supplied with stock and the necessary *.mplements of agriculture.
Buildings were erected, and a school of fifty children was soon
commenced in which instructions were daily given in the Scrip-
tures and in useful knowledge and the arts of civilized life.
In 1821 a second station was commenced at Tinsawattee, an
Indian settlement about sixty miles south of Valley Towns;
at which were settled Mr. Duncan O'Briant and his wife,
whose support was derived in part from funds appropriated by
the Sarepta Baptist Association in Georgia. In September of
the same year Rev. Thomas Roberts was appointed superin-
tendent of the mission, and several missionary teachers and
artisans were added to its stations. Preaching was commenc-
ed both at Valley Towns and Tinsawattee, and a few of the
natives soon gave evidence of having experienced its power,
while the general influence of the mission became perceptible
in the improvement of its scholars and the social progress of all
who were connected with it. -
Among the persons who had already joined the station at
Valley Towns was Mr. Evan Jones, who with Mrs. Jones had
been for several years assiduously devoted to the charge of the
schools. In 1825 he was ordained as pastor of the church
which had for some time existed at Valley Towns, and in the
same year, on the resignation of Rev. Mr. Roberts, was appoint-
ed in his place as superintendent of the mission. Under his
general oversight and care it continued to prosper, and he had
CIVILIZATION OF THE CHEROKEES. 325
the happiness of seeing several who had been pupils of the
schools, now members of the church and settled around him as
heads of Christian families, and pursuing the industry and prac-
tising the virtues of well regulated society. In 1826 the civil
organization of the nation was altered at a great council con-
vened for the purpose, a new code of laws was adopted, and
the Cherokees as a people were evincing a desire for knowl-
edge and a capacity for civilization that could not fail to en-
courage even the most despairing friends of the Indian race.
Their language had already been reduced to an alphabet by
George Guess, an uneducated native, who, without any aid,
had conceived the idea solely from what he had heard of the
“talking leaf” of the white man. Many hymns were composed
in the language, which the Cherokees committed to memory
and delighted to sing both in their own lodges and at the meet-
ings for public worship; and in 1825 the New Testament was
translated and written out according to the alphabet of Guess,
by David Brown, then deemed the best educated man in the
nation.* The National Council in 1827 procured a printing
press, and in the following year the “Cherokee Phoenix” was
published, - a weekly newspaper of respectable size and execu-
tion, printed both in Cherokee and English, at New Echota,
the capital of the nation. It was edited by Elias Boudinot, a
native who had been educated at the mission school at Cornwall,
Connecticut, and is said to have maintained a character quite
equal to the average of contemporary American newspapers.
By means of the press copies of the version of the New Tes-
tament and the hymns were multiplied for general use, and the
weekly appearance of the “Phoenix” was hailed by the nation
with gratification and pride, as an evidence of the civilization
they had attained.
In accordance with the directions of the Board the arrange-
*This translation was of course exceedingly imperfect. It has since given
place to versions executed by the missionaries of our own and of the Ameri-
can Board.
*
29
326 Missions AMoNG THE INDIANs of NoFTH AMERICA.
ments connected with the mission farm, which were at first
deemed necessary in order to enlist the interest of the Indians,
were gradually abandoned, and the missionaries began to devote
themselves more exclusively to the work of instructing the na-
tives in the truths of Christianity and leading them to repent-
ance and faith in Jesus Christ. This change in the manner of
conducting the mission was soon productive of the most benefi-
cial results. The attention of the people was directed especially
to the claims of the gospel, and in the course of the year 1829
thirty-seven Cherokees were baptized and added to the church
at Valley Towns. The religious awakening which then com-
menced spread widely through the nation. It was felt at the
stations of other missions, and continued for several years to
improve the morals and to subdue the hearts of the people.
Mr. Jones established several out-stations at which he preached
at regular intervals, often to large congregations of natives who
came together from all parts of an extended region, and who,
with the dress and appearance of civilized men, always exhibited
the utmost decorum in the services of public worship. Other
churches were thus established, and according to the report
which was made to the Board at the close of 1833, the number
of communicants connected with the mission was two hundred,
three fourths of whom had been added during the three pre-
ceding years. -
Among the Indian converts of superior intelligence and worth
who at this period became connected with the churches of the
mission, were three whose names have since become well known
as Christian ministers. These were Oganaya, Kaneeka, since
called John Wickliffe, and Jesse Bushyhead. The last men-
tioned had learned Christianity from the teachings of the Bible
alone, and apart from all other instructers had embraced the
salvation which it offers with an intelligent conviction and earn-
est faith, which, combined with his own superior understanding,
rendered him a Christian of no ordinary stamp. He was bap-
tized by a minister from Tennessee in 1830, and it was not till
he had collected a large Christian congregation at Amohee, the
THE CREERS. 327
place of his residence, that he became acquainted with the mis-
sionaries at Valley Towns. In the spring of 1833 the mission
was visited by Hon. Heman Lincoln, the Treasurer of the
General Convention, who received the most favorable impres-
sions of its condition and of the influence it was exerting upon
the social progress, the morals, and the piety of the people.
During his visit John Wickliffe and Jesse Bushyhead were
ordained to the Christian ministry, and assigned to different
posts in the service of the mission, and for many years they
subsequently devoted their best energies to the religious im-
provement of their brethren. f
The station at Tinsawattee still continued under the care of
Mr. O'Briant, who in 1829, for the sake of securing a more
central position, had removed the school to Hickory Log, about
ten miles down the Etowa river. At the two branches of this
station there were about eighty families, in which were thirty
persons who had been baptized and were members of the church.
The plan of removing beyond the Mississippi had some time
before been recommended by the government at Washington to
the Indians of the several States, and had been already adopted
by several of the tribes. In 1831 the Cherokees around Tin-
sawattee decided to remove, and invited their pastor, Mr. O’Bri-
ant, to accompany them. The arrangement was sanctioned by
the Board, and in the spring of the following year the Indians
were settled in the territory which had been assigned them just
beyond the western boundary of Arkansas. Here the mission
was reëstablished, but it did not prosper. Mr. O'Briant died in
1834, and though his place was supplied by faithful and assidu-
ous laborers, the natives constantly declined in numbers and in
civilization amidst the infelicities of an ill-selected location,
until, in 1836, the last of the missionaries who remained retired
to the mission at Shawanoe.
In connection with these stations of the Board among the
Cherokees, it is proper that a brief mention be made of the la-
bors which were also bestowed upon the neighboring tribe of
Creeks, at that time settled within the limits of Georgia and
328 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Alabama. The attention of the Convention was directed to
their condition and wants at the meeting in 1820, by a letter
from Governor Rabun of the first-mentioned State, and also
by communications from Rev. Jesse Mercer and Rev. Elijah
Mosely, proposing the immediate establishment of a mission in
the Creek nation. The proposal was received with favor, and
in 1822 Rev. Lee Compere, of South Carolina, was appointed a
missionary to labor under the supervision of a committee of two
associations of neighboring Baptist churches. But the Creeks
were far less civilized than the Cherokees, and were fully ex-
posed to influences entirely hostile to their social progress and
their reception of Christianity. Their country was overrun with
unprincipled traders, who sold to them the destroying fire-water,
and taught them all the vices with none of the virtues of civilized
men. In addition to this, their passions were constantly excited
and their prospects as a people greatly darkened by the troubled
relations now existing between them and the government of
the United States. They constantly suffered depredations from
their white neighbors, for which they knew no redress but
retaliation, and they had lately more than once sharpened the
tomahawk and raised the war-whoop to avenge the wrongs of
the nation. In these circumstances it was not to be expected
that a mission among the Creeks would be attended with high
success. A school was maintained for several years at Withing-
ton, on the borders of Alabama, and two or three of its members
and a few other Creeks gave evidence of genuine piety and
were baptized; but in 1829, on the removal of a large part of
the tribe to the western territory, the school was discontinued,
and Mr. Compere withdrew from the service of the Board.
Among the Creeks who at this time emigrated to the West
was John Davis, a pious pupil of Mr. Compere, who still cher-
ished an interest in the religious instruction of his passionate
and now distracted tribe. In 1830 he received an appointment
as a missionary of the Board, and immediately began his work
as a Christian preacher; but as he was not ordained none were
baptized and no church was formed. In 1832 Rev. David
THE CREEKS. - 329
Lewis was sent to the mission which had been thus commenced,
and was soon able to organize a church composed of members
of his own family and a few others who had been baptized in
Alabama. The preaching of Mr. Davis had been productive of
good results, and many others gave evidence of genuine piety,
and were admitted to the church by baptism. The school which
was established contained thirty pupils, and nearly three hundred
Creeks were accustomed to attend the preaching of the mission-
ary on the Sabbath. Rude log houses were built both for
religious worship and for the accommodation of the schools, and
the station received the name of Ebenezer. In the autumn of
1834 it was placed under the care of Rev. David Rollin, who
with his family and two assistants went to reside among the
Creeks. He increased the number of schools, and with the aid
of Mr. Davis, who was now ordained, established new places for
preaching and greatly enlarged the sphere of the mission. He
introduced hymns in the congregations for public worship, and
was able to induce several influential persons to learn to read
according to the system of George Guess, which was now in use
among most of the Indian tribes. In 1836 a second station had
been commenced at Canadian Creek, and the members of the
churches in the mission numbered eighty-two, a part of whom
were African slaves. The people were still without the New
Testament save in English, and Mr. Davis went to reside at
Shawanoe in order to aid Mr. Lykins in preparing a version of
the Gospel of John and other books in their own tongue.
But the Creeks were still a fierce and barbarous tribe, whose
passions were easily inflamed by the evil counsels of selfish and
unprincipled white men. Many of their leading chiefs were
hostile to the introduction of Christianity among them, and on
the arrival of a large body of new emigrants from east of the
Mississippi, the nation became distracted with tumults which
threatened the safety of the missionaries. Mr. Rollin and his
family accordingly withdrew to Shawanoe. He, however, sub-
sequently visited the churches, but the mission was effectually
broken up. Since then Rev. Messrs. Kellam and Mason have
29*
330 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
been sent to the Creeks by the Board, and, though each was able
to reside among them for a brief period as the teacher of a gov-
ernment school, yet they accomplished but little as missionaries,
and early in 1840 Mr. Mason, the last who remained, on his life
being threatened by the natives, was obliged to leave the country
The churches, however, were repeatedly visited by members of
other missions in the territory, under whose general supervision
they continued until the autumn of 1843, when Rev. Eber
Tucker, who had been a government teacher among the Choc-
taws, was appointed missionary to the Creeks. During a resi-
dence of nearly two years he baptized more than a hundred of
the tribe, and formed another church composed both of Indians
and negro slaves, which soon numbered two hundred and twenty
members. At the end of this period, however, while the pros-
pects of the mission were unusually inviting, he was obliged to
abandon it on account of the sickness of his family. It has
since been resumed, and is now continued by the Directors of
the American Indian Mission Association.
C H A P T E R XXIV.
PLAN of removing the Indians beyond the Mississippi...—Act of Congress in
1880. — Refusal of the Cherokees to remove.—Their removal by Force.—
Influence of these Events upon the Mission.—Judicious Conduct of the Mis-
sionaries.—Condition of the Mission in the Indian Territory. — Missions
among other Tribes in the Territory; their Progress and Results. – Growth
of the Mission among the Cherokees.—Their general Progress in Civiliza-
tion. — Death of Rev. Jesse Bushyhead. — Present Condition of the Cherokee
Nation. — Claims of the Indian Race. . -
IN May, 1830, Congress passed the celebrated bill authoriz-
ing the removal of the Indians then within the limits of the
United States, to the unoccupied territory beyond the Missis-
sippi. Few questions of public policy have ever excited so
deep and general an interest in the minds of the American peo-
REMOVAL OF THE INDIAN RACE. 331
ple, and none probably have given rise to more eloquent de-
bates within the halls of Congress. The gradual decay of the
Indian race in every State of the Union, and the sad but speedy
and inevitable extinction which had long been threatening them,
had for many years enlisted the warmest sympathies of philan-
thropic individuals and societies in different parts of the coun-
try. Among the various plans which had been devised for their
preservation and improvement was that of removing them, with
their own consent, to a portion of the western territory that
should be set off for the purpose and guarantied to them as
their possession forever. This plan had early been advocated
by Rev. Mr. McCoy as the one best fitted to secure them from
the destructive influences to which they were exposed in every
State east of the Mississippi. It had also been favored by the
Board and the Convention, and in the resolutions of these bodies
it had been recommended to the government of the United
States as a measure of humanity to the Indians. Successive
Presidents in their annual messages had urged the subject upon
the attention of Congress, and in 1828 an exploring party, of
which Mr. McCoy was a member, had been sent to the west-
ern territory to examine and mark out a suitable tract for the
reception of the tribes that might be willing to emigrate. In
the following year Messrs. McCoy” and Lykins were also di-
rected by the Convention to visit the territory, for the special
purpose of selecting sites for missions and schools among the
tribes that, by special treaty, were about to remove from some
of the Western States.
At this period, however, while a large number of the Indians
in the North and some in the South were favorable to a removal,
serious questions of conflicting jurisdiction had arisen between
*
* In 1830 Mr. McCoy's official connection with the Board was terminated
by his accepting an appointment from the government as Agent of Indian Af-
fairs. He however resided in the territory for many years, and was constant-
ly devoted to the welfare and improvement of the tribes. He was one of the
founders of the American Indian Mission Association in 1843, and was its first
Corresponding Secretary. He died at Louisville, Ky., in June, 1846.
332 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
the Cherokee nation and the State of Georgia, and between
other southern States and the Indians that were settled within
their limits. The Indians, and especially the Cherokees, claim-
ed to be an independent people, occupying lands which had been
repeatedly guarantied to them by solemn treaties bearing the
signature of the President of the United States. The States
on the contrary denied to them the attributes of sovereignty,
and claimed to themselves the jurisdiction of their territory, and
were proceeding to reduce it to the operation of their own laws.
The Indians threw themselves upon the protection of the na-
tional government; the States urged the independent authority
of their own legislatures. * :
In this state of affairs the act of 1830 was passed by both
Houses of Congress in spite of the opposition of a powerful mi-
nority and the petitions of multitudes of citizens. The act pro-
vided for an equitable exchange of lands with the several tribes,
for their removal at the public expense, their full indemnifica-
tion for the losses they might sustain, and for their entire sup-
port one year after their arrival in the new territory; — but it
neglected to provide for their protection in their present homes,
in case they chose to remain. In consequence of this omission
their removal became to them a measure of virtual necessity,
and its subsequent execution by the troops of the United States
often gave rise to acts of compulsion and outrage and to scenes
of innocent suffering, which the future historian will blush to
record in the annals of his country.
Many of the tribes both in the North and the South were soon
induced to accede to the terms which were offered them by the
agents of the goverment, and to remove to districts assigned
them in the new territory. The Cherokees, however, persisted
in refusing every offer, and expressed their determination to
remain upon their present reservations until compelled to aban-
don them by force. They were now to a considerable extent a
civilized people, possessing separate interests and a civil gov-
ernment of their own. They were engaged, like the citizens of
the surrounding States, in agriculture and trade. Many of them
REFUSAL OF CHEROKEES TO REMOVE. 333
had acquired considerable property, and were the owners of
large estates which, like those of their white neighbors, were
cultivated by the labor of African slaves. They had also to a
great extent abandoned the ancient superstitions of their race,
and had adopted the usages and modes of life which belong to
Christian nations. Under the teachings of missionaries of dif-
ferent Christian denominations who had long resided among
them, hundreds of them had embraced Christianity with a spir-
itual faith, and were now living in accordance with its precepts.
Their churches were thriving, and supplied with pastors from
their own people, and their children were receiving the lessons
of useful knowledge and growing up under the influence of in-
stitutions favorable to their progress and happiness.
Such was the moral and social aspect of the Cherokee nation
when, in accordance with the policy of the government, it be-
came necessary to effect their removal from the lands which
had been guarantied to their fathers as their perpetual heritage.
They were constantly harassed by the continued encroachments
of State jurisdiction, and saw their very nationality about to be
extinguished by a power which they could not resist. In these
troubled relations, both with the State of Georgia and with the
national government, their social interests were suffering a sad
decline, their industry was diminished, their schools and churches
were neglected, and their hopes and energies as a people were
well-nigh broken and destroyed. In 1835 a number of influen-
tial Cherokees, who saw the hopelessness of their condition,
formed a treaty with the Commissioner of the United States
providing for an exchange of the lands of the nation and their
removal beyond the Mississippi. The treaty, which was liberal
in its terms, was accepted by the President and confirmed by
the Senate; but on its being made known to the National Coun-
cil of the Cherokees they indignantly rejected it, disowned the
authority of the persons who made it, and reiterated their
determination not to remove until compelled by superior power.
Meanwhile the President had caused to be set apart for the
reception of the several tribes the unoccupied territory lying
334 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
west of the States of Arkansas and Missouri, and extending
six hundred miles from south to north and from three to six
hundred miles from east to west. He regarded the treaty with
the Cherokees as valid and proceeded to prepare for its execu-
tion, still hoping that the nation would comply with its terms
without the interposition of force. But in this he was disap-
pointed, and he decided to employ military array. Troops of
the United States to the number of ten thousand were gradually
collected within their territory, and an order was issued to Major
General Scott to commence the removal of the entire nation on
the 24th of May, 1838. The order was executed by the com-
manding general with the utmost regard for humanity which he
was able to secure; but the forced removal of a whole commu-
nity of sixteen thousand people over a route nearly eight hundred
miles in length could not be effected without exposing them to
immense sufferings and to numberless depredations from wicked
and lawless men. When the appointed day arrived a few fled
to the mountains to escape the arrest which awaited them; but
the greater proportion—the old and the young, sages wise in
council and warriors. brave in battle — yielded themselves up
without a struggle as prisoners to the troops, and were collected
into encampments under the guard of sentinels, in preparation
for their final march to a country which they had never beheld.
The scene was of the most affecting character, and presents a
subject on which the poet or the painter might well exercise
the loftiest genius of his art. It was a nation in captivity, —
about to be driven by force from their ancient seats, from the
fields they had learned to cultivate, and from the graves which
contained the ashes of their dead. -
Three thousand of the unhappy captives commenced their
journey in June, 1838, under the direction of agents of the
United States, and the rest of the nation, in consequence of the
petitions which they addressed to General Scott, were suffered
to remain till the following September, when, the sickly season
of Summer being past, they voluntarily removed in companies
of about a thousand each, under leaders of their own appoint-
INFLUENCE OF REMOVAL ON THE MISSION. 335
ment. Messrs. Jones and Bushyhead each had the charge of
one of these emigrant bands, and have described with touching
minuteness the incidents of their sorrowful march. The sev-
eral detachments were four or five months in reaching the place
of their destination, and on their arrival it was found that not
less than four thousand, or one fourth part of the entire nation,
had perished by the fatigues and disasters of the way. Other
tribes had preceded them to this common home of their race,
and there were now nearly a hundred thousand collected within
the territory which had been assigned to them. In this manner
was executed a measure of public policy which, though stern
and cruel in many of its features, has undoubtedly resulted in
the benefit of the Indian race. It has arrested their decline
and delayed for an indefinite period the extinction which we
dare not hope they can ever wholly escape.
We turn now to consider the influence which these events
exerted upon the progress of the mission among the Cherokees.
Fortunately for its interests its principal stations were not
within the jurisdiction of Georgia, the State which more than
any other was bent upon annihilating the independence of the
nation. The missionaries were on this account interrupted in
their labors far less than were those of the American Board, who
were stationed at Brainerd and New Echota. The Indians also
who occupied the towns in the retired valley of the Hiwassee,
where Mr. Jones and his associates resided, were less distracted
by the troubles of the period than were their brethren in other
parts of the nation. The deep religious interest which com-
menced in 1830, and which by the close of 1835 had led to the
baptism of three hundred, continued almost without interruption
through the darkest days of their adversity to the period of
their removal; and even during their dismal journey it was
scarcely abated in the detachments which contained the mem-
bers of the mission and their several churches. Their evening
encampments resounded with the voice of prayer and the song
of praise, and the secluded streams by which they rested in
their wearisome march were sometimes consecrated by the
336 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANs of North AMERICA.
baptism of new believers. Their national calamities seemed the
occasion for the more abundant display of the grace of God in
turning them to himself and in conferring upon them the bless-
ings of the gospel.
During all this trying period Mr. Jones and his associates
appear to have conducted the mission with admirable judgment
and discretion. In common with other missionaries among the
Cherokees they were often suspected of interference with the
policy of the government, and were once arrested by officers of
the United States and removed from their stations; but in the
spirit of conscious innocence they still visited their churches and
continued their labors as preachers of the gospel. The in-
fluence which they exerted was such as became them as Chris-
tian missionaries and as spiritual guides and friends of the
people; and the fidelity with which they adhered to the nation
through all its gloomy fortunes is a triumphant proof of the sin-
cerity of their zeal and the purity of their designs. They shared
the discomforts and perils of the journey, and on the arrival of
the successive detachments in their appointed district they gave
them counsel and aid in reërganizing their settlements and re-
uniting their churches. In this manner, though the social in-
terests and moral habits of the Cherokees had suffered a serious
shock from the troubled condition of their civil affairs, yet on
their arrival at their new home the labors of the mission
among them were almost immediately resumed, and soon began
to be attended with their wonted results.
At the close of the year following the settlement of the na-
tion in the western territory Mr. Jones returned to Tennessee,
where his family was still residing, and also visited the Eastern
States and the members of the Board at Boston. The accounts
which he gave of the progress of civilization and Christianity
among the Cherokees created new interest in behalf of the
mission and led to immediate measures for its enlargement.
In June, 1841, accompanied by his family he reached the In-
dian territory, and again entered upon the duties of his station,
after an absence of eighteen months. During this period the
- MISSION AT SHAWANOE. 337
churches had enjoyed great prosperity; their numbers had
been increased by the addition of upwards of two hundred, and
nearly a hundred more were baptized before the close of the
year. Additional houses of worship had been erected, and a
portion of the public money had been set apart by the National
Council as a permanent fund for the support of schools, in
which the Bible was always to be used as a book of instruction.
The people were now for the most part settled upon their own
farms, and were rapidly recovering from the evils incident to
their recent changes. Industry resumed its wonted activity,
and the wilderness began to bloom beneath the labors of their
agriculture, while other tribes seeing the comforts they enjoyed
seemed disposed to follow their example and emulate their pro-
gress in civilization.
In addition to the missions among the tribes still remaining
east of the Mississippi, there were now within the limits of the
Indian territory nine missions of the Board, at which were
stationed twenty-four missionaries and assistants together with
twelve native preachers. These were among the Shawanoes,
the Delawares, the Putawatomies, the Ottawas, the Otoes, the
Omahas, the Creeks, the Choctaws, and the Cherokees. Most
of them were of comparatively recent origin, and some were
little more than government schools under the charge of teachers
recommended by the Board, who also preached on the Sabbath
to the respective tribes among whom they were stationed. This
number was soon enlarged by additions to the Cherokee mission,
and in 1841 the missionaries and teachers who were connected
with the Shawanoes, Ottawas, Putawatomies, and Delawares—
tribes contiguous to each other—were united in a single mis-
sion, of which the principal seat was fixed at Shawanoe and a
subordinate station in each of the other tribes.
At this station there had been a printing-press since 1833, at
which the Gospel of Matthew, several school books and a hymn
book had been printed in the languages of the Shawanoes, the
Ottawas, and the Delawares. A newspaper called the “Shaw-
anoe Sun” had also for several years been edited and published
30
338 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
at the mission. Since that time the Gospel of John has been
translated and printed in Shawanoe, and a few books in Eng-
lish, which is taught in all the schools and is in common use
among the tribes. In the autumn of 1842, some distrust having
been shown by several chiefs towards the members of the mis-
sion, its operations were for a time suspended, and some of the
missionaries were threatened with violence by the Indians. Mr.
Pratt, who had charge of the press, went to reside at Stock-
bridge, where a branch of the church had been established
among the Stockbridge tribe, and of this branch he was now
ordained the pastor. At nearly the same time there arrived at
Shawanoe Rev. J. S. Bacon, a member of the Board, who had
been appointed to visit the several missions of the Indian terri-
tory. His arrival was exceedingly opportune, and his presence
and the explanations and assurances which he gave exerted the
happiest influence in allaying the excited feelings which then
prevailed in the tribe. Mr. Bacon extended his visit also to the
Cherokees, the Creeks, and the Choctaws, and to some other
tribes in which the Board have no stations, and collected many
important facts and views respecting the present condition of the
Indian race, the progress of the missions and the benefits they
are conferring. Since that period the labors of the missionaries
have gone on without interruption, and though the tribes on
which they are bestowed are gradually wasting away, yet they
have been attended with many gratifying results. Rev. Messrs.
Barker, Pratt, and Meeker, with their wives and Miss E. S.
Morse, a teacher, and three native assistants, now constitute the
resolute and hopeful band who are sustaining the interests of
civilization and Christianity at their respective stations among
the Shawanoes, the Delawares and the Ottawas.
Of the remaining missions in the Indian territory, that among
the Creeks has already been considered; that among the Choc-
taws was continued for several years under the charge of Rev.
R. D. Potts, with an occasional assistant, but amidst the em-
barrassments of the Board in 1843 it was relinquished, and
has since been taken under the care of the American Indian
PROGRESS OF CHEROKEE MISSION. 339
Mission Association. Those among the Otoes and the Omahas
have also yielded to the same necessity, and the only missions
in the territory that now remain under the care of the Board
are the Shawanoe and the Cherokee.
To the latter of these missions we now return, and trace the
progress it has made since the arrival of Mr. Jones at his sta-
tion in the summer of 1841. Though unmarked by striking
events, it is yet a progress of civilization and of Christian feel-
ing, intelligence and culture, which imparts an interest even to
the statistics in which it must be recorded, and awakens the
highest hopes for the people by whom it has been realized.
The mission has its principal seat at Cherokee, which is
three miles west of the boundary of Arkansas, and the portion
of the nation who are connected with it reside within a circuit
of forty miles on the north, the west and the south. Within
this tract there are five stations, at each of which is a church,
and an equal number of out-stations at which preaching is regu-
larly maintained. In the autumn of 1843 the mission was fur-
nished with a press and printing establishment, which added
greatly to its efficiency and its influence with the nation. It
was intrusted to the management of Mr. H. Upham, a printer
by trade; and at the same time Rev. W. P. Upham became
associated with Mr. Jones in preaching and in the care of
the churches and stations. At this press the book of Genesis
and about half the books of the New Testament have been
printed in Cherokee, together with a number of school-books,
tracts, and other religious works. A periodical, known as the
“Cherokee Messenger,” was commenced by Mr. Upham in
1844, and has since been continued by the members of the
mission. To Mr. Jones and the intelligent native assistants
whom he has employed has been assigned the work of prepar-
ing a version of the New Testament in Cherokee. It was com-
menced in 1842 and completed in 1847, and after a careful
revision is now passing through the press. The book of Gene-
sis was also translated entirely by Mr. Bushyhead. Among
the works which have been provided for the reading of the na-
340 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANs of NoFTH AMERICA.
tion is the Pilgrim's Progress; that wonderful book, which,
though written in the cell of a jail by an illiterate Baptist
preacher whom his own age knew only to persecute and despise,
has yet attained a rank among the noblest productions of liter-
ary genius, and, translated into the languages of many nations,
has taught the lessons of Christian faith to multitudes of persons
in every grade of civilization and in every condition of life —
literally to Jew and Greek, to barbarian, bond and free.
The duty of superintending the interests of the stations has
been assigned to Messrs. Jones and Upham, who also preach at
Cherokee, while the work of travelling through the territory
and preaching at the out-stations has been usually performed
by the native pastors, most of whom have been long in the ser-
vice of the mission and have proved themselves men of supe-
rior judgment and fidelity. Their labors have been signally
blessed by Him to whose cause they have been devoted.
Every year has brought with it new accessions to the band of
Christian disciples, and has witnessed their growth in the social
charities and spiritual graces which the gospel enjoins. The
churches, which on their arrival in the territory in 1839 con-
tained about five hundred members, now number more than
twelve hundred, to whose character for piety and zeal the mis-
sionaries bear the most gratifying testimony. The civil feuds
generated in the nation by the various questions connected with
their removal from Georgia have occasionally been revived,
and have sometimes impelled the rival factions to the verge of
violence. From this cause the progress of the Cherokees in
some years has been seriously checked, and passions were ex-
cited among them which threatened to bear them back to the
barbarism from which they had but lately emerged. These
feuds, however, it is hoped are now extinguished, and every
outward hinderance to their social and religious advancement is
effectually removed. To the promotion of this advancement
the National Council is earnestly and wisely devoted, as is prov-
ed by the whole course of its legislation. The school system of
the nation is far in advance of that of many of the frontier
INDIAN CIVILIZATION, 341
States of the Union, and would do no discredit even to older and
more favored portions of the country. Indeed so numerous
and elevated have the national schools now become, that several
of those formerly sustained by the mission have been discon-
tinued, and their teachers removed to other tribes.
The summer of 1845 was a sickly season among the Chero-
kees, and the month of July was marked in the history of the
mission by the death of Rev. Jesse Bushyhead, the ablest and
most successful of the native preachers, and one of the ablest
and most energetic men of the nation to which he belonged.
He was one of its earliest pioneers in civilization, and one of
the noblest exemplifications of Christian character it has ever
produced. With the interest of an intelligent patriot in its for-
tunes, he engaged earnestly in attempting to avert the troubles
which threatened it and participated in many of the most impor
tant negotiations relating to its removal beyond the Mississippi.
In 1833 he was ordained to the Christian ministry, and became
pastor of a church, – an office in which he continued to the end
of his life, a faithful preacher of righteousness to the people of
his charge. In addition to his services as a missionary he was
also appointed Chief Justice of the Cherokees after their settle-
ment in the new territory, and in this station, which he still
held at the time of his death, through many trying periods of
national affairs, he was always distinguished for his wise admin-
istration of even-handed justice. His memory will long be
cherished in the nation with the respect that is due to a high-
minded councillor and magistrate, and a faithful minister of the
gospel.
The Indian population with which our missions are now con-
nected in the several tribes does not exceed thirty thousand,
and this number is gradually diminishing in accordance with
what appears to be the destiny of their race, even in its most
favorable conditions. Of these tribes the Cherokees are un-
doubtedly the most nearly civilized. Among them the preach-
ing of the gospel has been attended with signal success; conver-
sions are as frequent as in the congregations of New England,
29*
342 MISSIONS AMONG THE INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA.
and the institutions of Christianity may be considered as already
permanently established. They need only to be furnished with
educated teachers and pastors in order to secure for themselves
the sure progress of a Christian people. When this want shall
have been supplied, even though the mission should be with-
drawn, we may anticipate for the Cherokee nation during the
remnant of their existence as a people, the continued bless-
ings of social order, of popular instruction and of Christian
worship.
The missions among the Indians of North America, though
requiring a piety and zeal as self-sacrificing and devoted, and
often prosecuted amid perils and privations as difficult to be
borne, as those which belong to any other mission, have yet, it
must be admitted, been regarded with far less interest by the
Christian public both of our own and of other denominations.
This may be in part owing to their comparative proximity, and
the seeming familiarity which we possess with their condition
and operations. They do not appeal to us from the distant
shores of ancient heathenism, and it may be on this account
that they exert less influence both upon our imagination and our
sympathies. But this want of interest must also be ascribed to
the peculiar barbarism of the Indians and their hopeless des-
tiny as a people. That they are capable of civilization and
conversion to Christianity is abundantly proved by the facts of
their history, as well as by their participation in our common
humanity; but though blessed with religion and civilization they
can never have a place among the nations of the earth. The
future opens before them no prospect of advancement—no
hopes of ultimate greatness and power. It reveals to them only
a descending pathway of decline and diminution, terminating
at last in their utter extinction as a race. This is indeed a
melancholy doom for a once mighty people, and it spreads its
sombre shadow even over the labors of the Christian missionary
for their instruction and improvement.
But even with these hopeless prospects as a people the claim
they have upon the sympathies and the philanthropy of Ameri-
A. : - CLAIMS OF THE INDIAN RACE. 343
can Christians is, if possible, stronger than that of any other
portion of mankind. It is for us that their heritage has been
despoiled and they have been scattered and wasted, and it is
to us that Providence has assigned the broad domain which
they lately held by the undisputed possession of centuries. We
are daily treading amid the graves of their dead, and are occupy-
ing the ancient homes where they once dwelt in barbarian
pride and power. Every wave of our population that rolls
westward must diminish their territory and hasten their extinc-
tion. In their civil relations to the American people they have
been styled the adopted children of the republic; they are
under its protection and within its guardian care. Their con-
dition on this account the more earnestly invites the ceaseless
endeavors of Christian philanthropy to raise them from degra-
dation and reclaim them from barbarism, and to pour into their
darkened natures the light of that gospel which has made our
national condition and prospects so different from theirs.
IN the foregoing chapters we have narrated the leading facts
pertaining to the commencement and progress of the several for-
eign missions of a society which is connected with a large Chris-
tian denomination, and which has long maintained an honora-
ble rank among the philanthropic institutions of the country.
The narrative embraces plans and operations which have been
carried on in many different lands and among different races of
men, and at its close we may properly linger for a moment upon
the features by which they are marked and the results which
they have accomplished.
These missions, like the contemporary missions of other re-
ligious societies, sprang from the spirit of Christian philanthro-
py which found its earliest expression in this country, near the
344 CONCLUSION.
beginning of the present century, in the pious resolutions and
vows of a few young men at that time students in the Seminary
at Andover. Commencing in the humblest manner, with but
few to furnish them support or even to lend them countenance,
they have gone steadily forward in the sacred work of propa-
gating the gospel. They have extended from country to coun-
try, and from continent to continent, until they are now engaged
in promulgating the doctrines of the Bible in the languages of
eighteen different portions of the human race. They thus con-
stitute an interesting and important part of that beneficent enter-
prise which is at length awakening the interest and enlisting
the energies of nearly every portion of the Christian church,
and which more than any other enterprise of the age is identified
with the spiritual progress and elevation of man.
Though scattered in countries widely separated from each
other, these missions have one single design and every where
present one uniform characteristic. They are established for
the simple propagation of the gospel of Christ. With this ob-
ject alone in view their founders and agents have gone forth
proclaiming the doctrines of the Cross in the countries which
they have entered, and they have refrained from every under-
taking which was not connected with this single errand. The
introduction of science or of art, the instruction of the young, and
even the translation of the Scriptures, important as these may
well be deemed, have all been made subsidiary to what they
have been instructed to regard as the higher work of preaching
to the people. The missionaries have generally been men of
intellectual discipline and culture; but the characteristic by
which they may be most properly distinguished is that they
were devoted to the work which was set before them,-the work
which the Saviour of men early committed to his chosen disci-
ples to be prosecuted even to the end of the world. They have
penetrated countries sunk in the lowest barbarism or overshad-
owed with the hoary heathenism of a thousand years; they
have gone to nations enslaved by spiritual despotism, and grop-
ing in the fading twilight of a corrupted faith; but their errand
SUCCESS OF THE MISSIONS, 845
has been always the same. They have not courted the favor of
princes or the sanction of prelates; they have intrigued neither
with politicians nor ecclesiastics; but have seated themselves
among the people, and there begun to preach to all who would
hear. As teachers of religion they have asserted the supremacy
of the conscience, and have neither established for themselves
nor recognized in others any authority over the inherent free-
dom of the human soul. When driven from one city or coun-
try they have gone to another; and though called before magis-
trates, incarcerated in dungeons and threatened with ignomini-
ous death, they have trusted in the protection of Heaven, and
have still worked on in their holy enterprise of mercy and love.
Missionary labors thus conducted, however misapprehended
and derided they may sometimes be, cannot fail to command
the respect even if they do not secure the coöperation of all
intelligent and right-minded people. The spirit which they
embody is precisely the spirit which history and song have
most delighted to celebrate, and which in all ages awakens the
admiration and sympathy of generous and magnanimous na-
tures. By the spectacle which they have presented, this spirit
has been diffused through the churches which have contributed
to their support, and the piety of a multitude of hearts has been
raised to a nobler standard and quickened to a more heroic zeal
for the Salvation of men.
But the spirit in which these missions have been undertaken
and thus far conducted does not constitute their only title to the
respect and gratitude of the friends of the human race, or their
only claim to the continued and most hearty coöperation of
those on whom they depend for their pecuniary support and
their progressive enlargement. They have accomplished results
of the highest importance to the social and spiritual interests of
mankind. The divine Head of the church has been with them
according to his own gracious promise, and has been pleased to
employ them as instruments for the extension of his kingdom
in the world. They have thus been the means of bringing
many thousands of the devotees of heathenism or of superstition
346 CONCLUSION.
to the knowledge and the worship of God, and of planting in
many an idolatrous or unevangelized land pure churches of
Christ, in which we may hope the doctrines and ordinances of
the gospel will be cherished through centuries to come, and
from which, as from centres of spiritual illumination, there shall
be diffused over the surrounding wastes the ever-increasing
light of heavenly truth.
The success they have attained has been different in different
countries, but with scarcely an exception it has been propor-
tioned to the directness of the efforts which have been made to
press the truths of the gospel upon the attention of the people.
Their history unites with that of the whole Christian church, as
well as with the testimony of Scripture, in demonstrating that
by the foolishness of preaching men are most effectually turned
to repentance and faith in Jesus Christ. Other agencies have
contributed their influence, but it is the preacher's proclamation
of the tidings of salvation which at all periods and in all countries
has won for the religion of the Cross its most glorious and en-
during triumphs.
The character and efficiency of these missions, though mainly
dependent on the wisdom and zeal of those who conduct them
in the countries in which they are planted, must also be affected
in no small degree by the counsels and measures of their guar-
dians and managers at home. It is only when these are per-
vaded by generous Christian sympathy and concentrated upon
the single end to be accomplished, that the labors of the mis-
sionaries can be prosecuted with the highest energy and the
best success. Upon topics like this the records of our mis-
sionary Convention are replete with instruction. Every pain-
ful vicissitude through which it has passed has been felt at the
remotest station of its missions. Every period of pecuniary
embarrassment, of divided counsels, or of unsettled plans, has
imparted its own sombre spirit to the operations it is conduct-
ing in the most distant lands. The agency of the Missionary
Union, the association in which members of our communion
over a large portion of the country are now united, is limited
FACILITIES FOR MISSIONARY LABOR. 347
by the terms of its constitution to the single object of “diffusing
the knowledge of the religion of Jesus Christ by means of mis-
sions throughout the world; ” and with the recorded experience
of the past all before us, we cannot but earnestly hope it will
never again be extended to any other object however important
or inviting. Rather may this Union, which had its origin
amidst the happiest auspices, intrench itself more and more in
the affections of its members and friends, and, becoming every
*year more and more identified with the interests and triumphs
of our growing missions, remain unchanged, and be transmitted
to other generations crowned with the richest blessings of
Heaven upon all its deliberations and endeavors for the spir-
itual welfare of mankind.
The facilities amidst which the Union is now conducting the
enterprise to which it is devoted are wholly unexampled in its
history. The experience of its managers has become mature,
and the confidence of its supporters is firmly settled; and far
beyond the immediate sphere of its counsels and plans a most
remarkable and favorable change has taken place in the con-
dition of the world. The great events of the present century
have been tributary to the advancement of Christian missions.
The explorations of commerce in distant seas, the victories
of European arms over the nations of the East, the intimate in-
tercourse which is now established between the remotest lands,
—all have opened new pathways for the missionary and removed
innumerable obstacles which once opposed his progress. Nor
is the change less remarkable or less favorable in the opinions
and feelings with which this enterprise is regarded in civilized
countries. Once it was derided and opposed, not merely by
a hostile public sentiment at home, but by colonial officers and
commercial agents in all parts of the world. But all this has
passed away, and our missions are invited to countries from
which they were lately driven by unfriendly governors, and
are cherished and supported as invaluable agencies of civil-
ization by the very officers who once denounced and drove
them away as the troublesome intermeddlings of impotent en-
348 CONCLUSION.
thusiasts. It can now scarcely be said that a single portion of
mankind is inaccessible to their heroic pioneers. The commerce
of the English race now covers every sea and traffics on every
shore, and wherever either the English or the American flag
proclaims the presence of civilized power, there the missionary
confident of protection, may prosecute his work unharmed. The
unintelligible jargon of barbarian tribes has been reduced to the
forms of written speech, and the confused languages which were
once regarded as incapable of acquisition even by the most"
assiduous and protracted industry, are now fully mastered by
the missionary and already contain the printed Scriptures and
the rudiments of a religious literature for the people who speak
them.
With such aims still before them, and possessing these accu-
mulated facilities for their prosecution and accomplishment, the
missions whose brief and changeful history we have recited
commend themselves to their supporters and friends as agencies
which God has signally blessed in hastening the march of
Christian civilization, and in establishing his own kingdom of
righteousness and truth among the nations. They are identi-
fied with the highest interests of man in the countries where
they are established, and are the subjects of the fondest hopes,
the daily prayers and the generous sacrifices of a multitude of
Christian hearts in the churches of our own extended com-
munion. The fields which they occupy are constantly widen-
ing, and the claims which they prefer become stronger and
more numerous with every succeeding year. May the counsels
which direct them ever be blessed of Heaven, and the charities
which support them be worthy of the sacred and sublime object
they aim to accomplish, – THE conversIon of THE WORLD
TO THE RELIGION OF THE SAVIOUR.
i

‘8 ‘edom'ſ up 19qumu QIOUAA
• . . . . . . . . . . . “eooexo 39
• . . . . . . . . . “Aubuliet) 39
• * * * * * * * * * * * “eouſex i o) uoissºl
e e º e º 'º e s e º e º 'º & eº *uoſssſſW ugseg
0% ‘8 "opsy up requinu eſonAA
tº º ºs e º e º e º e *SIºjo.J.
‘g “eopleury up 19qumu 9(OWAA
& © tº e º º is tº º & tº º 33 99xoleuſ)
tº º ºs e º e º e º 'º e *uoyssºw 90UlvaeuS
e e º º e º 'º e *ggiorgognſ, 29
*ue:Spuomº uſ ‘seabºo 93
• * * * * * * * * * * “soaqlſo O4 uOpºstſ.
98.I
60I
99
#9
0I #89 (I,000Z 851 £6I 99T 63
#I | 8t. || 6 # 9
tº ºn e 00II IZI 9 e - e. e g
tº e º 'º e º e º e
88
:
g38U
6IQI
8/3
85
85
00I
08
& & © tº dº e º e 19
- - e º e º e e 09
* * * * * * * * 09 I tº º e º & © tº e tº º º e • * * * 10g I • * * * | * e s e i º e s tº e s : e. e. e. e. I • * * * [ s s e e º e ] e o e e i s e s a
09
* * * * * * * * e e º e i s tº e º i e o e e i e º e e i tº e º e i e s e e i s e a e i e º e e i e e s e i s e e e 008? 008 g3 8T • * > e 8I
“.....'I''''|''''''''I''''|''''''''|''''|''''|''''|''''| 0% ºf gL | 02 | FI 9
I
• * * * * * * *|09 8 • “I” ---|--|--|--|--|0} 3.
********|[8][I] 83 98 || I gz || 2 |0}ſ 03
98 I 92 || 3. 8301
:::::::::gz
* c e s i e º e g i e º e º n e s e e
º
ZI
:
* @ e e i e º a s tº gº tº e ] e º e º I tº
00I
tº e - © tº & e º e o 'º e tº e º e 09
;
© & © & e º ºs e * c e s ] e º e e i e º 'º e ] tº e º º
I T ſº tº e ºs
83 | #I | #2
• * * g c tº e e tº e - e i º e º 'º & © tº e º e º e
09
º ºg
1.
I
;
#
:
e
º
º
e g c e ſ tº e º e ] e e º e I e e e e 09
..#.
º
I
Zºi
§
&
© tº tº º • - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ‘oošooſeſ.)
:
9
3991,
º
#8
&#I
33
| 6
91.
98
* * * * * * * * * * * * | * * * * | * ~ e s i e s is e i e º e s ] e s e s ] e º 'º e ] e º e a e e s a a e e s I º e º 'º e tº º e º e e tº e º 'º 9 I
• ‘. . . . . . [gł9 0% * * & © ſº e º e º 'º e º º * * * *|009 6I I 09 9 tº e º 'º &I Q & © tº 8 ::::::::::::::::::::::::
º: ØI I * * * * 1 ſº e e e ] e º 'º e ] e s e e 3I I 92 I 8 e - © e. 8 8 & º e º 'º e s tº e º e º 'º e º 'º a 9 º' tº * * *10
º 863%|8I . • e H e º e º I tº e º e i o e e e 8T Z º e sº 6% f 9 I 9 8 I ........................ UrºjS
… * c | * * c e ſ ∈ C & © e º e º e º e º e º e e gfºſ Číž & 8 18 || 8 tº e º 'º º e º 'º e º 'º º ºny
000°000%;I © tº • e º 'º e º e ] e º 'º e I e e i º º a de 011, I8 8I tº e º e 0 8I & ::::::::::::::::::::::: AoA'ºï.
ºtº e e g tº % 98 09 gº 9 I 6% 9 * @ º te e º ſº tº t e º tº uº. }}
005'006 |39T e tº e 09 #6I 8I • . . . . ; ...] : “... ‘uuuung ‘uſeumun
|
;
tº s e
#
8
g
I
#6
I
º
i92
'guopsgºw
|* * *
i
;
;
i• e o e.
:
i
i
#
|
i
ii
‘6-878T NI ‘SNOISSIW IHL IO ITQWL
350
APPENDIX.
MISSIONS AND MISSIONARIES OF THE UNION.
rº;
Station. Missionary. #, Dept. of Labor. Remarks.
<!
BURMAH.
Maulmain. |Adoniram Judson 1814|Burmese,
{{ Emily Chubbuck 3. 1846 66
66 |Thomas Simons, 1831 66
{{ Hosea. Howard, 1832 €6
{{ |Theresa Patten H. {{ &G
{{ Justus H. Winton, * Sgau Karen, In U. S.
{{ Calista Holman W. & {{ $6
{{ Sewall M. Osgood, 1834|Burmese, $6.
{{ S. M. Willsey O. 1836 tº $6
{{ Edward A. Stevens, {{ (6
{{ Elizabeth L. Haven S. {{ {{
{{ Lyman Stilson, 46 {{
... ºt Lucretia Brownson S. &é {{
(£ Miss Miranda Vinton, 1841|Sgau Karen,
$6 |Joseph G. Binney, 1843 {{
{{ Juliet Pattison B. {{ { {
{{ Thomas S. Ranney, “ Burmese, Printer.
2. “ l—— R. &&. &ć
{{ Norman Harris, 1844|Sgau Karen,
{{ f(). C. Wadsworth H. &&. ( &
{{ iss Lydia Lillybridge, 1846|Burmese,
{{ William Moore, 1847|Pwo Karen,
{{ Elizabeth % º M. sº {{
Amherst. James M. Haswel 1835|Peguam
{{ :*. H. 1& gºn, Returning top.s.
Tavoy. |Jonathan Wade, Sgau Karen
y Kºº W. H., ** Haus.
has Bennett {{ -
{{ |; Kneeland B. {{ {{ Printer.
{{ Francis Mason, 1829 {{
{& Ellen H Bullard M. 1843 {{
{{ |Edmund B. Cross, 1842 {{
£& Julia Ann Putnam C. {{ & 4
{& Judson Benjamin, 1848 {{
{{ Susan R. Stone B. {{ &
Mergui, Durlin L. Brayton, 1837|Pwo Karen,
Mary H. Fuller B. {{ {{ In U. S.
Akyab, Lovell Ingalls, 1835|Burmese, e
{ Calvin C. Moore, 1848 { {
Laura C Irish M. & & € $
Sandoway, 1835|Sgau Karen,
44 1846 &ć
{{ {{ {{
&g 1848 {{
46 {{ {{
SIAM.
Bangkok, #: Siamese, t
& 1840 {{ |Machinist.
{{ {{ & &
€6 1847 &&.
& 1848 {{
CHINA. w
Hongºng, #tiºn Pºle,
Ningpo {{ {&
#", 1838 {{ £6.
(6 & si i
{{ # Ni & £6 Ph
{{ {{ ££
(£ &&. (£ $6
ASSAM.
Sibsagar, 1831||Assamese,

APPENDIX. ...” 359
OF THE TREASURER.
19. It shall be the duty of the Treasurer to take charge of all moneys and
other property contributed to the Treasury of the Union, and to give receipts
therefor; to keep safely all the moneys and funds of the Union, and all their
evidences of property; to keep fair and accurate accounts of all moneys re-
ceived and expended;... to invest and deposit moneys, and make payments
and remittances according to the directions of the Executive Committee; to
exhibit his books, accounts, vouchers, and evidences of property, whenever
required, to the Board or to the Executive and Auditing Committees; to make
out an annual statement of receipts and payments, and of the condition of the
permanent funds and other property, for the information of the Board of Man-
agers; and to perform such other acts as may be necessary to the faithful
discharge of the duties of his office.
OF THE AUDITING COMMITTEE.
20. The Auditing Committee shall not be members of the Executive Com-
mittee, but shall at any time, when requested, attend its meetings to give in-
formation respecting the state of the Treasury. It shall be their duty once
a month to examine the books of the Treasurer, particularly and thoroughly,
with all the vouchers and evidences of property thereto belonging. . A cer-
tificate of the result of this examination shall be entered upon the books of
the Treasurer, and a copy furnished to the Executive Committee, to be en-
tered upon their records. They shall also examine the annual statement of
the Treasurer, and give a written certificate of the result to be entered upon
the records of the Board of Managers.
MISCELLANEOUS.
21. The President, Vice Presidents, and Recording Secretary of the Union,
the members of the Board of Managers, the Executive Committee, the Cor-
responding Secretaries, the Treasurer, the Auditing Committee, and all
missionaries employed by the Executive Committee, shall be members in
good standing of regular Baptist churches.
22. All moneys contributed to the Treasury of the Union shall be expend-
ed at the discretion of the Executive Committee, except such as may be ap-
ropriated by the Board of Managers for the salaries of the ºft
ecretaries and Treasurer; but moneys or other property given for specifie
objects shall be appropriated according to the will of the donors, provided
such an application shall not be contrary to the provisions of this Constitu-
tion, or to the instructions of the Board of Managers, in which case they shall
be réturned to the donors or their lawful agents.
23. The Union, the Board of Managers, and the Executive Committee,
shall each have power to adopt such By-Laws or Rules of Order as may be
necessary for the government of their own proceedings, provided always
that no such regulations shall contravene any part or principle of this Con-
stitution.
24. Alterations may be made in this Constitution only upon recommen-
dation by the Board of Managers, and at an annual meeting of the Union,
by a vote of two thirds of the members present.
END.
W 0 R. KS 0 N MISSION S.
The Publishers invite attention to the following valuable works, to which
reference is frequently made in the preceding history. They will be found
interesting to all who desire to become fully acquainted with the toils, suf-
ferings, and successes of the heralds of salvation. A full description of
, them will be found in the annexed advertisement.
MEM OIR OF ANN H. J U D S ON,
By J. D. Knowles. with a Portrait. 18mo., Cloth. Price 58 cents.
ME MOIR OF GE OR G E D A N A B O A R D M A N,
With Portrait and Vignette, 12mo., Cloth Price 75 cents.
M E M O I R O F H E N RI E T T A S H U C K,
By Rev. J. B. Jeter. With Portrait. 18mo., Cloth. Price 50 cents.
M E M O I R O F W I L L I A M G. C. R O C K E R,
By R. B. JMedbery. With a Portrait. 18mo., Cloth. Price 62; cents.
M E M O I R O F KO T H A H-B Y U,
The Karen.4postle. By Rev. F. JMason. 18mo., Cloth. Price 25 cents.
THE MISSION A R Y ENT E R P R IS E.
Discourses on JMissions, by American fluthors. Edited by Baron Stow. 12mo,
Price 85 cents.
T H E G R E A T C O M M I S S I O N.
T By John Harris, D. D. Sixth thousand. 12mo., Cloth. Price 100.
C AT AL O GUE
O F W A LU A B L E W O R K s, P U B L Is H E D BY
G OULD, KEND ALL AND LIN COLN,
No. 59 W As H 1 N G T o N S T R E E T,
B O ST ON .
THE attention of the public is invited to an examination of the merits of the works
described in this Catalogue, embracing valuable contributions to General Literature,
Science, and Theology.
Besides their own Publications, they have a general assortment of Books, in the
various departments of Literature, and can supply every thing in their line of business
on the lowest terms, wholesale and retail.
PRINCIPLES OF Z 0 ÖLOGY; Touching the Structure, Develop-
ment, Distribution, and Natural Arrangement of the RACEs of ANIMALs,
living and extinct, with numerous illustrations. For the use of Schools
and Colleges. Part I., COMPARATIVE PHYSIoloGY. By Louis AGASSIz
and AUGUSTUs A. Gould.
Eactracts from the Preface.
*The design of this work is to furnish an epitome of the leading principles of the science
Of Zoëlogy, as deduced from the present state of knowledge, so illustrated as to be intelligible
to the beginning student. No similar treatise now exists in this country. and indeed, some
of the topics have not been touched upon in the language, unless in a strictly technical
form; and in scattered articles.”
.* Being designed for American students, the illustrations have been drawn, as far as pos-
sible, from American objects. * * * Popular names have been employed as far as possible,
and to the scientific names an English termination has generally been given. The first part
is devoted to Comparative Physiology, as the basis of Classification; the second, to System:
atic Zoëlogy, in which the principles of Classification will be applied, and the principal
groups of animals briefly characterized.”
MOLERN FRENCH LITERATURE; By L. RAYMoND DE VERI-
gour, formerly lecturer in the Royal Athenæum of Paris, member of the
Institute of France, &c. American edition, brought bown to the present
day, and revised with notes by WILLIAM. S. CHASE. With a fine portrait
of ÍAsian rise.
**This Treatise has received the highest praise as a comprehensive and thorough survey
of the various departments of Modern French Literature. It contains biographical and
critical notes of all the prominent names in Philosophy, Criticism, History, Romance,
Poetry, and the Drama; and presents a full and impartial consideration of the Political
Tendencies of France, as they may be traced in the writings of authors equally conspicu-
ous as Scholars and as Statesmen. Mr. Chase, who has been the Parisian correspondent of
several leading periodicals of this country, is well qualified, from a prolonged residence in
France, his familiarity with its Literature, and by a personal acquaintance with many of
these authors, to introduce the work of De Véricour to the American public.
“This is the only complete treatise of the kind on this subject, either in French or Eng-
lish, and has received the highest commendation. Mr. Chase is well qualified to introduce
the work to the public. The book cannot fail to be both useful and popular.” – New York
JEvening Post.
“Literature and Politics are more closely allied than many are aware of. It is partien-
Iarly so in France; and the work announced by this learned French writer will, doubtless,
be eagerly sought after.”— The Symbol, Boston.
“Mr. Chase is entirely competent for the task he has undertaken in the present instance
His introduction and notes have doubtless added much to the value of the work, especially
to the American reader.”— Evening Gazette, Boston.
GOULD, KENDALL AND LINCOLN'S PUBLICATIONS.
ſilencies of Distinguisjö ſilissionaries.
MEMOIR OF ANN H. JUDSON, late Missionary to Burmah. By Rev.
JAMEs D. KNowLEs. 12mo. Edition, price 85 cents. 18mo., price 58 cts.
“We are particularly gratified to perceive a new edition of the Memoirs of Mrs. Judson.
She was an "honor to our country – one of the most noble-spirited of her sex. It cannot,
therefore, be surprising, that so many editions, and so many thousand copies of her life and
adventures have been sold. The name — the long career of suffering — the self-sacrificing
spirit of the retired country-girl, have spread over the whole world; and the heroism of her
apostleship and almost martyrdom, stands out a living and heavenly beacon-fire, amid the
dark midnight of ages, and human history and exploits. She was the first woman who
resolved to become a missionary to heathen countries.”—American Traveller.
“This is one of the most interesting pieces of female biography which has ever come un-
der our notice. No quotation, which our limits allow, would do justice to the facts, and we
must, therefore, refer our readers to the volume itself. It ought to be immediately added to
every family library.”—London Miscellany.
MEMOI R OF GEORGE DANA BOARDMAN, Late Missionary to
Burmah, containing much intelligence relative to the Burman Mission.
By Rev. ALONzo KING. A new Edition. With an Introductory Essay,
by a distinguished Clergyman. Embellished with a Likeness; a
beautiful Wignette, representing the baptismal scene just before his
death ; and a drawing of his tomb, taken by Rev. H. MALCOM, D.D.
Price 75 cents.
“One of the brightest luminaries of Burmah is extinguished, - dear brother Boardman
is gone to his eternal rest. He fell gloriously at the head of his troops - in the arms of vic-
tory, - thirty-eight wild Karens having been brought into the camp of king Jesus since the
beginning of the year, besides the thirty-two that were brought in during the two preceding
years. Disabled by wounds, he was obliged, through the whole of the last expedition, to be
carried on a litter; but his presence was a host, and the Holy Spirit accompanied his
dying whispers with almighty influence.” REV. DR. JUDSON.
“No one can read the Memoir of Boardman, without feeling that the religion of Christ is
suited to purify the affections, exalt the purposes, and give energy to the character. Mr.
Boardman was a man of rare excellence, and his biographer, by a just exhibition of that
excellence, has rendered an important service, not only to the cause of Christian missions,
but to the interests of personal godliness.” BARON STow.
MEMOIR of MRS. HENRIETTA SHUCK, The First American
Female Missionary to China. By Rev. J. B. JETER. Fourth thousand.
Price 50 cents.
* We have seldom taken into our hands a more beautiful book than this, and we have
no small pleasure in knowing the degree of perfection attained in this country in the arts
of printing and book-binding, as seen in its appearance. The style of the author is sedate
and perspicuous, such as we might expect from his known piety and learning, his attach-
ment to missions, and the amiable lady whose memory he embalms. The book will be ex-
tensively read and eminently useful, and thus the ends sought by the author will be hap-
pily secured. We think we are not mistaken in this opinion; for those who taste the
effect of early education upon the expansion of regenerated convictions of duty and happi-
ness, who are charmed with youthful, heroic self-consecration upon the altar of God, for the
welfare of man, and who are interested in those struggles of mind which lead men to shut
their eyes and ears to the importunate pleadings of filial affection – those who are interested
in China, that large .# field for the glorious conquests of divine truth, who are inter-
ested in the government and habits, social and business-like, of the people of this empire —
all such will be interested in this Memoir. To them and to the friends of missions generally,
the book is commended, as worthy of an attentive perusal.”—The Family Visiter, Boston.
MEMOIR OF REV. WILLIAM G. CROCKER, Late Missionary in
West Africa, *::: Bassas, Including a History of the Mission. By
R. B. MEDBERY. Price 624 cents.
“This interesting work will be found to contain much valuable information in relation to
the present state and prospects of Africa, and the success of Missions in that interestin
tountry, which has just taken a stand among the nations of the earth, and, it is to be hoped,
may successfully wield its new powers for the ultimate good of the whole continent. The
present work is commended to the attention of every lover of the liberties of man.
“Our acquaintance with the excellent brother, who is the subject of this Memoir, will be
long and fondly cherished. This volume, prepared by a lady, of true taste and talent, and
of a kindred spirit, while it is but a just tribute to his worth, will, we doubt not, furnish
s of humble and practical piety, and will give such facts relative to the mission to
which he devoted his life, as to render it worthy a distinguished place among the religious
and missionary biography which has so much enriched the family of §.”ä. Watchman,
Gould, KENDALL AND LIN colN's PUBLICATIONs.
lustfs on ſilissions,
THE MISSIONARY ENTERPRISE : A Collection of Discourses
on Christian Missions, by American Authors. Edited by BARON
STow, D.D. Second Thousand. Price 85 cents.
“If we desired to put into the hands of a foreigner a fair exhibition of the capacity and
spirit of the American church, we would give him this volume. You have here thrown
together a few discourses, preached from time to time, by different individuals, of different
denominations, as circumstances have demanded them ; and you see the stature and feel
the pulse of the American Church in these discourses with a certainty not to be mistaken.
“You see the high talent of the American church. We venture the assertion, that no
nation in the world has such an amount of forceful, available talent in its pulpit. . The
energy, directness, scope, and intellectual spirit of the American church is wonderful. In
this k, the discourses by Dr. Beecher, Pres. Wayland, and the Rev. Dr. Stone of the
Episcopal church, are among the very highest exhibitions of logical correctness, and burn-
ing, popular fervor. This volume will have a wide circulation."—The New Englander.
“This work contains fifteen sermons on Missions, by Rev. Drs. Wayland, Griffin, Ander-
son, Williams, Beecher, Miller, Fuller. Beman, Stone, Mason, and by Rev. Messrs. Kirk,
Stow, and Ide. It is a rich treasure, which ought to be in the possession of every American
Christian.”—Carolina Baptist.
THE GREAT commission ; Or, the Christian Church constituted
and charged to convey the Gospel to the World. A Prize Essay. By
John HARRIs, D.D. With an Introductory Essay, by W. R. WILLIAMS,
D.D. Fifth Thousand. Price $1.00.
“Iſis plan is original and comprehensive. In filling it up the author has interwoven
fºcts with rich and glowing illustrations, and with trains of thought that are sometimes
almost resistless in their appeals to the conscience. The work is not more distinguished
for its arguments and its genius, than for the spirit of deep and fervent piety that per-
vades it.”—The Dayspring.
“This work comes forth in circumstances which give and promise extraordinary interest
and value. Its general circulation will do much good.” — New York Evangelist.
“In this volume we have a work of great excellence, rich in thought and illustration of a
subject to which the attention of thousands has been called by the word and providence of
God.” - Philadelphia Observer.
“The merits of the book entitle it to more than a prize of money. It constitutes a most
powerful appeal on the subject of Missions.”— New York Baptist Advocate.
. Its style is remarkably chaste and elegant. Its sentiments richly and fervently evan-
gelized, its argumentation conclusive. Preachers especially should read it; they will re-
new their strength over its noble pages.”— Zion's Herald, Boston.
“To recommend this work to the friends of missions of all denominations would be but
faint praise; the author deserves and will undoubtedly receive the credit of having applied
a new lever to that great moral machine which, by the blessing of God, is destined to
evangelize the world.” – Christian Secretary, Hartford. "
“We hope that the volume will be attentively and prayerfully read by the whole
church, which are clothed with the “Great Commission” to evangelize the world, and
that they will be moved to an immediate discharge of its high and momentous obligations.
A. E. Puritan, Boston.
THE KAREN APost LE: Or, Memoir of Ko THAH-BYU, the first
Karen convert, with notices concerning his Nation. With maps and
lates. By the Rev. FRANCIs MAsox, Missionary. American Edition.
2dited by Prof. H. J. RIPLEY, of Newton Theol. Institution. Fifth Thou-
sand. Price 25 cents.
****This is a work of thrilling interest, containing the history of a remarkable man, and
giving, also, much information respecting the Karen Mission, heretofore unknown in this
eountry. It must be sought for, and read with avidity by those interested in this most in-
teresting mission. It gives an account, which must be attractive, from its novelty, of a
people that have been but little known and visited by missionaries, till within a few years,
The baptism of Ko Thah-Byu, in 1828, was the beginning of the mission, and at the end of
these twelve years, twelve hundred and seventy Karens are officially reported as members
of the churches, in good standing. The mission has been carried on pre-eminently by the
Karens themselves. and there is no doubt, from much touching evidence contained in this
volume, that they are a people peculiarly susceptible to religious impressions. The account
of Mr. Mason must be interesting to every one.
9%
GoULD, KENDALL AND LINCOLN's PUBLICATIONS.
§gºt 33%ffs,
THE PSALMIST : A New Collection of Hymns, for the use of the
Baptist Churches. By BARON STow and S. F. SMITH.
Assisted by W. R. Williams, Geo. B. Ide, R. W. Griswold, S. P. Hill,
J. B. Taylor, J. L. Dagg, W. T. Brantly, R. B. C. Howell, Samuel W.
Lynd and John M. Peck.
Pulpit edition, 12 mo., sheep, Price 1.25. Pew edition, 18mo., 75 cts.
Pocket edition, 82mo., 56% cts. – All the different sizes supplied in
extra styles of binding at corresponding prices.
**This work it may be said, has become THE Book of the Baptist denomination, having
been introduced extensively into every State in the Union, and the British provinces. As
a collection of hymns it stands unrivalled.
The united testimony of pastors of the Baptist churches in Boston and vicinity, in New
York, and in Philadelphia, of the most decided and flattering character, has been given in
favor of the book. Also, by the Professors in Hamilton Literary and Theological Institution,
and the Newton Theological Institution. The same, also, has been done by a great number
of clergymen, churches, Associations, and Conventions, in every State of the Union.
The following notice, from the Miami Association, of Ohio, is but a specimen of a host
of others, received by the publishers:
“Your Committee recommend to the attention of the Churches, the new work called
“The Psalmist,’ as worthy of special patronage. 1. It is exceedingly desirable that our
whole denomination should use in the praises of the sanctuary the same psalms, hymns, and
spiritual songs. To secure uniformity, we prefer “The Psalinist,' because it is strictly, and
from the foundation, designed for the use of Baptist churches, – is not surpassed by any
º Book in the world. 2. It has been prepared with the greatest care. In no instance has
a Hymn Book gone through so thorough a revision. , 3. It is a book of very superior merits.
The Committee therefore recommend to the churches the adoption of this work as well
calculated to elevate the taste and the devotion of the denomination.”
THE PSALMIST, WITH A suppleMENT, by RICHARD FULLER,
of Baltimore, and J. B. JETER, of Richmond. (Prices same as above.)
**This work contains nearly thirteen hundred hymns, original and selected, by 172
writers, besides pieces credited to fifty-five collections of hymns or other works, the author-
ship of which is unknown. Forty-five are anonymous, being traced neither to authors nor
collections. -
The SUPPLEMENT, occupying the place of the Chants, which in many sections of the
country are seldom used, was undertaken by Rev. Messrs. Fuller and Jeter, at the solicita-
tion of friends at the South. .
“The Psalmist contains a copious supply of excellent hymns for the pulpit. We are
acquainted with no collection of hymns combining, in an equal degree, poetic merit, evangeli-
cal sentinent, and a rich variety of subjects, with a happy adaptation to pulpit services.
Old songs, like old friends, are more valuable than new ones. A number of the hymns best
known, most valued, and most frequently sung in the South, are not found in the psalmist.
Without them, no hymn book, whatever may be its excellences, is likely to become gener-
ally or permanently popular in that region.” – Preface.
companion, FoR. THE PSALMIST. Containing Original Music.
Arranged for hymns in ‘The Psalmist,' of peculiar character and metre.
By N. D. Gould. Price 12% cents.
***This work is designed, and the music has been written, expressly to meet the wants
of those who use “The Psalmist' It is adapted to the numerous beautiful hymns of peculiar
metre, which are embraced in that collection, a few of which are to be found in other hymn
books, and to none of which have any tunes been hitherto adapted. They are simple, and
suitable for either private, social, or public devotion.
wing HELL’s.’ WATTS. An arrangement of the Psalms and Hymns
of Watts, with a Supplement. 32mo. Price 67 cents.
WATTS AND RIPPon. The Psalms and Hymns of Dr. Rippon, with
Dr. Rippon's Selections, in one volume, new edition, corrected and
improved by Rev. C. G. Sox1MERs, New York. 18mo: Price 75 cents.
Gould, KENDALL AND LINCOLN's PUBLICATIONs.
Daſwatſ, lustfs on Baptism.
JEWETT ON BAPTISM. The Mode and Subjects of Baptism. By
MILO P. JEWETT, A.M., late Professor in Marietta College and a licensed
Minister of the Presbyterian Church. Tenth Thousand. Price 25 cents.
***There continues to be a steady demand for this popular book. Its cheapness puts it
within the reach of all. Rev. J. R. Graves, one of the editors of the Tennessee Baptist, in a
recent number of his paper, says:
“Who will write the history of one little Jewett on Baptism f Hundreds in our land have
been converted to the truth by perusing that book. In the past year, Remington, an able
Methodist preacher, read that work. It resulted in his conversion — he wrote his ‘reasons,
and they converted another preacher, and the pebble thus thrown by Bro. Jewett in the sea
of mind, produced a wave which produced another, and thus in long succession they will
travel on, each producing its successor until they break on the shores of etermity. Is the
object not a commendable one It is pouring. oil upon the unresting wave of religious
mind, lashed by angry discussions. Such books read in solitude with one's Bible and his
God, will hush the tempest of his own soul to rest.”
JUDSON ON BAPTISM. A Discourse on Christian Baptism; with
many quotations from Pedobapist authors. To which are added a letter
to the church in Plymouth, Ms., and an address on the mode of baptizing.
By ADONIRAM JUDSON. Fifth American edition, revised and enlarged
by the author. Price 25 cents.
*...* Several large editions were many years since published in this country, and rapidly
circulated. Although frequent calls have been made for copies, it has been for a long time
“out of print.” Heretofore it has been published as a pamphlet, and is now for the first
time published in book form, making a neat 18mo: volume, and having been thoroughly
revised and enlarged by its venerable author, while lately in this country, it will be sought
for and read with interest by all.
It is deemed one of the best works on the subject of Baptism, extant.
“It is a clear, calm, and convincing view of the futility of the distinguishing points of
Pedobaptism, and a rational and scriptural defence of the baptism of persons of suitable
age and qualifications, and in the manner prescribed in the New Testament.”
Christian Review, Dec. 1847.
THE BAPTISMAL QUESTION ; ‘....", Messrs. Cooke and
Towne's “Hints to an Inquirer on the subject of Baptism " — a Review
of the “Hints,” by Rev. Wm. Hague—with a Rejoinder by Messrs.
Cooke and Towne, and Mr. Hague's Examination of the Rejoinder.”
12mo. Price 67 cents.
BAPTISM ITs own, WITNESS ; , Or... Reflections suggested by
reading “The Baptized Child.” By Rev. W.M. HAGUE. Price 12% cts.
THE CHRISTIAN REVIEW. A Quarterly Publication. Edited by
JAMEs D. KNowLEs, BARNAs SEARs, and S. F. SMITH.
A limited number of complete sets, from 1836 to 1843 inclusive,
being the first Eight volumes, can be supplied at $10.00 per set, in
neat Cloth backs.
A few copies of the work, from vol. 2 to vol. 8 inclusive, will be sup-
plied in boards, the seven volumes, for $5.00 per set.
Single volumes (except the first), supplied in numbers, at $1.00 per
volume.
*...* The Christian Review contains valuable contributions from all the leading men of the
Baptist denomination, and is an important acquisition to any library. The present opportu-
nity to secure sets of the early volumes of this work at this greatly reduced price, will, we
are sure, be embraced by many who desire to possess it, and may never again have so
favorable an opportunity, as the stock on hand is limited.
Gould, KENDALL AND LINCOLN'S PUBLICATIONS.
itipſ.g's Notºs.---0ſrušan's Johºršance,
THE Four Gospels, witH, Nores. Chiefly Explanatory; in-
tended principally for Sabbath School Teachers and Bible Classes, and
as an aid to Family Instruction. By HENRY J. RIPLEY, Newton Theol.
Institution. Seventh Edition. Price $1.25.
*** This work should be in the hands of every student of the Bible, especially every
Sabbath School and Bible Class teacher. It is prepared with special reference to this class
of persons, and contains a mass of just the kind of information wanted.
“The undersigned, having examined Professor Ripley's Notes, on the Gospels, can
recommend them with confidence to all who need such helps in the study of the sacred
Scriptures. Those passages which all can understand are left without note or comment.
and the principal labor is devoted to the explanation of such parts as need to be explained
and rescued from the perversions of errorists, both the ignorant and the learned. The
practical suggestions at the close of each chapter, are not the least valuable portion of the
work. Most cordially, for the sake of truth and righteousness, do we wish for these Notes
a wide circulation.
BARon Stow, R. II. NEALE, R. Turnbull,
DAN i EL SIIARP, J. W. PARKER, N. COLVER.
WM. HAGUE, R. W. Cush MAN,
THE Acts of THE Apostl. Es, witH NoTEs....Chiefly Ex-
planatory. Designed for Teachers in Sabbath Schools and Bible Classes,
and as an Aid to Family Instruction. By Prof. HENRY J. RIPLEY.
Price 75 cents.
“The external appearance of this book, - the binding and the printed page, —“it is
a pleasant thing for the eyes to behold.' On examining the contents, we are favorably
impressed, first, by the wonderful perspicuity, simplicity, and comprehensiveness of the
author's style; secondly, by the completeness and systematic arrangement of the work, in
all its parts, the “remarks' on each paragraph being carefully separated from the exposi-
tion; thirdly, by the correct theology, solid instruction, and consistent explanations of
difficult passages. The work cannot fail to be received with favor. These Notes are much
more full than the Notes on the Gospels, by the same author. A beautiful map accompanies
them.” — Christian Reflector, Boston.
CRUDEN’s conDENSED CONCORDANCE. A Complete Con-
cordance to the Holy Scriptures ; by ALEXANDER CRUDEN, M.A. A
New and Condensed Edition, with an Introduction; by Rev. DAvid
KING, LL.D. Fifth Thousand. Price in Boards, $1.25 ; Sheep, $1.50.
****This edition is printed from English plates, and is a full and fair copy of all
that is valuable in Cruden as a Concordance. The principal variation from the larger book
consists in the exclusion of the Bible Dictionary, which has long been an incumbrance,
and the accuracy and value of which have been depreciated by works of later date, contain-
ing recent discoveries, facts, and opinions, unknown to Cruden. The condensation of
the quotations of Scripture, arranged under their most obvious heads, while it diminishes
the bulk of the work, greatly facilitates the finding of any required passage.
“Those who have been acquainted with the various works of this kind now in use,
well know that Cruden's Concordance far excels all others. Yet we have in this edition of
Cruden, the best made better. That is, the present is better adapted to the purposes of a
Concordance, by the erasure of superfluous references, the omission of unnecessary explai.
nations, and the contraction of quotations, &c.; it is better as a manual, and is better
adapted by its price to the means of many who need and ought to possess such a work,
than the former larger and expensive edition.” – Boston Recorder.
“The new, condensed, and cheap work prepared from the voluminous and costly one of
Cruden, opportunely fills a chasm in our Biblical literature. The work has been examined
critically by several ministers, and others, and pronounced complete and accurate.”
Baptist Record, Phila.
“This is the very work of which we have long felt the need. We obtained a copy of
the English edition some months since, and wished some one would publish it; and we
are much pleased that its enterprising publishers can now furnish the studeht of the Bible
with a work which he so much needs at so cheap a rate.” — Advent Herald, Boston.
“We cannot see but it is, in all points, as valuable a book of reference, for ministers and
Bible students, as the larger edition.” – Christian Reflector, Boston.
*The present edition, in being relieved of some things which contributed to render all
former ones unnecessarily cumbroils, without adding to the substantial value of the work,
becomes an exceedingly cheap book.” – Albany Argus.
GOULD, KENDALL AND LINCOLN's PUBLICATIONS.
diff, lustfs ºf John jarris, D.D. -
THE PRE-ADAMITE EARTH: Contributions to Theological Science.
Price 85 cents.
“It is a book for thinking men. It opens new trains of thought to the read f
him in a new position to survey the wonders of God's works; ... COrn j *...i.
ence to bear her decided testimony in support of Divine Truth.” TPīšia. Cà, tºº.
MAN PRIMEVAL 3 Or, the Constitution and Primitive Condition of the
Human Being. A Contribution to Theological Science. With a finely
engraved portrait of the author; 12mo, cloth, price $1.25.
*** This is the second volume of a series of works on Theological Science. The first was
received with much favor—the present is a continuation of the principies which were
seen holding their way through the successive kingdoms of primeval nature, and are here
resumed and exhibited in their next higher application to individual man.
. “His copious and beautiful illustrations of the successive laws of the Divine Manifesta-
tion, have yielded us inexpressible delight.”— London Eclectic Review.
THE GREAT COMMISSION ; Or, the Christian Church constituted
and charged to convey the Gospel to the World. A Prize Essay. With
an Introductory Essay, by W. R. WILLIAMs, D.D. Price $1.00
* Of the several productions of Dr. Harris, - all of them of great value, — that now before
us is destined, probably, to exert the most powerful influence in forming the religious and
missionary character of the coming generations. But the vast fund of argument and in-
struction comprised in these pages will excite the admiration and inspire the gratitude
of thousands in our own land as well as in Europe. . Every clergyman and pious and re-
flecting layman ought to possess the volume, and make it familiar by repeated perusal.”
Boston Recorder.
“His plan is original and comprehensive. In filling it up, the author has interwoven facts
with rich and glowing illustrations, and with trains of thought that are sometimes almost
resistless in their appeals to the conscience. The work is not more distinguished for its
arguments and its genius, than for the spirit of deep and fervent piety that pervades it.”
The Day-Spring.
THE GREAT TEACHER ; Or, Characteristics of our Lord's Ministry.
With an Introductory Essay, by H. HuMPHREY, D.D. Tenth thousand.
Price 85 cents.
“The book itself must have cost much meditation, much communion on the bosom of
Jesus, and much prayer. Its style is, like the country which gave it birth, beautiful, varied,
finished, and every where delightful. But the style of this work is its smallest excellence.
It will be read: it ought to be read. It will find its way to many parlors, and adds to the
comforts of many a happy fireside. The reader will rise from each chapter, not able, per-
haps, to carry with him ..". striking remarks or apparent paradoxes, but he will have a
sweet itnpression made upon his soul, like that which soft and touching music makes when
every thing about it is appropriate. The writer pours forth a clear and beautiful light, like
that of the evening light-house, when it sheds its rays upon the sleeping waters, and
covers then with a surface of gold. We can have no sympathy with a heart which yields
not to impressions delicate and holy, which the perusal of this work will naturally make.”
Hampshire Gazettc.
MISC ELLANIES ; Consisting principally of Sermons and Essays. With
an Introductory Essay and Notes, by J. BELCHER, D.D. Price 75 cents.
“Some of these essays are among the finest in the language; and the warmth and energy
of religious feeling manifested in several of them, will render them peculiarly the treas-
ure of the closet and the Christian fireside.”—Bangor Gazette.
MAMMON ; Or, Covetousness, the Sin of the Christian Church. A Prize
Essay. Price 45 cents. Twentieth thousand.
**This masterly work has already engaged the attention of churches and individuals,
and receives the highest commendations.
ZEBU Lon ; Or the Moral Claims of Seamen stated and enforced. Edited
by Rev. W. M. Rogers and D. M. LoRD. Price 25 cents.
*** A well written and spirit-stirring appeal to Christians in favor of this numerous, use-
ful, and long neglected class.
THE Active christi AN : Containing the “Witnessing Church,”
“Christian Excellence,” and “Means of Usefulness,” three popular pro-
ductions of this talented author Price 31 cents.
§
Gould, KENDALL AND LINCOLN'S PUBLICATIONS.
• CIÉartſ; £isſors --- jºsſity at filambership,
THE APostolic AL AND PRIMITIVE church ; Popular in
its government and simple in its worship. By LYMAN Coll:MAN. With
an introductory essay, by Dr. AUGUSTUs NEANDER, of Berlin. Second
Edition. Price $1.25.
The Publishers have been favored with many highly commendatory notices of this
work, from individuals and public journals. The first edition found a rapid sale; it has
been republished in England, and received with much favor; it is universally pronounced
to be standard authority on this subject; and is adopted as a Text Book in Theological
Beminaries. e
From the Professors in Andover Theological Seminary.
“The undersigned are pleased to hear that you are soon to publish a new edition of the
“Primitive Church, by LYMAN Coleman. ... They regard this volume as the result of
extensive and original research; as embodying very important materials for reference,
much sound thought and conclusive argument. In their estimation, it may both interest
and instruct the tº: layman, may be profitably used as a Text Book for Theologi-
cal Students, and should especially form a part of the libraries of clergymen. The intro-
duction, by NEANDER, is of itself sufficient to recommend the volume to the literary
public.” L1:ONAH d Woods, BELA B. Edwards,
RALPH EMERSON, Edward A. PARK,
From Samuel Miller, D.D., Princeton Theological Seminary.
* Gentlemen, – I am truly gratified to find that the Rev. Mr. Cole MAN's work on the
* Apostolical and Primitive Church, is so soon to reach a second edition. It is, in my
judgment, executed with learning, skill, and tidelity; and it will give me great pleasure to
learn that it is in the hands of every minister, and every candidate for the ministry in our
land, and indeed of every one who is disposed, and who wishes for enlightened and safe
guidance, on the great subject of which it treats.”
Yours, respectfully, SAMUEL MILLER.
THE CHURCH MEMBER'S MANUAL Of Ecclesiastical Principles,
Doctrines, and Discipline; presenting a Systematic View of the Structure,
Polity, Doctrines, and Practices of Christian Churches, as taught in the
Scriptures; by Wm. Crowell. with an Introductory Essay, by HENRY
J. RIPLEY, D.D. Price 90 cents.
The Rev. J. Dowling, D.D., of New York, writes: —“I have perused, with great satis-
faction ‘The Church Member's Manual.' I have long felt in common with many of my
ministering brethren, the need of just such a work to put into the hands of the niembers,
and especially the pastors and deacons of our ºft. . . As a whole, I have great
#. in commending the work to the attention of all Baptists. I think that Bro. Crowell
as performed his task in an admirable manner, and deserves the thanks of the whole Bap-
tist community.”
We cordially concur in the above recommendation. S. H. Cone, Elisha Tucker, W. W.
Evarts, David Bellamy, Henry Davis, A. N. Mason, and A. Haynes.
THE CHURCH IN EARNEST; By Joris ANGELL JAMEs. 18mo.
cloth; price 50 cents.
“A very seasonable p. The church universal needs a re-awakening to its high
vocation, and this is a k to effect, so far as human intellect cau, the much desired resus-
citation.” – A. P. Com. Adv.
“We are glad to see that this subject has arrested the pen of Mr. James. We welcome
and commend it. Let it be scattered like autumn leaves. We believe its perusal will do
much to impress a conviction of the high mission of the Christian, and much to arouse the
Christian to fulfil it.”— N. Y. Recorder.
“We rejoice that this work has been republished in this country, and we cannot too
strongly commend it to the serious perusal of the churches of every name." — Alliance.
“ Mr. James's writings all have one object, to do execution. He writes under the impulse
- Do something, do it. He studies not to be a profound or learned, but a practical writer.
He aims to raise the standard of piety, holiness in the heart, and holiness of iife. The influ-
ence which this work will exert on the church must be highly salutary.”—Boston Recorder.
THE CHURCH MEMBER'S GUIDE, By Rev. J. A. JAMEs. Edited
by Rey.J. Q. Cºupes. New Edition ; with an Introductory Essay, by
Rev. HUBBARD WINslow. Price 38 cents.
A pastor writes – “I sincerely wish that every professor of religion in the land may
Possess this excellent manual. I am anxious that every member of my church shoºtá
possess it, and shall be happy to promote its circulation still more extensively.”
“The spontaneous effusion of our heart, on laying the book down, was, – may every
church-member in our land soon possess this book, and be blºssed with in the happiness
which conformity to its evangelic sentiuments and directions is calculated to confe.”
Christian Secretary.
THE EARTH AND MAN:
Lectures on Comparative Physical Geography, in its Relation to the History of JMankind.
By ARNold Guvor, Prof. Phys. Geo. & Hist., Neuchatel.
Translated from the French, by PROF. C. C. FElton.—With Illustrations.
12mo. PRI cr $1.25.
“Those who have been accustomed to regard Goography as a merely descriptive
branch of learning, drier than the remainder biscuit after a voyage, will be delighted
to find this hitherto unattractive pursuit converted into a science, the principles of
which are definite and the results conclusive ; a science that embraces the investiga-
tion of natural laws and interprets their mode of operation ; which professes to dis-
cover in the rudest forms and apparently confused arrangement of the materials com-
posing the planets’ crust, a new manifestation of the wisdom which has filled the
earth with its riches. . . * * To the reader we shall owe no apology, if we have
said enough to excite his curiosity and to persuade him to look to the book itself for
further instruction.”—JNorth American Review.
“The grand idea of the work is happily expressed by the author, where he calls it
the geographical march of history. * * * The man of science will hail it as a beauti-
ful generalization from the facts of observation. The Christian, who trusts in a mer-
ciful Providence, will draw courage from it, and hope yet more earnestly for the
redemption of the most degraded portions of mankind. Faith, science, learning,
poetry, taste, in a word, genius, have liberally contributed to the production of the
work under review. Sometimes we feel as if we were studying a treatise on the
exact sciences ; at others, it strikes the ear like an epic poem. Now it reads like
history, and now it sounds like prophecy. It will find readers in whatever language
it inay be published; and in the elegant English dress which it has received from the
accomplished pen of the trunslator, it will not fail to interest, instruct and inspire.
We congratulate the lovers of history and of physical geography, as well as all
those who are interested in the growth and expansion of our common education, that
Prof. Guyot contemplates the publication of a series of elementary works on Physical
Geography, in which these two great branches of study which God has so closely
joined together, will not, we trust, be put asunder.”—Christian Examiner.
** A copy of this volume reached us at too late an hour for an extended notice. The
work is one of high merit, exhibiting a wide range of knowledge, great research, and
a philosophical spirit of investigation. Its perusal will well repay the most learned
in such subjects, and give new views to all, of man’s relation to the globe he inhabits.”
Sillinnan's Journal, July, 1849.
“These lectures form one of the most valuable contributions to geographical science
that has ever been published in this country. They invest the study of geography
with an interest which will, we doubt not, surprise and delight many. They will
open an entire new world to most readers, and will be found an invaluable aid to the
teacher and student of geography.”—Evening Traveller.
“We venture to pronounce this one of the most interesting and instructive books
which have come from the American press for many a month. The science of which
it treats is comparatively of recent origin, but it is of great importance, not only on
account of its connections with other branches of knowledge, but for its bearing upon
many of the interests of society. In these lectures it is relieved of statistical details,
and presented only in its grandest features. It thus not only places before us most
instructive facts relating to the condition of the earth, but also awakens within us a
stronger sympathy with the beings that inhabit it, and a profounder reverence for the
beneficent Creator who formed it, and of whose character it is a manifestation and
expression. They abound with the richest interest and instruction to every intelli-
gent reader, and especially fitted to awaken enthusiasm and delight in all who are
devoted to the study either of natural science or the history of mankind.”—Provi
Journal. *.
“Geography is here presented under a new and attractive phase ; it is no longer a
dry description of the features of the earth’s surface. The influence of soil, scenery
and climate upon character, has not yet received the consideration due to it from his-
torians and philosophers. In the volume before us the profound investigations of Hum-
boldt, Ritter and others, in Physical Geography, are presented in a popular form, and
with the clearness and vivacity so characteristic of French treatises on science. The
work should be introduced into our higher schools.”—The Indepenudent, JWew York.
“Geography is here made to assume a dignity, not heretofore attached to it. The
knowledge communicated in these Lectures is curious, unexpected, absorbing.”—
Christun JMirror, Portland.
Gould, KENDALL & LINCOLN, PUBLISHERs, BosTON.
§
s
º . Tº 7 x^. 3 A g
(/ o-3. 3. ‘ ‘.” -- ~~ *, * 2 •- 3 -
WAYLAND’S UNIVERSITY SERMONS.
SERMONS DELIVERED IN BROWN UNIVERSITY.
By FRANCIS WAYLAND, D. D.
Second Edition. 12mo, Price $1.00.
“Few sermons contain so much carefully arranged thought as these by
Dr. Wayland. The thorough logician is apparent throughout the volume,
and there is a classic purity in the diction unsurpassed by any writer, and
equalled by very few.” — New York Commercial Advertiser.
“They are the careful production of a matured and powerful intellect,
and were addressed to a thinking and well-informed audience, and are
especially adapted for the educated and thoughtful man.”—Chr. Alliance.
“No thinking man can open to any portion of it without finding his atten-
tion strongly arrested, and feeling inclined to yield his assent to those self-
evincing statements, which appear on every page. As a writer, Dr. Way-
land is distinguished by simplicity, strength and comprehensiveness. He
addresses himself directly to the intellect more than to the imagination, to
the conscience more than to the passions. Yet, through the intellect and
the conscience, he often reaches the depths of our emotive nature, and
rouses it by words of power. We commend these sermons to all students
of moral and religious truth, to all lovers of sound thought conveyed in
elegant diction.” – Watchman g Reflector.
“The discourses contained in this handsome volume are characterized by
all that richness of thought and elegance of language for which their tal-
ented author is celebrated. The whole volume is well worthy of the pen
of the distinguished scholar and divine from whom it emanates.—
IXr. Baird's Christian Union.
S.A. C. R. E D R H E TO RIC:
Or, Composition and Delivery of Sermons.
BY HENRY J. RIPLEY, Prof. in Newton Theological Institution.
Including WARE’s HINTs on Extemporan Eous PREAchina.
12mo. Price 75 Cents.
*
“An admirably prepared work, clear and succinct in its positions and
recommendations, soundly based on good authority, and well supported by
a variety of reading and illustrations. It is well adapted for a healthy dis-
cipline of the faculty, and there are few preachers who might not with profit
revise their practice by its pages. It is worthy, too, of being a companion
to Whately, in the general study of Rhetoric.” – N. Y. Literary World.
“Prof. Ripley possesses the highest qualifications for a work of this
kind. His position has given him great experience in the peculiar wants
of theological students.” – Providence Journal.
“His canons on selecting texts, stating the proposition, collecting and
arranging materials, style, delivery, etc., are just and well stated. Every
theological student to whom this volume is accessible, will be likely to
procure it. — Christian Mirror, Portland. tº
“This work belongs among the substantials of our literature. It is man-
ifestly the fruit of mature thought and large observation; it is pervaded
by a manly tone, and abounds in judicious counsels; it is compactly writ-
ten and admirably arranged, both for study and reference. It will become
a text book for theological students, we have no doubt; — that it deserves
to be read by all ministers who can avail themselves of it, and especially
by all young ministers, is to us as clear. — N. F. Recorder.
092
||||
OF MICHEGAN
|
|
|
|
LO
！=
！=
CD
|
|
■=============
--~~~~~~~~~
|
ſ-----------~--~~~~~~~~ ~~~~“
|
DO NOT REMOVE
Cro
|
|·
|
|

§§
****）:
。、、、。。
*ș«.**
ſae
§§§$%&'（）*.*¿¿ ...， ¿ſºſº，ſºğ
**ī£; £®8$（* * * * *,: , }
-št.） a.º.:….….………*…*…！！！！！！！！！ ：）
&...， ¿s，…，∞∞∞∞|-
kae）
*******************************